class _LB_nt>_ 
 
 Book__^_l__ 
 CoipglitN _L_^ 
 
 COEmjGHT DEPOSm 
 
J/^' 
 
 Common School 
 
 Examiner and 
 
 Review 
 
 A SERIES OF QUESTIONS USED BY 
 
 State, County and City Superintendents 
 
 IN THE EXAMINATION OF TEACHERS AND PUPILS 
 ANSWERED IN THE CLEAREST AND BRIEFEST MANNER 
 
 DESIGNED FOR 
 
 Teachers and Pupils 
 
 BY 
 
 ISAAC HINTON BROWN 
 
 Author of "Universal Arithmetic Papers"; "Universal Algebra Papers" 
 
 "Universal Question Book"; "Rational Elocution"; "Common 
 
 School Elocution and Oratory"; ' Practical Arithmetic"; 
 
 "Arithmetical Drill Book"; "English 
 
 Grammar"; Etc., Etc., Etc. 
 
 AND 
 
 CHARLES WALTER BROWN, A. M. 
 
 Author of "John Paul Jones," "Ethan Allan," "Nathan Half. 
 "Lafayette," "Washington," "Lincoln," "Sherman," Etc. 
 
 A. FLANAGAN COMPANY 
 
 CHICAGO NEW YORK 
 
 1906 
 

 LIBRARY of CONGRESS 
 
 Two Copies Received 
 
 MAK 26 1906 
 
 >5 Copyright Entry 
 cuss £L'yfc, No, 
 
 / if/ 8" /c 
 
 COPY B. 
 
 Copyright 189S and 1906, 
 
 BY 
 
 CHARLES WALTER BROWN 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Alcohol, Questions on 
 
 Alcohol, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Algebra, Questions on 
 
 Algebra, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Arithmetic, Questions on 
 
 Arithmetic, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Botany, Questions on 
 
 Botany, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Civil Government, Questions on 
 
 Civil Government, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Geography, General Questions on 
 
 Geography, Answers to General Questions on 
 
 Geography, Physical, Questions on 
 
 Geography, Physical, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Grammar, Questions on ... 
 
 Grammar, Answers to Questions on 
 
 History of U. S., Questions on 
 
 History of U. S., Answers to Questions on 
 
 Literature, American, Questions on 
 
 Literature, American, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Memory Gems 
 
 Opening and Closing of School 
 
 Orthography, Questions on 
 
 Orthography, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Penmanship, Questions on . , 
 
 Penmanship, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Philosophy, Questions on 
 
 Philosophy, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Physiology, Questions on 
 
 Physiology, Answers to Questions on 
 
 Reading, Questions on 
 
 Reading, Answers to Questions on . 
 
 Rules Governing Examinations 
 
 Sayings of Experienced Educators . 
 
 Spanish-American War 
 
 Subjects for Conversation, Essay, Etc. 
 
 Subjects for Debate .... 
 
 Suggestions by the Author 
 
 Theory and Practice.of Teaching, Questions on 
 
 Theory and Practice of Teaching, Answers to Questions 
 
 Zoology, Questions on 
 
 Zoology, Answers to Questions on 
 
 (3) 
 
 Page. 
 
 372 
 
 373 
 
 433 
 
 441 
 
 3'i 
 
 43 
 
 259 
 
 264 
 
 240 
 
 24,1 
 
 100 
 
 119 
 
 152 
 
 157 
 
 65 
 
 76 
 
 175 
 
 194 
 
 468 
 
 474 
 
 414 
 
 379 
 
 8 
 
 11 
 
 28 
 
 30 
 
 327 
 
 334 
 
 278 
 
 284 
 
 18 
 
 2L 
 
 5 
 
 388 
 
 42 
 
 421 
 
 422 
 
 7 
 
 348 
 
 353 
 
 302 
 
 308 
 
BROWN, iSriAC H1NT0N, author and educator, born near Washington 
 Court House, Fayette County, Ohio, August 17, 1842 ; died in Columbia, Mo., 
 March 28, 1889. After receiving a common school education in Pittsburg, 
 New Orleans and St. Louis, he began teaching school at sixteen years of 
 age. Four years later he entered McKendree college, the alma mater of 
 Jno. A. Logan and Wm. R. Morrison. Passing the examination for the 
 Naval Academy in the spring of 1863, he was at once appointed master's 
 
 mate on the Little Rebel 
 ys: ^^x °^ *k e Mississippi squa- 
 
 jg |l|k dron, and at the age of 23 
 
 / S he was promoted to acting 
 
 / ^f~ 'is&ti^ master and ensign. In 
 
 / \ 1865 he again took up the 
 
 / V* profession of teaching, 
 
 ttfc «fflK^. 8 which he continued unin- 
 
 terrupted for twenty-four 
 
 S" years, filling the office of 
 
 ■' ' m • 
 
 |||j county and city superin- 
 
 ^. , teudent of a number or 
 schools in Illinois and 
 Missouri. In 1884 he was 
 tendered the Democratic 
 nomination for Superin- 
 tendent of Public Instruc- 
 tion of Illinois, but declined 
 to accept the department 
 of Elocution in the Univer- 
 sity of Missouri and Super- 
 intendent of City Schools, 
 Columbia, Mo. * * * As 
 an educator he ranked among the foremost of his time ; as an author his 
 works on Elocution attest his ripe scholarship ; as an elocutionist and public 
 reader he had no superior in the west, and his numerous poems give ex- 
 pression to his patriotism. His books are "Common School Elocution" 
 (New York, 1880); " Examiner and Review" (Chicago, 1882); "Manual 
 of Oratory" (New York, 1884); "Test Problems in Arithmetic" (Chicago, 
 1885); "Test Problems in Algebra" (Chicago, 1889); "Rational Elocution" 
 (Chicago, 1896) ; "Arithmetical Drill Book" (Chicago, 1898). His poems f 
 "An American Exile," "Nathan Hale, the Martyr Spy," "Which One? " 
 and many others are widely known. — Horace H. Morgan, LL.D., Principal 
 St. Louis High School, 1856-1888. 
 
 cJ?fo, 
 
COMMON SCHOOL 
 
 EXAMINER AND REVIEW. 
 
 RULES GOVERNING EXAMINATIONS. 
 
 The following rules will give the teacher or pupil an idea of 
 the regulations governing examinations. 
 
 1. The object of this examination is to ascertain 
 your knowledge of the subject, and your ability to 
 present the principles of it correctly and clearly: the 
 result of the examination depends upon your success 
 in showing these conditions. 
 
 2. Provide yourself with paper, pens, and ink. 
 
 3. Be prepared to begin each subject at the time 
 appointed. 
 
 4. No reference books or notes will be permitted in 
 the examination room. 
 
6 RULES GOVERNING EXAMINATIONS. 
 
 5. Do not communicate during the examination in 
 any manner with any one except the examiner : the 
 papers of those who violate this rule will not be exam- 
 ined. 
 
 6. Number and letter your answers to correspond 
 with the questions and their subdivisions. 
 
 7. Write in a legible hand : no time can be spent in 
 deciphering ambiguous expressions ; — all such will be 
 considered as evidence of the writer's inability to spell 
 or to use tfiem correctly, and will be charged to his 
 spelling and grammar. 
 
 8. Let every answer be clear, definite, and com- 
 plete. 
 
 9. Divide your work into paragraphs, so that each 
 answer shall stand out prominently. 
 
 10. If you do not understand a question, raise your 
 hand for an explanation. 
 
 11. Pass such questions as you cannot answer, leav- 
 ing a blank space numbered according to the place it 
 occupies. 
 
 12. Ask no indulgences or allowances: such a re- 
 quest implies presumptive deficiency. 
 
 13. Absence, except in case of sickness, will debar 
 the candidate from examination in the branch of study 
 missed. 
 
 14. Fold your completed paper, and write your 
 name and subject on the back. [Some examiners re- 
 quire the number by which candidates are designated 
 to be written on the papers.] 
 
RUL.ES governing examinations. 
 
 SUGGESTIONS BY THE AUTHOR. 
 
 1. Examiners take nothing for granted; be explicit. 
 
 2. To avoid embarrassment, the respiration should be 
 deep, full and vigorous. 
 
 3. Keep your manuscript until it is called for. See 
 that it contains no errors which you can correct. 
 
 4. The minimum of speech during recesses will give 
 you the maximum of intellectual power when wanted. 
 
 5. Examiners' impressions decide all doubtful answers; 
 they reason that what you know you can explain clearly. 
 
 6. Observe propriety in dress, manner and behavior; a 
 fop, clown, or a boor is out of place in the school room. 
 
 7. The only favors you should expect will be of the 
 nature of a premium for the neatness, order and promptness 
 you exhibit. 
 
 8. Examine the paper given you, answering mentally 
 the questions with which you are familiar before commit- 
 ting anything to paper. 
 
 9. Any unfairness in obtaining answers deprives the 
 candidate of the first condition required for a certificate — 
 moral character. Be above suspicion. 
 
QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 1. Define the following terms: (a) Orthography, 
 (b) Phonology, (c) Orthoepy, (d) letter, (e) Elemen- 
 tary Sound. 
 
 2. (a) How many elementary sounds does the Eng- 
 lish language contain? (b) How divided? 
 
 3. Name the voice-producing organs. 
 
 4. Name the organs employed in speech. 
 
 5. Into what two classes are letters divided? 
 
 6. Into what classes are the consonants divided ac- 
 cording to the organs employed in their production ? 
 
 7. (a) What are subvocals? (5) Name them. 
 
 8. («) What are aspirates? (b) Name them. 
 
 9. Name the consonant combinations. 
 
 10. Define the following terms: («) cognates, (b) 
 liquids, (c) coalescents, (d) explodents, (e) continu- 
 ants. 
 
 11. Name the uses of silent letters. 
 
 12. What is the distinction between the name and 
 the power of a letter ? 
 
 13. Define the following terms : ( a ) Diphthong, (b ) 
 Digraph, (c) Trigraph, (cZ) Syllable, (e) Word. 
 
 8 
 
QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 9 
 
 14. Classify the letters i in alien, ce in ocean, ti in 
 
 notion. 
 
 15. When are w and y vowels? Consonants? 
 
 16. "What is syllabication? 
 
 17. How should words be divided at the end of the 
 line? 
 
 18. When is the hyphen most commonly used? 
 
 19. What is the essential part or base of a syl- 
 lable? 
 
 20. Why are words divided into syllables? 
 
 21. Define orthographic synthesis and analysis. 
 
 22. What faculties does the exercise of spelling 
 chiefly tend to cultivate? 
 
 23. How are words classified with regard to the 
 number of syllables they contain ? 
 
 24. («) How are words classified according to their 
 formation? (6) Define the classes. 
 
 25. (a) Define accent. (6) What two kinds? (c) 
 Tell how each is denoted and where it is commonly 
 placed, (d) State what effect a change of accent may 
 produce. 
 
 26. (a) What are the significant parts of many de- 
 rivative words? (6) Define each. 
 
 27. What is the usual office of Prefixes and Suffixes 
 respectively? 
 
 28. In the change of prefixes applied to certain de- 
 rivative words for the sake of euphony or analogy, 
 what is the usual practice? 
 
 29. Mention some elementary sounds which have no 
 single character to represent them. 
 
10 QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 30. Under what circumstances is a word formed 
 by prefixes or suffixes primitive? 
 
 31. (a) Which letters have no sound of their own? 
 (6) Which letters are never silent? (c) When is m 
 silent? (d) When is final e silent? (e) What would 
 be the result if final e was not silent? 
 
 32. State the relative advantages of oral and written 
 spelling as a drill exercise. 
 
 33. With the word incomprehensibility, show the 
 proper application of the terms penult, antepenult, 
 etc. 
 
 34. What sounds has Ih? Give sounds illustrating 
 each. 
 
 35. What advantage arises from a knowledge of the 
 rules for the duplication of consonants ? . 
 
 36. State and illustrate the rules for doubling the 
 final consonant of words receiving a suffix beginning 
 with a vowel. 
 
 37. (a) Into what is final y preceded by a consonant 
 usually changed upon receiving a suffix? (6) What 
 occurs when the final y is preceded by a vowel? 
 
 38. Give rules for the spelling of words derived 
 from radicals ending in silent e. 
 
 39. State a rule for spelling words derived from 
 radicals ending; with a double letter. 
 
 40. Give an orthographic analysis of the word dis- 
 contentment. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. ll 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 1. (a) Orthography is the art of writing words with 
 the proper letters according to common usage. (6) 
 Phonology is the science of uttering the elementary 
 sounds, (c) Orthoepy is the art of uttering words 
 with propriety, (d) A letter is the least distinct part 
 of a written word representing one or more elemen- 
 tary sounds, (e) An elementary sound is the simplest 
 sound of a language uttered by a single impulse oi 
 voice. 
 
 2. (a) The English language contains forty-foui 
 elementary sounds, (b) They are divided into vocals, 
 subvocals and aspirates. 
 
 3. Abdominal and Thoracic Muscles, the Dia* 
 phragm, the Thorax, the Pleura, the Lungs, the 
 
 Trachea and the Larynx. 
 
 4. The Lips, Teeth, Tongue, Palate and Nasal 
 organs assisted by the respiratory organs. 
 
 5. Letters are divided into vowels and consonants. 
 
 6. Labials, or lip sounds; Linguals, or tongue 
 sounds; Lingua-Dentals, or tongue-teeth-sounds ; Lin- 
 gua-Nasals, or tongue-nose sounds; Palato-Nasals, or 
 palate-nose sounds, and Palatals. 
 
 7. (a) Subvocals are those sounds produced by the 
 voice modified by the speech organs, (b) The sub- 
 vocals are: Labials, b, v, w, m ; Lingua-Dentals, d, th, 
 j,z, zh; Linguals, l,r; Lingua-Nasal, n; Palato-Nasal, 
 ng ; Palatals, g andy. 
 
12 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 8. (a) Aspirates are mere breathings modified by 
 the speech organs, (b) The aspirates are : Labials,^?, 
 f t ivh; Lingua-Dentals, t, thy ch, s, sh; Palatals, A*, 
 and h. 
 
 9. The consonant combinations are: ch, gh, ph, 
 sh, Ch, why and ng. 
 
 10. (a) Cognates are sounds formed by the same 
 organs in different positions. (6) Liquids are such 
 sounds as flow readily into other sounds, (c) Coales- 
 cents unite freely with other sounds, (c?) Explodents 
 are such sounds as do not admit of prolongation, (e) 
 Continuants are sounds which are capable of an indefi- 
 nite prolongation. 
 
 11. Silent letters are used first, to modify the sounds 
 of other letters, and second, to show the origin or defi- 
 nition of words. 
 
 12. The name of a letter is the term by which it is 
 known ; the power of a letter is the elementary sound 
 it represents. 
 
 13. (a) A Diphthong is the union of two vowel 
 sounds in the same syllable; as, ou, ow, oe,and oy. 
 (b) A Digraph is the combination of two letters to 
 represent one sound; as ai, ph, etc. (c) A Tri- 
 graph is the union of three vowels in the same sylla- 
 ble, not all of which are sounded; as, ieu in lieu. 
 (<?) A syllable is a sound or a combination of sounds 
 produced by a single vocal impulse, (e) A Word is 
 a syllable or a combination of syllables used as the sign 
 of an idea. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 13 
 
 14. The i in alien is a substitute for y, and is there- 
 fore a consonant, subvocal, palatal. In ocean and 
 notion, ce and ti are substitutes for sh, and are conso- 
 nant, aspirate, lingua-dentals. 
 
 15. When w and y represent u and i they are vowels ; 
 they are consonants when they precede a vowel in the 
 same syllable. 
 
 16. Syllabication is the correct division of words 
 into syllables. 
 
 17. Words should be divided at the end of a line by 
 syllables only. 
 
 18. Between recently compounded words ; between 
 syllables at the end of the line; between syllables to 
 show more clearly their pronunciation. 
 
 19. The vowel. There is an apparent exception in 
 the second syllable of such words as table, castle, 
 muscle. 
 
 20. To assist in their pronunciation. 
 
 21. Synthesis is the process of combining elemen- 
 tary sounds. Analysis is the process of separating a 
 syllable or word into its elementary sounds. 
 
 22. The faculties of memory, observation and dis- 
 crimination. 
 
 23. As Monosyllables, one syllable ; Dissyllables, 
 two syllables ; Trisyllables, three syllables • Poly- 
 syllables, many syllables. 
 
 24. (a) Into Simple and Compound, Primitive 
 and Derivative. (6) 1st. A Simple word is one which 
 is not formed by uniting two or more words; as, son, 
 father. 
 
14 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 2nd. A Compound word is formed of two or more 
 simple words; as, son-in-law , father-in-law . 
 
 3rd. A Primitive word is one not formed from any 
 other word in the same language ; as, man, rain. 
 
 4th. A Derivative word is one formed by joining 
 to a primitive word some letter or syllable to modify 
 its meaning ; as, manly, raining. 
 
 25. (a) Accent is a marked stress applied to some 
 particular syllable. (6) Certain words have two ac- 
 cents, viz., a primary and a secondary, (c) The pri- 
 mary is the more forcible, and, in words having more 
 than one accent, usually follows the secondary. The 
 primary is denoted thus ('), the secondary, thus ("), 
 as in" com pat ibil' i ty. (d) A change of accent 
 sometimes changes the meaning of a word ; as, Au ' gust, 
 the month, and au gust', majestic ; sometimes a differ- 
 ent part of speech is indicated by a change of accent ; 
 as, in 'suit, the noun, in suit', the verb. 
 
 26. (a) Roots, prefixes, and suffixes, (b) The Root 
 is that part of a derivative word modified by a prefix 
 or a suffix. A Prefix is that part of a derivative word 
 which is placed before the root. A suffix is that part 
 of a derivative word which is placed after the root. 
 
 27. Prefixes modify the meaning of a primitive 
 word; while Suffixes, in addition, usually determine 
 its part of speech. Ex. — Improper, not proper, an 
 adjective. Proper??/, in a proper manner, an adverb. 
 
 28. The last letter of the prefix must often be the 
 same as the first letter of the root, as, cor-rect, instead 
 of co-rect. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 15 
 
 29. The sounds represented by the following combin- 
 ations: oi, ou, oy , ow, ng, t7i, ch (soft), sh, zh. 
 
 30. When by the addition of prefixes or suffixes the 
 meaning of both root and prefix or suffix is changed, 
 the word remains primitive; as, re and proof in the 
 word reproof, which is a primitive word. 
 
 31. (a) C, x, and q. (b) F, j, q, r, as, v, z. (c) 
 In mnemonics, (d) When preceded by another vowel 
 in the same syllable; as, mate, tape, rice, ride, (e) 
 An additional syllable would be formed. 
 
 32. The exercise of oral spelling in young children 
 cultivates a clear, distinct, and energetic articulation, 
 and a readiness of speech. Written spelling fixes the 
 forms of words in the mind and gives practice in writ- 
 ing. 
 
 33. The last syllable (ty) is the ultima. The last 
 but one (i) is the penult. The last but two (bil) is the 
 antepenult. The last but three (si) is the preante- 
 penult. 
 
 34. Aspirate as in thin, and subvocal as in thine. 
 
 35. By an examination of the word we may deter- 
 mine whether the final consonant should be doubled or 
 not. 
 
 36. Monosyllables and other words accented on the 
 last syllable, ending in a single consonant preceded by 
 a single vowel, double their final consonant before a 
 suffix that begins with a vowel ; as, spot, — spotted, 
 begin, — beginning. 
 
 37. (a) The final y of a radical word when pre- 
 ceded by a consonant, is generally changed to i 
 upon the addition of a suffix ; as, try, — trial, happy, — 
 
16 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 happiness, (b) If the final y is preceded by a vowel 
 the y remains unchanged upon receiving a suffix; as, 
 buy, — buyer, glory, — glorying. 
 
 38. 1st. Final e of the radical word is rejected when 
 the suffix begins with a vowel, except in words ending 
 in ce and ge; as, moving, peaceable. 
 
 2nd. Final e of a radical word is usually retained 
 when the suffix begins with a consonant, as, in hope, — 
 hopeless, move, — movement. 
 
 Exceptions. — Awful, judgment, truly, wholly, 
 abridgment, acknowledgment. 
 
 39. Words ending in a double letter preserve it 
 double in their derivatives unless the syllable affixed 
 begins with the same letter ; as, seeing, skillful. 
 
 40. Discontentment is a simple derivative polysyl- 
 lable of four syllables, accented primarily on the third 
 syllable, and secondarily on the first, derived from 
 content. Content, the radical, is modified, first by the 
 prefix dis, meaning not, and, second, by the suffix 
 ment, meaning state of being. The word signifies ' ' the 
 state of being discontented. 1 '' 
 
 d - - - is aconsonant-subvocal-lingua-dental. 
 
 i is a vowel, short sound, the base of first syl- 
 lable. 
 
 s - - - is a consonant-aspirate-lingua-dentai, normal 
 sound. 
 
 c is a substitute for k, a consonant-aspirate-pala- 
 tal. 
 
 o - - - is a vowel, short obscure sound, base oi second 
 syllable. 
 
 n - ~ - is a consonant-subvocal-lin^ua-nasal. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 17 
 
 t is a consonant-aspirate-lingua-dental. 
 
 e is a vowel, short sound, base of third syllable. 
 
 n is a consonant-sub vocal-lingua-nasal. 
 
 t is a consonant-aspirate-lingua-dental. 
 
 m is a consonant-subvocal-labial. 
 
 e is a vowel, short obscure sound, base of fourth 
 
 syllable, n and t same as n and t above. 
 
 Some of the following words have been found in 
 nearly every list examined. The candidate who as- 
 pires to a creditable standing in spelling should master 
 the list. 
 
 gauge 
 
 guerrilla 
 
 apostasy 
 
 bicycle 
 
 bowie-knife 
 
 caisson 
 
 euchre 
 
 elecampane 
 
 exchequer 
 
 ghoul 
 
 fusillade 
 
 cynical 
 
 inflammatory 
 
 cuirassier 
 
 porphyry 
 
 paraphernalia 
 
 whimsey 
 
 exhilarate 
 
 novitiate 
 
 vicissitude 
 
 nonpareil 
 
 indelible 
 
 Pentateuch 
 
 mnemonics 
 
 apocalypse 
 
 idiosyncrasy 
 
 plagiarism 
 
 surcingle 
 
 mademoiselle 
 
 initiation 
 
 mayoralty 
 
 rescission 
 
 Pyrrhonism 
 
 harelipped 
 
 millionaire 
 
 sanatory 
 
 alpaca 
 
 meerschaum 
 
 terrify 
 
 beleaguer 
 
 munein 
 
 lachrymal 
 
 camomile 
 
 inoculate 
 
 isosceles 
 
 caoutchouc 
 
 purslain 
 
 bacchanalian 
 
 anachronism 
 
 corpuscle 
 
 chenille 
 
 corypheus 
 
 aphyllous 
 
 saccharine 
 
 cavalier 
 
 millennium 
 
 stadtholder 
 
 colonelcy 
 
 hygiene 
 
 labyrinth 
 
 sadducee 
 
 Pleiades 
 
 gherkin 
 
 plebeian 
 
 apocrypha 
 
 dishabille 
 
 pusillanimous 
 
 scirrhus 
 
 scarify 
 
 balustrade 
 
 titillation 
 
 superannuated 
 
 syzygy 
 
 panacea 
 
 hypocritical 
 
 daguerreian 
 
 mammalia 
 
 sibylline 
 
 holly-hock 
 
 secession 
 
QUESTIONS ON READING. 
 
 1. (a) How many and what kinds of reading arc 
 there? (5) What is the purpose of each ? (c) and (d) 
 Name at least five requisites for each kind of reading. 
 
 2. Define Reading as an Art. 
 
 3. What is Elocution? 
 
 4. Why is Reading less effectively taught in our 
 schools than some other branches ? 
 
 5. State how Reading may be taught so'as to secure 
 results commensurate with the time it usually receives. 
 
 6. Upon what is voice dependent? 
 
 7. How can a clear, full, flexible voice be secured? 
 
 8. Give a description of the pupil's position while 
 reading. 
 
 9. Explain the Word Method of teaching Reading. 
 
 10. What is the Phonic Method of teaching Read- 
 ing? State its distinctive purpose. 
 
 11. Describe the Sentence Method of teaching Rend 
 ing. 
 
 12. Is it possible for a poor reader to teach reading ? 
 If so, to what extent? 
 
 13. What is Articulation? 
 18 
 
QUESTIONS ON READING. 19 
 
 14. How can a distinct and correct articulation be 
 acquired ? 
 
 15. Name the Essential Elements of vocal ex- 
 pression, and tell why called essential elements. 
 
 16. Define the term Resonance as used in Reading. 
 
 17. What is Quality of Voice? 
 
 18. Into what two classes may quality be divided? 
 What does each embrace ? 
 
 19. Define the following: (a) Pure Tone, (b) 
 Orotund, (c) Plaintive, (6) Pectoral, (e) Guttural. 
 
 20. How does the quality of voice determine the 
 emotions of the speaker ? 
 
 21. What classes of sentiment are expressed by the 
 following Voice Qualities : Pure Tone, Orotund, Plain- 
 tive, Pectoral, Guttural, Aspirate? 
 
 22. What is meant by Force in Reading? 
 
 23. What relation does Stress bear to Force? 
 
 24. Define Pitch, and state its natural divisions. 
 
 25. What does the term Compass mean? 
 
 26. Define Movement, and name its divisions. 
 
 27. What is meant by the term Quantity? 
 
 28. What terms are commonly employed to desig- 
 nate the different kinds of Stress ? 
 
 29. Explain the difference between Slides and 
 Waves. 
 
 30. Define Slur. 
 
 31. What is Emphasis? How is it effected? 
 
 32. State the difference between Absolute and 
 Antithetic Emphasis. 
 
20 QUESTIONS ON READING. 
 
 33. What is meant by Cadence? 
 
 34. Give a general rule for the use of the Downward 
 Slide. 
 
 35. Give a general rule for the use of the Upward 
 Slide. 
 
 36. State the general law governing the use of 
 Waves. 
 
 37. (a) What is Personation? (6) What does it re- 
 quire ? 
 
 38. What is meant by Monotone? 
 
 39. State the difference between grammatical and 
 rhetorical pauses. 
 
 40. (a) What is a Climax? (b) How should it be 
 read? 
 
 41. What is Transition ? 
 
 42. (a) What is a Series? (5) How many kinds ? 
 
 43. What is Modulation ? 
 
 44. Explain the term Grouping as applied to Read- 
 ing. 
 
 45. How is Slide sometimes affected by emphasis? 
 
 46. Define a Parenthetical Clause, and state how it 
 should be read. 
 
 47. (a) What physical habits ought a pupil to form 
 from reading aloud? (b) What bad physical habits 
 may be formed in reading classes under poor teachers? 
 
 48. What are the chief objects to be attained in the 
 study and practice of reading? 
 
 49. Describe the style of reading which may be 
 considered in the highest degree excellent. 
 
 50. What is Eespiration ? 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON READENvi. 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BEADING. 
 
 1. (a) Two: Silent, or Intellectual, and Audible, or 
 Oral . ( b ) The apprehension of the thought and the ex- 
 pression of the thought. 
 
 (c) For Silent Reading. (d) For Audible Reading. 
 
 <iuick Perception. All Required for Silent Reading. 
 
 Keen Discernment. Respiratory Command. 
 
 Clear Conception. Distinct Articulation. 
 
 Vivid Imagination. Imitative Power. 
 
 Good Taste and Judgment. Command of Voice. 
 Human Sympathy. Expressive Action. 
 
 An Interest in Affairs. Correct Personal Habits. 
 
 2. Reading as an art is the interpretation and ex- 
 pression of thought, sentiment, and emotion as pres- 
 ented in written or printed composition. 
 
 3. Elocution is the expression of thought, emotion, 
 and passion by all the organs of the body, in an easy, 
 graceful, and effective manner. 
 
 4. First, for the want of skill among teachers. 
 Second, the absence of a definite standard of excellence 
 in reading. Third, the lack of interest among pupils 
 in the matter contained in their books. 
 
 5. The teacher should arouse the interest of pupils 
 by first reading the lesson properly and effectively 
 before the class, and then by skillfully questioning 
 the pupils, concentrate their attention upon the thought 
 and its expression. 
 
 O. Upon a proper and sufficient supply of air. 
 
22 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON HEADING. 
 
 7. By a daily and systematic exercise in Respiration, 
 Articulation, and Waves. 
 
 8. Book in left hand, thumb and little finger in 
 front; first, second, and third fingers at the back of the 
 
 book ; the elbow not touching 
 the side. The book should 
 be held in such a manner that 
 a line drawn from the eyes 
 toward the page would inter- 
 sect the plane of the book at 
 right angles. The full face 
 of the pupil should be seen 
 by the teacher. The weight 
 of the body should be sup- 
 ported, while reading, on 
 both feet, the left heel two 
 or three inches in advance of 
 the hollow of the right foot. 
 The chest should be elevated 
 and expanded, the position 
 erect and easy. 
 
 9. TheWord Method con- 
 sists in recognizing words as 
 wholes without reference to 
 the letters of which they are 
 the reader's position, composed. 
 
 10. The Phonic Method consists in uttering each ele- 
 mentary sound of words with exaggerated distinctness. 
 Its purpose is to cultivate the speech organs rather 
 than to give facility in distinguishing words. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON READING. 28 
 
 11. The Sentence Method consists in presenting an 
 entire sentence as the unit of thought without refer- 
 ence to the words of which it is composed. 
 
 12. It is possible to the same extent that dancing, 
 singing, fencing, etc., may be taught by a tyro in those 
 arts. 
 
 13. Articulation is the utterance of the sounds of a 
 language. 
 
 14. Spell by sound with decided force and distinct- 
 ness such words as contain many unharmonious sounds ; 
 as, peremptory, legible, mangled' st, obligatory. 
 
 15. Quality, Force, Stress, Pitch, and Movement 
 are called Essential Elements, because they are found 
 in the utterance of every sentence. 
 
 16. Resonance in reading me ans the location whence 
 the sound appears to come. 
 
 17. Quality of Voice is the nature, character or kind 
 of tone used. 
 
 18. Normal and Abnormal Qualities. The Normal 
 qualities are Pure Tone and Orotund. The Abnormal 
 qualities are Plaintive, Pectoral, Guttural, Aspirate, 
 Nasal, and Falsetto. 
 
 19. (a) The Pure Tone is a clear, smooth, musical 
 tone free from any aspiration or harshness, (b) The 
 Orotund is the Pure Tone deepened and intensified to 
 its utmost magnitude, with the resonance in the chest. 
 (c) The Plaintive is a thin, feeble tone, with the reso- 
 nance in the forward part of the mouth, (d) The 
 Pectoral is a rough, harsh, husky, hollow tone resem- 
 bling the Orotund, (e) The Guttural is a grating, 
 
24 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON READING. 
 
 rattling, discordant sound produced by a rigid com- 
 pression of the muscles of the throat. 
 
 20. Different qualities arise from the ever changing 
 sentiments that animate the human mind, and the 
 varied physical conditions to which the body is con- 
 stantly subjected. 
 
 21. The Pure Tone is employed to express solemn, 
 serious, tranquil, narrative, descriptive, and didactic 
 thought. 
 
 The Orotund is used to express earnest, bold, grand, 
 and lofty thought and emotions of grandeur, rever- 
 ence, and sublimity. 
 
 The Plaintive Quality expresses feebleness, exhaus- 
 tion, languor, and affectation. 
 
 The Pectoral is used to express sorrow, dread, 
 solemnity, awe, remorse. 
 
 The Guttural indicates fierce anger, hatred, con- 
 tempt, scorn, loathing, malice, detestation. 
 
 The Aspirate is used in the expression of secrecy, 
 surprise, fear, caution, and expiring life. 
 
 22. Force is the degree of energy with which sound 
 is sent forth from the vocal organs. It is not 
 loudness. 
 
 23. Stress is the application of force to some par- 
 ticular part of a syllable or word. It is not accent. 
 Accent includes the entire syllable. 
 
 24. Pitch is the degree of elevation or depression of 
 sound. Its natural divisions are Middle, High, Low. 
 
 25. Compass is the range of voice above and below 
 the Key-note. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON READING. 25 
 
 26. Movement is the degree of rapidity with which 
 sounds are uttered in continued discourse. Its divi- 
 sions are Moderate, Rapid, Slow. 
 
 27. Quantity is the time occupied in the utterance 
 of single syllables or words ; its divisions are Medium, 
 Long and Short. 
 
 28. Radical, Median, Final, Compound, Thorough, 
 and Intermittent. 
 
 29. Slides, sometimes termed Inflections, are 
 changes of pitch either upward or downward on a single 
 sound. Waves are compound movements of voice, 
 embracing sometimes combinations of several slides. 
 
 30. Slur is a smooth, rapid and subdued movement 
 of voice over certain phrases and clauses of less im- 
 portance than others with which they stand associated. 
 
 31. Emphasis is the peculiar utterance of words, 
 phrases, and clauses which renders them specially sig- 
 nificant or prominent. It is effected by a change of 
 Quality, Force, Stress, Pitch or Movement from the 
 prevailing element. 
 
 32. Absolute Emphasis makes prominent some word 
 or phrase regardless of its relation to other ideas con- 
 tained in the sentence ; while Antithetic Emphasis ex- 
 presses a contrast between two or more ideas. 
 
 33. Cadence is a general lowering of pitch, indi- 
 cating the close of a sentence. 
 
 34. The Downward Slide is employed in sentences 
 denoting (1) completeness of thought, (2) determina- 
 tion, (3) certainty, (4) positive and decisive declara- 
 tion, (5) emphatic declaration. 
 
26 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON READING. 
 
 35. The Upward Slide is employed in sentences de- 
 noting (1) incompleteness of thought, (2) indifference, 
 (3) uncertainty, (4) doubt, (5) contingency, (6) 
 negation. 
 
 36. The Waves, of which there are nearly two 
 hundred varieties, are used in the expression of con- 
 trast, double meaning, insinuation, wit, jest, drollery, 
 irony, sarcasm, sneer, and contempt. 
 
 37. (a) Personation consists in representing the 
 peculiarities of two or more persons in speaking. (6) 
 The skillful personation of different characters requires 
 a careful study of their peculiar temperaments, condi- 
 tions, and circumstances, and the application of the 
 appropriate vocal and facial expression. 
 
 38. The Monotone consists in the utterance of 
 several successive words with the same elements, as 
 quality, force, stress, pitch, and movement. 
 
 39. Grammatical pauses are the punctuation marks 
 used to denote the grammatical relation of words and 
 sentences, thus enabling the reader to understand 
 the same; while rhetorical pauses are temporary 
 suspensions of voice used to give effect to ex- 
 pression. 
 
 40. (a) A Climax is a sentence or a succession of 
 sentences so arranged that each idea rises in impor- 
 tance, force, or dignity above that which precedes it. 
 (b) It should be read with a gradual increase of inten- 
 sity of all the vocal elements. 
 
 41. Transition is a change in the manner of ex- 
 pression in obedience to the change of sentiment. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON READING. 27 
 
 42. (a) A Series is a succession of particulars hav- 
 ing the same grammatical construction, (b) There 
 
 are two kinds : the Commencing and the Concluding. 
 
 © © 
 
 43. Modulation is the ready and perfect adaptation 
 of the appropriate elements of speech to the sentiments 
 designed to be conveyed. 
 
 44. Grouping is the skillful arrangement of words, 
 phrases, and sentences, with regard to the elements 
 employed in their delivery, into such groups as shall 
 render their meaning clear, pleasing, and effective. 
 
 45. Words having the Upward Slide sometimes re- 
 ceive the Downward Slide when emphasized. 
 
 46. A Parenthetic Clause is one thrown in to ex- 
 plain, or it expresses something said aside from the 
 general discourse. It should be read with a lower 
 pitch and a more rapid movement than the other parts 
 of the composition. 
 
 47. («) A distinct articulation, correct respiration, 
 control of voice, and graceful attitudes and action. 
 (b) Careless articulation, unpleasant tones, and un- 
 gainly attitudes. 
 
 48. To develop the power of grasping thought and 
 to secure proper oral expression of written language. 
 
 49. That reading which inspires the hearer with 
 emotions similar to those sensations one experiences 
 while listening to the skillful recital of interesting 
 events witnessed by the narrator, may be considered 
 " excellent." 
 
 50. Respiration, or breathing, is the act of taking 
 air into the lungs and expelling it from them. 
 
QUESTIONS ON PENMANSHIP. 
 
 1. What are the principal positions at the desk ? 
 
 2. Describe the correct manner of holding the pen . 
 8. What movements are employed in penmanship? 
 
 4. Which of the various movements is regarded 
 best for general business purposes ? 
 
 5. What should be the first lesson in writing with a 
 pen? 
 
 6. Explain the following terms used in writing: (a) 
 Base line, (&) Head line, (c) Intermediate line, (d) 
 Top line, (e) Space. 
 
 7. (a) Define Main Slant, (b) Connective Slant. 
 
 8. From what authority is derived the Main and 
 Connective Slants. 
 
 9. What is the unit for measuring the height and 
 width of letters ? 
 
 10. (a.) How many principles are employed in the 
 Spencerian System (or any other with which you may 
 be familiar) in writing? (6.) Give their descriptive 
 names. 
 
 11. How should the paper be placed upon the desk 
 while writing? 
 
 28 
 
QUESTIONS ON PENMANSHIP. 20 
 
 12. Into how many and what classes are the small 
 letters divided? 
 
 13. State the heights of the three classes of small 
 letters. 
 
 14. Name in alphabetical order (a) the short letters, 
 (b) the semi-extended letters, (c) the loop letters. 
 
 15. (a) Which is the longest of the small letters? 
 (6) Which is the widest? 
 
 16. Where is the beginning of the small letters? 
 
 17. Where are the small letters finished? 
 
 18. At what point do the extended loops above the 
 base line cross? 
 
 19. How far below the base line do the loops in g, 
 j, etc., extend.? 
 
 20. What is the height of the capitals above the base 
 line ? 
 
 21. What principles or elements are most prominent 
 in the formation of the capitals? 
 
 22. What distinction should be made between I and 
 J? 
 
 23. What is the general rule ror spacing and com- 
 bining small letters? 
 
 24. (a) What is the general rule for spacing be- 
 tween words composed entirely of small letters? (b) 
 Rule for spacing between sentences? 
 
 25. State and illustrate the different forms of shaded 
 strokes used in writing. 
 
 26. What is the height of the figures in medium 
 handwriting ? 
 
30 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS OX PENMANSHIP. 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PENMANSHIP. 
 
 1. Front, Left Oblique, Right, and Right Oblique. 
 
 2. Take the pen between the first and second fin- 
 gers and the thumb, observing, 1st, that it crosses the 
 second finger on the corner of the nail ; 2d, that it 
 crosses the forefinger forward of the knuckles; 3d, 
 that the end of the thumb touches the holder opposite 
 the lower joint of the forefinger; 4th, that the top of 
 the holder points toward the right shoulder; 5th, that 
 the wrist is above the paper, and the hand resting 
 lightly upon the nails of the third and fourth fingers ; 
 6th, that the ooint of the pen comes squarely to the 
 paper. 
 
 3. The Finger Movement, the Fore Arm, the Whole 
 Arm, the Combined Fore Arm and Finger, and the 
 
 Combined Whole Arm and Finger Movements. 
 
 4. The Combined Fore Arm and Finger move- 
 ment. 
 
 5. Correct position and pen holding. 
 
 6. (a) The Base line is the horizontal line, real or 
 imaginary, on which the letters rest. (6) The Head 
 line marks the height of the shortest letters, (c) The 
 Intermediate line marks the height of the semi-ex- 
 tended letters t, d, and p. (d) The Top line marks 
 the height of the extended loop letters b, 1, f, etc. 
 (e) A space in height is the height of the shortest let- 
 ters a, e, i, etc. A space in width is the distance be- 
 tween the straight lines of small u. 
 
ANSWIJIS TO QUESTIONS ON PENMANSHIP. 31 
 
 7. (a) The Main Slant is that given to the main or 
 downward strokes ; it forms an angle of about 52° with 
 the horizontal. (6) The connective slant is that which 
 marks the lines connecting the downward strokes; it 
 forms with the horizontal an angle of 30°. 
 
 8. From the practice of a majority of the best pen- 
 men. 
 
 9. The height of small i 'is called a space in height; 
 the distance between the straight lines of small u is 
 called a space in width. 
 
 10. (a) Seven principles or elements according to 
 the Spencerian System. (6) They are 1st, a straight 
 line on the main slant; 2d, a right curve, usually on 
 the connective slant ; 3d, a left curve, usually on the 
 connective slant ; 4th, an extended loop, three spaces 
 in height; 5th, the capital O, or direct oval; 6th, the 
 reversed oval; 7th, the capital stem. 
 
 11. The paper should be so placed that the right 
 arm makes with the ruled lines a right angle. 
 
 12. Three: short, semi-extended, and extended or 
 looped letters. 
 
 . 13. Short letters are one space, except r and «v, 
 which are one and a quarter spaces ; semi-extended, 
 two spaces ; extended or looped, three spaces. 
 
 14. (a) The short letters are «, c, e, *, m, n, o, r, s, 
 u, v, w, x; (b) The semi-extended letters are d, p, q v 
 i; (c) The loop letters are b,f, g, h,j, k, ?, y, z. 
 
 15. (a) fis the longest; (b) m is the widest. 
 
 16. On the base line. 
 
 17. At the head line. 
 
32 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PENMANSHIP. 
 
 18. At the head line. 
 
 19. The loop? extend two spaces below the base 
 line. 
 
 20. Three spaces. 
 
 21. The Fifth, Sixth, and Seventh, according to the 
 Spencerian System. 
 
 22. The J should extend two spaces below the base 
 line. 
 
 23. The connecting curve should be carried one and 
 one-quarter spaces to the right of the preceding letter. 
 
 24. («) The first curve should begin on the base 
 line one and one half spaces to the right of the final 
 downward stroke of the preceding word, (b) The 
 spaces between sentences should be twice as great as 
 between words. 
 
 25. Five forms of shaded strokes are used; they 
 'are exemplified in the letters t, p, Z, y, O. 
 
 26. One and one-half spaces, except the 6, which 
 extends one-half space above, and the 7 and 9 which 
 continue one-half space below the other figures. 
 
QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 1. Define the following terms: (a) Mathematics* 
 
 (b) Arithmetic, (c) Integer, (d) Fraction, (e) Math- 
 ematical Sign. 
 
 2. State the difference between an abstract and a 
 concrete number, and illustrate. 
 
 3. What is the difference between a Simple and 
 Compound Number? Illustrate. 
 
 4. Define the following: (a) APower, (b) AEoot. 
 
 (c) Demonstration, (d) An Axiom, (e) Analysis. 
 
 5. Name the fundamental operations in Arithmetic, 
 
 6. Why are ten figures used in the Arabic no- 
 tation ? 
 
 7. What systems of notation are in general use? 
 
 8. Name the five principles upon which the Roman 
 notation is founded. 
 
 9. State the difference between the simple and local 
 value of a figure. 
 
 10. Why, in adding, do we begin at the right? 
 
 11. Why are the minuend, subtrahend and difference 
 like numbers ? 
 
 12. Why must the multiplier be an abstract number' 
 
 a 33 
 
34 QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 13. What is the difference between long and short 
 division ? 
 
 14. Why do we begin at the left in division. 
 
 15. How find the true remainder by dividing by 
 factors ? 
 
 16. Define the following: (a) Prime Factor, (b) 
 Composite number, (c) Reciprocal of a number, (d) 
 Cancellation, (e) Multiple of a number. 
 
 17. On what principle may we cancel the factors in 
 the operation of cancellation ? 
 
 18. What is the difference between the G. C. D. and 
 L. C. M. of two numbers? 
 
 19. How does the unit of a fraction differ from a 
 fractional unit? 
 
 20. Define the following terms: (a) Fraction, (b) 
 Common Fraction, (c) Proper Fraction, (d) Improper 
 Fraction, (e) Simple Fraction. 
 
 21. (a) What is a Compound Fraction? (6) What 
 does it indicate? (c) What is its sign? 
 
 22. («) Define a Complex Fraction. (6)Whatdoes 
 it indicate ? 
 
 23. Give the meaning of the following terms : (a) 
 Denominator, (6) Numerator, (c) Terms of a Frac- 
 tion, (d) The value of the Fraction, (e) Mixed 
 Number. 
 
 24. What is the Reciprocal of a Fraction? 
 
 25. Show how the general principles of division 
 apply to fractions. 
 
 26. How is the G. C. D. of fractions found? 
 
 27. How is the L. C. M. of fractions found? 
 
QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 35 
 
 28. Upon what principle does the inversion of the 
 divisor depend ? 
 
 29. In what case may we add two fractions by 
 writing the sum of the denominators over their 
 product, in the form of a fraction? 
 
 30. By what must we multiply a fraction, to have 
 its numerator for the product ? 
 
 31. Are the powers of a proper fraction greater or 
 less than the fraction itself? Why? 
 
 32. (a) Is there such a thing as a prime fraction? 
 (5) Can two fractions be prime to each other? (c) 
 What kind of fraction must the G. C. D. of two or 
 more proper fractions be? (d) Can a fraction or 
 mixed number be properly called a common divisor 
 of two integers? (e) What relation subsists between 
 the G. C. D., L. C. M. and product of two num- 
 bers ? 
 
 33. What is a Decimal Fraction, and in how many 
 ways may it be written ? Illustrate. 
 
 34. Upon what does the value of a decimal figure 
 depend? 
 
 35 . State the effect of prefixing or annexing ciphers 
 to decimals. 
 
 36. What is the denominator of a decimal? 
 
 37. How does a Mixed Decimal differ from a Mixed 
 Decimal number? 
 
 38. Why does the product of two decimals contain 
 a? many decimal places as both multiplicand and 
 multiplier ? 
 
36 • QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 39. Define the following terms: (a) A Finite Deci- 
 mal, (b) A Circulating Decimal, (c) Repetend, (d) 
 A Pure Circulating Decimal, (e) A Mixed Circulating 
 Decimal. 
 
 40. State the difference between an Account and a 
 Bill. 
 
 41. vV^hat is the Metric System of measurement? 
 
 42. What are the principal units of the Metric 
 system ? 
 
 43. Name the prefixes employed with the metric 
 denominations, distinguishing those used as multiples 
 from those used as divisors. 
 
 44. What is a Measure? How established? 
 
 45. What is the standard unit of value in the United 
 States ? 
 
 46. State the standard unit of the following: (a) 
 weight, (b) length, surface and volume, (c) capacity, 
 (d) angles, (e) time. 
 
 47. Define the following terms: (a) A Line, (b) 
 Surface, (c) Angle, (d) Square, (e) A Cube. 
 
 48. (a) What is the difference between a square 
 yard and a yard square ? ( b ) Between three square 
 yards and three yards square ? 
 
 49. (a) How many cubic inches in a wine gallon? 
 (6) Cubic inches in a bushel? (c) How many feet in 
 a mile? (d) How many square rods in an acre? (e) 
 What is the value of a Pound Sterling in U. S. 
 Money ? 
 
 50. What is a Gunter's Chain? Why so called? 
 
QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 37 
 
 51. How are the public lands of the U. S. divided 
 and subdivided? 
 
 52. State the number of pounds in a bushel of 
 wheat ; a bushel of corn ; a bushel of oats ; a bushel 
 of clover seed ; a bushel of potatoes. 
 
 53. How many pounds or ounces make a cubic loot 
 of water ? 
 
 54. For what are the following measures and 
 weights used : Linear Measure ? Square Measure ? 
 Cubic Measure? Liquid Measure? Dry Measure? 
 Troy Weight? Avoirdupois Weight? Apothecaries 
 Weight ? Circular Measure ? 
 
 55. Compare the pound Troy with the pound Avoir- 
 dupois. 
 
 56. Which is heavier, a pound of butter or a pound 
 of silver? 
 
 57. As regards quantity, what is the difference be- 
 tween a pint of chestnuts and a pint of claret? 
 
 58. What are duodecimals ? 
 
 59. Define the following terms : (a) Ratio, (6) The 
 Terms of a Ratio, (c) Antecedent and Consequent, 
 ( d) A Simple Ratio, (e) A Compound Ratio. 
 
 60. What is a Simple Proportion ? 
 
 61. What is Percentage ? 
 
 62. Name and define the elements involved in per- 
 centage. 
 
 63. Give short rules for the five cases of percentage. 
 
 64. Name the Applications of Percentage, 
 
 65. Define Profit and Loss, Commission, Consign- 
 ment, Consignee, Consignor, Net Proceeds. 
 
38 QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 66. What is the difference between a company and 
 a corporation ? 
 
 67. What is a charter? 
 
 68. Explain the terms at par, above par, below par. 
 
 69. Define the following: (a) Installment, (6) As- 
 sessment, (c) Dividend, (cZ) Gross Earnings, (e) Net 
 Earnings. 
 
 70. Name and define the U. S. Securities. 
 
 71. In what kind of money is the interest on bonds 
 payable ? 
 
 72. What is Insurance ? 
 
 73. Name and define the different kinds of insur- 
 ance. 
 
 74. What is a tax? 
 
 75. What are Duties? How many and what kinds? 
 
 76. What is the meaning of Tare? Leakage? 
 Breakage ? 
 
 77. Distinguish between Simple and Compound In- 
 terest ? 
 
 78. Explain the difference between true and bank 
 discount? 
 
 79. What is Exchange? 
 
 80. What four parties may there be to a transaction 
 in exchange ? 
 
 81. What is the Indorsement of a bill? 
 
 82. What is the Acceptance of a bill? 
 
 83. What is the Equation of Payments? 
 
 84. State the difference between Simple and Com- 
 pound Partnership. 
 
 85. What is Alligation Medial? 
 
QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 39 
 
 86. What is Alligation Alternate ? 
 
 87. What reason may be given for a higher rate of 
 interest being allowed in the new States than in the 
 old? 
 
 88. How much longer will it take $100 at interest 
 to double itself at 6 per cent , than it will $50? 
 
 89. What is the difference between Involution and 
 Evolution ? 
 
 90. How does the Square of a number differ from 
 its Square Eoot? 
 
 91. What is a Surd? Illustrate. 
 
 92. Distinguish Exponents from Indices. 
 
 93. State the difference between an Arithmetical 
 Progression and a Geometrical Progression. 
 
 94. Name the elements of an arithmetical progres- 
 sion, and write the symbol by which each is commonly 
 designated. 
 
 95. What are the elements and symbols of a geom- 
 etrical series ? 
 
 96. (a) How find the area of a triangle when the 
 base and altitude are given? (b) When the three 
 sides are given ? 
 
 97. How find the area of a trapezoid when its par- 
 allel sides and altitude are given ? 
 
 98. How find the area of a trapezium, when the 
 diagonal and perpendiculars are given ? 
 
 99. (a) How do you find the circumference? (b) 
 The diameter? (c) The area of a circle? (d) The 
 lateral surface of a prism or a cylinder? (e) The con- 
 tents of a prism or a cylinder? 
 
40 ^JESTIONS on arithmetic. 
 
 i.00. How is the contents of a pyramid or a cone 
 
 found ? 
 
 101. (a) How do you find the surface of a sphere 
 (6) The solidity of a sphere? 
 
 102. What is Gauging? 
 
 103. What must be a dealer's asking and selling 
 prices of an article costing $7.20, in order that he may 
 fall 20 % from his asking price, allow 10 % for delayed 
 payments, and still make 20 %? 
 
 104. If A.'s money is 20 °lo more than B.'s, B.'s 
 money is what per cent, less than A.'s? 
 
 105. Bacon which costs 12 cents a pound wastes 15 
 % before it is sold ; at what price per pound must it be 
 sold to gain 25 per cent. ? 
 
 106. An article lost 10 % by wastage, and is s old 
 for 30 % above cost ; what is the gain per cent. ? 
 
 107. Sent $5,128.05 to a broker in Cincinnati, with 
 directions to purchase pork at $12 V2 per bbl., to in- 
 sure it for 60 days at 15 cents a $100, to pay storage 
 at 5 cents a bbl. for 10 days, and to deduct his com- 
 mission of 2 % on the money expended. How many 
 barrels of pork did he buy? 
 
 108. Bought by Avoirdupois weight 10 lbs. of 
 opium at 45 cents an ounce and sold the same by Troy 
 weight at 50 cents an ounce ; how much was gained or 
 lost? 
 
 109. Sold wheat at 2V2 % commission ; invested 2 /3 
 of its value in coffee at l 3 /4 % commission ; remitted 
 the balance, $623. What was the value of the wheat, 
 the coffee, and my separate commissions? 
 
QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 41 
 
 110. I wish to line the carpet of a room 21 feet 
 wide and 24 feet long with canvas 2 /a of a yard wide. 
 If the lining shrink 8 % in length and 5 % in width, how 
 many yards must I buy? 
 
 111. Sold some hemp on a commission of 5 %, in- 
 vested the net proceeds in flour, commission 2 % ; my 
 whole commission was $210 ; what was the value of the 
 hemp and the flour? 
 
 112. If the relative value of oak wood to spruce is 
 as 3 to 1, and that of spruce to pine as 7 to 9, how 
 many cords composed of spruce and pine in equal 
 parts' will equal 60 cords of oak ? 
 
 113. A citizen donated 3 acres of land, which was 
 three-eighths as wide as long to a school district; what 
 were its dimensions in feet? 
 
 114. An agent took a risk at l 3 /4 % and reinsured Vs 
 of it at 2V± %, and V* of it at IV2 %; what rate of 
 insurance does he get on the remainder? 
 
 115. A draft payable in 30 days after sight, was 
 bought for $352.62, exchange being IV2 % discount, and 
 interest 6 % ; what was its face ? 
 
 116. A., B., and C. are partners; A.'s stock $8,000, 
 B.'s $12,800, C.'s $15,200; A. and B. together gain 
 $1,638 more than C. ; what is the gain of each? 
 
 117. A. received of B. 700 lbs. of hides to tan at 6 
 cents per lb. tanned, and was to take his pay in green 
 hides at 9 cents per lb. A. returned to B. 500 lbs. of 
 tanned leather, and as there was 25 % Waste in tanning, 
 how many lbs. of raw hides must B. send to A. to pay 
 him for his trouble ? 
 
42 QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 118. The stocks of three partners, A., B., and C, 
 
 are $350, $220, and $250, and their gains $112, $88, 
 and $220 respectively. Find the time that each man ,f > 
 stock was in trade, B.'s being in two months longer 
 than A.'s. 
 
 119. The amount of my capital for a certain time 
 at 4 % is $360, and for the same time at 7 % is $405 ; 
 required the principal and the time. 
 
 120. Sold a horse and carriage for $597, gaining 
 25 % on the horse and 10 % on the carriage. What was 
 the cost of each, provided 3 /4 of the cost of the horse 
 equals 2 /3 of the cost of the carriage? 
 
 121. If 248 men in 5V2 days of 11 hours each 
 dig a trench that is 7 degrees of hardness, 232 ] /2 ft. 
 long, 3 2 /3 ft. wide, and 2V3 ft. deep; in how many 
 days of 9 hours each, will 24 men dig a trench that is 
 4 degrees of hardness 337V2 ft. long, 5 2 /3 ft. wide, 
 and 3V2 ft. deep? 
 
 122. Three-fifths of the cost of a house increased 
 by V5 of the cost of the farm for two years at 5 %, 
 amounts to $4,950. What was the cost of each, if 3 /g 
 of the cost of the house equals 2 /7 of 4 /5 of the cost 
 of the farm? 
 
 123. An agent sold a quantity of coffee on a com- 
 mission of 6 %, and invested the net proceeds in pork 
 at 5 %. His whole commission was $440 ; what was 
 the value of the pork ? 
 
 124. A. and B. have an annual income of $400 
 each. A. spends each year $40 more than B. ; at the 
 end of 4 years they both together have a sum equal to 
 the income of either. What do they spend annually? 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 43 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 1. («) Mathematics is the science of quantity. (6) 
 Arithmetic is the Science of numbers and the Art of 
 computation, (c) An integer is a number composed 
 of whole or integral units, (d) A fraction is a num- 
 ber which expresses equal parts of a whole thing, (e) 
 A Mathematical sign is a character indicating the rela- 
 tion of numbers, or an operation to be performed. 
 
 2. An Abstract number is one whose unit is not 
 named; as, 3, 4, 6 ; etc. A concrete number is one 
 whose unit is named ; as, 4 boys, 3 books, 6 apples. 
 
 3. A simple number is either an abstract number or 
 a concrete number of but one denomination; as, 27, 
 28 days. A Compound Number is a concrete number 
 expressed in two or more denominations ; as, 4 days, 
 8 hours, 28 minutes. 
 
 4. (a) A Power is the product arising from multi- 
 plying a number by itself one or more times, (b) A 
 Koot is the factor repeated to produce a power, (c) 
 A Demonstration is a process of reasoning by which a 
 truth or principle is established, (d) An Axiom is a 
 self-evident truth, (e) Analysis is the process of in- 
 vestigating principles and solving problems independ- 
 ently of set rules. 
 
 5. Notation and Numeration, Addition, Subtraction^ 
 Multiplication, and Division. 
 
 6. Because in any scale of numbers there are a*, 
 many characters as are required to make any given 
 
44 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 number of units equal one unit of the next higher or- 
 der. In the Arabic notation ten units equal one unit 
 of the next higher order. 
 
 7. The Roman and the Arabic. 
 
 8. 1st. Repeating a letter repeats its value ; as, XX 
 equals twenty. 
 
 2d. A letter of any value placed after one of greater 
 value adds its value to that of the greater ; as, XXI 
 equals twenty-oneo 
 
 3d. A letter of any value placed before one of 
 greater value takes its value from that of the greater ; 
 as, IX equals nine. 
 
 4th. A letter of any value placed between two of 
 greater value takes its value from the sum of the two 
 greater; as, XIX equals nineteen. 
 
 5th. A bar or dash placed over a letter increases its 
 value one thousand fold; as, V equals five thousand. 
 
 9. The simple value of a figure is its value when 
 standing alone or in unit's place. The local value is 
 its value arising from the order in which it stands. 
 
 10. We begin at the right because we can shorten 
 the operation by adding the terms of each order, as we 
 reach it, the units of that order (if any) contained in 
 the sum of the terms of the next higher order. 
 
 11. Because, since the minuend and subtrahend have 
 the same denomination, their difference expresses sim- 
 ply the excess of like units in the minuend above those 
 in the subtrahend. 
 
 12. Because the multiplier shows how many times 
 the multiplicand is taken additively. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 45 
 
 13. In short division the several products are sub- 
 tracted mentally, and the remainder is each time men. 
 tally prefixed to the next figure of the dividend for a 
 partial dividend; in long division the entire work is 
 written. 
 
 14. We begin at the left in division because the re- 
 mainder in dividing any part of the dividend must be 
 less than the divisor, and it can be divided only by be- 
 ing expressed in units of a lower order. 
 
 15. Multiply each remainder, except the^??\^ by all 
 the divisors preceding its own. The sum of these 
 products and the first remainder will be the true re- 
 mainder. 
 
 16. (a) A Prime Factor is one that cannot be 
 separated into two or more factors, (b) A Com- 
 posite number is the product of two or more factors, 
 each of which is greater than 1. (c) The Reciprocal 
 of a number is one divided by that number, (d) Can- 
 cellation is a process of shortening division by reject- 
 ing equal factors from divisor and dividend, (e) A 
 multiple of a number is one which is exactly divisible 
 by that number. 
 
 17. That dividing both divisor and dividend by the 
 same number does not change the value of the quo- 
 tient. When terms are cancelled they are divided by 
 the same factor. 
 
 18. The Greatest Common Divisor of two or more 
 numbers is the greatest number which will exactly di- 
 vide them; as, 9 is the G. C. D. of 18, 27, and 36. 
 The Least Common Multiple of two or more numbers is 
 
46 ANSWERS TO QUKSTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 the least number which can be exactly divided bv 
 each of them; as, 36 is the L. C. M. of 9, 12, and 
 18. 
 
 19 The Unit of the Fraction is the unit or thing di- 
 vided; as, the unit of the fraction of an apple is one 
 apple. A fractional unit is one of the equal parts into 
 which the unit is divided; as, one-third is the frac- 
 tional unit of thirds. 
 
 20. (a) A Fraction is one or more of the equal parts 
 of a unit. (6) A Common Fraction is one expressed 
 in figures by two numbers, one written over the other 
 with a line between them, (c) A Proper Fraction is 
 one whose numerator is less than its denominator. ((/) 
 An Improper fraction is one whose numerator is 
 equal to or greater than its denominator, (e) A Sim- 
 ple Fraction is a fraction not united with another, and 
 both of whose terms are integers. 
 
 21. (a) A Compound Fraction is a fraction of a 
 fraction; as, 2 /3 of 3 /4. (b) It indicates multiplica- 
 tion, (c) Its sign is of or X • 
 
 22. (a) A Complex Fraction is one having a frac- 
 
 as 
 tion in one or both of its terms; as |. (6) It in- 
 
 i 
 dicates division. 
 
 23. (a) The number of equal parts into which the 
 unit is divided is called the Denominator, because it 
 names the parts, (b) The number of parts taken is 
 called the Numerator, because it numbers the parts, 
 (c) The Terms of a fraction are the numerator and 
 denominator. (eZ) The value of a fraction is the 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 47 
 
 quotient of the numerator divided by the denominator. 
 (e) A Mixed Number is a whole number and a frac- 
 tion expressed together. 
 
 24. The Fraction Inverted. 
 
 25. 1st. Multiplying the numerator or dividing the 
 denominator multiplies the fraction. 
 
 2nd. Dividing the numerator or multiplying the 
 denominator divides the fraction. 
 
 3rd. Multiplying or dividing both terms of a frac- 
 tion by the same number does not alter its value. 
 
 26. Find the G. C. D. of the numerators and the 
 L. C. M. of the denominators. 
 
 27. Find the L. C. M. of the numerators and the 
 G. C. D. of the denominators. 
 
 28. Inverting the terms of the divisor and multi- 
 plying the numerators for a new numerator and mul- 
 tiplying the denominators for a new denominator, is 
 the same as reducing the fractions to a common de- 
 nominator, and dividing the numerator of the dividend 
 by the numerator of the divisor. 
 
 29. When the numerator of each fraction is one. 
 
 30. By its denominator. Ex. 2 /3 X 3 = 2. 
 
 31. They are less. The continued product of the 
 numerator by itself, divided by the continued pro- 
 duct of the denominator by itself, will give a quotient 
 iess than the numerator of the fraction divided by its 
 denominator. 
 
 32. (a) No. (b) No. (c) A proper fraction. 
 (d) Yes. (e> The product of the G. C. D. and L. 
 C. M. equals the product of the two numbers. 
 
48 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 33. A Decimal Fraction is a fraction whose denomi- 
 nator is some power of ten. It may be written in 
 three ways: 1st. Bywords; as, two-tenths. 2nd. By 
 writing the denominator under the numerator, as a 
 common fraction ; as, 2 /io. 3rd. By omitting the de- 
 nominator and writing the fraction in a decimal form ; 
 as, .3. 
 
 34. The value of a decimal figure depends upon the 
 place it occupies at the right of the decimal sign. 
 
 35. Prefixing a cipher to a decimal diminishes its 
 value tenfold, because it removes every decimal figure 
 one place to the right. Annexing a cipher to a deci- 
 mal does not alter its value, because it does not alter 
 the place of any figure in the decimal. 
 
 36. The denominator of a decimal, when expressed 
 is the unit 1, with as many ciphers annexed as there 
 are places in the decimal. 
 
 37. A Mixed Decimal is a decimal ending at the 
 right with a common fraction; as, .6 2 /3. A Mixed 
 Decimal Number is an integer and a decimal written 
 together as one number; as, 5.8. 
 
 38. Since the denominator of the product of two 
 fractions is the product of their denominators, this 
 must contain as many decimal places as the two de- 
 nominators combined. 
 
 39. (a) A Finite Decimal terminates with the fig- 
 ures written; as, .25. (6) A circulating Decimal 
 contains a figure or set of figures repeated an unlimited 
 number of times; as, .56731. (c) The repeated fig- 
 are or figures are called the Kepetend. (d) A pure 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 49 
 
 Circulating Decimal is made up wholly of a repetend ; 
 as, .1546. (e) A Mixed Circulating Decimal is a 
 decimal in which the repetend is preceded by one or 
 more figures, which form what Is called the finite 
 part. 
 
 40. An Account is a record of items of debt and 
 credit between parties. A Bill is a written statement 
 of goods sold or delivered, services rendered, with the 
 price, quantity and cost annexed to each item. 
 
 41. The Metric System is a decimal system of 
 weights and measures, having the meter for its base 
 or unit. 
 
 42. The Meter, Liter, and Gram. To these are 
 added, for square and cubic measures, the Ar and 
 8ter. 
 
 43. The names of the higher denominations are 
 formed by prefixing to the name of the unit, the Greek 
 numerals, Deka, (10), Hekto, (100), Kilo, (1,000), 
 Myria, (10,000). The lower denominations are 
 formed by prefixing to the name of the unit the Latin 
 ordinals, deci, (Vio), centi, (Vioo), milli, (Viooo). 
 
 44. A measure is a standard unit, established by 
 law or custom, by which the length, surface, capacity, 
 and weight of things are estimated. 
 
 45. The American dollar. 
 
 46. (a) Of weight, the Troy Pound. (6) Of 
 length, the linear yard ; for ordinary surface the Square 
 Yard ; for land, the Acre; for volume in general, the 
 Cubic Yard; for wood, the Cord, (c) The unit of 
 capacity is the Gallon for fluids, and the Bushel foi 
 
 4 
 
50 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 dry substances, (d) The unit of angles is the Right 
 Angle, or, practically, one degree of a circle, (e) 
 The unit of time is the Day. 
 
 47. (a) A Line is that which has length only, (b) 
 A surface is that which has length and breadth only, 
 (c) An angle is the opening between two lines which 
 meet at a point, (d) A Square is a rectilinear figure 
 which has four equal sides and four right angles, (e) 
 A Cube is a regular solid bounded by six equal squares 
 called its faces. 
 
 48. (a) There is no difference, (b) Three square 
 vards are three squares, each 1 yard long and one yard 
 wide, each containing a square yard ; three yards 
 square is a square figure three yards long and three 
 yards wide, and contains 3 times 3 yards, or 9 square 
 yards. 
 
 49. (a) 231 cu. inches, (b) 2150.42 cu. inches, 
 (c) 5280 feet n a mile, (d) 160 sq. rods in an acre, 
 (e) $4.8665 equal 1 Pound Sterling. 
 
 50., A Gunler's Chain, is 4 rods or 66 feet long, 
 and contains 100 links. It is so called from the name 
 of its inventor 
 
 51. The public lands of the U. S. are divided into 
 Townships, which are subdivided into Sections, Half- 
 Sections, Quarter Sections, etc. 
 
 52. The law or custom of most States is as follows : 
 wheat, 60 lbs. ; corn in the ear, 70 lbs. ; oats, 32 lbs. ; 
 clover seed, 60 lbs. ; potatoes, 60 lbs. 
 
 53. 62V2 lbs. or 1000 oz. make a cubic foot of 
 water. 
 
tlteWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC 5) 
 
 54. Linear measure is used in measuring lines and 
 distriKVs ; Square Measure, in measuring surfaces 
 Cubitf Measure, in measuring solids and volumes 
 Liquid Measure, ir> measuring milk, oil, wine, etc. 
 Dry Measure, in measuring grain, fruit, etc. 
 Troy Weight is used in weighing gold, silver, etc. 
 Avoirdupois Weight, in weighing coarse articles 
 as, groceries, hay, etc., and all metals except gold and 
 silver ; Apothecaries Weight is used in mixing medi- 
 cines; Circular Measure is used in measuring angles, 
 latitude, heavenly bodies, etc. 
 
 55. The pound Troy equals 5760 grains, while the 
 pound Avoirdupois equals 7000 grains. 
 
 56. A pound of butter. 
 
 57. A pint of chestnuts is one-sixth greater than a 
 pint of claret. 
 
 58. The divisions and subdivisions of a unit, result- 
 ing from continually dividing by 12. 
 
 59. (a) Ratio is the relation of two like numbers 
 with respect to comparative value, (b) The Terms of 
 a ratio are the two numbers compared. (c) The 
 Antecedent is the first term ; the Consequent is the 
 second term. (cZ) A Simple Ratio consists of a single 
 couplet, (e) A Compound Ratio is the product of two 
 or more simple ratios. 
 
 60. A Simple Proportion is an equality of two sim- 
 ple ratios, and consists of four terms. 
 
 61. Percentage is the process of calculating by hun- 
 dredths. 
 
52 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 62. 1st. The Base is the number on which percent- 
 
 age is computed. 
 
 2d . The Rate is the number of hundredths taker 
 
 3d. The Percentage is that part of a number 
 which is indicated by the rate. 
 
 4th. The Amount is i he sum of the base and 
 the percentage. 
 
 5th. The Difference is the base less the percen- 
 tage. 
 
 63. 1st. Base and rate given to find the percentage: 
 
 Multiply the base by the rate. 
 2d. Base and percentage given, to find the rate : 
 
 Divide the percentage by the base. 
 3d. Rate and percentage given, to find the base: 
 
 Divide the percentage by the rate. 
 4th. Base and rate given, to find either amount 
 or difference : 
 
 Multiply the base by 1 plus the rate, for 
 the amount; and by 1 minus the 
 rate for the difference. 
 5th. Amount or difference and rate given, to 
 find the base : 
 
 Divide the amount by 1 plus the rate; 
 and the difference by 1 minus the 
 rate. 
 
 64. Profit and Loss, Commission and Brokerage, 
 Insurance, Taxes, Duties, Interest, Discount, Equa- 
 tion of Payments, Averaging Accounts, Stocks, and 
 Exchange. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 53 
 
 65. Profit and Loss are commercial terms, usod to 
 express gain or loss In business. Commission is the 
 fee or compensation of an agent, factor, or commission 
 merchant. A Consignment is a quantity of goods sent 
 to one person to be sold on commission for another 
 person. The Consignee is a person who receives goods 
 to sell for another. The Consignor is a person who 
 sends goods to another to be sold. The net proceeds of 
 a sale or collection is the sum left, after deducting the 
 commission or other charges. 
 
 66. A company is an association of persons for 
 carrying on some business. Companies may be incor- 
 porated or not. A corporation is a body formed and 
 authorized by law to act as a single person. 
 
 67. A Charter is the legal act of incorporation, and 
 defines the powers and obligations of the incorporated 
 body. 
 
 68. Stock is at par when it sells for its first cost, or 
 nominal value. It is above par when it sells for more 
 than its nominal value. It is beloiv par when it sells 
 for less than its nominal value. 
 
 69. (a) An Installment is a percentage on the par 
 value of the capital stock, required of the stockholders, 
 as a payment on their subscription. 
 
 (b) An Assessment is a percentage on the par 
 
 value of the capital stock, required of 
 stockholders, to meet the losses or the 
 business expenses of the company. 
 
 (c) A Dividend is a sum paid to the stockhold- 
 
 ers from the profits of the business. 
 
54 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 (cZ) Gross Earnings are all the moneys received 
 from the regular business of the company. 
 
 (e) Net Earnings are the moneys left after pay- 
 ing expenses, losses, and the interest upon 
 the bonds, if there be any. 
 
 70. First, Bonds, of which there are two kinds; 
 viz., first, those which are payable at a fixed date 
 known by the rate of interest they bear ; as U. S. 6's ; 
 and, second, those which are payable at a fixed date, 
 but which may be paid at an earlier specified time, as 
 the Government may elect. These are known and 
 quoted by a combination of two dates ; as, U. S. 
 5-20's, or a combination of the rate of interest and the 
 two dates ; as U. S. 6's 5-20's; that is, bonds bearing 
 6 % interest, which are payable in 20 years, but may be 
 paid in 5 years, if the Government so elect. 
 
 Second, Notes, of which there are two kinds; viz., 
 first, those payable on demand without interest, known 
 in common language as "Green Backs;" and, sec- 
 ond, Notes payable at a specified time, with interest, 
 known as Treasury Notes. 
 
 71. The interest on bonds is payable in gold. 
 
 72. Insurance is security guaranteed by one party 
 to another, against loss, damage, or risk. 
 
 73. Fire insurance, against loss by fire. Marine in- 
 surance, against the dangers} of navigation. Accident 
 insurance, against casualties. Health insurance, pro- 
 viding a weekly allowance in case of sickness. Life 
 insurance provides a certain sum at the death of the 
 insured, to be paid to some designated party. 
 
ANSWEES TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 55 
 
 74. A Tax is a sum of money assessed on tK, per- 
 son or property of an individual for public purposes. 
 
 75. Duties are taxes levied on imported goods, for 
 the support of government and the protection of home 
 industry. There are two kinds : Ad Valorem Duty 
 and Specific Duty. 
 
 76. Tare is an allowance for the weight of the box 
 or other covering that contains the goods. Leakage is 
 an allowance on liquors imported in casks or barrels. 
 Breakage is an allowance on liquors imported in bottles. 
 
 77. Simple interest is the sum paid for the use of 
 the principal only. Compound interest is interest on 
 both principal and interest, when the interest is not 
 paid when due. 
 
 78. True discount on a given sum is less than bank 
 discount, for it is a given rate per cent, on a smaller 
 sum than that upon which bank discount is reckoned. 
 True discount is the difference between the present 
 worth and the face of the debt. True discoui: is 
 reckoned on the present worth, — bank discount is 
 reckoned on the face of the debt. 
 
 79. Exchange is a method of making payments at 
 a distance by written orders, called bills Ox exchange. 
 
 80. 1st. The Drawer or Maker, who signs the bill. 
 2nd. The Drawee, to whom the order is ad- 
 dressed. 
 
 3rd. The Payee, to whom the money is ordered 
 
 to be paid. 
 4th. The Buyer or Remitter, who purchases the 
 
 bill. * 
 
56 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 81. The Indorsement of a bill is the ivriting upon 
 its back, by which the payee relinquishes his title, 
 and transfers the payment to another. 
 
 82. The Acceptance of a bill is the promise wmch 
 the drawee makes when the bill is presented to him to 
 pay it at maturity. This obligation is usually ac- 
 knowledged by writing the word " Accepted," with 
 his signature across the face of the bill. 
 
 83. The Equation of Payments is the process of 
 finding an equitable time of payment of several sums, 
 due at different times without interest. 
 
 84. In Simple Partnership the capital of the several 
 partners is invested for an equal time. In Compound 
 Partnership the capital of the several partners is in- 
 vested for an unequal time. 
 
 85. Alligation Medial is the process of finding the 
 average value or quality of a mixture composed of 
 articles of different value or qualities. 
 
 86. Alligation Alternate is the process of com- 
 pounding several articles of different values or quali- 
 ties to form a mixture of an average value or quality. 
 
 87. In the new States capital is less abundant than 
 in the old States. Opportunities for speculation being 
 more favorable in the new than in the old States, 
 money will command a higher rate than where enter- 
 prises are less active. 
 
 88. No longer. 
 
 89. Involution is the process of raising a given 
 number to a given power. Evolution is the process of 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 57 
 
 extracting the root from a number considered as a 
 power; it is the reverse of Involution. 
 
 90. The Square of a number is its second power. 
 The Square Root of a number is one of the two equal 
 factors that produce the number. 
 
 91. A Surd is an indicated root that cannot be ex- 
 actly obtained ; as, V27 
 
 92. The Exponent of a power is a small figure 
 placed at the right of a figure, to show how man}' 
 times it is to be taken as a factor. The Index of the 
 root is the figure placed above the radical sign, to de- 
 note what root is taken. 
 
 93. An Arithmetical Progression is a series which 
 increases or decreases by a common difference. A Ge- 
 ometrical Progression is a series of numbers which 
 increases or decreases by a common ratio. 
 
 94. The elements of an arithmetical progression 
 are five : the first term, a; the last term, I; the com- 
 mon difference, d; the number of terms, n; and the 
 sum of the terms, s. 
 
 95. The elements and symbols of a geometrical 
 series are, the^rs^ term, a ; the last term, I; the ratio, 
 r; the number of terms, n; and the sum of the terms, s. 
 
 96. (a) Multiply the base by half the altitude. 
 (b) When the three sides are given: From half the 
 sum of the three sides subtract each side respectively ; 
 then multiply half the sum and the three remainders 
 together, and extract the square root of the product. 
 
 97. Multiply half the sum of the parallel sides by 
 the altitude. 
 
58 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 98. Multiply the diagonal by half the sum of the 
 perpendiculars to it from the opposite angle. 
 
 99. (a) The circumference = the diameter X 3.1416. 
 (b) The diameter = the circumference h- 3.1416. (c) 
 The area of a circle equals half the circumference 
 multiplied by half the diameter, or the circumference 
 multiplied by one-fourth of diameter, (d) The lateral 
 surface of a prism or cylinder equals the perimeter of 
 the base multiplied by the altitude, (e) The contents 
 of a prism or a cylinder equals the area of the base 
 multiplied by the altitude. 
 
 100. The contents of a pyramid or a cone equals 
 the area of the base multiplied by one-third of the al- 
 titude. 
 
 101. (a) The surface of a sphere equals the circum- 
 ference multiplied by the diameter, (b) The solidity 
 of a sphere equals the surface multiplied by one-sixth 
 of the diameter. 
 
 102. Gauging is finding the contents of casks and 
 other vessels. 
 
 103. $7.20 X 1.20 = $8.64, Net price, 
 
 $8.64-^ .90 = $9.60, Selling price. 
 
 $9.60 -*- .80 = $12, Asking price. 
 
 104. B.'s = 100 % : A.'s = 120 % : Difference 20 % ; 
 .20-*- 1.20 = 16| %. Ans. 
 
 105. 125 % of 12 cents = 15 cents ; 
 100 % — 15 % = 85 % ; 
 
 15 cents -f- .85 = 17 \\ cents, Ans. 
 
AKSWEKS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 59 
 
 Or 
 
 12 cents -5- .85 = 14 T 2 T cents, cost of 1 lb. after 
 
 wastage ; 
 
 14 T 2 T cents X 125 % = 17^ cents, An«wer. 
 
 106. 100 % — 10 % = 90 %, what remains ; 
 130 % of 90 = 117, Selling price ; 
 117 % — 100 % = 17 % gain. Ans. 
 
 107. $5128.05 -=- (100 % + 2 %) = $5027.50, money 
 
 to be expended after deducting com. 
 15 cents on $100 = 1£ cents on $121 ; 
 5 cents storage + 1| cents Ins. + $12|, first cost 
 
 of pork, = $12.56|, total cost of one barrel 
 
 of pork. 
 $5027.50 -4- $12.56£ = 400 bbls. Ans. 
 
 108. 16 oz. X 10 = 160 oz. Av. : 160 oz. X .45 = 
 
 $72, cost of opium ; 
 7000 grs. X 10 = 70000 grs. in 10 lbs. Av. ; 
 
 70000 -?- 5760 = 12}£ lbs. Troy. 12 oz. X 
 
 12*4 = 145f oz. Troy; 
 50 cts. X 145| = $72 91|, Selling price ; 
 $72.91f — $72 = 91| cents, gain. 
 
 109. If % of | = 1* of f: | of the value or 66f % 
 
 + 2\% + l^% = 10\%: 100— 70^% = 29f 
 % remitted. 
 $623 = 29| %. $623 -4- .29| = $2100, value of 
 wheat, | of $2100 = $1400, expended for 
 coffee. 2|. % of $2100 - $52.50 com. on 
 wheat. If % of $1400 = $24.50, com. on 
 coffee. 
 
60 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 110. 21 ft. = 7 yds., 24 ft. = 8 yds., 
 
 100% — 5% = 95%; 7yds. -- 95 % = 7 T ' T = 
 i y Y yds., required width of lining; 
 
 100 % — 8 % = 92 % ; 8 yds. -5- 92 % = 8ff 
 yds. = 2 2°-j, required length of lining. 
 
 tV x W ■+• I = 96 AV y ds - Ans - 
 
 111. 100% — 5% = 95 %; 100% + 2%= 102 %. 
 95 % +- 102 % = 93 T 7 T % ; 
 
 1.00 — .93 T 7 T = .06|f whole com. : cost of hemp 
 
 as the base. 
 $210 -?- .06|i = $3060, value of hemp ; 
 95 % of $3060=12907 ; $2907 -r- 1.02 = $2850, 
 
 value of flour. 
 
 Or 
 
 1.02-*-.95 = 1.07 T V; 
 
 1.07 T V — 1.00= .07 T 7 ^, whole com.: oost of 
 
 flour as the base ; 
 $210.00 -*- .07 T 7 7 = $2850, value of flour; 
 $2850 X 1.02 = $2907; $2907 -*- .95 = $3060, 
 
 value of hemp. 
 112. Value of 1 C. spruce = ^ value 1 C. of oak, 
 " 1 " pine = f " 1 " " 
 Also value of 1 C. pine = \ of ^ or $ value 1 
 
 C. oak; 
 \ C. oak + f C. oak = £f C. oak = value 1 C. 
 
 spruce and 1 C. pine: \ of |f = /j- C. oak = 
 
 value of a cord composed of spruce and pine 
 
 in equal parts ; 
 60 -r- j 8 T = 157^ cords. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 61 
 
 113. 3 Acres = 160 sq. rods * 3 - 480 sq. rd. ; 
 
 A piece of land f as wide as long equals a 
 piece of land containing 24 small pieces ar- 
 ranged in a rectangular form 3 parts wide 
 and 8 long. 480 sq. rr h- 24 = 20 sq. rd. 
 in each small square. 272£ sq. ft. X 20 = 
 5445 sq. ft. The square root of 5445 sq. 
 ft. = 73.79 + feet, which multiplied by 3 
 and 8 respectively equals the length and 
 width of the 3 Acres. 
 
 114. 2\ % of £ is j% % on the entire risk ; II % of 
 
 £ is | % on the entire risk ; -£$ % + f % = 
 f| % on the whole risk ; £ + |- = & ; f | — 
 t$ = jv °f ^he risk for which he receives If 
 % — 41 %, or 4| % on the whole ; for ^ , T i 
 of f | % . f or the whole f £ of || % = 1 * § % 
 Ans. 
 
 115. $1 — $.015 = $.985; $.985 — $.0055 (the int. 
 
 of $1 for 33 days) = $.9795, cost of $1 ; 
 $352.62 -*- .9795 = $360, Ans. 
 
 116. $8000 -f $12800 + $15200 = $36000, whole 
 
 stock : 
 The proportional parts are, A., f|;B., ||; 
 
 O 38. 20_|_32 — 52— A '.„„,] 13 '„. 52 
 V'» 90 J "9""0" ' 9"0" — ¥0' — A * b £lI1U - D - b J "9 
 
 || = ||, A.'s and B.'s more than C.'s; 
 $1638 = ||; T i T =$H7; || = $2340, A.'s 
 gain; || = $3744, B.'s gain; || = $4446, 
 C.'s gain. 
 
 117. Since A. returns 500 lbs. of tanned leather he 
 
 is entitled to 6 cents X 500, or $30 worth 
 
62 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 of green hides. A waste of 25 % of 700 
 lbs. leaves 525 lbs. of tanned leather, of 
 which A. retains 25 lbs. This is equal to 
 33| lbs. of raw hides, for 25 -s- 75 % = 33| . 
 $30 -f- 9 cents = 3331, TS T o. G f lbs. green 
 hides to which A. is entitled ; 3331 — 331 = 
 300 lbs. Ans. 
 
 118. A.'s gain is 32 % of his stock, B.'s gain is 40 
 
 % of his stock, C.'s gain is 88 % of his 
 stock. The difference between 40 % and 32 
 %, or 8 %, equals the difference between 
 A.'s and B.'s time, or 2 months. If 8% 
 equals 2 months, 1 % equals |- month ; 32 c /, 
 — 8 month's A.'s time; 40 % = 10 months, 
 B.'s time ; 88 % = 22 months, C.'s time. 
 
 119. $405 — $360 = $45, difference of amounts ; 
 
 7 %_ 4 % = 3 %, difference of rates. 
 
 $45 ^- 3 % = $15 interest at 1 % ; 
 
 $15 X 4 % = $60 interest at 4 %. 
 
 $360 — $60 = $300, the principal. 
 
 $60 -f- 12, the interest of $300 for one year, 
 
 =5, the number of years. 
 
 120. Since f the cost the horse = | the cost of 
 
 the carriage, \ the cost of the horse = | 
 the cost of the carriage ; and f the cost of 
 the horse = f the cost of the carriage ; hence 
 the horse cost f as much as the carriage. 
 25 %, or ^ the cost of the horse, + f = V° > 
 S. P. of horse ; 10 %, or T \ the cost of the 
 carriage, + | = i-i, S. P. of carriage; 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC. 
 
 6,1 
 
 y> + |i = VV = $ 597 > A = $ 3 > W = $ 270 
 
 121. r 
 
 cost of carriage 
 horse. 
 
 24 men : 
 9 hours: 
 7 degrees : 
 long: 
 3§ ft. wide: 
 2 J ft. deep: 
 
 | of $270= $240 cost of 
 
 *) 
 
 232£ ft 
 
 .5 1 days: x. 
 
 3 
 
 answer 133f days. 
 
 248 men 
 11 hours 
 4 degrees 
 337^. ft. lon g 
 5§ ft. wide 
 3i ft. deep 
 
 Cancelling and reducing: 
 122. The amount of $1 for 2 years at 5 % equals 
 $1.10; 
 Since 110 % of | the cost of house and f the 
 cost of farm = $4950, 100 % of f the cost 
 of house and } the cost of farm =$4500. 
 Since 4 the cost of the house = f- of | the cost 
 of the farm, f the cost of the house = -£% 
 the cost of the farm. 
 $4500 = -y 8 7 the cost of farm + 1 cost of farm, 
 
 = |4 cost of farm 
 
 13. 
 3 5 
 
 cost of farm, 4 
 
 4 of cost of house = -^ 
 
 2 8 T of the cost of farm, and 
 
 $4500, 3V = $125, 
 
 44= $4375, cost of farm 
 Since 
 
 cost of house 
 
 r 8 T of $4375= $1666§, cost of house. 
 123. 100% — 6%= 94%, proceeds of coffee, or 
 
 105 % of pork. 
 94 % 4- 105 % = 8911 % of the value of coffee, 
 
 which equals value of the pork. 
 100 % —89^1 % = IO14, whole com., which is 
 
 equal to" $440. $440 -*- 10}$ % = $4200, 
 
<J4 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ARITHMETIC . 
 
 value of coffee. 94 % of $4200= $3M3, 
 proceeds of coffee, or 105 % of the valm of 
 pork ; $3948 -5- 105 % = $3760, value of 
 pork. 
 124. $400 X 4 X 2 = $3200, income of A. and B. 
 for 4 years ; $3200 — $400 = $2800, amount 
 spent by A. and B. in 4 years ; $2800 — 
 $160 (amount A. spends more than B. in 
 four years) »■= $2640, or twice the amount 
 spent by B. ; $2640 -*- 2 =- $1320, amount 
 spent by B. in 4 years; $1320 +- 4 » $330 ; 
 B.'s annual expenses. $330 + $40 — $370, 
 A.'s annual expenses. 
 
QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 1 What is the difference between Grammar and 
 English Grammar? 
 
 2. Into what parts is English Grammar divided? 
 
 3. Define Etymology, Syntax, Prosody. 
 
 4. What is the test of correctness in the use of 
 language ? 
 
 5. What is meant by the terms Inflection and Deri- 
 vation of words ? 
 
 6. What is language? 
 
 7. Name the parts of speech. 
 
 8. (a) Whatisanoun? (6) A pronoun? 
 
 9. Give a complete classification of the noun and 
 the pronoun. 
 
 10. State the difference between a proper and a 
 common noun. 
 
 11. What may be used as nouns? 
 
 12. When does a proper noun become common? 
 
 13. When does a common noun become proper? 
 
 14. What does the word substantive signify? 
 
 15. Define the following;: Class Nouns, Abstract 
 Nouns, Collective Nouns, Verbal Nouns. 
 
 6 65 
 
H6 QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 16. Name the properties or attributes of nouns and 
 pronouns. 
 
 17. How are the genders distinguished? 
 
 18. State the application of each gender. 
 
 19. What is personification ? 
 
 20. What attributes determine the gender of certain 
 nouns without sex ? 
 
 21. What are the three ways of distinguishing the 
 masculine and feminine genders? 
 
 22. When is a collective noun of the neuter gender? 
 
 23. Of what gender are pronouns of the first and 
 second person? 
 
 24. What should be the gender of pronouns of the 
 third person, singular number when referring to both 
 sexes? 
 
 25. Name the feminine genders of the following : 
 steer, colt, earl, friar, hart, sire, sloven, stag, swain, 
 don, infant, tzar, John, youth, marquis. 
 
 26. What is person as applied to nouns and pro- 
 nouns? 
 
 27. Distinguish the person of nouns and pronouns. 
 
 28. What is the person of the predicate nominative? 
 
 29. What is number as applied to nouns and pro- 
 nouns ? 
 
 30. What are the numbers and what docs each de- 
 note? 
 
 31. State how the plural of nouns ending in the 
 following manner is formed; nouns ending in y pre- 
 ceded by a consonant, nouns ending mfovfe, nouns 
 ending in o. 
 
QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 67 
 
 32. How is the plural of letters, figures, marts, and 
 signs usually formed? 
 
 33. How are compound words made plural? 
 
 34. How are compound terms composed of a proper 
 noun and a title pluralized ? 
 
 35. State the rule for forming the plural of the 
 compounds of full. 
 
 36. What is the origin of the sign 's ? 
 
 37. Write the plurals of the following: ottoman, 
 alderman, court-martial, mouthful, nebula, focus, 
 hypothesis, goodness, trout, elf, it, aid-de-camp, billet- 
 doux, porte-monnaie, staff, Nero, n, Dr., Mr. Jones, 
 chimney. 
 
 38. Name and define the Cases. 
 
 39. How may the several cases be known? 
 
 40. How is the possessive singular formed? The 
 possessive plural ? 
 
 41. How is the possessive of compound names 
 formed ? 
 
 42. When is a noun or pronoun in apposition with 
 another ? 
 
 43. In what ways may a noun be in the absolute 
 case? 
 
 44. What does the term declension mean? 
 
 45. Of what does parsing consist ? 
 
 46. Into what classes may pronouns be divided? 
 
 47. What is the personal pronoun? What two 
 kinds ? 
 
 48. What is the antecedent of a pronoun? What 
 may it be ? 
 
68 QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 49. In what cases are compound personals used? 
 
 50. Define Possessive Pronouns. Name the pos- 
 sessives. 
 
 51. What is a Relative Pronoun? Illustrate. 
 
 52. State fully the difference between a persona] 
 and a relative pronoun. 
 
 53. What two uses has the relative pronoun? 
 
 54. (a) When is as a relative pronoun ? (6) When 
 is that a relative ? (c) When is what a relative? 
 
 55. When is that preferred to who or which? 
 
 56. What is the possessive of which and what? 
 
 57. Name the Interrogative pronouns. 
 
 58. (a) What is an adjective? (6) What two 
 classes ? 
 
 59. Into what classes are descriptive adjectives 
 divided? 
 
 60. Name the classes into which limiting adjectives 
 are divided. 
 
 61. What is a Participial Adjective? 
 
 62. What is a Limiting Adjective? 
 
 63. State the particular use of the definite article. 
 
 64. For what is the indefinite article used? 
 
 65. (a) What are Pronominal Adjectives? (b) 
 Into what classes are they divided? 
 
 66. What is the office of Demonstratives? Name 
 them. 
 
 67. How are the Distributives used ? Name them. 
 
 68. How are the Indefinites used? Name them. 
 
 69. What are Numeral Adjectives? Name the 
 cl -ses. 
 
QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 6 1 * 
 
 70. Define and illustrate the three classes of Nu- 
 merals. 
 
 71. What is Comparison ? How many degrees? 
 
 72. When is an adjective in the positive degree? 
 
 73. Define the comparative degree. Tell how it is 
 formed. 
 
 74. Define the superlative degree. Tell how it is 
 formed. 
 
 75. What does the suffix ish signify? 
 
 76. What words signify a high degree of duality 
 without implying comparison ? 
 
 77. Give the comparative and superlative degrees 
 of the following adjectives: bad, little, far, fore, lazy, 
 ill, good-natured, evil, old, late. 
 
 78. Name some adjectives which have no positive. 
 
 79. Name some adjectives which have no compara- 
 tive. 
 
 80. Name some adjectives which have number. 
 
 81. What is meant by descending comparison? 
 
 82. When monosyllabic and polysyllabic adjectives 
 are used in the same sentence, which should precede? 
 
 83. Correct and state your reason: "A more hand- 
 somer woman." 
 
 84. (a) Define a verb. (6) How classified with 
 respect to use? 
 
 85. Define a copulative verb. Illustrate. 
 
 86. What is a transitive verb? Illustrate 
 
 87. Define an intransitive verb. Give an example. 
 
 88. What distinction may be made between the 
 action expressed by a transitive and an intransitive 
 verb? 
 
70 QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 89. How can a transitive verb in the passive voice 
 be distinguished from an intransitive verb? 
 
 90. How may the words "What" and "Whom" be 
 employed to determine whether a verb is transitive or 
 intransitive ? 
 
 91. When does an intransitive verb become transi- 
 tive? 
 
 92. How are verbs classified with respect to their 
 nature? 
 
 93. Define and illustrate Active Verb, Passive Verb, 
 Neuter Verb. 
 
 94. Give the classification of verbs according to 
 form . 
 
 95. What is a Regular verb? Illustrate. 
 
 96. Define an Irregular verb. Give an example. 
 
 97. What properties has the verb? 
 
 98. Define Voice. How divided? 
 
 99. What does the Active Voice represent? 
 
 100. Define Passive voice, and state how it is 
 formed. 
 
 101. What is Mode? 
 
 102. How many and what modes are there? 
 
 103. Define the Indicative mode. 
 
 104. In what class of sentences is the indicative 
 mode used? 
 
 105. («) What is the subjunctive mode? (MWhy 
 so called? 
 
 106. What is the potential mode? 
 
 107. What does the imperative mode express? 
 
 108. How may the imperative usually be known? 
 
QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 71 
 
 109. How does the infinitive represent an action? 
 
 110. After what words is the sign to omitted? 
 
 111. What relations may the infinitive sustain to 
 other parts of the sentence ? 
 
 112. What are the signs of the modes? 
 
 113. What is a participle ? Why so called? 
 
 114. How is the participle formed from the verb? 
 
 115. How many participles are there? 
 
 116. What does the present participle denote? 
 
 117. How may the present active participle be 
 used? 
 
 118. What is denoted by the perfect participle? 
 
 119. In what ways is the action or state expressed 
 by a participle ? 
 
 120. In what case is the agent of an action expressed 
 by the participle? Illustrate. 
 
 121. Name the auxiliary verbs, and state for what 
 used. 
 
 122. What is an impersonal or unipersonal verb? 
 
 123. Define tense, and name the divisions usually 
 ^cognized by grammarians. 
 
 124. Define the present tense. 
 
 125. What is the present perfect tense? 
 
 126. Define the past tense. 
 
 127. Define the past perfect tense. 
 
 128. What is the future tense? 
 
 129. Define the future perfect tense. 
 
 130. How many and what tenses in each mode? 
 
 131. How many and what forms have verbs? 
 
 132. Give rules for the use of shall and will. 
 
72 QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 133. Define the terms, relation, agreement, govern- 
 ment. 
 
 134. What is person and number as applied to 
 verbs ? 
 
 135. When should a verb be in the singular? 
 
 136. In what cases should a verb be in the plural? 
 
 137. Define conjugation. 
 
 138. How many and what forms of conjugation? 
 
 139. What are the principal parts of a verb? 
 
 140. What is the synopsis of a verb ? 
 
 141. How is a verb conjugated negatively? 
 
 142. How conjugate a verb interrogatively and nega- 
 tively ? 
 
 143. What are defective verbs ? Illustrate. 
 
 144. What are redundant verbs? Give examples. 
 
 145. What is meant by the term, "To make a 
 verb?" 
 
 146. Give the principal parts of the following verbs : 
 dive, say, drink, gird, bear (to carry), cling, set, lie 
 (to recline), shoe, sit, eat, wring, wear, strike, swim, 
 lay, chide, dare (to venture), fly. 
 
 147. What is an adverb? To what is it equivalent? 
 
 148. Into what classes are adverbs divided? 
 
 149. What are the modal adverbs? Interrogative 
 adverbs ? 
 
 150. Define an adverbial phrase. 
 
 151. What are conjunctive adverbs? Name five. 
 
 152. Give examples in which adverbs are used as 
 adjectives. 
 
QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 73 
 
 153. Classify the following adverbs : wholly, verily, 
 asunder, therefore, away, seldom, almost, perhaps, 
 why, forth. 
 
 154. What is a preposition? 
 
 155. What is the preposition and its object termed 9 
 
 156. Define a complex preposition. Illustrate. 
 
 157. How is a preposition regarded whose object is 
 omitted ? 
 
 158. What distinction should be observed in the use 
 of "with" and "by?" 
 
 159. What is a conjunction? 
 
 160. What part of the sentence does the conjunc- 
 tion form ? 
 
 161. Are all conjunctive words conjunctions? If 
 not, name exceptions. 
 
 162. Into what classes are conjunctives divided? . 
 
 163. Define each class of conjunctions, and illus- 
 trate. 
 
 164. What is an interjection. What meaning has 
 it? 
 
 165. Give sentences illustrating the use of as, first, 
 as a relative pronoun; second, as a correlative cc 
 junction ; third, as a complex preposition, fourth, a*, 
 an adverb. 
 
 166. Illustrate by sentences, the use of but as an 
 adverb, an adjective, a preposition, and a conjunction. 
 
 167. Of what does Syntax treat? 
 
 168. What is the difference between a proposition 
 and a sentence? 
 
 169. What is a principal proposition? 
 
74 QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 170. Define a subordinate proposition. 
 
 171. What is a phrase? Illustrate. 
 
 172. Define the terms, element, analysis, synthesis. 
 
 173. What is the subject of a proposition? 
 
 174. What is the predicate ? The copula? 
 
 175. How are sentences classified with respect to 
 use? 
 
 176. Define a declarative sentence. 
 
 177. What is an interrogative sentence? 
 
 178. Explain the difference between a direct and an 
 indirect question. 
 
 179. What is an imperative sentence? 
 
 180. Define an exclamatory sentence. 
 
 181. How are sentences classified with respect to 
 form? 
 
 182. What is a simple sentence? Illustrate. 
 
 183. What is a complex sentence? Illustrate. 
 
 184. What are clauses? 
 
 185. Define a compound sentence. 
 
 186. What terms are applied to the parts of a com- 
 pound sentence ? 
 
 187. How are clauses connected ? Members? 
 
 188. What is a transitive sentence? 
 
 189. Define an intransitive sentence. 
 
 190. Define a mixed sentence. 
 
 191. What is an auxiliary sentence? 
 
 192. What may the subject of a sentence be? 
 
 193. Of what may the predicate be composed? 
 
 194. What is a modifier ? 
 
 195. What elements arc termed subordinate? 
 
QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 75 
 
 196. Define an objective element. What is it called? 
 
 197. What is an adjective element? 
 
 198. What parts of speech form the adjective ele- 
 ment ? 
 
 199. Define an adverbial element. 
 
 200. What is an independent element? 
 
 201. Into what classes are elements divided? 
 
 202. Designate the classes of elements according to 
 construction. 
 
 203. How are clauses classified with reference to 
 their use ? 
 
 204. What is an abridged sentence? 
 
 205. Give a comprehensive rule for the use of the 
 comma. 
 
 206. Give ten short rules for the use of capital let- 
 ters. 
 
 207. Correct the following, giving your reason: 
 "Things look much more favorably this morning." 
 " Washington was given the command of a division." 
 "The most tremendous civil war which history re- 
 cords." " To sayhe is relieved, is the same as saying 
 he is dismissed." " We are agreed on this." 
 
 208. What is a figure of speech? 
 
 209. Into what three classes may Figures be 
 divided? 
 
 210. Define the several figures of speech. 
 
 211. Name five figures of orthography with exam- 
 ples. 
 
 212. Define Ellipsis. 
 
 213. What is Enallage? Illustrate. 
 
76 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 214. Write ten figures of rhetoric, and illustrate 
 each. 
 
 215. What is versification? Define verse. 
 
 216. What is a poetic foot? 
 
 217. Name the principal poetic feet. Illustrate. 
 
 218. State the difference between rhyme and blank 
 
 verse. 
 
 219. What is a stanza? 
 
 220. What is a csesural pause? 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 1. Grammar treats of the science upon which the 
 principles of languages are based. English Grammar 
 teaches how to speak and write the English language 
 correctly. 
 
 2. English Grammar is divided into four parts : Or- 
 thography, Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody. 
 
 3. Etymology treats of the classification, derivation 
 and properties of words. Syntax treats of the con- 
 struction of sentences. Prosody treats of the laws of 
 versification. 
 
 4. The usage of the best writers and speakers. 
 
 5. Inflection of words means the change of form 
 which they undergo. The Derivation of words is 
 tracing them to their original form and meaning. 
 
 6. Language is the expression of ideas by means of 
 words. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 77 
 
 7. Noun, Pronoun, Adjective, Verb, Adverb, Prep- 
 osition, Interjection, Conjunction. To these are added 
 by different authors, Articles, Participles, and Words 
 of Euphony. 
 
 8. (a) A noun is a name. (6) A pronoun is a word 
 used instead of a noun. 
 
 9. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 PROPER. 
 COMMON. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Class, 
 
 Abstract, 
 
 Collective, 
 
 Verbal, 
 
 Personal, 
 
 Possessive, 
 
 Relative, 
 
 Interrogative. ^ 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 PERSON, 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 Masculine, 
 
 Feminine, 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Common. 
 ( First, 
 < Second, 
 ( Third. 
 ( Singular. 
 ) Plural. 
 | Nominative, 
 I Possessive, 
 ") Objective. 
 [ Absolute. 
 
 10. A proper noun is the name of some particular 
 person, place, or thing. A common noun is applied to 
 each individual of a class of objects. 
 
 11. Any word, sign, phrase, or sentence used inde- 
 pendently of its meaning is a noun; as, "A is an ar- 
 ticle." 
 
 12. A proper noun becomes common when it as- 
 sumes meaning; as, "Bolivar was styled the Wash- 
 ington of South America." 
 
 13. A common noun becomes proper when it is used 
 to distinguish one individual from another of the same 
 class; as, " The Park." 
 
 14. The word substantive includes everything used 
 as a noun. 
 
 15. Class nouns are names applied to each individ- 
 ual of a class or group of objects. Abstract nouns 
 denote the quality of objects. Collective nouns are 
 
78 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 singular in form but plural in meaning. Verbal nouns 
 denote the names of actions ; they are participles and 
 infinitives, sometimes termed Participial nouns. 
 
 16. Person, gender, number, and case. 
 
 17. As masculine, feminine, neuter, and common. 
 
 18. The masculine gender is applied to males, the 
 feminine gender, to females, the neuter gender, to 
 objects neither masculine nor feminine, the common 
 gender, to terms which may signify either male or 
 female. 
 
 19. Personification is the application of the mascu- 
 line or feminine genders to objects without life. 
 
 20. Objects noted for size, power, and domineering 
 qualities are masculine. Objects noted for beauty, 
 amiability, productiveness, or submissive qualities are 
 feminine. 
 
 21. First, by using different words ; as man, woman. 
 Second, by using different terminations ; as host, 
 
 hostess. 
 Third, by prefixes and suffixes ; as, Mr. Smith, 
 Mrs. Smith. 
 
 22. Collective nouns conveying the idea of unity or 
 in the plural form, are neuter. If they convey the 
 idea of plurality without the plural form they have the 
 gender of the individuals composing the collection. 
 
 23. They have the common gender unless the sex is 
 known from some other word. 
 
 24. Usage sanctions the use of the masculine forms, 
 he, his, him; as, " Every scholar should be prompt in 
 his exercises." 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 79 
 
 25. The feminine of steer is heifer, of colt is 
 filly, of earl is countess, of friar is nun, of hart is 
 roe, of sire (the king) is madam, of sire (a horse) is 
 dam, of sloven is slattern, of stag is hind, of swain is 
 nymph, of don is donna, of infant is infanta, of tzar is 
 tzarina, of John is Joanna, of youth is maiden or 
 damsel, of marquis is marchioness. 
 
 26. Person is that property of a noun or pronoun 
 which distinguishes the speaker, the person spoken to, 
 and the person or object spoken of. 
 
 27. The first person denotes the speaker; the second 
 person, the person addressed ; the third person, the 
 person or object spoken of. 
 
 28. It is in the third person. 
 
 29. Number is the distinction of nouns and pronouns 
 with regard to unity or plurality. 
 
 30. The numbers are the Singular and Plural. The 
 singular denotes but one ; the plural denotes more than 
 one. 
 
 31. Nouns ending in y, preceded by a consonant, 
 change y into ies; as glory, glories. Most nouns end- 
 ing in f or fe are changed to ves; &s,tvife, wives. 
 Most nouns ending in o, add es; as, cargo, cargoes; 
 nouns ending in o, preceded by a vowel, add s. 
 
 32. Letters, figures, signs, etc., form their plurals 
 by adding 's; as, the 3 's and 4 '*, a's, +V 
 
 33. Most compound words are pluralized by having 
 the described part made plural ; as ox-carts. In some 
 compound words both parts are pluralized ; as, men- 
 servants. 
 
80 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 34. They are made plural by adding a plural termin- 
 ation to either the name or the title, but not to both, 
 os, the Misses Smith or the Miss Smiths. 
 
 35. The compounds of full form the plural regu- 
 larly; as, spoonfuls, bucketfuls. 
 
 3€ The 's comes to us from the ending es or is in the 
 old English genitive case. The apostrophe indicates the 
 v>mission of e or i. 
 
 37. The plural of ottoman, is ottomans; alderman, 
 aldermen; court-martial, courts- martial ; mouthful, 
 mouthfuls; nebula, nebulce; focus, foci; hypothesis, 
 hypotheses; goodness, no regular form; trout, trout; 
 elf, elves; it, they ; aid-de-camp, aids-de-camp; porte- 
 monnaie, porte-monnaies; billet-doux, billets-doux: 
 staff, staves, (sticks) ; staffs, (officers) ; Nero, JSTeroes; 
 n, ri's; Dr., Drs. ; Mr. Jones, Messrs. Jones ; chimney, 
 chimneys. 
 
 38. There are four cases : Nominative, Possessive, 
 Objective, and Absolute. The Nominative Case is the 
 use of a noun or pronoun as the subject or predicate of 
 a proposition. The Possessive Case is the use of a 
 noun or pronoun to denote ownership. The Objec- 
 tive Case is the use of a noun or pronoun as the 
 object of a transitive verb or of a preposition. The 
 Absolute Case is the use of a noun independent of 
 any relation. 
 
 39. The Nominative is the name case. The Pos- 
 sessive denotes possession. The Objective usually 
 follows a transitive verb or a preposition. The Abso- 
 lute Case is used independently. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 81 
 
 40. The possessive singular is formed by annexing 
 's to the nominative. The possessive plural is formed 
 by annexing the apostrophe only when the nominative 
 plural ends in s. If the plural does not end with*, the 
 apostrophe and s are added. 
 
 41. By annexing 's to the last part; as, "John 
 Smith's house„" 
 
 42. When it denotes the same person or thing. It is 
 then said to be in the same case. 
 
 43. 1st, By direct address. 2nd, By exclamation. 
 3d, By pleonasm or specification. 4th, With a parti- 
 ciple. 
 
 44. Declension of a noun is its variation to denote 
 number and case. 
 
 45. Parsing consists, first, in naming the part of 
 speech ; second, in stating its properties or attributes; 
 third, in naming its relation to other words together 
 with the rule for such relation. 
 
 46. Personal, possessive, relative, and interrogative. 
 
 47. The personal pronoun both represents the noun 
 and by its form shows whether it is of the first, second, 
 or third person. A personal pronoun may be simple 
 or compound. 
 
 48. The antecedent is the noun or substa itive ex- 
 pression for which a pronoun stands. It may be a 
 noun, a different pronoun, a phrase, or a clause. 
 
 49. In the nominative and objective cases only. 
 
 50. A Possessive pronoun is a word which repre- 
 sents both the possessor and the thing possessed ; a« 
 mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs - 
 
 9 
 
81 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 51. A Relative pronoun represents some preceding 
 noun or equivalent expression, called the antecedent, 
 to which it joins a limiting clause; as, "The town 
 which we just passed is Milton." 
 
 52. First, Personal pronouns have a peculiar form 
 for each person ; the relatives do not change their form 
 for person. Second, a personal pronoun may be the 
 subject of an independent sentence ; a relative is not 
 so used ; it is found only in a subordinate clause. 
 
 53. A pronominal and a conjunctive use. By tht 
 first it represents a noun, by the second it joins a modi- 
 fying clause to the antecedent. 
 
 54. As is a relative when it takes the place of who, 
 which, or what after such, many, and same. That is 
 a relative when who, whom, or which can be substituted 
 for it. WJiat is a relative when that which can be 
 substituted for it. 
 
 55. That is preferred to who and which when the 
 antecedent denotes both persons and things ; after the 
 •uperlative degree ; after who used as an antecedent, 
 and generally after no, all, any, each, every, same, 
 some, or very. 
 
 56. Which and what having no possessive form of 
 ^neir own, sometimes borrow whose, the possessive of 
 who. 
 
 57. The Interrogative pronouns are w\o, which and 
 what. 
 
 58. (a) An Adjective is a word used to describe or 
 limit the meaning of a noun, (b) Descriptive and 
 limiting adjectives. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 83 
 
 59. Into Common, Proper, and Participial. 
 
 60. Into Articles, Pronominal Adjectives, and Nu- 
 meral Adjectives. 
 
 61. A Participle placed before the noun it describes, 
 as, "A warbling brook." 
 
 62. A Limiting Adjective limits or restricts the 
 meaning of a noun without expressing any of its qual- 
 ities. 
 
 63. The definite article is used to point out a partic- 
 ular object or group of objects ; to distinguish one 
 object from another of the same name; as, Ohio, the 
 State, the Ohio, the river ; to point out some well 
 known object; as, the Pleiades. 
 
 64. The indefinite article is used to show that no 
 particular one of a class is meant. Its general use is 
 to point out a single individual or a group ; as, an apple, 
 a brace of ducks. 
 
 65. (a) Pronominal Adjectives are limiting adjec- 
 tives sometimes used as pronouns, (b) They are 
 divided into three classes ; Demonstratives, Distribu- 
 tives, and Indefinites. 
 
 66. The Demonstratives point out objects definitely. 
 They are this, that, these, those, former, latter, both, 
 same, yon, yonder. 
 
 67. Distributives relate to objects taken separately. 
 They are each, every, either, neither, many a. 
 
 68. The Indefinites relate to objects indefinitely. 
 They are all, any, another, certain, divers, enough, 
 few, little, many, much, no, none, one, own, other, sev- 
 eral, some, sundry. 
 
84 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 69. Numeral Adjectives are those which express 
 number and order. The classes are Cardinal, Ordinal, 
 and Multiplicative. 
 
 70. Cardinal Numerals tell how many ; as, one, two. 
 Ordinal Numerals tell the order ; as first , second . 
 Multiplicative Numerals tell how many fold ; as, 
 
 single, twofold. 
 
 71. Comparison is a variation of adjectives express- 
 ing different degrees of quality. There are three de- 
 grees of comparison : The Positive, the Comparative, 
 and the Superlative. 
 
 72. An adjective is in the positive degree when it 
 expresses simply the quality. 
 
 73. An adjective is in the comparative degree when 
 it expresses a higher or lower degree of quality; as, 
 tall, taller. It is regularly formed by adding er or 
 more or less to the positive form. Less is added when 
 a less degree of quality is expressed. 
 
 74. An adjective is in the superlative degree when 
 it expresses the highest or lowest degree of quality ; 
 as, tall, taller, tallest. It is regularly formed by add- 
 ing est, or most, or least to the positive form. Least is 
 added when the smallest degree of quality is ex- 
 pressed. 
 
 75. A small degree of some quality; as, saltish. 
 
 76. Very, exceedingly, greatly, much, vastly, etc. 
 
 77. Bad, worse, worst; little, less, least; far, far- 
 ther or further, farthest or furthest; fore, former, 
 foremost; lazy, lazier, laziest; ill, worse, worst; 
 good-natured, bettcr-natured, best-natured ; evil, worse 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS OS GRAMMAR. 85 
 
 worst ; old, older or elder, oldest or eldest ; late, later 
 or latter, latest or last. 
 
 78. Nether, nethermost; under, undermost; hither, 
 hithermost. 
 
 79. Top, topmost; head, headmost; southern, 
 southernmost. 
 
 80. This — these; that — those; few — many. 
 
 81. The expression of a lower degree of quality 
 than is implied in the positive ; as, rash, less rash, least 
 rash. 
 
 82. The monosyllabic adjective should precede ; as, 
 " A more proud and exalted mind." 
 
 83. "A handsomer woman." Adjectives should 
 not be doubly compared. 
 
 84. (a) A verb is a word which expresses action, 
 being or state. (6) Verbs may be classed as Copu- 
 lative, Transitive, and Intransitive. 
 
 85. A copulative verb asserts the predicate of the 
 subject; as, "Gold is yellow." Examples : seem, ap- 
 pear, become, is named, is elected, is made, is chosen. 
 
 86. A Transitive verb has, or requires an object to 
 complete its meaning ; as, " James cut the apple." 
 
 87. An Intransitive verb neither has nor requires an 
 object to complete its meaning; as, "The clouds 
 darken." 
 
 88. The action expressed by a transitive verb has 
 reference to some object upon which it terminates, 
 apart and distinct from the subject; the action ex- 
 pressed by an intransitive verb affects the subject 
 only. 
 
86 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 89. A verb in the passive voice is transitive, if its 
 subject in the passive voice can be made its object in 
 the active: as, " The door was shut by John ;" " John 
 shut the door." 
 
 90. Ask the question What f or Whom? after the 
 assertion; if the answer is a different thing or person 
 from the subject, the verb is transitive, otherwise it is 
 intransitive. 
 
 91. When the object is like the verb • as, "And he 
 dreamed yet another dream." 
 
 92. Into Active, Passive, and Neuter. 
 
 93. An Active Verb represents the subject in an 
 active state; as, " Boys play." A Passive Verb repre- 
 sents the subject as acted upon ; as, " The man was in- 
 jured." A Neuter Verb represents the subject in 
 neither of these states ; it implies being or condition ; 
 as, " The child sleeps." 
 
 94. With respect to their form, verbs are either 
 Regular or Irregular. 
 
 95. A regular verb forms its past indicative and 
 perfect participle by "dding d or ed to the present in- 
 dicative, or simplest form of the verb ; as, hope, hoped, 
 hoped. 
 
 96. An irregular verb does not form its past tense 
 and perfect participle by adding d or ed to the present 
 indicative; as, am, ivas, been. 
 
 97. Voice, Mode, Tense, Number, and Person. 
 
 98. Voice is that form of a transitive verb which 
 shows whether the subject acts or is acted upon, Into 
 Active and Passive voices. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 87 
 
 99. The Active Voice represents the subject as act- 
 ing upon some object; as, "John saws wood." 
 
 100. The Passive Voice represents the subject as 
 being acted upon ; as, "John was struck by James." 
 The passive voice is formed by prefixing some form 
 of the neuter verb to be to the perfect participle of a 
 transitive verb. 
 
 101. Mode is the manner in which the action, being, 
 or state is represented. 
 
 102. Five modes : the Indicative, Subjunctive, Po- 
 tential, Imperative, and Infinitive. 
 
 103. The Indicative mode asserts a thing as a fact. 
 
 104. The indicative mode is used in declarative, in- 
 terrogative, and exclamatory sentences and subor- 
 dinate propositions. 
 
 105. («) The Subjunctive mode asserts a thing as 
 doubtful or conditional, (b) It is so called because it 
 is used only in subjoined or subordinate sentences. 
 
 106. The Potential mode asserts the power, possi- 
 bility, liberty, duty, obligation, inclination, or neces- 
 sity of doing, or being in a certain state. 
 
 107. The Imperative mode expresses a oommand, 
 an exhortation, an entreaty, or a permission. 
 
 108. By the omission of a subject. 
 
 109. The Infinitive expresses the action, being, or 
 state without affirming it. 
 
 110. After the verbs bid, dare, feel, hear, help, let, 
 make, need, see, and some others. 
 
 111. The Infinitive, as an abstract noun, may be the 
 subject or predicate of a sentence ; may be in apposi- 
 
88 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAlkMAR. 
 
 tion with a noun ; and may be the object of a transi- 
 tive verb or a preposition. 
 
 112. Indicative mode: the simple form of the verb; 
 Subjunctive mode: if, though, except, lest, unless; 
 Potential mode : may, can, must, might, could, would, 
 should; Imperative mode : let or a command; Infini- 
 tive mode: to. 
 
 113. A Participle is a word partaking of the proper- 
 ties of a verb, an adjective, and a noun. It is so called 
 because it partakes of the properties of the verb and 
 the adjective. 
 
 114. The present participle, by adding ing ; the 
 past by adding ed to all regular verbs; and the 
 perfect, by prefixing to the past the auxiliary 
 " having." 
 
 115. There are three participles: the present the 
 past and the perfect. 
 
 116. The present participle denotes an action or 
 state in progress at the time represented by the prin- 
 cipal verb. 
 
 117. As an adjective, a predicate, and a noun. 
 
 118. The perfect participle denotes an action or 
 state completed at the time represented by the princi- 
 pal verb. 
 
 119. It may be predicated or assumed. 
 
 120. It is in the possessive : " I heard of his going 
 home." 
 
 121. They are do, be, have, shall, will, may, can, 
 must. They are used in the conjugation of other 
 verbs. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 89 
 
 122. An impersonal verb is one by which an action 
 or state is asserted independently of any particular 
 subject : as, " It snows; " "It seems." 
 
 123. Tense denotes the time of an action or 
 event. Six tenses: the present, the present perfect, 
 the past, the past perfect, the future, and the future 
 perfect. 
 
 124. The present tense denotes simply present 
 time. 
 
 125. The present perfect tense denotes what is 
 past and finished, but which is connected with the 
 present. 
 
 126. The past tense denotes simply past time. 
 
 127. The past perfect denotes what is passed and 
 finished before some other event, which is also past. 
 
 128. The future tense denotes simply future time , 
 
 129. The future perfect tense represents a future 
 time prior to some other future time. 
 
 130. The indicative has the six tenses ; the subjunc- 
 tive has three: the present , past and past perfect ; the 
 potential has four : the present, present perfect, past, 
 and past perfect ; the imperative has one : the present; 
 the infinitive has two: the present, and the present per- 
 fect. 
 
 131. Verbs have Reforms: the common, the em- 
 phatic, the progressive , the passive, and the ancient. 
 
 132. Shall in the first person, and will in the sec- 
 ond and third, denote simple futurity; as, "I shall 
 go." " You and he will go with me." Shall in the 
 second and third person denotes necessity; as, "You 
 
9U ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 and be shall not go till I come." Will in the first per- 
 son denotes determination; as, " I loill prove my as- 
 sertion." 
 
 133. Relation is the connection or relation words 
 have with one another ; agreement is the similarity 
 words have with one another in person, gender, num- 
 ber, case, etc.; government is the power one word has 
 over another in determining its relations. 
 
 134. Person and number of verbs are the changes 
 which they undergo to mark their agreement with their 
 subjects. 
 
 135. A verb should be singular when its subject is 
 singular, when its subject is a group viewed as one 
 thing, when its subject is two or more objects taken 
 singly, and denoted by several terms. 
 
 136. A verb should be plural when its subject is 
 plural, when its subject is a group conceived as to its 
 individual parts, when it has two or more objects 
 taken collectively. 
 
 137. Conjugation is the correct expression in regu- 
 lar order of the modes, tenses, voices, numbers, and 
 persons of a verb. 
 
 138. Four forms: the regular, the emphatic, the 
 progressive and the interrogative. 
 
 139. The principal parts of a verb are the present 
 indicative, the past indicative, and the perfect parti- 
 ciple. 
 
 140. The Synopsis of a verb is its variation it 
 form, through the different modes and tenses, in a 
 single number and person. 
 
ANSWERS TO- QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 91 
 
 141. Place not after it, or after the first auxiliary, 
 but before the infinitive or the participles. 
 
 142. Place the subject and not after the vero, or af- 
 ter the first auxiliary. 
 
 143. Defective verbs are those wanting some of 
 their principal parts ; as beware, ought, quoth, wit. 
 
 144. Redundant verbs are those having more than 
 one form for their past tense or perfect participle ; 
 as, cleave, cleft, clove, or clave; cleft, cloven, or 
 cleaved. 
 
 145. To put a verb into any required form. Ex.: 
 To name the tense, mode, form, voice, number and 
 person of the verb. 
 
 146. dive, — dived, dived; say, — said, said; 
 drink, — drank, drunk; gird, — girded or girt; bear, 
 — bore, borne; cling, — clung, clung; set, — set, set; 
 lie, — lay, lain; shoe, — shod, shod; sit, — sat, sat; 
 eat, — ate, eaten; wring, — wrung, wrung; wear, — 
 wore, worn; strike, — struck, struck or stricken; 
 swim, — swam or swum, swum; lay, — laid, laid; 
 chide, — chid, chidden or chid; dare, — durst or 
 dared, dared; fly, — flew, flown. 
 
 147. An adverb is a word which modifies the mean- 
 ing of a verb, adjective, participle, or an adverb. It 
 is equivalent to a phrase consisting of a preposition 
 and its object, limited by an object. 
 
 148. Five classes ; ab verbs of time, place, cause, 
 manner, and degree. 
 
 149. Modal adverbs show the manner of the asser- 
 tion ; as, yes, truly. Interrogative adverbs are those 
 used in asking questions^ 
 
92 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 150. An adverbial phrase is a combination \.»ed as a 
 single adverb. 
 
 151. Conjunctive adverbs are those which connect 
 an adverbial element with the part of the principal 
 proposition modified. Ex. where, when, while, before, 
 since. 
 
 152. "He seems better." " She looks well." 
 
 153. Wholly — degree ; verily — modal ; asunder — 
 manner ; therefore — cause ; away — place ; seldom — 
 time; almost — degree; perhaps — manner; why — 
 cause; forth — place. 
 
 154. A preposition is a word which shows the rela- 
 tion of a noun or pronoun to some other word. 
 
 155. A phrase; as, "at home," "in town." 
 
 156. A complex preposition consists of two words, 
 and is parsed as a single word; as, " as far," " from 
 among." 
 
 157. As an adverb ; as, " They went out." 
 
 158. With denotes an instrument; by a cause ; with 
 the immediate, by the remote means. 
 
 159. A conjunction is a word used to connect words, 
 sentences, and parts of sentences. 
 
 160. A pure conjunction forms no part of the 
 sentence; it unites the materials of the sentence. 
 
 161. They are not ; relative pronouns and conjunc- 
 tive adverbs are exceptions. 
 
 162. Into three classes: copulative, disjunctive, and 
 correlative. 
 
 163. Copulative conjunctions join on members de- 
 noting an addition, consequence, cause, or supposition ; 
 as, and, for. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 93 
 
 Disjunctive conjunctions join on members denoting 
 opposition of meaning; as, but, except. 
 
 Correlative conjunctions are copulatives or disjunc- 
 tives, u?ed in pairs, one referring or answering to an. 
 other ; as, so — as, neither — nor. 
 
 164. An interjection is a word used to express some 
 sudden or strong emotion. The interjection has no defi- 
 nite meaning or grammatical relation. 
 
 165. Relative pronoun: "This is the same as I 
 found;" Correlative conjunction; "As he did to you, 
 so will I do to him;" Complex preposition: "As for 
 me, 1 cannot go;" Adverb: " It is as clear as crystal." 
 
 166. An adverb : " I can but think him gone;" An 
 adjective: " There is nothing but leaves;" A preposi- 
 tion: " They have all gone but you ;" A conjunction : 
 " Age advances, but knowledge lingers." 
 
 167. Syntax treats of the construction of sentences. 
 
 168. A proposition is a thought expressed in words. 
 A sentence is the assemblage of words used to express 
 the thought . 
 
 169. A principal proposition is one which makes 
 complete sense when standing alone. 
 
 170. A subordinate proposition is one which does 
 not make complete sense when standing alone, but 
 must be connected with another proposition. 
 
 171. A phrase is an assemblage of words forming a 
 single expression, but not making complete sense ; as» 
 in haste, since then. 
 
 172. An element is one of the component parts of a 
 sentence. Analysis is the separation of a sentence into 
 
$i ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 its elements. Synthesis is the construction of sentences 
 from words. 
 
 173. The subject of a proposition is that of which 
 something is affirmed. 
 
 174. The predicate of a proposition is that which is 
 affirmed of the subject. 
 
 The copula is a word or group of words used to assert 
 the predicate of the subject. 
 
 175. Declarative, interrogative, imperative, and ex- 
 clamatory. 
 
 176. A declarative sentence affirms or denies some- 
 thing. 
 
 177. An interrogative sentence is one which asks a 
 question. 
 
 178. A direct question requires yes or no for an 
 answer. 
 
 An indirect question cannot be answered by yes or 
 no. 
 
 179. An imperative sentence expresses a command 
 or an entreaty. 
 
 180. An exclamatory sentence is used in the ex- 
 pression of emotion. 
 
 181. With respect to form sentences are simple, 
 complex, and compound. 
 
 182. A simple sentence contains but one proposi- 
 tion: "The sun rises in the east." 
 
 183. A complex sentence contains one principal 
 proposition, some part of which is modified by one or 
 more subordinate propositions: "The fog disappears 
 when the sun rises." 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 95 
 
 184. Clauses are the propositions of which complex 
 sentences are composed. 
 
 185. A compound sentence contains two or more 
 simple or complex sentences, joined by coordinate con- 
 nectives. 
 
 186. The parts of a compound sentence are called 
 members. 
 
 187. The clauses of complex sentences are connected 
 by relative pronouns, conjunctions and conjunctive 
 adverbs. The members of a compound sentence are 
 connected by conjunctions. 
 
 188. A transitive sentence is one whose predicate is 
 a transitive verb. 
 
 189. An intransitive sentence is one whose predicate 
 is an intransitive verb. 
 
 190. A mixed sentence nas both a transitive verb 
 and an intransitive verb as predicates. 
 
 191. An auxiliary sentence is a subordinate propo- 
 sition. 
 
 192. The subject may be a word, a phrase, or a 
 clause. 
 
 193. The predicate may be a word, a phrase, or a 
 clause. 
 
 194. A modifier is a word, phrase, or clause joined 
 to a term to limit or modify its meaning. 
 
 195. The subordinate elements are objective, ad- 
 jective, and adverbial. 
 
 196. An objective element is a word or group of 
 words which completes the meaning of a transitive 
 
96 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 verb in the active voice, or of its participles. It is 
 called the object. 
 
 197. An adjective element is a word or group of 
 words which modifies a noun, or other expression used 
 as a noun. 
 
 198. The adjective element may be an adjective, a 
 participle, a noun in apposition, or a possessive. 
 
 199. An adverbial element is a word or group of 
 »vords used to modify a verb, adjective, participle, or 
 an adverb. 
 
 200. An independent element is a word or expression 
 which has no grammatical connection with the sentence 
 in which it may be used. 
 
 201. Elements maybe of the first class; as, a word ; 
 of the second class; as, a phrase; of the third class ; as, 
 a clause. 
 
 202. Simple elements, or those not restricted by a 
 modifier; complex elements, or those which contain a 
 leading element restricted in meaning by one or more 
 modifiers; compound elements, or those consisting of 
 two or more simple or complex elements. 
 
 203. Clauses may be classed with reference to their 
 ase or position in sentences; as* subject clauses, predi- 
 cate clauses, relative clauses, appositive clauses, inter- 
 rogative clauses, objective clauses, and adverbial 
 clauses. 
 
 204. An abridged sentence is one whose predicate 
 has the infinitive or participial form. 
 
 205. The following terms should be set off by com- 
 mas: 1. Parenthetical expressions. — 2. Intermediate 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 97 
 
 expressions, that is, such as break the essential part of 
 a sentence. — 3. Dependent clauses. — 4. Words form- 
 ing a series. — 5. Words or phrases in pairs. — 6. 
 Noun in apposition* — 7. Absolute case. — 8. In- 
 verted clauses. 
 
 206. Capital letters should be used in the following 
 cases: The first word of a sentence, — The first word 
 of an example, — The first word of a direct quotation, — 
 The first word of a direct question, — The first word 
 after a period, — The first word after an interroga- 
 tion, — Numbered clauses, — The pronoun I and the 
 interjection O, — The first word of every line of 
 poetry, — Proper names, — Adjectives derived from 
 proper names, — Names of the Deity. 
 
 207. " Things look much more favorable this morn- 
 ing." Favorable modifies tilings, and should be an 
 adjective. " The command of a division was given to 
 Washington." The object of the active verb, and not 
 that of a preposition should be made the subject of the 
 passive verb. " The most tremendous civil war that 
 history records." That should be used in preference to 
 which after the superlative degree. " To say he is re- 
 lieved, is the same as to say he is dismissed." It is im- 
 proper to use different forms of the verb in the same 
 construction. " We agree on this. " Needless passive 
 forms should be avoided. 
 
 208. A figure of speech is a deviation from the or- 
 dinary form, regular construction, or literal significa- 
 tion of words. 
 
 T 
 
98 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 
 
 209. Into figures of orthography, syntax, and rhet- 
 oric. 
 
 210. A figure of orthography is a deviation from 
 the ordinary spelling or pronunciation of words. A 
 figure of syntax is a deviation from the ordinary con- 
 struction or arrangement of words. A figure of 
 rhetoric is a deviation from the ordinary application of 
 words. 
 
 211. Apheresis; as, 'gainst, for against. Prosthe- 
 sis ; as, beloved, for loved. Syncope; as, o'er, for 
 over. Apocope; as, yond, for yonder. Syneresis; 
 as, don't, for do not. 
 
 212. Ellipsis is the omission of a word, phrase, or 
 clause, which must be supplied to complete the mean- 
 ing. 
 
 213. Enallage is the use of one part of speech or 
 of one form of a word for another. Ex. We, for /. 
 Methiiiks, for I think. 
 
 214. Simile: "He is like a giant: " Allegory: 
 Bunyan's Pilgrims' Progress; Metonymy: "Intem- 
 perance kills more than the sword;" Personification: 
 "Joy gave him happiness; " Irony: " Sure, Brutus is 
 an honorable man;" Hyperbole: "Then, swift as 
 light, *heir swords flashed;" Synecdoche: gold, for 
 mone) ; Antithesis : " Virtue ennobles, vice debases; " 
 Epigram " Nothing so fallacious as facts, except fig- 
 ures; " Paralipsis : " I will not call him villain, for it 
 would be unparliamentary." 
 
 215. Versification is the art of making verse. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GRAMMAR. 99 
 
 Verse is the musical arrangement of words, according 
 to some regular accent. 
 
 216. A poetic foot is a collection of syllables, one of 
 which is accented. 
 
 217. The Iambus, two syllables, second accented, 
 enthrall; the Trochee, two syllables, first accented, 
 raven; tho Anapest, three syllables, the last accented, 
 countersign; the Dactyl, three syllables, the first ac- 
 cented, principal. 
 
 218. Rhyme is a similarity of sound between succes- 
 sive lines or lines at regular intervals. Blank verse is 
 verse without rhyme. 
 
 219. A stanza is a combination of lines constituting 
 a division of a poem. 
 
 220. A caesural pause is a slight pause made in or 
 near the middle of poetic lines 
 
 Lore 
 
QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 1. Define Geography. How divided? 
 
 2. Define Mathematical Geography. 
 
 3. What is Political Geography? 
 
 4. Define Physical Geography. 
 
 5. State three facts which prove the totundity of 
 the earth. 
 
 6. What is the generally accepted reason for the 
 flattening of the earth at the poles ? 
 
 7. (a) Give the length in miles of the equatorial 
 diameter, (b) The polar diameter, (c) The earth's 
 circumference, (d) The earth's extent of surface, 
 (e) What proportion is water? 
 
 8. What revolutions has the earth? Explain the 
 cause of each. 
 
 9. What proofs can you give for the earth's daily 
 rotation ? v^ 
 
 10. State the cause of the change from day to night. 
 
 11. Explain the cause of winter and summer. 
 
 12. What position does the earth occupy in the solar 
 system ? 
 
 13. What is the inclination of the earth's axis? 
 100 
 
QUESTIONS OX GEOGRAPHY. 101 
 
 14. What is the length of the earth's orbit? 
 
 15. Into what zones is the earth's surface divided? 
 What is the width of each in degrees? 
 
 16. Why are the tropics and polar circles placed 
 just where they are ? 
 
 17. What imaginary lines would be removed from 
 the surface of the globe if its axis were perpendicular 
 to the plane of its orbit, and what would be the effect 
 upon the seasons, and on the length of day and night? 
 
 18. If the rotary motion of the earth were to cease, 
 what change would be made in the distribution of wa- 
 ter on the surface of the earth ? 
 
 19. Mention five causes which produce oceanic cur- 
 rents . 
 
 20. Name four effects of ocean currents. 
 
 21. When are the days and nights equal throughout 
 the globe? 
 
 22. What is the horizon? 
 
 23. What is a great circle of the earth? A small 
 circle? Give an example of each. 
 
 24. What is a meridian circle? A meridian? 
 
 25. What do you mean by the circle of illumina 
 tion ? 
 
 2C. What is latitude? Longitude? 
 
 27. What is the greatest latitude a place can have? 
 Why? The greatest longitude? Why? 
 
 28. (a) Philadelphia and Denver are in the same 
 latitude ; would the parallel be the shortest distance 
 between them measured on the earth's surface? (5) 
 Is there any parallel which is the shortest distance be- 
 tween two points situated upon it? 
 
102 QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 29. If the inclination of the earth were 20 degrees 
 from the vertical, what would be the width of each 
 zone? 
 
 30. Name the countries crossed by the Tropic of 
 Cancer. By the equator. 
 
 31. Give the approximate latitude of the following 
 cities: New Orleans, Philadelphia, St. Louis, Wash- 
 ington, Montreal, Chicago, New York, Havana, Lon- 
 don, Paris, Berlin, Vienna, Rome, St. Petersburg, 
 Constantinople, Rio Janeiro. 
 
 32. Where is there neither latitude nor longitude ? 
 
 33. How many degrees is Washington west of 
 Greenwich ? 
 
 34. What are the following: Island, Arcl ipelago, 
 Peninsula, Cape, Isthmus? 
 
 35. What is a Mountain ? Mountain Range? Vol- 
 cano? Water Shed? 
 
 36. Why is the climate of England milder than that 
 of Labrador? 
 
 37. Name and locate the four most celebrated vol- 
 canoes. 
 
 38. Name the warm ocean currents. The cold cur- 
 rents. 
 
 39. Where, on the 21st of June at the Arctic Circle, 
 would you look for sunrise ? 
 
 40. Define the following : Cascade, Confluence, 
 Frith or Estuary, Glacier, Avalanche. 
 
 41. What is the Ecliptic? Why so called? What 
 is its mean distance from the sun? What is its 
 length ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY - . 103 
 
 42. What is the earth's orbital velocity? 
 
 43. Under what circumstances would summer and 
 winter be longer than at present? 
 
 44. Which has the longer twilight June 21, Havana 
 or Quebec? Explain why. 
 
 45. What is climate? Upon what conditions does 
 it depend ? 
 
 46. How does the temperature vary with altitude 
 and distance from the equator ? 
 
 47. Why are the western coasts of Europe and the 
 United States warmer than the eastern coasts of Asia 
 and the United States ? 
 
 48. Into what general classes is mankind divided? 
 Give an example of each class. 
 
 49. What are the political divisions of the world? 
 
 50. What is a Republic? Empire? Kingdom? 
 Limited Monarchy? Absolute Monarchy? Give ex- 
 amples of each. 
 
 51. What is a village? Town? City? A capital 
 of a state or country ? The Metropolis ? 
 
 52. What are the chief industrial pursuits? 
 
 53. Distinguish between the two kinds of Ctom- 
 merce. Between imports and exports. 
 
 54. Name the four grades of social condition of 
 mankind. 
 
 55. Name the four principal religicis systems. 
 
 56. What are the Equinoxes? When do they oc- 
 cur? 
 
 57. Explain what you mean by the Solstices, and 
 state when they occur. 
 
104 QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 58. Name the grand divisions of the earth, and af- 
 ter each write the name of its principal mountain sys- 
 tem. 
 
 59. Name the eight largest islands in their order of 
 size. 
 
 60. Give in round numbers the area of each of the 
 grand divisions. 
 
 61. Name and give length of principal river of each 
 grand division. 
 
 62 . To what is the term Antarctic Ocean applied ? 
 
 63. How much more land does the North Temperate 
 zone contain than the South Temperate ? 
 
 64. Name ten peninsulas which project in a south- 
 erly direction. 
 
 65. How far north have navigators explored? 
 
 66. What was the only beast of burden possessed 
 by the aborigines of America ? 
 
 67. Why is the region about the Antarctic Circle 
 colder than that of the Arctic Circle? 
 
 68. Name the ten largest gulfs and bays that wash 
 the coast of North America. 
 
 60. Name the ten largest lakes of North America. 
 
 70. Into what four classes is the surface of North 
 America naturally divided ? 
 
 71. Name the political divisions of North America. 
 
 72. Name the principal wild animals of North 
 America . 
 
 73. What is the area of the United States? Its 
 population? Breadth from north to south? Length 
 from east to west ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 105 
 
 74. What races may be found in the United States ? 
 
 75. What are canons? What river is remarkable 
 for its numerous and deep canons ? 
 
 7G. For what are the rivers of the Atlantic plain 
 remarkable? 
 
 77. What political divisions do the United States 
 comprise? 
 
 78. Name the ten largest cities of the United States. 
 
 79. Why has the northeastern part of the United 
 States been foremost in manufacturing industries ? 
 
 80. Name five principal exports of the United 
 States. Five principal imports. 
 
 81. Locate and define the following: Ottawa, 
 Yukon, Hatteras, Yucatan, Nicaragua, Hayti, Halifax, 
 Sitka, Bathurst, Bermuda, Sandusky, Yankton, The 
 Thousand Isles, Mackinaw, Itasca, Tehuantepec, Gila, 
 Height of Land, Kodyak, Fundy. 
 
 82. Compare the New England States with Cali- 
 fornia in size. With Texas. 
 
 83. If Texas were placed across the United States 
 from Washington City westward, how far would it 
 extend ? 
 
 84. State the location of the following colleges: 
 Yale, Harvard, Brown University, Dartmouth, Vassar, 
 William and Mary College. 
 
 85. Name the States and their capitals that border 
 on the Mississippi River. 
 
 86. In what two industries do the Middle States ex- 
 cel all others ? 
 
 87. What is the government of the District of Co- 
 lumbia ? 
 
106 QUESTIONS ON GEOGEAPHT. 
 
 88. Iii what respect is Chesapeake Bay remarkable? 
 
 89. What three large cities are in nearly the same 
 latitude as Philadelphia? How do they compare in 
 climate? Give the reason for your answer. 
 
 90. Of what benefit are sand-bars and islands lying 
 off the coast of North Carolina? 
 
 91. Name the peculiar productions of North Caro- 
 lina. How are they obtained ? 
 
 92. Give a detailed description of Florida. 
 
 93. How are the lowlands along the Mississippi 
 rendered tillable? 
 
 94. Whence comes the moss used for cushions and 
 mattresses ? 
 
 95. What is the Red River Raft? 
 
 96. By whom, and for what purpose was Indian 
 Territory set apart ? 
 
 97. Compare the eastern tributaries of the Missis- 
 sippi with the western in the following respects : (1 ) 
 Rapidity of descent. (2) Navigable distance. (3) 
 Extent of surface drained. (4) Time of subsidence. 
 
 98. What is the natural center of population of 
 the United States? Give reasons for your answer. 
 
 99. Name ten productions of the Mississippi Valley. 
 
 100. How do steamboats pass the falls at Louisville ? 
 
 101. For what is Chicago remarkable? Name five 
 points. 
 
 102. Why is the climate of Michigan milder than 
 other States in the same latitude ? 
 
 103. How do vessels pass from Lake Superior to 
 Lake Michigan ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 107 
 
 104. Why is southwestern Michigan particularly 
 adapted to fruit culture ? 
 
 105. (a) Locate Yellowstone National Park, (b) 
 Give its area, (c) By whom and for what set apart? 
 (d) Name four features which render it a natural 
 wonder, (e) What three rivers have their source in 
 this park? 
 
 106. Name the capitals of the five territories. 
 
 107. Why is the Red River of the North impor- 
 tant ? 
 
 108. Compare the natural commercial advantages of 
 the Atlantic and Pacific States. 
 
 109. What and where are the following: Dry 
 Tortugas, Managua, The Panhandle, The Eastern Shore, 
 Sandy Hook ? 
 
 110. What waters surround New York City? 
 
 111. Name the largest lake in each grand division. 
 
 112. (a) Where do navigators change their time? 
 (b) Under what circumstances do they add a day and 
 drop a day ? 
 
 113. In what city is it 6 A. m. when it is noon at 
 London? 
 
 114. On the 21st of June at noon which way are the 
 shadows cast at London, Tunis, Mecca, Rio Janeiro, 
 Muscat ? 
 
 115. Name, in order, the five most populous powers. 
 
 116. Name the States which excel in the following 
 productions: Corn, Wheat, Oats, Potatoes, Sweet Po- 
 tatoes, Tobacco, Cotton, Wool, Manufacturing pro- 
 ducts, Mining products. 
 
108 QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 117. How does the extent of the railroad system of 
 the United States compare with that of European 
 countries? 
 
 118. Which is the most densely populated country? 
 
 119. Trace the " International Date Line." 
 
 120. Where is the center of population of the United 
 States ? 
 
 121. Name the States crossed by the 40th parallel. 
 
 122. Name the waters upon which a boat would ply 
 from Nashville to Little Rock. 
 
 123. Why had Rhode Island formerly two capitals? 
 
 124. For what are the following cities noted : Spring- 
 field, Mass., Annapolis, Pittsburg, Paterson, Indian- 
 apolis ? 
 
 125. What and where are the following: Salado, 
 Popocatepetl, Welland, Elburz, Batavia, Ormus, Brest, 
 Finland, Manilla, Tenneriffe? 
 
 126. What portions of icebergs are under water? 
 
 127. By whom is Greenland inhabited? Why 
 called Greenland? 
 
 128. For what is Iceland remarkable? By whom 
 peopled? What is their language? 
 
 129. What is the chief value of Alaska? 
 
 130. Name the principal American possessions of 
 Great Britian ? 
 
 131. What provinces are embraced in the Dominion 
 of Canada? 
 
 132. How is the Dominion of Canada governed? 
 
 133. What countrv furnishes the greater portion of 
 furs to the worltf * 
 
QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 109 
 
 134. How do vessels pass from the great lakes to the 
 ocean ? 
 
 135 . For what is the Bay of Fundy noted ? Explain 
 the cause. 
 
 136. In what are nearly all the people of New- 
 foundland employed? 
 
 137. Name the largest city of the following States: 
 Vermont, North Carolina, Arkansas, Oregon, Nevada. 
 
 138. (a) Which State has the greatest number of 
 electoral votes ? (b) Upon what does this depend? 
 
 139. (a) Of how many members does the House of 
 Representatives consist (1903) ? (b) What is the basis 
 of representation? 
 
 140. Name the cities which have been capitals of the 
 United States. 
 
 141. Why is the passage from New York to Liver- 
 pool shorter than that from Liverpool to New York ? 
 
 142. What and where are the following : Tapajos, 
 Tchad, Anticosti, The Levant, The Three Rivers, Pem- 
 bina, Atacama, Heart's Content, Otranto, Severn, 
 Taranto ? 
 
 143. What two States have nearly the same area? 
 
 144. What are the only French possessions in North 
 America ? 
 
 145. How do the United States compare in size with 
 Brazil ? 
 
 146. Compare Illinois with England in size and 
 population. 
 
 147. What is remarkable about the climate of Mex- 
 ico? 
 
110 QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 148. What kind of government has Mexico? Of 
 what composed ? Who are its people ? What are its 
 exports ? 
 
 149. Of what does Central America consist? 
 
 150. What gives Central America importance to the 
 world ? 
 
 151. How is the intense heat of the West Indies 
 modified? 
 
 152. Name five valuable exports of the West Indies. 
 Who are its people? What is their number? Of how 
 many islands do the West Indies consist? 
 
 153. For what is Havana noted? 
 
 154. What peculiar navigable advantages has the 
 Amazon ? 
 
 155. A vessel sails from Baltimore to Maracaybo, 
 touching at Vera Cruz, name the waters upon which 
 she sails. 
 
 156. Why is South America not well adapted for 
 commerce ? 
 
 157. What character of government prevails in 
 South America? What is the prevailing religion? 
 Population, number, and origin? 
 
 158. What is the government of Brazil ? How does 
 the country compare in population with the U. S. ? 
 
 159. What capital of South America is in the same 
 longitude as Washington ? How does their time com- 
 pare? 
 
 160. Name the greatest mountain chain of South 
 America ; the highest mountain ; the largest city ; the 
 largest gulf. 
 
QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. Ill 
 
 161. Name the countries of South America, and after 
 each write the name of its capital. 
 
 162. Caracas is in longitude (57° W., St. Louis is 'a 
 90° 15' W. How does their time compare? 
 
 163. What are the lowlands of South America 
 called in the different river basins? 
 
 164. In what part of the world is the largest bird of 
 prey? 
 
 165. Describe the great plains of South America 
 with reference to their vegetable and animal pro- 
 ductions. 
 
 166. Mention ten of the most valuable productions 
 of South America. 
 
 167. Name five forest trees of South America of 
 great commercial value. 
 
 168. What are the five chief commercial cities of 
 South America? 
 
 169. Which is the most enterprising nation of South 
 America? To what is this due? 
 
 170. What language is spoken in Brazil ? Why? 
 
 171. To whom do the Falkland Islands belong? Im- 
 portance ? 
 
 172. What is particularly remarkable about the 
 Galapagos Islands? 
 
 173. What and where are tne following: Chiloe, 
 Cuzco, Frio, Maracaybo, Aspinwall, Cartagena, Para, 
 Kosario, Guayaquil, Popayan, Corrientes, San Fran- 
 cisco, Tucuman, Angostura, Xingu, Cotopaxi, Panama, 
 Maderia, Joannes, Bahia? 
 
112 QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 174. Where is the only part of the world to which 
 the cinchona-tree is indigenous? What canyon sa} r ol 
 the supply? 
 
 175. What nations in America are without sea- 
 fronts ? 
 
 176. Which nations own no islands except those 
 along their coasts termed littoral islands? 
 
 177. What is the area and population of Europe? 
 
 178. How does the coast-line of Europe compare 
 with that of the other grand divisions? What ad- 
 vantages accrue from an extensive coast line ? 
 
 179. Name ten seas that wash the shores of Europe. 
 
 180. What forms of government prevail in Europe, 
 and how many of each ? 
 
 181. Name the countries of Europe and after each 
 write the name of its capital. 
 
 182. Name the Republics of Europe. 
 
 183. Which is the oldest Republic of the world? 
 
 184. Which countries of Europe have the same 
 king? 
 
 185. What causes the great emigration from Europe 
 to America? 
 
 186. What striking features exist in the political ge- 
 ography of Europe ? 
 
 187. Name five gulfs or bays that wash the shores 
 of Europe. 
 
 188. Compare the latitude of St. Petersburg with 
 some prominent point in America. 
 
 189. Name in order the ten largest cities of Europe. 
 
QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 113 
 
 190. Locate the following: Lipari Islands, Lake 
 Como, Palermo, Elba, Hamburg. 
 
 191. Name the waters upon which a vessel would 
 sail by the shortest route from Genoa to Trieste. 
 
 192. What countries occupy the Great Low Plain of 
 Europe ? 
 
 193. Name and locate the foreign possessions of 
 Great Britain. 
 
 194. Compare the winter climate of England and 
 South Carolina, and give a reason for your answer. 
 
 195. How do the railroads of England differ from 
 those of the U. S. ? 
 
 196. Why is Birmingham said to be in the Black 
 Country ? 
 
 197. For what are the following cities noted : Liv 
 erpool, Manchester, Leeds, Nottingham, Newcastle' 
 upon-Tyne, Sheffield, Portsmouth, Oxford, Cambridge? 
 
 198. What is the length of twilight in northern 
 Scotland at the summer solstice? 
 
 199. How many and what telegraph cables con- 
 nect America with Europe? 
 
 200. What and where are the following : Kiev, 
 Riga, Rhodes, Dwina,Kiolen, Cattegat, Pesth, Candia, 
 Gottenburg, Dovrefield, Astrakhan, Munich, Crimea, 
 Cologne, Wilna, Wener, The Naze, Bucharest, Dantzic, 
 Finland? 
 
 201. Describe the climate of Ireland. 
 
 202. For what are the following cities noted : Bel- 
 fast, Paris, Lyons, Bordeaux, Glasgow? 
 
 8 
 
114 QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 203. Compare the climate about the G. of Finland 
 with that of the harbor of Hammerfest. Explain the 
 cause. 
 
 204. What country of Europe is the richest in min- 
 eral productions? 
 
 205. What people carry on nearly all the trade of 
 Austria, Hungary, and Poland? 
 
 206. What are respectively the centers of the inland 
 and foreign trade of Austria? 
 
 207 . What are the most famous quicksilver mines of 
 the world? 
 
 208. What is " The Key to the East? " 
 
 209. What is the military importance of Gibraltar? 
 
 210. What and where is the " Alhambra? " 
 
 211. Describe the lo cation of Venice? 
 
 212. How does the German Empire compare in area 
 and population with Texas? 
 
 213. Name two famous watering places of Europe. 
 Locate them. 
 
 214. Where is amber found on the surface? 
 
 215. Which is the best cultivated country of the 
 world? 
 
 216. From what country and through what rivers 
 does water flow into four great seas of Europe? 
 
 217. Name the characteristics of the Dutch. Of the 
 Swiss. 
 
 218. Where is the most fertile land of Europe? 
 
 219. Which is the greatest grain market of the world ? 
 
 220. What three nations control over one-third of 
 the world? 
 
QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 115 
 
 221. Describe and locate the Steppes of Russia. 
 
 222. In what part of Europe are famous fairs held? 
 
 223. Which is farther from London, a town 2° west 
 ;r one 2° north of it? Explain your answer. 
 
 224. What and where are the two great shipping 
 ports of Russia? 
 
 225. What is the religion of the Russians? 
 
 226. To what race do the Russians belong? 
 
 227. Where do the following people live : Amphis- 
 cians, Antiscians, Ascians, Periecians, Pericians, Anti- 
 podes? 
 
 228. Name the waters upon which a vessel sails by 
 the shortest route from St. Petersburg to Odessa. 
 
 229. What is the width of Dover Strait, Gibraltar, 
 Behring ? 
 
 230. From what nations are the Italians derived? 
 
 231. What language is chiefly spoken in the follow- 
 ing cities : Havana, Constantinople, Quebec, Rio Ja- 
 neiro, Berne? 
 
 232. Where are the Valdai Hills ? The Matterhorn ? 
 
 233. WhatisaMercatorMau? By whom invented? 
 For what purpose? 
 
 234. State the advantages and disadvantages of Mer- 
 cator's Map. 
 
 235. State the principal points of resemblance and 
 difference between («) the British Parliament and 
 the Congress of the U. S. ; (6) between the Executive 
 powers of the two countries. 
 
 236. What country in the world has the longest and 
 most numerous lines of railroad? 
 
116 QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY". 
 
 237. Name five principal mountain systems o) Asia. 
 
 238. Name in order the five longestrivers o) Asia. 
 
 239. What are the political divisions of Asia ■ 
 
 240. Name the seas, gulfs, and bays which surround 
 Asia, beginning at the N. W. 
 
 241. Locate the following cities of Asia : Tobolsk, 
 Kelat, Tomsk, Madras, Hong Kong, Irkoutsk, Tokio, 
 Aden, Colombo, Khiva, Lassa, Bankok, Lucknow, 
 Cabul, Teheran, Smyrna, Tientsin, Kashgar, Surat, 
 Mecca, Shanghai, Medina, Cashmere, Hue, Omsk, 
 Mandalay, Ozaka, Aleppo, Tiflis, Nankin, Damascus, 
 Ispahan, Mocha, Beyroot, Fuh Chau. 
 
 242. Name the two principal forms of religion of 
 Asia and state their distinctive features. 
 
 243. What do the suffixes stan, chow, ho and kiang 
 added to Asiatic names signify? 
 
 244. What is the character of the surface of 
 Siberia? 
 
 245. Has a passage along the northern coast of 
 Europe and Asia ever been made ? 
 
 246. Where and from what is ivory obtained in Si- 
 beria? 
 
 247. What are the principal exports of Asiatic 
 Turkey ? 
 
 248. How do most of the tribes of Arabia, Turke- 
 stan, Tibet, etc., live? 
 
 249. What are the estimated area and population of 
 China? 
 
 250. Name and describe some of the most famous 
 public works of China. 
 
QUESTIONS ON GEOGEAPHY. Ill 
 
 951. Is the production of tea limited to China? «.e.j 
 Can it be cultivated elsewhere? Explain fully. 
 
 252. Enumerate the uses of the bamboo. 
 
 253. How do you account for the non-progressir* 
 spirit of the Chinese and at the same time for their in- 
 genuity ? 
 
 254. Where is the largest known collection of in- 
 habitants ? 
 
 255. Name the four large islands of Japan? How 
 many smaller ones ? 
 
 256. What are the principal articles of commerce 
 obtained from Arabia ? 
 
 257. From what and how is Gutta-Percha obtained? 
 
 258. What is sago? How obtained? 
 
 859. What is the government of Japan, and what 
 is the ruler called? 
 
 260. What valuable woods are found in Siam ? 
 
 261. Name ten exports of Hindoostan. 
 
 262. From what is opium made? To what extent 
 is it used in China? 
 
 263. How does the quality and flavor of such fruits 
 as grapes, pears, peaches, watermelons, etc., grown in 
 dry countries compare with the same when grown in 
 moist countries? 
 
 264. For what purpose is Siberia used by Russia? 
 
 265. Where do the " Fire Worshippers " live? 
 
 266. What and where are the Tundras? 
 
 267. What and where are the following: Tulare, 
 Zealand, Agulhas, Chincha, Land's End? 
 
118 QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 268. Enumerate five causes for our limited knowl- 
 edge of Africa. 
 
 269. Locate and define the following: Nubia, 
 Sofala, Zululand, Algeria, Victoria Nyanza, Tunis, 
 Monrovia, Port Said, Zambesi, Orange, Natal, Tchad 
 Canary, Tananarivo, Dahomey, Comoro, Zanzibar, 
 Congo, Alexandria, Oran. 
 
 270 Name the political divisions of Africa. 
 
 271. Which are the Barbary States? Their chief 
 products ? 
 
 272. To what race do the Egyptians belong 7 What 
 is their language ? Their ruling class ? Prevailing re- 
 ligion? 
 
 273. How does the temperature of the Sahara by 
 day compare with the temperature at night? 
 
 274. What and where is Liberia? 
 
 275. Describe the Suez Canal. Who constructed 
 it? 
 
 276. What does Oceanica comprise ? What is its ex- 
 tent? 
 
 277. Contrast Australia and the United States in 
 respect to area, climate, seasons, vegetation, animals. 
 
 278. Describe the natives of Australia. 
 
 279. Three persons separate in St. Louis, January 
 1, 1883. A starts eastward to go round the world; 
 B journeys west, also to go round the world, and C 
 remains in St. Louis. On the evening: of December 31 . 
 1883, they meet again in St. Louis, A and B having 
 just completed the circuit of the world. How many 
 days has each seen in the year? 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS OH GEOGRAiuiY. 119 
 
 280. A vessel goes from Chicago to Shanghai by 
 way of the Suez Canal; name the waters u] dii whi^h 
 she sails. 
 
 281. (a) Explain what is meant by "standard 
 time." (6) By whom and when adopted ? (c) How 
 many and what divisions of time in the United States? 
 
 282. Name three important cities of the Mississippi 
 Valley having nearly the same standard and local time. 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 1. Geography is a description of the earth's sur- 
 face, its countries and their inhabitants. It is treated 
 under three divisions: Mathematical, Political and 
 Physical Geography. 
 
 2. Mathematical Geography treats of the form, 
 size and motions of the earth, and its relations to other 
 heavenly bodies. 
 
 3. Political Geography treats of the divisions 
 formed by man for the purpose of government, the 
 people, religion, customs, and government. 
 
 4. Physical Geography treats of the natural divi- 
 sions of land and water, climate, productions, and their 
 effects upon the animal creation. 
 
 5. 1st. Ships have sailed around it. 2d. The hull 
 of an outgoing vessel *c the first to disappear from 
 sight. 3d. The shadow which the earth casts upoo 
 the moon during an eclipse is circular. 
 
120 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 6. Its revolution during its plastic state. 
 
 7. (a) 7,925V2 miles, (b) 7,899 miles, (c) 24,- 
 899 miles, (d) 196,900, 278 square miles, (e) About 
 three-fourths. 
 
 8. Two : A daily and a yearly. The daily is 
 caused by the earth's turning on its axis. The yearly, 
 by the earth's revolution around the sun. 
 
 9. 1st. The flattening of the earth at the poles. 
 2d. If a number of balls be let fall from the summit of 
 a high tower they will fall eastward of a vertical line. 
 The top of the tower being farther from the center of 
 the earth than its base, has a greater centrifugal force 
 than the base, and hence, tends to throw the balls east- 
 ward. 3d. The diminished weight of bodies at the 
 equator is partly due to the centrifugal force caused 
 by the earth's rotation. 4th. Since all the heavenly 
 bodies turn upon their axes, it is reasonable to suppose 
 the Earth is no exception. 
 
 10. The daily revolution, presenting one-half of the 
 earth's surface to the sun. 
 
 11. During the winter season north of the equator 
 the rays of the sun fall obliquely upon that portion of 
 the earth ; during the northern summer the sun's rays 
 fall more nearly vertical, and thus concentrate the 
 heat. 
 
 12. It is the third from the sun. 
 
 13. It leans 23V2 degrees from the perpendicular. 
 
 14. 577,000,000 miles. 
 
 15. Into one torrid, two temperate, and two frigid 
 ■ones. The torrid is 47 degrees in width, the temper- 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 121 
 
 ate zones are each 43 degrees wide, and the frigid zones 
 are 23 x /2 degrees respectively. 
 
 16. The tropics mark the limit of the sun's vertical 
 rays north and south of the equator. The polar circles 
 mark the limit of the sun's oblique rays. Ex. On 
 the 21st of June, when the sun's rays are vertical to 
 the Tropic of Cancer, the extreme southern limit of 
 the sun's oblique rays is marked by the antarctic cir- 
 cle. 
 
 17. The tropics ana polar circles would be removed. 
 There would be no change of seasons. The days and 
 nights would be equal throughout the globe. 
 
 18. The waters of the ocean would settle about the 
 poles. 
 
 19. 1st. The rotation of the earth on its axis. 2d. 
 Difference in the densities of the waters of the polar 
 and tropic seas. 3d. Immense evaporation in the 
 equatorial regions. 4th. Winds and tides. 5th. The 
 melting of polar ice and snow. 
 
 20. 1st. Modification of the extremes of climate. 
 2d. Advantage to commerce by shortening the time of 
 ocean navigation. 3d. Distribution of animal and 
 vegetable life. 4th. They render the globe healthful 
 by carrying off decaying vegetable and animal matter 
 
 21. On the 21st of March and the 22d of Septem. 
 ber, on which days the sun's rays are vertical on the 
 equator. 
 
 22. The horizon is that circle upon which the earth 
 and sky appear to meet. 
 
122 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 23. A great circle is one which divides the earth into 
 two equal parts. Ex. The equator. A small circle is 
 one that divides the earth into two unequal parts. Ex. 
 The tropics and polar circles. 
 
 24. A meridian circle passes through the poles. A 
 meridian is half a meridian circle and extends from 
 pole to pole. 
 
 25. The circle of illumination separates the dark 
 side of the earth from the light. 
 
 26. Latitude is distance north and south of the 
 equator towards the poles. Longitude is distance east 
 and west of some given meridian, measured on paral- 
 lels in degrees. 
 
 27. 90 degrees north or south, because latitude does 
 not extend beyond the poles. The greatest longitude 
 cannot be more than 180 degrees east or west, because 
 longitude is reckoned both ways from a given meridian 
 to the other half of a meridian forming with the start- 
 ing point a meridian circle. 
 
 28. (a) It would not. (b) Yes, the equator. 
 
 29. The torrid zone would extend 20 degrees each 
 side of the equator, and would be 40 degrees wide. 
 The frigid zones would each be 20 degrees, while the 
 temperate zones would be 50 degrees wide. 
 
 30. The Tropic of Cancer crosses Mexico, Sahara, 
 Nubia, Turkey, Arabia, Hindostan, Birmah, and 
 China. The equator crosses Ecuador, U. S. of Co- 
 lombia, Brazil, Lower Guinea, Ethiopia, Zanguebar, 
 Sumatra, Borneo, and the Celebes. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 123 
 
 31. New Orleans, 30°; Philadelphia, 40°; St 
 Louis, 381/2°; Washington, 39°; Montreal, 46°; Chi- 
 cago, 42°; New York, 41°; Havana, 23°; London, 
 511/2°; Paris, 49°; Berlin, 52V2°; Vienna, 48°; Rome, 
 42°; St. Petersburg, 60°; Constantinople, 41° ; Rio 
 Janeiro, 23° south. 
 
 32. Where any prime meridian, as that of Wash- 
 ington or Greenwich, crosses the equator. 
 
 33. 77 degrees. 
 
 34. An island is a body of land entirely sur- 
 rounded by water. An archipelago is a group of 
 islands. A peninsula is a body of land nearly sur- 
 rounded by water. A cape is a point of land extend- 
 ing into the water. An isthmus is a neck of land 
 connecting two larger bodies of land. 
 
 35. A mountain is a great elevation of land. A 
 mountain range is a connected line of mountains. A 
 volcano is a mountain which sends forth fire, smoke, 
 ashes, and lava. A water shed is the ridge or elevated 
 land from which water flows in different directions. 
 
 36. The gulf stream, warmed by the equatorial 
 heat, gives off its warmth to the British Isles, while 
 the cold Arctic winds and currents render Labrador 
 too cold for cultivation. 
 
 37. Vesuvius, in southern Italy; Etna, in Sicily- 
 Hecla, in Iceland ; Cotopaxi, in Ecuador. 
 
 38. The Equatorial Current, Gulf Stream, and the 
 Japan Current are warm ; the Arctic and Antarctic cur- 
 rents are cold. 
 
 39. Toward the North Pole. 
 
124 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 40. A cascade is a stream flowing down a precipice. 
 A confluence is the meeting of two rivers. A Frith 
 or Estuary is the narrow and deep inlet of the sea at 
 the mouth of a river. A glacier is a mass of snow and 
 ice moving slowly down the side of a mountain. An 
 avalanche is a mass of snow, ice, and earth rolling 
 down the side of a mountain. 
 
 41. The Ecliptic is the orbit, or path, which the 
 earth describes in its yearly revolution. It is so called 
 because the eclipses of the sun and moon happen in or 
 near its plane. Its mean distance from ths sun is 92,- 
 000,000 miles. The length of the orbit is 577,000,000 
 miles. 
 
 42. The velocity of the earth is 1,099 miles a min- 
 ute. 
 
 43. If the inclination of the earth's axis were greater 
 than at present the vertical rays of the sun would ex- 
 tend farther north and south than the present tropics, 
 and, consequently, prolong the summers and win- 
 ters. 
 
 44. Quebec has the longer twilight. On June 21, 
 at Havana, the sun in setting passes downward verti- 
 cally. At Quebec, on same day, the sun in setting 
 north of west passes downward diagonally toward the 
 north, thus leaving the reflection of its rays above the 
 horizon longer than when it sets due west. 
 
 45. Climate is the condition of a place in relation 
 to its temperature, moisture, and atmosphere. It is 
 influenced by latitude, elevation, prevailing winds, 
 nearness to the ocean, and mountain ranges. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 125 
 
 46. The temperature diminishes 1° for every 350 
 feet of elevation, and 1° for every 100 miles from the 
 equator. 
 
 47. The western coast of Europe is warmed by the 
 Gulf Stream ; the Japan Current imparts its moisture 
 and warmth to the western coast of the U. S. The 
 eastern shores of Asia and America are cooled by cold 
 currents from the Arctic Ocean. 
 
 48. The Caucasian, or white race; Ex. Europeans 
 and their descendants ; The Mongolian, or yellow 
 race; Ex. Chinese, Japanese, and Esquimaux; The 
 Malay, or brown race; Ex. The inhabitants of Malay 
 Peninsula and East Indies; American Indian, or red 
 race; Ex. The Indians of the Territories; The Ethi- 
 opian, or black race; Ex. The inhabitants of Lower 
 and Upper Guinea. 
 
 49. Republics, Empires, Kingdoms. 
 
 50. A Republic is a country governed by represen- 
 tatives elected by the people; Ex. The United States, 
 Peru; An Empire is a region comprising several coun- 
 ties governed by a monarch styled Emperor ; Ex. 
 Russia, Germany. A Kingdom is a country governed 
 by a King or Queen; Ex, Spain, Denmark. A Lim- 
 ited Monarchy is a government in which the power of 
 the monarch is limited by law; Ex. Great Britain, 
 Prussia. An Absolute Monarchy is a government in 
 which the power of the ruler is unlimited ; Ex. Russia, 
 China. 
 
 51. A village is a small collection of houses and in- 
 habitants. A town is larger than a village. Cities are 
 
126 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 large towns having special privileges granted by law. 
 The capital is the city in which the laws are made. 
 The Metropolis is that city of a state or country which 
 contains the largest number of inhabitants. 
 
 52. Agriculture, manufacturing, commerce, mining, 
 lumbering, fishing, hunting, and trapping. 
 
 53. Commerce carried on between parts of the same- 
 country is called domestic; carried on between differ- 
 ent countries is called foreign. Imports are goods 
 brought into a country, exports are those sent out. 
 
 54. Civilized, half-civilized, barbarous, and savage. 
 
 55. Christian, Jewish, Mohammedan, and Pagan. 
 
 56. Equinoxes, meaning equal nights, are times in 
 the year when the sun's rays fall vertical to the equa- 
 tor. They occur March 20 and September 22. 
 
 57. The Solstices, meaning the sun standing; are 
 times in the year when the sun's rays fall vertical to 
 the tropics. The summer solstice occurs June 21, the 
 the winter solstice, December 21. During the former 
 the sun's rays are vertical to the Tropic of Cancer, 
 when the days are longest north of the equator. Dur- 
 ing the winter solstice the sun's rays are vertical to the 
 Tropic of Capricorn, when the days are longest south 
 of the equator. 
 
 58. North America — The Rocky Mountains; South 
 America — The Andes; Europe — The Alps; Asia — 
 The Himalaya; Africa — The Atlas. 
 
 59. Australia, Greenland, Borneo, New Guinea, 
 Madagascar, Sumatra, Niphon, Great Britain. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 127 
 
 60. North America, 9,000,000 square miles; South 
 America, 7,000,000; Europe, 3,800,000; Asia, 17,- 
 000,000; Africa, 11,500,000. 
 
 61. North America, Mississippi — 4,396 miles; 
 South America, Amazon — 3,596 miles; Europe, 
 Volga — 2,351 ; Asia, Yenisei — 3,688; Africa, Nile — 
 3,895 miles. 
 
 62. To the waters supposed to lie south of the Ant- 
 arctic Circle. 
 
 63. Thirteen times as much. 
 
 64. Alaska, California, Florida, Spain, Arabia, Indo- 
 China, Corea, Kamtchatka, Africa, and Malacca. 
 
 65. 86° 13' north. (Nansen Expedition, 1896.) 
 
 66. The Llama of Peru. 
 
 67. In the Antarctic regions there are no land 
 masses to receive and diffuse the rays of the sun as in 
 the Arctic regions. 
 
 68. Gulf of Mexico; Hudson Bay; Baffin Bay; 
 Gulf of St. Lawrence; California; Chesapeake Bay ; 
 Delaware Bay ; James Bay ; Bay of Campeachy ; Bay 
 of Honduras. 
 
 69. Great Bear, Great Slave, Athabasca, Winni- 
 peg, Superior, Michigan, Huron, Erie, Ontario, Nica- 
 ragua. 
 
 70. The Western Highland, the Eastern Highland, 
 the Low Central Plain, and the Atlantic Plain. 
 
 71. British America, Danish America (Greenland 
 and Iceland ), United States, Mexico, Centra! American 
 Republics, The West Indies. 
 
128 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 72. In the north: polar bear, reindeer, musk-ox, 
 moose, walrus, grizzly bear ; in the central part: bison, 
 deer, peccary; in the south, the alligator. 
 
 73. Area, 3,557,000 square miles. Population, 
 75,000,000. Breadth from north to south, 1300 miles. 
 Length from east to west, 2500 miles. 
 
 74. The White, Red, Yellow and Black. 
 
 75. Deep cuts, or gorges, many hundred feet deep 
 lined by perpendicular walls, formed by the flowing 
 of rivers. The Colorado River has the most frightful 
 canons in the world. 
 
 76. For their numerous falls, furnishing excellent 
 water-power. 
 
 77. Forty-five States, five territories and one federal 
 district. 
 
 78. New York, Chicago, Philadelphia, St. Louis, 
 Boston, Baltimore, Cleveland, Buffalo, San Francisco, 
 Cincinnati. 
 
 79. Because of its abundant water-power, iuel, labor, 
 and superior commercial facilities. 
 
 80. Exports: Cotton, breadstuffs, provisions, petro- 
 leum, and tobacco. Imports: Dry goous, sugar, 
 coffee, tea, tin. 
 
 81. Consult map of North America. 
 
 82. New England is about one-third as large as 
 California, and about one-fourth as large as Texas. 
 
 83. From Washington City to Jefferson City, Mo. 
 
 84. Yale, New Haven, Ct. ; Harvard University, 
 Cambridge, Mass.; Brown University, Providence, 
 R. I. ; Dartmouth, Hanover, N. H. ; Vassar, Pough- 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY 129 
 
 Cieepsie, N. Y. ; William and Mary College Williams- 
 burg, Ya. 
 
 85. Minnesota, St. Paul; Wisconsin, Madison; 
 Iowa, Des Moines; Illinois, Springfield; Missouri, 
 Jefferson City; Kentucky, Frankfort; Tennessee, 
 Nashville ; Arkansas, Little Rock; Mississippi, Jack- 
 son; Louisiana, Baton Rouge. 
 
 86. In the value of their manufactures and com- 
 merce. 
 
 87. Its government is similar to that of the terri- 
 tories. The Governor is appointed by the President 
 and Senate. It has one delegate to Congress. 
 
 88. For the variety, excellence, and abundance of 
 its fish and oysters. 
 
 89. Madrid, Naples, and Constantinople ; all of 
 which have a milder and more equable climate than 
 Philadelphia. This is due to the warm winds of the 
 Sahara, moistened by the evaporation of the Mediter- 
 ranean Sea. 
 
 90. They protect the navigation of the entire coast 
 of North Carolina. 
 
 91. Tar, pitch, and turpentine. The turpentine is 
 obtained by blazing the tree, and dipping the gum 
 from a box that is put at the root to receive it as it ex- 
 udes from the tree. Tar is obtained by burning pine 
 wood with a close smothering heat and collecting the 
 resinous exudations. 
 
 92. Florida has the mildest climate of the Southern 
 States. The Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico, by 
 which it is almost surrounded, temper the heat of sum- 
 
130 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 mer. The soil is adapted to the cultivation of almost 
 every fruit and vegetable. The live-oak, the most 
 valuable wood used in ship building, will become a 
 source of wealth. The State abounds in beautiful 
 lakes, and clear, deep springs. Some of the lakes are 
 deep enough to float a man-of-war, and yet so clear 
 are they, that pebbles may be distinctly seen on the 
 bottom. 
 
 93. By embankments, called fevees. In many places, 
 below the mouth of Red River, the surface of the Mis- 
 sissippi during high water is above the land back of the 
 levees. 
 
 94. From the forest trees of the swamp lands of the 
 South, from which may be seen the long gray moss, 
 which, as a parasite, hangs in long and graceful festoons. 
 
 95. An immense collection of logs extending for 
 nearly one hundred miles. Among these trees and logs, 
 vines and creepers have taken root, and their tendrils 
 have so interwoven among the branches that the whole 
 has become matted together from bank to bank. 
 
 96. By the U. S. Congress for the Indians and their 
 descendants to be occupied and governed in their own 
 way. 
 
 97. The eastern tributaries are more rapid in de- 
 scent. They are not navigable to so great a distance. 
 The plains are not so extended. The rapidity of the 
 streams permit the discharge of the waters much sooner 
 than the long gentle streams of the West. 
 
 98. The Mississippi valley. The vast area of arable 
 land, susceptible of an easy cultivation, will for ages 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 131 
 
 produce food sufficient for the support of 300,000,000 
 people. 
 
 99. Corn, wheat, oats, hay, potatoes, tobacco, live 
 stock, iron, copper, and lead. 
 
 100. By a canal on the Kentucky shore. 
 
 101. ( 1 ) Its rapid growth. ( 2 ) Its extensive railway 
 connections. (3) The enterprise of its people. (4) Its 
 grain and provision trade. (5) World's Fair (1893). 
 
 102. Because it is nearly surrounded by water 
 
 103. By a ship canal in Michigan. 
 
 104. The winds blowing across Lake Michigan are 
 so warmed by the open waters that fruit-trees are 
 seldom injured by extreme cold. 
 
 105. (a) It lies almost wholly in the northwest cor- 
 ner of State of Wyoming. (b) Its area is 3575 square 
 miles, (c) Congress in 1882 set it apart asa" per- 
 petual reservation for the benefit and instruction of 
 mankind." (d) Its deep canons, lofty falls, numer- 
 ous geysers, and beautiful lakes make it the most won- 
 derful portion of the continent, (e) Clark's Fork of 
 the Yellowstone, the Lewis Fork of the Columbia, and 
 the Madison and Gallatin branches of the Missouri. 
 
 106. Arizona, Phoenix; New Mexico, Santa Fe; Indian, 
 Tahlequah; Alaska, Sitka; Oklahoma, Guthrie. 
 
 107. Because it is the natural water route to the 
 most fertile spot of the Dominion of Canada. 
 
 108 The absence of numerous bays, harbors, and 
 navigable streams on the Pacific coast will prevent the 
 
132 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 location of as many seaports as are found on the Atlan- 
 tic coast. 
 
 109. Dry Tortugas, Islands off the coast of Florida ; 
 Managua, capital city of Nicaragua ; The Pan Handle is 
 that portion of West Virginia lying between Ohio and 
 Pennsylvania ; The Eastern shore is that part of Virginia 
 lying east of Chesapeake Bay ; Sandy Hook is a Cape 
 in New Jersey. 
 
 110. The Hudson, East and Harlem Rivers, and a 
 creek running into the Hudson. 
 
 111. North America, Superior; South America, Mar- 
 acaybo; Europe, Ladoga ; Asia, Baikal; Africa, Vic- 
 toria. 
 
 112. (a) On the 180th meridian from Greenwich. 
 (b) If sailing westward, a day is added ; if sailing east- 
 ward, a day is dropped. 
 
 113. In New Orleans, 90 degrees west from Lon- 
 don. 
 
 114. At London, north ; at Tunis, north ; at Mecca, 
 south ; at Rio Janeiro, south ; at Muscat, no perceptible 
 shadow. 
 
 115. 1. Chinese Empire; 2. British Empire; 3. 
 Russian Empire ; 4. United States ; 5. German Empire. 
 
 116. Corn and Hay, Iowa; Wheat and Oats, Illinois; 
 Potatoes, New York; Sweet Potatoes, North Carolina; To- 
 bacco, Kentucky; Cotton, Mississippi; Wool, Ohio; Manu- 
 facturing products, New York; Mining products, Pennsyl- 
 vania. 
 
 117. The United States have more miles of railroad 
 than all the countries of Europe combined. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 133 
 
 118. Belgium, 482 inhabitants to the square mile. 
 
 119. It runs from Behring Strait southwest, along 
 the ocean side of Japan, and between the Phillipine 
 Islands and Asia; thence it curves, taking a south- 
 easterly course to Chatham Island, passing on the 
 Pacific side of Borneo, New Guinea, New Ireland, and 
 the New Hebrides, and east of New Zealand. 
 
 120. 12 miles south of Columbus, Indiana. (1901) 
 
 121. New Jersey, Pennsylvania, West Virginia, 
 Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Missouri, Colorado, Utah, 
 Nevada, and California. 
 
 122. Cumberland Eiver, Ohio River, Mississippi 
 River, and Arkansas River. 
 
 123. In its early charter the General Assembly was 
 required to meet alternately at each place. 
 
 124. Springfield, manufacture of arms; Annapolis, 
 seat of the U. S. Naval Academy ; Pittsburg, iron and 
 glassworks; Paterson, locomotive works and extensive 
 silk manufactures; Indianapolis, great railroad center 
 and largest city in the United States not on navigable 
 waters. 
 
 125. Salado, river in Argentine Confederation ; Pop- 
 ocatepetl, a volcano in southern Mexico; Welland, a 
 canal in Canada connecting Lakes Erie and Ontario ; 
 Elburz, mountains in Persia ; Batavia, the capital city 
 of Java; Ormus, strait separating Persian Gulf and 
 Arabian Sea ; Brest, a city in western France; Finland, 
 a gulf in Western Russia; Manilla, the capital city of 
 Luzon ( Phillipine Islands ) ; Tenneriffe, a famous peak 
 of the Canary Islands. 
 
134 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 126. About seven-eighths. 
 
 127. By a few hundred Danes and Esquimaux. 
 When first seen by Icelanders it looked green and fertile 
 compared with their island. 
 
 128. For its numerous geysers and volcanoes. Itis 
 peopled by descendants of Norwegians, a thrifty and 
 industrious race who speak the old Norse language. 
 
 129. Its fisheries and furs. 
 
 130. Dominion of Canada, Newfoundland, Balize, 
 Bermudas, Jamaica, and a number of smaller islands 
 of the West Indies. 
 
 131. British Columbia, Manitoba, Ontario, Quebec, 
 New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, Prince Edward Island, 
 and Northwest and Northeast territories. 
 
 132. By a Governor-General under appointment of 
 the British crown. The laws are enacted by a Parlia- 
 ment composed of a senate and house of commons. 
 The senators are appointed by the Governor-General ; 
 members of the House of Commons are elected by the 
 people. 
 
 133. The Canadian territories furnish two-thirds of 
 the world's supply. 
 
 134. Vessels pass through Welland Canal from Lake 
 Erie to Lake Ontario, and through canals around the 
 rapids in St. Lawrence River. 
 
 135. For its high tide, which reaches 70 feet. This 
 is caused by the narrow neck of water through which 
 the tides rush with such rapidity as often to overtake 
 swine feeding on the beach. 
 
 136. In the cod, seal, herring, and salmon fisheries 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 135 
 
 137. Vermont, Burlington ; North Carolina, Wil- 
 mington; Arkansas, Little Rock; Oregon, Portland ; 
 Nevada, Reno. 
 
 138. ( a ) New York has thirty-six electoral votes, 
 four more than Pennsylvania, (b) The number is pro 
 portional to the population. 
 
 139. (a) 356 members, (b) One member for every 
 173,900 inhabitants. 
 
 140. Philadelphia, York, Lancaster, Baltimore, 
 Princeton, N. J., Annapolis, Trenton, N. J., New York 
 and Washington. 
 
 141. The Gulf Stream and prevailing winds aid the 
 vessels going eastward. 
 
 142. Tapajos, a branch of the Amazon River; 
 Tchad, a lake in Soudan, Africa; Anticosti, an island 
 in Gulf of St. Lawrence. The Levant is that portion 
 of Asia washed by the eastern end of the Mediterra- 
 nean Sea; Three Rivers, a city in Quebec, Canada; 
 Pembina, a city in northeast Dakota; Atacama, a 
 desert in southwest Bolivia; Heart's Content, a town 
 in Newfoundland; Otranto, a strait east of Italy; 
 Severn, a river in western England; Taranto, a gulf in 
 southern Italy. 
 
 143. Iowa and Illinois, also Nevada and Colo- 
 rado. 
 
 144. Three small islands south of Newfoundland, 
 Miquelon, Langley, and St. Pierre, comprising eighty- 
 one square miles. 
 
 145. Brazil is a quarter of a million square miles the 
 larger. 
 
136 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 146. Illinois contains nearly 6,000 more square 
 miles than England, but has only one-eighth as many 
 inhabitants. 
 
 147. Mexico has the greatest possible variety of 
 climate ; cold on the high mountains, temperate on the 
 plateaus, and hot and moist on the coast. 
 
 148. It is a federal republic of 27 states, cne 
 territory, and one federal district. Its people consist 
 of Indians, mixed races, and Spanish Creoles; «.e., de- 
 scendants of the early Spanish settlers. Its chief ex- 
 ports are silver, dye-woods, cochineal and vanilla. 
 
 149. Of five republics: Guatemala, San Salvador. 
 Honduras, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, and Balize, a 
 British colony. 
 
 150. It contains the principal routes connecting the 
 commerce of the two great oceans. 
 
 151. By the ocean currents and trade winds. 
 
 152. Sugar, coffee, cotton, tobacco, and tropical 
 fruits. Creoles (descendants of European settlers), 
 negroes and coolies from China ; they number about 
 4500000. The West Indies include about one thou- 
 sand islands. 
 
 153. Havana is the greatest sugar market in tlie 
 world, and is the second city of the New World in 
 foreign commerce. 
 
 154. The Amazon is so deep, and so sluggish is tL 
 current that a sailing vessel may ascend by the aid of 
 an almost constant easterly wind 2600 miles. The 
 river and its branches furnish 50000 miles of navigable 
 waters. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 137 
 
 155. Chesapeake Bay, Atlantic Ocean, Florida 
 Strait, Gulf of Mexico, Bay of Campeachy, Yucatan 
 Channel, Caribbean Sea, and Gulf of Venezuela. 
 
 156. On account of the absence of few good 
 harbors. 
 
 157. Republic. Roman Catholic religion. Por 
 ulation 38,000,000, of whom more than one-half belong 
 to mixed races, derived from Spanish and Portuguese 
 settlers, Indians, and Negroes. 
 
 158. A Republic. Brazil contains about one-fifth 
 as many people as the United States. 
 
 159. Lima. Washington and Lima have the same 
 time. 
 
 160. The Andes is the greatest mountain chain; 
 Aconcagua is the highest mountain ; Rio Janeiro is the 
 largest city ; Panama is the largest gulf. 
 
 161. Consult map of South America. 
 
 162. Caracas has 1 hr. and 33 min. earlier time. 
 
 163. Llanos in the Orinoco basin ; Selvas in the 
 Amazon; Pampas in the La Plata and^Paraguay. 
 
 164. The condor, the largest known bird of prey, is 
 found among the Andes in Peru and Bolivia. 
 
 165. The Selvas are covered with an almost impen- 
 etrable growth of trees, climbing plants, and dense 
 underbrush. Myriads of beasts, birds, and insect , and 
 uncivilized tribes are the sole inhabitants. The Llanos 
 of the Orinoco and the Pampas of the La Plata and 
 Paraguay are destitute of trees. In the dry season 
 they become parched and all vegetation is destroyed. 
 When the rainy season sets in the whole country is 
 
138 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 covered with luxuriant grass, which attracts multitudes 
 of wild cattle and horses. 
 
 166. Coffee, Sugar, Tobacco, Kice, Maise, Cinchona, 
 Caoutchouc (india-rubber), Precious Stones, Tropical 
 Fruits, and Spices. 
 
 167. Rosewood, mahogany, Brazil-wood, tortoise- 
 shell wood, the most beautiful cabinet-wood in the 
 world, and the India rubber tree. 
 
 168. Rio Janeiro, Buenos Ayres, Aspinwall, Val- 
 paraiso, Montevideo. 
 
 169. The Chilians. This is due to extensive com- 
 merce and a large European population. 
 
 170. Portuguese, because Brazil was settled by the 
 Portuguese. 
 
 171. To Great Britain. Excellent pasturage for 
 cattle and sheep. 
 
 172. They are the only inhabitable group of islands 
 in the Pacific Ocean that were uninhabited at the time 
 of their discovery. 
 
 173. Consult map of South America. 
 
 174. The eastern slopes of the Andes from Bolivia 
 to the U. S. of Colombia and to no other part of the 
 world. The forests are being rapidly all destroyed. 
 
 175. Paraguay and Bolivia. 
 
 176. Russia, China, Turkey and Brazil now own 
 no islands near their coasts. 
 
 177. Area, 3824240 sq. miles; population, 323- 
 834000. 
 
 178. The coast-line of Europe is about 20000 miles 
 greater in proportion than that of any other of the 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 139 
 
 grand divisions. Greater commercial facilities and cli- 
 matic advantages are offered by a deeply indented coast 
 than a by more regular outline. 
 
 179. Caspian, Azof, Black, Marmora, Archipelago, 
 Adriatic, Mediterranean, Irish, North, Baltic, White. 
 
 180. 4 Empires, 14 Kingdoms, 5 Republics, 5 Grand 
 Duchies, 8 Duchies, 4 Free Cities, 9 Principalities, 1 
 Landgraviate, and 1 Electorate. 
 
 181. Consult map of Europe. 
 
 182. France, Switzerland, Andorra, San Marino, 
 and the Ionian Isles. 
 
 183. San Marino, in Italy. 
 
 184. Norway and Sweden, and Austria and Hungary. 
 
 185. America possesses greater political privileges, 
 cheaper land, and a greater demand for labor. 
 
 186. A high state of improvement both in country 
 and towns, absence of fences, vast extent of improved 
 lands, limited forests, magnificent mansions, spacious 
 barns, great number of villages, excellent roads and, 
 withal, a most vigilant system of municipal and national 
 government. 
 
 187. Lions, Biscay, Finland, Bothnia, and Onega. 
 
 188. St. Petersburg is in the same latitude as Cape 
 Farewell. 
 
 189. London, Paris, Berlin, Vienna, St. Petersburg, 
 Constantinople, Moscow, Glasgow, Liverpool, Naples. 
 
 190. Lipari Islands, north of Sicily ; L. Como, 
 northern Italy; Palermo, N. W. Sicily; Elba, N. E. 
 of Corsica ; Hamburg, N. W. Prussia on Elbe River. 
 
140 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 191. Gulf of Genoa, Mediterranean Sea, Tyrrhen- 
 ian Sea, Strait of Messina, Ionian Sea, Strait of 
 Otranto, Adriatic Sea, Gulf of Trieste. 
 
 192. Russia and Germany. 
 
 193. In Europe : The islands of Malta, Cyprus, 
 Jersey, Guernsey, Alderney and Heligoland, and tlu, 
 Fort of Gibraltar; in America: Dominion of Canada 
 and adjacent islands, Balize, British Guiana, and the 
 islands of Bahama, Bermuda, Jamaica, Turk, Lee- 
 ward, Windward, Trinidad, and Falkland; in Asia: 
 India, Hong Kong, Singapore, Aden, Malacca, and 
 Ceylon Island ; in Africa : Cape of Good Hope, Natal, 
 Caffraria, Transvaal, Gold Coast, Sierra Leone, and 
 the Islands of St. Helena, Ascension and Mauritius ; 
 in Oceanica : Australia, New Zealand, Tasmania and 
 Feejee Islands. 
 
 194. The winter climate of England is milder than 
 that of S. Carolina. This is due to the warm west 
 winds blowing from the Gulf Stream. 
 
 195. English railroads have double tracks. They 
 are not allowed to cross each other on the same 
 level, but are compelled to cross by going under or 
 over. 
 
 196. On account of the great number of iron and 
 coal mines. 
 
 197. Liverpool, greatest cotton market of the world ; 
 Manchester, cotton manufacture; Leeds, woolens; 
 Nottingham, laces and stockings ; Newcastle-upon- 
 Tvne, coal trade; Sheffield, cutlery; Portsmouth; 
 naval station; Oxford and Cambridge, Universities. 
 
AKSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 141 
 
 198. Twilight sufficient to enable one to read lasts 
 all night. 
 
 199. Four : two English and one French between 
 Heart's Content, Newfoundland, and Valentia Bay, 
 Ireland; and one between Rio Janeiro and Portugal. 
 
 200. Consult map of Europe. 
 
 201. In the western part of Ireland it rains three- 
 fourths of the year, and the climate is damp and 
 mild; so much so, even in winter, that its green 
 fields have won for it the name of the "Emerald 
 Isle." 
 
 202. Belfast, manufacture of linen goods; Paris, 
 excellence in the manufacture of almost every fancy 
 article in the market; Lyons, silk manufacture; Bor- 
 deaux, for its wines; Glasgow, ship building and 
 marine engines. 
 
 203. The Gulf of Finland is closed with ice half the 
 year, while ice never forms in the harbor of Hammer- 
 fest. The mildness of the latter is due to the influence 
 of the Gulf Stream. 
 
 204. Austria. 
 
 205. The Jews. 
 
 206. Inland trade, Vienna ; foreign trade, Trieste. 
 
 207. Almaden, Spain. 
 
 208. Constantinople has been so regarded by the 
 great powers of Europe. 
 
 209. It commands the passage between the Mediter- 
 ranean and the Atlantic. 
 
 210. A famous Moorish palace in Granada, Spain, 
 now in ruins. 
 
142 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 211. Venice is situated upon 72 islands, between 
 which the waters, serving as streets, are navigated by 
 gondolas. 
 
 212. It is 50,290 square miles smaller, but contains 20 
 times as many people. 
 
 213. Brighton, in southern England, and Baden- 
 Baden, at Aix-la-Chapelle, Rhenish-Prussia. 
 
 214. It is found along the coast of the Baltic Sea, 
 where it is cast up by the waves. 
 
 215. Belgium 
 
 216. From Switzerland, the rivers Danube, Rhine, 
 Rhone, and Po flow into the Black, North, Mediter- 
 ranean, and Adriatic Seas. 
 
 217. The Dutch are a sober, provident, and indus- 
 trious people ; the Swiss are phlegmatic, industrious 
 and patriotic. 
 
 218. The southeast part of Russia, termed the 
 " Black Lands of Russia," bordering on the Caspian 
 and Black Seas. The soil is inexhaustible, yielding 
 annually, without, manure, two crops: a green crop 
 and a cereal. 
 
 219. London, where the breadstuff s of the world 
 meet in competition. 
 
 220. Russia, Great Britain and the United States. 
 
 221. The Steppes of Russia, immense prairies cov- 
 ered with coarse grass, and subject to intense summer 
 droughts, extend along the southern border of Russia, 
 from the foot of the Carpathian Mountains in Europe, 
 to China. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 143 
 
 222. At Nijni (nizh'nl) Novgorod, Russia, where 
 meet and barter merchants from China, Mongolia, 
 India, Afghanistan, Persia, Turkey, and every part of 
 Europe. 
 
 223. Tne town 2° north is farther from London, 
 than that 2° west of it, because the degrees of longi- 
 tude grow smaller as we approach the Poles. 
 
 224. Archangel is the northern port, Odessa the 
 southern; the former is on the White Sea, the latter is 
 on the Black Sea. 
 
 225. Greek Christians. The Emperor is the head 
 of the church. 
 
 226. The Russians belong chiefly to the Slavonic 
 race. 
 
 227. Amphiscians : the inhabitants between the 
 tropics, whose shadows, in one part of the year, are 
 cast to the north, and in the other to the south. 
 Antiscians : the inhabitants of the earth living on dif- 
 ferent sides of the Equator, whose shadows at noon 
 are cast in contrary directions. Those living north of 
 the Equator are antiscians to those on the south, and 
 vice versa. Ascians : persons who at certain times of 
 the year have no shadow at noon. Such only are the 
 inhabitants of the torrid zone, who have, twice a year, 
 a vertical sun. Periecians : the inhabitants of the 
 opposite sides of the globe, in the same parallel of 
 latitude. Pericians : the inhabitants within a polar 
 circle, whose shadow during some portion of the sum- 
 mer must, in the course of the day, move entirely 
 round, and fall toward every point of the compass. 
 
144 ANSWEES TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 (See Ques. 39.) Antipodes: those persons who live 
 on opposite sides of the globe, and whose feet are, of 
 course, directly opposite to the feet of those who live 
 on this side. 
 
 228. Gulf of Finland, Baltic Sea, Great Belt, 
 Straits of Cattegat and SkagerKack, North Sea, Dover 
 Strait, English Channel, Atlantic Ocean, Strait of Gib- 
 raltar, Mediterranean Sea, Archipelago Sea, Strait of 
 Dardanelles, Sea of Marmora, Bosphorus Strait, and 
 Black Sea. 
 
 229. Dover Strait, 30 miles; Gibraltar, 12; Beh- 
 ring, 40. 
 
 230. From the Romans, Greeks, Gauls, Goths, Ger- 
 mans, and Arabs. 
 
 231. In Havana, Spanish ; Constantinople, Arabic ; 
 Quebec, English; Rio Janeiro, Portuguese; Berne, 
 German. 
 
 232. The Valdai Hills are between St. Petersburg 
 and Moscow. The Matterhorn is an Alpine peak be- 
 tween Italy and Switzerland. 
 
 233. A Mercator Map, or projection, conceives the 
 surface of the earth to be that of a cylinder, in which 
 the parallels and meridians cross each other at right 
 angles. It was invented by Mercator, of Antwerp, to 
 aid mariners in determining their true course more 
 readily than by the ordinary maps. 
 
 234. Mercator' s Map distorts the proportions by 
 representing the surface of a sphere on that of a plane, 
 in which, places far to the north or south appear much 
 more distant east and west than they really are ; but 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 145 
 
 this distortion is made in such a way as to preserve the 
 true course of places from each other. 
 
 235. («) The Parliament consists of the House of 
 Lords and the House of Commons ; these correspond to 
 the Senate and House of Representatives respectively. 
 The House of Lords is composed of 537 members, 
 termed peers, who hold their seats by one of five titles ; 
 viz. , by hereditary right, by creation of the sovereign, by 
 virtue of office, as the English bishops, by election for 
 life, as the Irish peers, and by election for the duration 
 of Parliament, as the Scottish peers. The House of 
 Commons is composed of 652 members, who are elected 
 by the electors of counties, cities, boroughs, and univer- 
 sities of the united kingdom. The United States Senate 
 is composed of 90 members, two from each State, 
 chosen for a term of six years by the joint ballot of their 
 respective State legislatures. The House of Repre- 
 sentatives consists of 356 members, apportioned among 
 the several States according to population, elected by 
 popular ballot by the electors of their several districts. 
 (6) The Sovereign of Great Britain holds the execu- 
 tive power for life by virtue of inheritance ; the Presi- 
 dent of the United States holds his office for four years 
 by election of electors selected by popular vote. The 
 veto of the British sovereign is final ; that of the Pres- 
 ident may be set aside by a two-thirds vote of both 
 houses of Congress. 
 
 236. The United States. 
 
 237. Himalaya, Altai, Stanovoy, Kuenlun, Hindoo* 
 koosh. 
 
 10 
 
146 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 238. Yang-tse-Kiang, Lena, Yenisei, Amoor, Obi. 
 
 239. Asiatic Russia, Chinese Empire, Japan, Anam, 
 Siam, Burmah, British India, Bokhara, Turkestan, 
 Afghanistan, Beloochistan, Persia, Arabia, Turkey. 
 
 240. Sea of Kara, Behring Sea, Okhotsk, Japan, 
 Yellow, Blue, China, Gulf of Siam, Bay of Bengal, 
 Arabian, Persian, Gulf of Aden, Red, Mediterranean, 
 Archipelago, Marmora, Black, Caspian. 
 
 241. Find on map of Asia. 
 
 242. Brahmanism and Buddhism. Among the 
 features of the former is the transmigration of the soul 
 into the inferior animals. Brahmanism has its seat in 
 Hindostan. Buddhism enjoins charity toward all men 
 and the conquest of self. 
 
 243. Stan is the Persian word for country. Chow 
 in Chinese means town of the second rank. Ho and 
 Kiang mean river. 
 
 244. The ground is perpetually frozen to a great 
 depth, while the summer thaw affects only the sur- 
 face. 
 
 245. Nordenskjold (nor'den shold) the Swedish ex- 
 plorer in 1878-9, made the passage from the Atlantic 
 to Behring Strait in 294 days. 
 
 246. Ivory from the tusks of mammoths (long since 
 extinct), imbebbed in masses of ice, has been found in 
 such quantities on the New Siberia Islands and nearthe 
 mouths of Siberian rivers, as to furnish profitable em- 
 ployment for many men. 
 
 247. Dried figs, raisins, cotton, opium, wool, goat's 
 hair, sponges, and leeches. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 147 
 
 248. They are nomads, half-savage, half-civilized, 
 and live by tending their flocks, robbing their neigh- 
 bors, and plundering the helpless. 
 
 249. Estimated area 4700000 square miles; popu- 
 lation 480000000. 
 
 250. A canal 700 miles long, constructed a thousand 
 years ago, and its celebrated wall built two thousand 
 years ago, 1200 miles long, from 15 to 30 feet high, 
 and so thick that six men on horse-back can ride 
 abreast upon it. 
 
 251. It is not. It can be cultivated in the south 
 Atlantic States ; but the expense of its preparation for 
 market, where labor is scarce, would not justify its 
 culture. The labor employed in the production of tea 
 in China costs not more than two cents a day. 
 No article of commerce requires more labor than tea ; 
 and hence, the restriction of its culture to such coun- 
 tries as furnish the cheapest labor. 
 
 252. Its leaves afford a medicine, its seeds a favorite 
 food, its tender shoots are eaten like asparagus, or 
 made into pickles and confections, a great variety of 
 utensils are made of its stem, paper from its pulp, and 
 entire dwellings have been made of its various parts. 
 
 253. Their non-progressivcness is due to the exclu- 
 sion of foreigners, and their ingenuity to their immense 
 numbers and constant struggle for food. 
 
 254. Three cities in China on the Yang-tse-Kiang 
 are so closely connected that they form one city with a 
 population of nearly 8,000,000. 
 
148 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 255. Niphon, Yesso, Kiushiu, and Shihoku together 
 with 3850 smaller islands form the empire of Japan. 
 
 256. Dates, tamarinds frankincense, gum-arabic, 
 sponges, coral, ambergris, tortoise-shell, and pearls. 
 
 257. Gutta-percha is the coagulated sap of a tree 
 (thetapan), peculiar to the East Indies. The milky- 
 juice, which flows from incisions made in the tree is 
 thickened by boiling. 
 
 258. Sago is a granulated meal obtained from the 
 tissues of trunks of the sago palm, by a process of 
 washing and sifting, by which the starchy granules are 
 separated. 
 
 259. The government of Japan is a limited mon- 
 archy, and the ruler is called the " Mikado." 
 
 260. White sandalwood, ebony, rosewood, iron- 
 wood, red dye-woods. 
 
 261. Sugar, cotton, flax, rice, tobacco, opium, in- 
 digo, hemp, gums, spices, and drugs. 
 
 262. Opium is made from the poppy. Its produc- 
 tion is confined largely to India. The entire proceeds 
 of the tea crop are said to be insufficient to pay for the 
 opium annually brought into China, and consumed there. 
 
 263. These fruits, together with apricots, nectar- 
 rines, cantelopes, plums, cherries, damascenes, and 
 some others, seem to have originated among the arid 
 plains of Persia and other dry countries, and in such 
 attain their highest excellence. 
 
 264. As a place of exile for political offenders. 
 
 265. At Bakou in Georgia, on the southwest shores 
 of the Caspian Sea. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 149 
 
 266. Vast marshy plains along the coast of the 
 Arctic Ocean. 
 
 267. Tulare, lake in California; Zealand, an island 
 east of Denmark ; Agulhas, cape in southern Africa; 
 Chincha,an island west of Peru; Land's End, a cape 
 in southwestern England. 
 
 268. Its compactness, absence of navigable rivers, 
 the savage nature of its inhabitants, its ferocious 
 beasts, and intensely hot climate. 
 
 269. Consult map of Africa. 
 
 270. Morocco, Algeria, Tunis, Tripoli, Barca, Fez- 
 zan, Egypt, Nubia, Soudan, Abyssinia, Zanguebar, 
 Mozambique, Cape Colony, Natal, Transvaal, Orange 
 Free State, Upper Guinea, Senegambia, Sierra Leone, 
 Liberia, Lower Guinea, Sahara. 
 
 271. Morocco, Algeria, Tunis and Tripoli. Pro- 
 ducts, leather, wool, grain, olives, olive oil, and trop- 
 ical fruits. 
 
 272. Caucasian. Language, Arabic, Ruling class, 
 Turks. Prevailing religion, Mohammedan. 
 
 273. The heat by day rises to 120° Fahrenheit, while 
 the nights following are often so cold that water 
 freezes. 
 
 274. An American settlement of emancipated slaves 
 established in 1820 by the American Colonization So- 
 ciety. It is an independent republic on the western 
 coast of Africa. 
 
 275. The Suez canal, ninety-two miles long, connects 
 Port Said on the Mediterranean, with Suez on the Red 
 
150 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 Sea. It has a depth of twenty-six feet, and was 
 opened in 1869. It was constructed by M. Lesseps, a 
 French engineer. 
 
 276. It comprises nearly all the islands of the 
 Pacific ocean. Area about 4,500,000 square miles. 
 Population 30,000,000. 
 
 277. In area Australia is about the same as the 
 United States. The climate is warmer, with less rain. 
 The seasons are opposite. Christmas occurs there in 
 mid-summer. The leaves of trees are leaden gray or 
 brown instead of green. The sun is so hot and the air 
 so dry that the narrow leaves arrange themselves ver- 
 tically instead of horizontally, and are alike on both 
 sides. Forests are seldom found. The trees are 
 grouped in clusters ; they cast shadows but give no 
 shade. There are no aboriginal quadrupeds larger than 
 the Dingo dog and Kangaroo. Many of the animals 
 are pouched. The apteryx, a bird, has no wings, and 
 the lyre-bird has tail feathers which resemble a harp. 
 
 278. They are a sort of negro without wooly heads, 
 but with thick lips and flat noses. In color they vary 
 from chocolate-brown to sooty black. 
 
 279. A, 366 days ; B, 364; and C, 365. (See ques- 
 tion 112). 
 
 280. Lake Michigan, Strait of Mackinaw, Lake 
 Huron, St. Clair River, Lake St. Clair, Detroit River, 
 Lake Erie, Welland Canal, Lake Ontario, St. Lawrence 
 River, Canal around St. Lawrence Rapids, Gulf of St. 
 Lawrence, Atlantic Ocean, Strait of Gibraltar, Medit- 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON GEOGRAPHY. 151 
 
 erranean Sea, Suez Canal, Red Sea, Strait of Babel- 
 Mandeb, Gulf of Aden, Arabian Sea, Indian Ocean, 
 Strait of Malacca, China Sea, Formosa Channel, and 
 Blue Sea. 
 
 281. (a) Standard time is the uniformity of time 
 for all places situated seven and one-half degrees 
 east and west of a given standard meridian. (6) 
 It was adopted by nearly all the American rail- 
 roads November 18, 1883. (c) Five divisions are pro- 
 vided for the United States, with the following merid- 
 ians passing through their centers: Intercolonial, 60th 
 meridian; Eastern, 75th meridian ; Central, 90th me- 
 ridian; Mountain, 105th meridian; Pacific, 120th 
 meridian. 
 
 282. St. Louis, Memphis, and New Orleans. 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 1. What circumstances prove that the interior of the 
 earth is highly heated ? 
 
 2. At what rate does the heat increase as we descend ? 
 
 3. Name four effects upon the earth's surface pro- 
 duced by the heated interior. 
 
 4. (a) What are Earthquakes? (6) How jaani- 
 fested? (c) When most frequeat? (d) State five 
 causes, (e) Where most frequent ? 
 
 5. What places on the earth's surface can you 
 mention which show a gradual change of level ? 
 
 6. Locate the regions of the world where volcanoes 
 are most numerous, and give the cause for such loca- 
 tion. 
 
 7. Name the principal elements composing the earth's 
 crust. 
 
 8 . ( a ) Name the classes of rocks according to origin . 
 (6) According to condition, (c) According to the 
 presence or absence of fossils. 
 
 9. Define Azoic Time, Paleozoic Time, Mesozoic 
 Time, Cenozoic Time. 
 
 152 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 15B 
 
 10. What do the following Ages include: Azoic, 
 Silurian, Devonian, Carboniferous, Reptilian, Mam- 
 malian, Age of Man? 
 
 11. What are continental and oceanic islands ? Give 
 two examples of each. 
 
 12. State the difference between volcanic and corai 
 islands in respect to origin, distribution, height, and 
 habitation. 
 
 13. Name and define the different kinds of coral 
 islands. 
 
 14. Explain the formation of plains and give an ex- 
 ample of each method. 
 
 15. Describe the continents in respect to ths fol- 
 lowing features : height, depression, culminating 
 points, prolongation, trend of mountains. 
 
 16. Name and locate the predominant and secondary 
 mountain systems of North America. 
 
 17. What connection have plains with civilization 
 and human progress ? Cite instances and reasons to 
 prove your answer. 
 
 18. Name the degrees of temperature which produce 
 the three conditions of water, as liquid, solid, and 
 gaseous. 
 
 19. (a) What temperature is water at its maximum 
 density? (6) What advantage accrues from this 
 physical exception? 
 
 20. How are extremes of heat and cold mitigated bv 
 large bodies of water? 
 
 21. State two causes of hot springs. 
 
154 QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 22. (a) What is an Artesian Well ? (b) Show how 
 such wells prove the heated interior of the earth. 
 
 23. Name the classes into which springs are divided. 
 
 24. Define the different kinds of springs. 
 
 25. Name three extensive geyser-regions of the 
 world. 
 
 26. What is the usual explanation of the origin of 
 petroleum, or rock or coal oil? 
 
 27. Name five inland bodies of salt water, and give 
 your reason for such waters being salt. 
 
 28. Name the five most extensive deltas of the 
 world. 
 
 29. What part of the earth's water is contained by 
 each of the five oceans? 
 
 30. Classify, define, and give examples of the in- 
 dentations of the ocean. 
 
 31. Compare the waters of the Baltic Sea with 
 those of the Mediterranean with respect to saltness and 
 state your reason. 
 
 32. What are the three movements of the oceanic 
 waters ? 
 
 33. In what waters do waves have a forward motion ? 
 Explain. 
 
 34. Define Tides- By what caused? How dis- 
 tinguished? 
 
 35. What proof can you give for the influence of 
 the moon and sun in causing tides? 
 
 36. Explain why the lunar tide is greater than the 
 solar tide. 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 155 
 
 37. State the difference between spring and neap 
 tides . When do they respectively occur ? 
 
 38. Where is the " cradle of the tides? " 
 
 30. State the origin of constant currents and show 
 how these causes operate. 
 
 40. Describe the Gulf Stream. 
 
 41. What current in the Pacific resembles the Gull 
 Stream? What is its influence? Why inferior to the 
 Gulf Stream? 
 
 42. What is the composition of the atmosphere ? 
 
 43. State the use of the atmosphere in nature. 
 
 44. What is the pressure of the atmosphere upon 
 the earth ? Is this uniform in all parts of the world ? 
 
 45. (a) Define climate. (6) How influenced ? 
 
 46. In what two ways is the atmosphere warmed? 
 
 47. (a) What are isothermal lines? (6) Undei 
 what circumstances do they vary greatly from the par 
 allels? 
 
 48. State the rate of decrease of temperature ob 
 served as we ascend great elevations ? 
 
 40. Give two causes for a decrease of temperature 
 with elevation above the sea. 
 
 50. Explain the origin of winds. 
 
 51. How is the direction of the wind affected by the 
 otation of the earth ? 
 
 52. Name and define the three classes of winds. 
 
 53. Explain the cause of land and sea breezes. 
 
 54. Where are the " Horse latitudes?" Why .so 
 called? 
 
156 QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 55. («) What is the cause of desert winds? (6) 
 Name and locate five from the Desert of Sahara. 
 
 56. Define Monsoons and name the Monsoon regions. 
 
 57. What are cyclones? Mention some peculiarity 
 about the direction and rotation of cyclones. 
 
 58. Name- five circumstances which influence eva ; ~ 
 oration. 
 
 59. State the various forms of precipitation of 
 moisture, and give the law of precipitation with respect 
 to time and distribution. 
 
 60. W r hat are the offices of clouds in the economy of 
 nature ? 
 
 61. Classify and define the various forms of clouds. 
 
 62. Where and what is the greatest annual rainfall? 
 
 63. Give an explanation of the cause of rain. 
 
 64. Explain the rotary theory of the formation of 
 hail. 
 
 65. Upon which side of the Mississippi does drift 
 tend to collect? Explain the cause of this tendency. 
 
 66. Why is no delta formed at the mouth of the 
 Amazon ? 
 
 67. About what is the actual time of darkness at the 
 North Pole? Explain your answer. 
 
 68. In what regions are the folio wing believed to 
 have originated : Wheat, corn, barley, oats, rye, buck- 
 wheat, potato? 
 
 69. What conditions are requisite for a luxuriant 
 growth of forests ? 
 
 70. Which cereal has the farthest northern range? 
 
 71. Name the principal food plants of the tropics. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 157 
 
 72. From what is chocolate prepared? 
 
 73. Name the countries which excel in the produc- 
 tion of the following metals: iron, copper, tin, zinc, 
 lead, gold, silver. 
 
 74. What forms the basis for the distribution of 
 ani iix al lif e ? Why ? 
 
 75. What difference in the variety, beauty, and size 
 of terrestrial and marine fauna may be observed in 
 passing from the equator toward the poles ? 
 
 76. How does the coal-field area of the United States 
 compare with that of Europe ? 
 
 77. Explain the cause of the limited amount of rain 
 in California, Peru, and Bolivia during the summer and 
 fall. 
 
 78. What is the origin of the solar and planetary 
 systems according to the Nebular hypothesis? Who 
 was its author ? To what credence is it entitled ? 
 
 79. What is the zodiac? Into what parts divided? 
 
 80. Name the planets in their order from the sun. 
 
 1NSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL 
 GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 1. The increased heat of the crust as we go below 
 the surface and the escape of lava and other heated 
 substances from volcanoes. 
 
 2. About 1° Fahrenheit for every 55 feet of de- 
 scent. 
 
158 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 
 
 3. 1st, Volcanoes; 2nd, Earthquakes; 3rd, Non- 
 Volcanic igneous eruptions ; 4th, Gradual elevations or 
 subsidences. 
 
 4. (a) Earthquakes are shakings of the earth's crust. 
 (5) 1st, A gentle wave; 2nd, An upward motion; 
 3rd, A rotary motion, (c) 1st, In winter; 2nd, At 
 night; 3rd, During new and full moon. (cZ) 1st, 
 Strain produced by contraction of the earth's crust ; 
 2nd, Forces that eject the matter from volcanoes ; 3rd, 
 Generation of gases in the interior; 4th, Falling in of 
 masses of rock from the roofs of subterranean caverns ; 
 5th, By the tidal wave of the pasty interior, (e) They 
 are most frequent in volcanic regions. 
 
 5. The eastern coast of America from Labrador to 
 New Jersey is rising. The bed of the Pacific in the 
 central part is sinking. Portions of the Andes are 
 rising. 
 
 6. Along the shores of the Pacific; on the islands of 
 the Pacific Ocean ; between the northern and southern 
 hemispheres. This is due to the weakness of the crust 
 in such places, caused by sinking oceans. 
 
 7. Oxygen, which constitutes nearly one-half , silicon, 
 aluminium, magnesium, calcium, potassium, sodium, 
 iron, and carbon. 
 
 8. (a) Igneous rocks, those which were ejected in a 
 melted condition, and afterward cooled. Aqueous 
 rocks, those deposited as sediment by water. Met- 
 amorphic rocks, those originally deposited in layers, 
 but afterwards so changed by heat as to lose all traces 
 of stratification, (b) Stratified rocks, those arranged 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 159 
 
 in layers by the action of water. Aqueous rocks be- 
 long to this class. Unstratified rocks, those destitute 
 of any arrangement. Igneous and Metamorphic rocks 
 belong to this class, (c) Fossiliferous and Non-f os- 
 siferous. 
 
 9. Azoic Time includes the period before vegetable 
 or animal life appeared on the globe. Paleozoic Time, 
 meaning ancient life, included the time when animal 
 and vegetable life bore but little resemblance to that 
 which we now see. Mesozoic life, meaning middle life, 
 was the period of huge animals, when both animal and 
 vegetable life approached nearer to the species now 
 existing than to the relics of preceding ages. Cenozoic 
 Time, or recent life, included the time when the ani- 
 mals and plants bore close resemblance to those now 
 living. 
 
 10. The Azoic Age includes all time prior to the 
 advent of life upon the globe. The Silurian Age is 
 characterized by types of life of the simplest construc- 
 tion, the animals were all marine and belong to the 
 three classes, mollusks, radiates, and articulates. 
 Devonian Age, or Age of Fishes. The fishes which 
 characterize this age belong to two classes, sharks and 
 ganoids, the latter were of the type of the sturgeon and 
 garpihe. Carboniferous Age was the coal-producing 
 ase. Dense forests of ferns and other trees covered 
 the earth from pole to pole. The climate was warm, 
 moist, and equable. Then followed subsidences and 
 upheavals ; the forests were swept away, submerged 
 and covered with mud and silt. Thus was formed the 
 
160 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 immense coal beds of the continents. The Reptilian 
 Age was the age of enormous reptiles of the lizard 
 kind, such as the ichtliyosaurus (fish-lizard), a cold- 
 blc ^ed, air-breathing, and carnivorous monster, hav- 
 ing the teeth of a crocodile and the head of a lizard, 
 and the jilesiosawus (lizard-like), a monstrous, though 
 less formidable animal than the ichthyosaurus. The 
 Mammalian Age was the period of enormous herbiv- 
 orous animals, whose skeletons are found in many 
 parts of the world. Among these were the mammoth, 
 whose remains are found imbedded in the frozen gravel 
 of Siberia ; the mastodon, with tusks eleven feet in 
 lengthy the megatherium, an animal resembling the 
 sloth; the mylodon and the deinotherium . The age of 
 Man is the present age. 
 
 11. Continental islands are such as lie near the shores 
 of continents, and have the same general construction. 
 Example: West Indies, Phillippines. Oceanic islands 
 are those in the ocean, having no connection with the 
 continents. Example : Sandwich, New Zealand. 
 
 12. Volcanic islands are formed mainly by the 
 summits of submarine volcanoes, either extinct or 
 a„'ive. The coral island is a limestone formation, de- 
 rived from countless skeletons of minute pol} r ps that 
 once lived below the surface of the waters. Volcanic 
 islands are scattered over the globe, while coral islands 
 are found in warm, shallow, tropical waters, remote 
 from active volcanoes. Coral islands rarely rise above 
 12 feet, on which account few of them furnish com- 
 fortable habitation for man. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 161 
 
 13. 1st. Atolls, or Lagoon islands, consist of a ring 
 of coral inclosing a lagoon — a portion of the ocean. 
 2nd. Encircling reefs are the same as Atolls except 
 that one or more islands lie within the lagoon. 3rd. 
 Fringing reefs are narrow ribbons of coral rock lying 
 near the shore of an ordinary island. 4th. Barrier 
 reefs are usually broad and lie some distance from the 
 shore. 
 
 14. Plains owe their existence to three causes ; viz., 
 1st. The absence of wrinkles in the folds of the crust, 
 as the plains of Kansas, Nebraska, etc. 2nd. Such as 
 were formed by marine deposits along the shores of 
 receding oceans, as the plains along the Atlantic coast. 
 3rd. Alluvial plains deposited by the fresh water of 
 rivers and lakes, as the alluvial bottoms along the lower 
 Mississippi. 
 
 15 . 1st. The greatest elevations of the continents are 
 nearly all found in tropical regions. 2nd. The con- 
 tinents have in general high borders and low interiors. 
 3rd. The highest points of land lie out of the center of 
 the continents. 4th. The greatest prolongation cor- 
 responds to the predominant mountain system. 5th. 
 The prevailing trends of mountain masses agree with 
 ';he direction of the coast line. 
 
 16. The predominant mountain system of North 
 America extends from the Arctic Ocean to the Isthmus 
 of Panama. It consists of two nearly parallel mountain 
 systems ; viz . , the Rocky Mountains , the Sierra Nevada , 
 and the Cascade ranges. The secondary system ex- 
 tends from Georgia to the Arctic Ocean, and comprises 
 
 u 
 
162 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY, 
 
 the Appalachian system, the Plateau of Labrador, the 
 Height of Land and the Arctic Plateau. 
 
 17. River-plains have ever been the chosen seats of 
 settled industry, progress, and civilization. The popu- 
 lous centers of civilization of antiquity, as Babylon, 
 Nineveh, Thebes, Rome, as well as modern sites of in- 
 dustry, are found in the river-plains of both continents. 
 These regions possess special adaptations and facilities 
 for agriculture, commerce, and the arts. 
 
 18. Fresh water freezes at 32° Fahr. Ocean water 
 freezes at 26 V2 Fahr. At 212° Fahr. water boils. 
 
 19. (a) Water reaches its greatest weight, or dens- 
 ity, at 39.2° Fahr. (b) If it contracted below this 
 temparature, say lower than 32°, the ice first formed 
 would sink to the bottom, and so continue, until our 
 rivers and lakes would become a frozen mass which 
 the greatest heat of summer would not thaw. 
 
 20. Large bodies of water take in more heat while 
 warming, and give out more heat while cooling than 
 any other substance. Again, the constant movement 
 of large bodies of water brings to the surface waters of 
 a different temperature, which modify the adjacent 
 lands. 
 
 21. Hot springs near active volcanoes may owe 
 their heat to their beds being in the vicinity of recently 
 ejected lava. If remote from volcanic disturbance 
 their high temperature is to be attributed to the great 
 depth of their reservoirs. 
 
 22. («) An Artesian well is one bored into the 
 earth until a subterranean basin is reached. The water 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 163 
 
 rushes up the bore in consequence of the hydrostatic 
 pressure. The temparature of waters issuing from 
 Artesian wells is always proportional to the depth, 
 showing a nearly constant increase of 1° for every 55 
 feet of descent. 
 
 23. Springs are divided into the following classes: 
 constant, variable, periodical, thermal, mineral and 
 petroleum. 
 
 24. Constant springs flow continually from sources 
 in subterranean lakes so vast that the constant flow 
 cannot drain them during the dryest seasons. 
 
 Variable springs burst forth after heavy rains and 
 diminish as th3 dry season approaches. 
 
 Periodical springs swell and subside at stated 
 periods. Their cause is usually attributed to the 
 siphon-shape of the outlet tube. 
 
 Thermal springs send forth water from 60° Fahr. to 
 the boiling point. Beyond this heat the spring is 
 termed a geyser. 
 
 Mineral springs are such as send forth water so 
 strongly impregnated with mineral matter as to sensibly 
 affect the animal system. The five principal classes 
 designated according to their ingredients are, Chaly- 
 beate (iron), Saline (salt), Silicious (flint), Calcareous 
 (lime), and Sulphurous springs. 
 
 Petroleum springs, from which we obtain our coal 
 oil are scattered all over the globe. 
 
 25. In Iceland over 100 geysers occur in a limited 
 area, in New Zealand, near the volcano of Tongariro, 
 over 1000 mud springs, hot springs and geysers burst 
 
164 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 from the ground. In Yellowstone Park, Wyoming 
 Ty., are some of the most magnificent geysers in the 
 world. 
 
 26. The oil is derived from the slow decomposition, 
 in the presence of heat, of various animal and vegetable 
 matters, which are found in the strata of nearly all the 
 geological formations. 
 
 27. Caspian Sea, Dead Sea, Aral Sea, Lake Urum- 
 iyah, in Persia, and Great Salt Lake, in Utah. These 
 lakes and seas have inlets but no outlets. All rivers 
 have more or less salt dissolved from the washings of 
 the crust. Since all loss of waters from lakes having 
 no outlets is by evaporation, the quantity of salt will 
 continually accumulate in such bodies of water. 
 
 28. The Mississippi, the Nile, the Tigris, the 
 Euphrates, and the Zambesi. 
 
 29. The Pacific contains about ^, the Atlantic, about 
 i, the Indian, about |, the Antarctic, about y 1 ,-, the 
 Arctic about -^ of the waters of the earth. 
 
 30. 1st. Inland Seas, or those surrounded by a nearly 
 continuous land border ; as the Baltic and Mediter- 
 ranean Seas. 
 
 2nd. Border Seas, or those isolated from the ocean 
 by peninsulas and island chains; as the Caribbean and 
 North Seas. 
 
 3rd. Gulfs or Bays, or broad expansions of the ocean 
 extending into the land ; as the Bay of Biscay, the Bay 
 of Bengal. 
 
 31. The Mediterranean contains more salt propor- 
 tionally than the Baltic, because, being connected 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 1G5 
 
 with the ocean by a narrow channel, it loses more 
 of its waters by evaporation than by outflow, while the 
 Baltic, receiving the waters of powerful rivers is fresher 
 than the ocean. 
 
 32. The three movements of the oceanic waters are 
 waves, tides, and currents. 
 
 33. In shallow water waves have a forward motion. 
 In such waters the motion at the bottom is checked, 
 and the top curls over and breaks, producing what are 
 called breakers. 
 
 34. Tides are the alternate rise and fall of the ocean 
 twice in a lunar day (24 hrs. and 51 min.), caused by 
 the attraction of the sun and moon. The rising of the 
 water is culled flood tide ; when it has attained its great- 
 est height high tide occurs. Remaining stationary for 
 a few minutes, the water falls, called ebb tide, reach- 
 ing the lowest point in about six hours, low tide occurs. 
 
 35. In the deep ocean the passage of the moon is 
 always followed by high water. The shape of the 
 ocean basin often prevents this occurring immediately 
 after the passage of the moon. Again, the highest 
 tides result when the sun and moon act simultaneously 
 on the same hemisphere of the earth. 
 
 36. The sun's distance from the earth being 400 
 times that of the moon, its attraction at any time is 
 almost the same on every part of the earth, there being 
 a difference of only ^/ - ¥ its whole attraction on oppo- 
 site sides. If the sun's attraction were the same upon 
 every part of the earth there would be no tendency to 
 disturb the waters upon any one side, i.e., no tides due 
 
166 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 to its influence. The difference between the moon's 
 attraction on opposite sides of the earth is T ^- its entire 
 attraction, equal to (^ of T y-g ) ^Vs" °^ the 3un ' s attrac- 
 tion. The fraction T }-g- is the force of the moon's en- 
 tire attraction compared to that of the sun. The 
 moon's influence in creating a tide is ^rV'r^einm or 
 more than twice the sun's; and the tides are due to 
 difference of attraction on different sides of the earth. 
 87. Spring tides are caused by the combined attrac- 
 tions of the sun and moon on the same portions of the 
 earth ; Neap tides, by their opposite attractions. 
 Spring tides occur twice during every revolution of the 
 moon, once at full, and once at new moon. Neap tides 
 occur twice during each revolution of the moon, when 
 the sun and moon are 90° apart, or as we say, when the 
 moon is in quadrature. 
 
 38. In the great southern water areas, where the 
 Pacific, the Indian and the Antarctic are merged in one. 
 
 39. The two principal causes of oceanic currents are 
 the sun's heat and the earth's rotation. The evapora- 
 tion constantly going on in the equatorial regions tends 
 to lower the level of the waters in those latitudes, 
 which, added to the influence of the sun in lessening 
 the specific gravity of the waters about the equator, 
 produce a constant tendency of the colder and warmer 
 waters to commingle. The polar waters flow toward 
 the equator to equalize the pressure, thus displacing the 
 warmer waters which flow toward the poles. If the 
 earth were at rest the currents would flow north and 
 south, to and from the equator ; but the rotation of the 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 167 
 
 earth from west to east causes currents flowing toward 
 the poles to be deflected toward the east, while those 
 flowing toward the equator are turned toward the west. 
 
 40. The Gulf Stream is an ocean river from 10 to 
 50 miles wide, and 500 fathoms deep, of a dark indigo 
 color, originating in the warm waters of the equatorial 
 regions. Its velocity is from four to six miles an hour, 
 and so great is its latent heat that after flowing 3000 
 miles to the north, it preserves, even in winter, a sum- 
 mer heat. 
 
 41. The Japan Current in the Pacific corresponds to 
 the Gulf Stream of the Atlantic. Its warm waters 
 soften the climate of the Aleutian Islands and the north- 
 west coast of America. On account of the shallowness 
 of Behring Strait through which it cannot pass, it has 
 neither the velocity nor sharpness of outline of the 
 Gulf Stream. 
 
 42. The atmosphere is composed of nitrogen and 
 oxygen, in the proportion, by weight, of 77 per cent of 
 nitrogen to 23 per cent of oxygen. To these are 
 added a small quantity of carbonic acid, about five or 
 six parts in every 10000 of air. 
 
 43. Oxygen supports combustion and respiration, 
 and is thus necessary to animal life. Carbonic acid, 
 composed of oxygen and carbon, is the source from 
 which vegetation derives its woody fibre, and is thus 
 necessary to plant life. In respiration animals take in 
 oxygen and give out carbonic acid; plants, in sunlight, 
 take in carbonic acid and give out oxygen. 
 
1 68 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 44. The atmosphere exerts a pressure of 15 pounds 
 on every square inch of surface. This pressure is not 
 uniform in all parts of the earth at the same level. 
 The greatest pressure is in latitude 35° north and south. 
 
 45. (a) Climate is the condition of the atmosphere 
 as regards heat or cold, moisture or dryness, healthi- 
 ness orunhealthiness. (5) It is influenced by latitude, 
 altitude, location with respect to mountains, plains, 
 bodies of water, ocean currents, and prevailing winds. 
 
 46. 1st. By direct absorption of the sun's rays 
 passing through it. 2nd. By actual contact, reflection, 
 or radiation from the heated earth. 
 
 47. (a) Isothermal lines connect places on the earth 
 which have the same mean annual temperature, (b ) In 
 tnose parts of the ocean traversed by warm currents 
 flowing toward the poles, isothermal lines are deflected 
 in the same direction as the currents ; while cold cur- 
 rents or mountain regions cause a marked bending of 
 those lines toward the equator. 
 
 48. The temperature of the atmosphere decreases 
 vith the elevation above the sea about 3° Fahr. for every 
 1000 feet. 
 
 49. Increased cold in elevation is caused as follows : 
 1st. Since the earth receives most of its heat from the 
 earth's surface, the farther we go from the surface up- 
 ward, the colder it grows. 
 
 2nd. The diminished humidity and density of the air 
 at great elevations prevents its absorbing either the 
 direct rays of the sun, or those reflected from the earth. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 169 
 
 50. Winds are caused by atmospheric heat disturb- 
 ances and the rotation of the earth. As the air in the 
 equatorial regions becomes heated, it expands, becomes 
 lighter, rises and its place is supplied by the inrushing 
 cold air. The ascending currents continue rising until 
 they reach a stratum of air of nearly the same density 
 as their own, when they spread laterally in all direc- 
 tions, filling the areas where the air has been rarefied 
 Jjy lateral surface currents. 
 
 51. But for the diurnal motion of the earth the wind 
 would blow due north and south from the equator. 
 Winds originating at the equator with a velocity of 1000 
 miles an hour, will, as they move northward or south- 
 ward like the currents, move faster than the slower 
 moving regions of the earth, and thus flow toward the 
 northeast and southeast. Winds originating at the 
 poles, moving with a slow velocity, will as they 
 approach the faster moving equatorial regions lag be- 
 hind, and so blow toward the southwest north of the 
 equator, and northwest south of the equator. 
 
 52. 1st. Constant, those which blow in the same 
 direction throughout the year. 2nd. Periodical, those 
 which blow alternately in opposite directions. 3rd. 
 Variable, those which blow irregularly; these are in- 
 fluenced by local causes. 
 
 53. The land, by reflection of the sun's rays, becomes 
 warmer than the sea during the day ; this causes an 
 ascending current, whose place is supplied by the cool 
 air from the sea rushing in. This is called the sea 
 breeze. During the night the land cools off more rap- 
 
170 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 idly than the water; the ascending current then rises 
 from the water and a breeze called the land breeze sets 
 toward the sea from the land. 
 
 54. The Calms of Cancer in the Atlantic are thus 
 known. Formerly, when vessels from New England 
 laden with horses for the West Indies were beset by 
 calms in these regions, it became necessary to throw 
 many of these animals overboard for want of water. 
 
 55. (a) Deserts by reason of the absence of water, 
 cool and heat more rapidly than other portions of land. 
 Currents alternately blow to and from the heated area 
 with great violence . ( b ) The Etesian Wind from July 
 to September blows over the Mediterranean ; The Har- 
 mattan blows over the coast of Guinea; The Khamsin 
 blows over Egypt ; The Sirocco blows over Italy ; The 
 Solano blows over Spain. 
 
 56. Monsoons are a species of land and sea breezes, 
 which blow in a certain direction during a part of the 
 year and in an opposite direction during the remainder 
 of the year. The three principal monsoon regions are 
 the Indian Ocean, the Gulf of Guinea, the Mexican 
 Gulf and Caribbean Sea. 
 
 57. Cyclones are storms moving in a parabolic path 
 about a calm, circular center. In the northern hemi- 
 sphere the rotation of the whirl is in a direction con- 
 trary to the hands of a watch, south of the equator 
 the whirl is with the hands of a watch. 
 
 58. 1st. The temperature of the atmosphere. 2nd. 
 The quantity of vapor in the air. 3rd. Amount of 
 atmospheric pressure. 4th. Extent of exposed sur- 
 face. 5th. The renewal of thn air. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 171 
 
 59. Moisture is deposited from the air in the form of 
 rain, fog, mist, dew, cloud, sleet, hail, and snow. 
 Precipitation can occur only when the air is cooled 
 below the temperature of its dew point. The amount 
 of precipitation decreases as we pass from the equator 
 to the poles, and from the coasts of the continents 
 toward the interior. 
 
 60. Clouds temper the climate, protect the earth 
 from too much heat in summer and keep it warm in 
 winter. By their constant motion, they keep the 
 atmosphere stirred up ; and thus is carried off those 
 noxious exhalations that would otherwise render the air 
 unfit for animal existence. Finally, they hold in 
 minute particles the vast reservoirs of vapor which, 
 when aggregating, exceed a certain size, fall to the earth 
 as rain. 
 
 61. The principal forms of clouds are classified as 
 follows: The Cirrus cloud, a fleecy, feathery mass of 
 condensed vapor, high above the earth ; the Cumulus 
 cloud, a mountainous, rounded mass of dense vapor, 
 formed in the lower regions of the atmosphere ; the 
 Stratus cloud, a stratified collection of horizontal sheets, 
 forming the base of the other clouds; the Nimbus 
 cloud, a dark, stormy mass of vapor from which rain 
 falls. 
 
 62. At Cherrapongi, a station among the Himalayas, 
 in India, where an annual rainfall of 610 inches has 
 been recorded. The greatest rainfall in the New 
 World is 280 inches, at Maranham, Brazil. 
 
172 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 
 
 63. When, from any cause, as the sweeping aowL 
 from the mountains into the warm valleys of cold blasts, 
 or the rising of warm winds up the mountain slopes, 
 clouds of different temperature are brought in contact, 
 unable to hold the whole amount of moisture in solu- 
 tion, they part with a portion of their vapor in the 
 form, of rain. This is due to the fact that the capacity 
 of clouds to retain their moisture diminishes faster than 
 their temperature. 
 
 64. Snowflakes, which form the nuclei of hail are 
 supposed to whirl around a horizontal axis, and be- 
 tween two horizontal layers of cloud — the upper one 
 of snow, the lower one of rain. 'As the particles pass 
 through the successive strata of snow and rain, alter- 
 nate coatings of ice and snow are formed, until at last 
 they are hurled to the ground as hail. 
 
 65. Upon the west bank. This is due to the diurnal 
 motion of the earth. 
 
 66. The sediment carried down the Amazon is swept 
 away by the equatorial current. 
 
 67. About 82 days, or from November 10th to Febru- 
 ary 1st. Owing to refraction and the breadth of the sun's 
 disc, twilight lasts from September 21, to Novembei 
 10, and from the same cause, twilight again begins 
 February 1st. 
 
 68. Wheat, in Tartary ; corn, in America; barley, in 
 Tartary ; oats, in the region of the Caucasus ; rye, in 
 Persia; buckwheat, in northern China: the potato, in 
 Chili or Peru. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 173 
 
 69. An abundance of regularly distributed rain 
 throughout the year. 
 
 70. Barley is grown farther north than any other 
 grain. 
 
 1. Rice, dates, cocoa-nuts, bananas and plantains, 
 cassava, bread-fruit, sago, and yams. 
 
 72. From the seed of the cocoa-tree. 
 
 73. Iron, Great Britain; Copper, Chili; Tin, Eng- 
 land ; Zinc, Germany; Lead, Spain ; Gold, the United 
 States; Silver, the United States. 
 
 74. The distribution of heat, moisture, and vegeta- 
 tion forms the basis for the distribution of animal life, 
 because animals derive their sustenance either directly 
 or indirecty from plants. 
 
 75. As a rule, the luxuriance and variety of terres- 
 trial animal life decrease as we pass from the equator 
 toward the poles. This law of distribution is reversed 
 in marine animal life, both the number and size of the 
 species increasing from the equator toward the poles. 
 
 76. The area of the coal fields of the United States 
 is over six times as great as that of Europe. 
 
 77. The prevailing "winds of California during the 
 summer and fall are from the cast, which are deprived 
 of their moisture in crossing the continent. The Pa- 
 cini shores of Peru and Bolivia are rainless for a simi- 
 lar reason. 
 
 78. The Nebular hypothesis assumes that the matter 
 of which the bodies belonging to the solar and planetary 
 systems is composed, once existed in space as a great, 
 chaotic, nebulous and highly heated mass of gas or 
 
174 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 v'npor, endowed with a kind of whirlpool motion, which, 
 gradually condensing through the mutual attraction of 
 its particles, formed the countless suns; that the 
 planets were formed by the condensation of rings of 
 matter successively thrown off by the central mass, 
 and the satellites by the condensation of matter thrown 
 off in like manner by the planets. It was invented by 
 Laplace, a French astronomer, in the latter part of the 
 last century. All recent observations and discoveries 
 seem to prove its correctness. 
 
 79. An imaginary belt in the heavens, extending nine 
 degrees on each side of the ecliptic, or celestial equa- 
 tor. Within its limits are contained the orbits of all 
 the planets except some of the minor planets. It is 
 divided into twelve parts, called signs, of 30° each, as 
 follows: Aries, Taunts, Gemini, Cancer, Leo, Virgo, 
 Libra, Scorpio, Sagittarius, Capricornus, Aquarius, 
 Pisces. 
 
 80. Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, 
 Uranus, and Neptune. 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 1. What theories have been advanced regarding the 
 origin of the American Indians ? 
 
 2. What evidence exists which indicates the occu- 
 pancy of this continent by a civilized race before the 
 Indians ? 
 
 3. Give a brief description of the American Indians 
 as they have manifested themselves to the Whites. 
 
 4. What claim to the discovery of America prior to 
 Columbus is now very generally accepted? 
 
 5. Name some circumstances that directly contrib- 
 uted to the discovery of the Western Continent. 
 
 6. What peculiar characteristics did Columbus 
 possess which fitted him for his great work? 
 
 7. Name in order the powers to which Columbus ap- 
 plied for aid. 
 
 8. (a) How many voyages to the New World were 
 made by Columbus? (&) Name discoveries made in 
 each voyage. 
 
 9. How came this countiy to be called America? 
 
 10. Why were the Indians so named 9 
 
 175 
 
176 QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 11. What two circumstances dispelled the idea of the 
 Spaniards that the lands discovered by Columbus were 
 the Indies? 
 
 12. Show how the promises made to Columbus by 
 the Sovereigns of Spain compared with his rewards. 
 
 13. Name ten Spanish discoverers and explorers, and 
 after each write the name of his most important dis- 
 covery or exploration, with date of each. 
 
 14. (a) What territory of the New World was 
 claimed by England? (6) Upon what were these 
 claims based? 
 
 15. Name the prominent English explorers of the 
 16th century. 
 
 16. What unsuccessful attempts were made by Eng- 
 land to colonize North America in the 16th century? 
 
 17. Locate the claims made by France, and state 
 what means were employed to confirm these claims. 
 
 18. Name five French explorers with the date and 
 location of their explorations. 
 
 19. Where and by whom were French settlements 
 made in the early part of the 17th century? 
 
 20. What claim did Holland make in America? 
 Upon what based, and what was the extent? 
 
 21. What motives may be assigned for the first at- 
 tempt of the French to plant colonies in Florida and 
 Carolina? 
 
 22. Give reasons for the long time intervening be- 
 tween the discovery and settlement of North America. 
 
 23. (a) What was the route from England to 
 America during the 16th century? (6) How and by 
 whom was the passage shortened, and to what extent? 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 177 
 
 24. Give names and dates of the first permanent 
 settlements made by the nations engaged in exploring 
 the future United States. 
 
 25. (a) What two companies were formed in Eng- 
 land for colonizing America ? (b) What were their 
 respective territorial boundaries ? 
 
 26. Relate the circumstances which determined the 
 site of the first permanent English settlement. 
 
 27. Why were the first settlers at Jamestown poorly 
 fitted for pioneer life? 
 
 28. What delusion among the people of Jamestown 
 impaired the success of their first year's settlement? 
 
 29. For what were the three charters granted to 
 Jamestown remarkable? Give their dates. 
 
 30. When was the " Starving Time " in Virginia? 
 What was its cause and result? 
 
 31. When, where, and by whom convened, was the 
 first legislative body in America? 
 
 32. When was negro slavery introduced into 
 America ? - 
 
 33. When was the Navigation Act passed? When 
 enforced? What were its provisions? 
 
 34. State the cause and date of Bacon's Rebellion. 
 •35. Give the dates of the two Indian massacres in 
 
 Virginia. 
 
 36. (a) Who was Pocahontas? (b) What influ- 
 ence had she upon the Jamestown Colony? 
 
 37. When, where, and by whom was New York 
 settled ? 
 
 12 
 
178 QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 38. Name in order the four Dutch Governors of 
 
 New York. 
 
 39. What people settled Delaware? Under whose 
 auspices ? By whom conquered ? 
 
 40. What is the origin of the term Puritan, as ap- 
 plied to the Plymouth settlers ? 
 
 41. (a) What was the character of the Pilgrim set- 
 tlers ? (6 ) How did it fit them to become the founders 
 of a successful colony in the New World ? 
 
 42. (a) State the plan of working practiced by the 
 early settlers of America, (b) What were its merits 
 and demerits ? 
 
 43. From what religious disturbances did the colon- 
 ists of Massachusetts suffer? 
 
 44. (a) What colonies composed the famous 
 " United Colonies of New England? " (b) What was 
 the purpose of the Union? 
 
 45. When did King Philip's War occur? 
 
 46. State the cause and result of King Philip's War. 
 
 47. Why was Massachusetts made a Eoyal Province ? 
 Who was appointed governor? 
 
 48. What social delusion occasioned great excite- 
 ment in Massachusetts in the latter part of the 17th 
 century ? 
 
 49. Who settled Connecticut? 
 
 50. When was the Pequod War? What was the 
 principal action? How did it terminate? 
 
 51. Under whom and by what class of people was 
 Rhode Island settled ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 179 
 
 52. What is particularly remarkable about the code 
 of laws adopted by Rhode Island ? 
 
 53. State what you can respecting general religious 
 persecutions during the 17th century. 
 
 54. How did New York come into the possession of 
 the English? 
 
 55. By what different sects was Pennsylvania prin- 
 cipally settled ? What reasons can you assign for this ? 
 
 56. What were the prominent principles of the laws 
 established in Pennsylvania under the guidance of 
 William Penn? 
 
 57. What remarkable feature can you mention in 
 connection with Penn's celebrated treaty with the In- 
 dians? 
 
 58. When, where, by whom, and for what purpose 
 was Maryland settled? 
 
 59. What were the provisions of the Toleration Act 
 passed by the Maryland Assembly in 1649? 
 
 60. How did the religious tolerance of Rhode Island 
 and Maryland differ ? 
 
 61. Give date and cause of Claiborne's Rebellion. 
 
 62. What religious troubles occurred in Maryland? 
 
 63. Explain the origin of Mason and Dixon's line. 
 
 64. After whom was Carolina named and by whom? 
 
 65. What was " Locke's Grand Model? " 
 
 66. By whom and when was Georgia founded and 
 for what purpose ? 
 
 67. What restrictions were contained in the early 
 laws of Georgia, and what was the effect? 
 
 68. By what people was Charleston largely settled? 
 
ISO QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 69. Name four missionaries among the Indians. 
 
 70. What was the character of Governor Andros's 
 administration in New England? 
 
 71. Give the dates of the introduction of some of 
 the religious societies in the American colonies. 
 
 72. What may be said of educational provisions 
 among the early colonies? 
 
 73. What were the causes of King William's War? 
 
 74. What cause can you assign for the Indians usu- 
 ally siding with the French against the English ? 
 
 75. Name the principal actions and their results of 
 King William's War. 
 
 76 . What treaty ended King William's War, and how 
 did it affect the American Colonies? 
 
 77. What was the cause and duration of Queen 
 Anne's War? 
 
 78. («) Name the important events of Queen 
 Anne's War. (5) By what treaty and upon what terms 
 was it settled ? 
 
 79. State the date, cause and result of King George's 
 War. 
 
 80. (a) What was the state of feeling between 
 French and English settlers in the middle of the 18th 
 century? (5) How had this condition been brought 
 about ? 
 
 81. What was the geographical position of the 
 French and English settlements at the opening of the 
 French and Indian War? How did this compare with 
 their respective claims? 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 181 
 
 82. Give some account of the ancestry of Washing- 
 ton. 
 
 83. Name the physical, mental, and moral traits 
 which fitted Washington for his destiny. 
 
 84. By whom and for what purpose was Wash- 
 ington sent to the French commandant at Fort le Boeuf ? 
 
 85. What were the five objective points of the Brit- 
 ish during the French and Indian War? 
 
 86. (a) What gave Fort du Quesneits importance? 
 
 (b) Who conducted the expedition against this fort? 
 
 (c) With what result? (d) By whom and when was 
 the fort taken? 
 
 87. State the result of expeditions against Louis- 
 burg, Crown Point and Ticonderoga, and Niagara. 
 
 88. By what military action was the French and In- 
 dian War terminated? By whom conducted? 
 
 89. State the results of the French and Indian War 
 to (a) the French; (6) the English; (c) the Colonists. 
 
 90. What eminent revolutionary generals received 
 their training in the French and Indian War? 
 
 91. What was the population of the American col- 
 onies at the beginning of the Revolution? 
 
 92. What forms of government existed in the colo- 
 nies prior to the Revolution? 
 
 93. Name the Colleges of Colonial times, and state 
 which of these owed its existence to the patronage of 
 the home government. 
 
 94. Where and when was the first printing press in 
 America? The first permanent newspaper? 
 
182 QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 95. What differences in the customs and manners of 
 the northern, middle, and southern colonies existed in 
 Colonial times? 
 
 96. What noted events occurred on the following 
 dates: October 12,1492; May 23,1607; June 28, 
 1619; December 21, 1620; February 22, 1732? 
 
 97. What connection had the following persons with 
 American history: DeSoto, Leonard Calvert, Roger 
 Williams, D'Iberville, Sir William Pepperell? 
 
 98. (a) When was rice first cultivated in South 
 Carolina? (6) When first exported ? 
 
 99. When, where, and by whom was the first per- 
 manent settlement made in the Mississippi valley ? 
 
 100. Show in what manner the influence of the early 
 Governors of Virginia retarded the progress of educa- 
 tion. 
 
 101. How were the manufacturing and commercial 
 enterprises of the colonists regarded by the British 
 government? 
 
 102. What was the condition of American literature 
 prior to the Revolution? 
 
 103 Name in order of numbers the nationalities rep- 
 resented in the American colonies at the opening of the 
 Revolution. 
 
 104. What were the peculiar characteristics of the 
 colonists which influenced them in resisting the oppres- 
 sions of the mother country ? 
 
 105. Enumerate what are commonly styled the re- 
 mote causes of the Revolution. 
 
 106. What was the direct cause of the Revolution? 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 183 
 
 107. Who and in what manner sounded "The 
 trumpet of theKevolution? " 
 
 108. Name some popular demonstrations showing 
 the general opposition to the measures of the British 
 government on the part of the colonists in the decade 
 preceding the Revolution. 
 
 109. (a) What was the Mutiny Act? (b) Why 
 passed? (c) What was its effect? 
 
 110. Give a short history of Faneuil Hall. 
 
 111. What application had the terms "Whigs and 
 Tories?" 
 
 112. How was Boston punished for the "Tea 
 Party?" 
 
 113. Give the dates, places of convening, and objects 
 of the three colonial Congresses held prior to the Rev- 
 olution. 
 
 114. (a) What and where was the first battle of the 
 Revolution? (b) What was its purpose? (c) What 
 was its effect? 
 
 115. When and where was the second Continental 
 Congress held? Name its principal acts. 
 
 116. For what purpose, by whom conducted, and 
 with what result was an expedition made against Can- 
 ada in 1775? 
 
 117. Name the principal military actions of 1776. 
 
 118. By whom and when was the resolution declar- 
 ing the Colonies free and independent States intro- 
 duced ? 
 
 119. (a) By whom was the Declaration of Inde- 
 pendence drawn up ? (6) When adopted by Congress, 
 
184 QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY 
 
 and by what majority? (c) By how many members 
 signed? (d) What was its effect? 
 
 120. By what movements did Washington display 
 his greatest military powers? 
 
 121. Name five eminent European officers who 
 served with distinction in the Continental armies. 
 
 122. (a) What was the object of Burgoyne's expe- 
 dition? (b) What was his force? 
 
 123. How were the plans of Burgoyne defeated? 
 
 124. What officers contributed largely to the check 
 and defeat of Burgoyne's army? 
 
 125. When was the present American Flag adopted? 
 
 126. What is meant by the Conway cabal? 
 
 127. What evidence attests the suffering and 
 patriotism of the American army during the Revolt 
 tion? 
 
 128. Name the circumstances which induced France 
 to aid the United States against England. 
 
 129. How far did the treaty of alliance with 
 France contribute to the ultimate success of the Revo- 
 lution ? 
 
 130. Name the principal battles of 1777. 
 
 131. (a) What financial measures were adopted by 
 Congress to carry on the Revolution? (b) What was 
 the result of the measure ? 
 
 132. Name the patriot leaders of the South during 
 the Revolution. 
 
 133. (a) State the cause of Arnold's treason, (b) 
 Its effect, (c) His reward. 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 185 
 
 134. (a) What difficulties beset the Continental 
 Army in consequence of a depreciated currency ? (b) 
 How were these difficulties aggravated by the 
 British ? 
 
 135. Name the important military events of 1778. 
 
 136. What important battles occurred in 1779? 
 
 137. Who was the " great financier" during the 
 Revolution ? 
 
 138. What is particularly remarkable about Gen- 
 eral Greene's campaign in the Carolinas? 
 
 139. Name the battles of 1780. 
 
 140. What important military actions occurred in 
 1781? 
 
 141. (a) By what treaty was the independence of 
 the United States recognized? (b) Who were the 
 commissioners appointed by Congress? 
 
 142. Relate some circumstance showing a tendency 
 on the part of the founders of our government to estab- 
 lish a monarchy instead of a republic. 
 
 143. {a) What were the "Articles of Confedera- 
 tion?" (b) When adopted by Congress? (c) When 
 did they become binding upon the States? (d) What 
 were some of their radical defects? 
 
 144. State the origin of the Constitution. 
 
 145. («) Into what two parties were the people 
 divided during the discussion pending the adoption of 
 the Constitution? (b) What were the principles of 
 these two parties? (c) Name some prominent Con- 
 stitutional advocates. 
 
186 QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 146. (a) When did the Constitution of the United 
 States go into operation ? (5) What States had not 
 adopted it at that time? (c) Who was chosen first 
 President and how elected? 
 
 147. State the effect of the Revolutionary war upon 
 the morals, manners, religion, education, commerce, 
 and manufactures of the States. 
 
 148. Who composed Washington's cabinet? 
 
 149. Name some of the difficulties with which the 
 first administration had to contend. 
 
 150. ( a ) What financial measures we re proposed by 
 Hamilton? (6) State their effect. 
 
 151. What was the origin of the District of Colum- 
 bia ? 
 
 152. (a) What political parties were formed during 
 Washington's administration ? (6) What distinguished 
 men were the leaders of these parties ? 
 
 153. What course did the people and government of 
 the United States pursue with respect to the French 
 Revolution ? 
 
 154. (a) What laws enacted during Adams's admin" 
 istration turned popular favor from the Federalists? 
 (£>) Explain these laws. 
 
 155. What was the first official expression of the 
 doctrine of State Rights ? 
 
 156. In what manner and when did the United States 
 acquire Louisiana? 
 
 157. When, by whom, and by what means was steam 
 first practically applied to navigation? 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 18? 
 
 158. Enumerate the causes of the second war with 
 Great Britain. 
 
 159. (a) Why was not the War of 1812 a popular 
 measure throughout the country? (&) What party 
 generally opposed the war ? 
 
 160. What was the general pian of the Americans at 
 the opening of the Second War with Great Britain ? 
 
 161. Contrast the general conduct of the land and 
 naval forces during 1812. 
 
 162. What armies were organized for the campaign 
 of 1813, and by whom commanded, and for what pur- 
 pose? 
 
 163. What action did Massachusetts take with ref- 
 erence to the War of 1812? 
 
 164. (a) What was the Hartford Convention? (b) 
 Why was it called? (c) What was its action ? 
 
 165. Name the principal battles of the Second War 
 with Great Britain. 
 
 166. By what treaty was this war ended? 
 
 167. What were the results of the War of 1812? 
 
 168. Name the principal events el Washington's 
 Administration. 
 
 169. Name the principal events of Adams's Admin- 
 istration. 
 
 170. What is particularly remarkable about the elec- 
 tion of James Monroe to the presidency ? 
 
 171. (a) What changes in the political parties of the 
 United States occurred during Monroe's administra- 
 tion ? (b ) What particular measures characterized the 
 new parties ? 
 
188 QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 172. Name the principal events of Monroe's admin- 
 istration. 
 
 173. Name some noted events which occurred July 
 4th. ' 
 
 174. What was the Missouri Compromise? 
 
 175. When and for what consideration did the 
 fJnited States obtain Florida? 
 
 176. What is the Monroe Doctrine? 
 
 177. How was John Quincy Adams elected Presi- 
 dent? 
 
 178. Name the coincidences in the lives of John 
 Adams and Thomas Jefferson. 
 
 179. For what was the administration of J. Q. 
 Adams particularly distinguished? 
 
 180. What practice in official appointments was in- 
 troduced by President Jackson in 1829? 
 
 181. State the means proposed by Jackson to secure 
 from France the payment of indemnities for destruc- 
 tion of American commerce during the Napoleonic 
 wars. 
 
 182. When did the cholera make its first appear- 
 ance in the United States ? 
 
 183. Give an account of the nullification ordinance. 
 
 184. Name the circumstances which contributed to 
 the financial crisis of 1837. 
 
 185. When and by whom was the northeastern 
 boundary settled? 
 
 186. In what respect did John Tyler resemble 
 Andrew Johnson in his official acts? 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 189 
 
 187. What were the conditions upon which Texas 
 was annexed to the United States? 
 
 188. What were the chief grounds of opposition to 
 the annexation of Texas ? 
 
 189. (a) Upon what were the rival claims of Eng- 
 land and the United States to Oregon based ? (b \ How 
 and where were these claims settled ? 
 
 190. (a) What was the cause of the war with Mex- 
 ico? (b) When did it begin? (c) How long did it 
 continue? (d) By what treaty was the war closed? 
 (e) What were the terms of this treaty? 
 
 191. What battles in Mexico were won by the Amer- 
 icans? 
 
 192. (a) What sectional disturbances threatened the 
 Union at the- beginning of Taylor's administration? 
 (b) How were the dangers averted? 
 
 193. Name the five provisions of the Compromise of 
 1850, known as the Omnibus Bill. 
 
 194. (a) What was the Kansas-Nebraska Bill? (b) 
 Who was its author? (c) What was the legal effect of 
 its passage? (d) State its political effect. 
 
 195. What Congressional act may be said to have 
 given birth and strength to the Republican party? 
 
 196. Name the political parties which have existed 
 since the adoption of the Constitution. 
 
 197. Name the principal events of Pierce's admin- 
 istration. 
 
 198. (a) What was the Dred Scott decision? (6) 
 How was it regarded by the North and South? 
 
190 QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 199. What was the alleged cause of the secession of 
 the Southern States? 
 
 200. Name the States which formed the " Confed- 
 erate States of America." 
 
 201. (a) When and how was the War of Secession 
 begun? (b) When and how was it ended? 
 
 202. What was the attitude of England and France 
 toward the United States during the Rebellion ? 
 
 203. What was the general result of the first year of 
 the War of Secession ? 
 
 204. What was the general plan of conducting the 
 war of the Rebellion on the part of the goverment? 
 
 205. Show in what manner the defeat of the national 
 troops at Bull Run proved advantageous to the cause of 
 the Union. 
 
 206. Name ten important battles of the Rebellion 
 fought in 18G2, and state which were Union and which 
 Confederate victories. 
 
 207. What was the numerical strength of the Union 
 and Confederate armies at the beginning of 1863? 
 
 208. (a y When and by whom was the Emancipation 
 Proclamation issued? (b) Whom did it include? (c) 
 How was it justified ? 
 
 209. (a) How many invasions of the North were 
 attempted by Lee? (5) How and when were these 
 checked ? 
 
 210. (a) What was the turning point of the War of 
 the Rebellion? (6) What military actions determined 
 this point? 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 191 
 
 211. Name the great battles won by the Confed- 
 erates in 1863. 
 
 212. What was the purpose of Sherman's " March 
 to the Sea." 
 
 213. What reasons may be assigned for the failure of 
 the United States government to subdue the Rebellion 
 earlier than it did? 
 
 214. Name some of the most important naval actions 
 of the War of the Rebellion. 
 
 215. Name in order the generals who commanded 
 the army of the Potomac. 
 
 216. How were the war measures of the government 
 during the Rebellion impeded in the North? 
 
 217. State the number of men actually enlisted in 
 the Union army during the Rebellion. 
 
 218. («) About what time during the Rebellion did 
 the United States army contain the greatest number of 
 men? (b) What was the daily expense of the govern- 
 ment at this time ? 
 
 219. What was the total cost to the government of 
 the War of Secession ? 
 
 220. What was the effect of the War of Secession 
 upon the North and South respectively? 
 
 221. How were the expenses of the government 
 during the Rebellion provided for by Congress? 
 
 222. How and when was slavery in the United 
 States abolished? 
 
 223. Write a summary of the principles contained 
 in the Fourteenth Amendment. 
 
192 QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 224. How were the men engaged in the Rebellion 
 restored to their rights and privileges in the Union ? 
 
 225. How and why were States engaged in rebellion 
 governed pending what is known as the * ' reconstruc- 
 tion?" 
 
 226. Give an account of the difficulties between 
 President Johnson and Congress which led to his im- 
 peachment. What was the result of this impeachment ? 
 
 227. State fully the nature of the * 'Alabama 
 Claims." 
 
 228. How was the difficulty regarding the Presi- 
 dential contest of 1876 settled? 
 
 229. What Presidents had been formerly Vice 
 Presidents ? 
 
 230. Name the Presidents who died in office 
 
 231. Name the Presidents in chronological order, 
 and after each write the name of the party by which 
 he was elected, date of inauguration, and term of office. 
 
 232. (a) When, and by whom, was the cotton gin 
 invented? (b) What can you say of its political in- 
 fluence in the United States? 
 
 233. Name the Presidents who had been military 
 men. 
 
 234. For what is April 19th notable in the history 
 of the United States? 
 
 235. What officer has charge of the National Bureau 
 of Agriculture? 
 
 236. When, where, and by whom was Indiana first 
 settled ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 193 
 
 237. Name five distinguished Union officers killed 
 during the War of Secession. 
 
 238. (a) State the difference between a protective 
 tariff and free trade. (6) Which sections of the Union 
 have favored these two policies? (c) Name three 
 political leaders who have favored a protective tariff. 
 (cZ) Three who have favored free trade. 
 
 239. Name the Presidential candidates of 1860 and 
 the parties they represented. 
 
 240. (a) When, where, and by what people was 
 Missouri settled? (6) When did it become a separate 
 territory? (c) When was it admitted into the Union? 
 
 241. When and where was California first settled 
 by a civilized race? 
 
 242. Name, including the more important Indian 
 troubles, the wars in which the United States have 
 been engaged. 
 
 243. (a) In what four ways have the United States 
 acquired territory? (b) Specify the territory gained 
 by each method, and state from whom acquired. 
 
 244. Name the three greatest books published by 
 American writers. 
 
 245. What were the requirements of reconstruc- 
 tion imposed upon the States which had passed ordi- 
 nances of secession? 
 
 246. Name the most decisive battle fought in the 
 following States : Massachusetts, New York, Penn- 
 sylvania, Maryland, Virginia, Tennessee, Georgia, 
 Mississippi, Arkansas, Kentucky. 
 
 18 
 
194: QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
 
 247. What general is said never to have lost a 
 battle? 
 
 248 («) How many attempts were made to lay the 
 Atlantic cable. (6) To whom was the success due? 
 249. Explain briefly the distinctions between the 
 Articles of Confederation and the Constitution. 
 
 250. When, and for what purpose, was the first 
 paper money used in America? 
 
 251 Name, three orators of America, three states- 
 men, three poets, three historians, three novelists, 
 three inventors. 
 
 252. Give the names of ten of the most prominent 
 signers of the Declaration of Independence. 
 
 253. What persons have held the offices of General 
 and Lieutenant-General respectively? 
 
 254. In whom was the American executive power 
 vested from 1787 to 1789? 
 
 255. Name five important national events since the 
 Rebellion. 
 
 256. What important decision was rendered by the 
 United States Supreme Court in 1883? 
 
 257. Why was President Hayes's administration 
 unpopular? 
 
 258. (a) What practice in Civil appointments led 
 to the adoption of the Civil Service Reform measure? 
 (J) What evil resulted from this practice? (c) Define 
 Civil Service Reform. 
 
 259. What two important bills were passed by 
 Congress during Cleveland's first administration? 
 
QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES HISTORY. 194A 
 
 260. Name the other officers in their order, besides 
 the Yice President, who may become President. 
 
 261. What was the chief issue of the campaign of 
 1888 and who were the successful candidates? 
 
 262. What new States were admitted during Harri- 
 son's administration? 
 
 263. What was the principal issue of the presidential 
 election of 1892 and who were elected? 
 
 264. To what was the industrial depression of 
 Cleveland's second term attributed by the opposite 
 party and by the administration? 
 
 265. What tariff measure was enacted in August, 
 1894? Explain fully. 
 
 266. Write an account of the Venezuelan dispute 
 and the position taken by President Cleveland with 
 reference to same. 
 
 267. (a) What was the paramount issue of the 
 campaign of 1896? (V) Give a short account of the 
 campaign. 
 
 268. Why did President McKinley call an extra 
 session of Congress soon after his inauguration and 
 what action did it take? 
 
 269. What resulted from the enactment of the 
 Dingley Tariff Law? 
 
 270. Why did the United States declare war against 
 Spain? 
 
 27 1. What great disaster occurred Feb. 15th, in 
 Havana Harbor, which hastened the conflict? 
 
 272. What two naval engagement-; demonstrated the 
 superiority of the U. S. over Spain as a naval power? 
 
194b questions on united states history. 
 
 273. Give the date of some of the more important 
 events of the war. 
 
 274. Who opened and closed hostilities on part of 
 the U. S.? 
 
 275. How did our government meet the expenses 
 of the war? 
 
 276. For what did the U. S. pay Spain $20,000,00(1? 
 
 277. («) What are the objects of holding Exposi- 
 tions? (h) Give date, place and object of each Exposi- 
 tion held in this country. 
 
 278. What distinguished service in the cause of 
 peace did President Roosevelt render in 1905? 
 
 279. What is the most important question now 
 (1906) before the Congress and the people at large? 
 
 280. What bills are now before Congress relating 
 to the above? 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON UNITED STATES 
 HISTORY. 
 
 1. 1st. That they are aborigines. 2nd. That they 
 are descendants of Asiatic tribes who crossed Behring's 
 Strait. 3rd. That they are descendants of Phoenician 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 195 
 
 >r Carthaginian colonies. 4th. That they are the ten 
 " lost tribes " of Israel, who were conquered by Shal- 
 Uaaneser, King of Assyria, 700 B. C. 5th. That they 
 are descended from the early Egyptians. 
 
 2. Throughout the Mississippi Valley many thou- 
 sand mounds and other curiously constructed earth- 
 works, seemingly designed for religious and military 
 purposes, attest the presence of a race greatly superior 
 to the Indians. Architectural remains, as ruins of 
 magnificent temples, cities and extended graded ways 
 scattered along the western coast of South America 
 and throughout Mexico and Central America, point to 
 a people who had attained a degree of civilization not 
 inferior to their contemporaries of Europe at the time 
 in which they flourished. 
 
 3. The Indians are cruel, treacherous, revengeful ; 
 and though boastful of their willingness for war, have 
 ever shown themselves, as a race, cowardly in open 
 battle. They are lazy and improvident, — the lessons 
 of famine teaching them nothing for the future. The 
 women are degraded, and regarded by the men as only 
 fit to bear the burdens of their lords and provide for 
 their daily wants. 
 
 4. The claims of the Northmen, about the year 
 1000. 
 
 5. 1st. The invention of the mariner's compass in 
 1302, and later, the astrolabe, an instrument for 
 reckoning latitude. 2nd. An increased desire for 
 geographical knowledge. 3rd. The invention of print- 
 ing, furnishing numerous books of travel and descrip- 
 
196 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 tion of other lands. 4th. Increased commercial 
 activity and a general demand for a route to the East 
 Indies. 
 
 6. He early displayed a fondness for Mathematics, 
 Geography, and Astronomy. At fourteen he went to 
 sea, where he continued, with few interruptions, all 
 his life. Marrying the daughter of an eminent Portu- 
 guese navigator, he became possessed of numerous 
 charts and journals, which increased his thirst for dis- 
 covery. 
 
 7. First, to the Senate of Genoa; second, to King 
 John II., of Portugal ; third, to Henry VII., of Eng- 
 land, and, fourth, to the court of Spain. 
 
 8. («) Columbus made four voyages, (b) In the 
 first voyage he discovered San Salvador, Cuba, and 
 Hispaniola; in the second, Jamaica, and other neigh- 
 boring islands; in the third, Trinidad, and the coast 
 of South America in 1498; in the fourth he explored 
 the coast of Darien in 1503. 
 
 9. A German geographer, Waldsee-Miiller, in re- 
 publishing the adventures of Americas Vespucius, a 
 companion of Columbus, suggested that the name of 
 this writer should be applied to the country discovered 
 by Columbus. 
 
 10. Columbus, supposing the lands he had discov 
 ered were the outlying islands of India, called the 
 natives Indians. 
 
 11. First, the discovery of the Pacific Ocean by 
 Balboa in 1513, and, second, the circumnavigation of 
 the globe by Magellan in 1620. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 197 
 
 12. He was promised the life Vice-royalty of all the 
 countries he might discover, and died in poverty and 
 obscurity, requesting that his chains be buried with 
 him. 
 
 13. Columbus, San Salvador, 1492; Ponce de Leon, 
 Florida, 1512; Balboa, South Sea (Pacific), 1513; 
 Cordova, Yucatan, 1517 ; Magellan, rounded S. Amer- 
 ica and crossed the Pacific Ocean, 1520; De Ayllon, 
 Caro'ina, 1520 ; Cortez, Mexico, 1519-21 ; De Narvaez, 
 Florida, 1528; De Soto, Mississippi River, 1541; 
 Espejo, New Mexico, 1582. 
 
 14. (a) England claimed that portion of North 
 America lying between Labrador and Florida, and 
 from ocean to ocean, (b) This claim was based upon 
 the discovery of Labrador and southward explorations 
 by the Cabots, in 1497. 
 
 15. Frobisher, Drake, Gilbert, Gosnold, and Smith, 
 
 16. In 1578, by Gilbert, in 1583, and again in 1587, 
 by Raleigh. 
 
 17. France claimed the valleys of the St. Law T rence, 
 Ohio and Mississippi Rivers, and the islands in the 
 Gulf of St. Lawrence. She attempted to make these 
 claims good by planting military stations, missions, 
 and trading posts at strategic points throughout the 
 region. 
 
 18. Verrazani, 1524, the coast from North Carolina 
 to New York; Cartier, 1535, St. Lawrence River; 
 John Ribaut, 1562, South Carolina; De Monts, 1605. 
 Nova Scotia; Champlain, 1609, Lake Champlain 
 
198 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 19. At Port Royal in 1605 by De Monts, and Que- 
 bec in 1608 by Champlain. 
 
 20. Holland claimed the Hudson valley as far east 
 as the Connecticut, and the land embraced in the pres- 
 ent States of New Jersey and Delaware, and the east- 
 ern shores of Maryland and Virginia. This claim was 
 based on the discoveries of Henry Hudson. 
 
 21. To found an asylum for the Huguenots, a sect 
 of French Protestants who were suffering from perse- 
 cution at home. 
 
 22. 1st. The hostility of the natives. 2nd. The jeal- 
 ousy among the rival claimants to the country. 3rd. 
 The absence of any great object of conquest, as ex- 
 isted in Mexico and Peru. 4th. The distance from 
 Europe and the inconvenience of transferring settlers 
 in large numbers to new homes. 
 
 23. (a) Southward along the coasts of Spain, Por- 
 tugal, and Africa to the Canary Islands, thence nearly 
 westward to the Bahamas, (b) Gosnold in 1602 
 shortened the passage 3,000 miles by sailing directly 
 from England to Massachusetts. 
 
 24. St. Augustine, by the Spanish, 1565; Port 
 Royal, N. S., by the French, 1605; Jamestown, by 
 the English, 1607 ; New York, by the Dutch, 1613. 
 
 25. («) The London Company and the Plymouth 
 Company, named from the residence of their principal 
 members. (6) James I. granted to the first company 
 all lands lying between the 34th and 38th parallels of 
 north latitude, to the Plymouth Company the land 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 199 
 
 lying between the 41st and 45th parallels. Both 
 grants extended from the Atlantic to the Pacific. 
 
 26. The company, consisting of 105 persons, de- 
 signed for the settlement under the command of Cap- 
 tain Newport, contemplated landing on Roanoke 
 Island ; but a violent storm carried them northward 
 into Chesapeake Bay. Finding a good harbor off 
 Point Comfort, so named on account of their recent 
 peril, they went up the James River, where on the 
 8th of May, 1607, forty miles above its mouth they se- 
 lected a site for their future city. 
 
 27. They were mostly from cities, unused to labor 
 and hardships; and, ignorant of the means to be em- 
 ployed in obtaining food, they were more of a burden 
 than a help to the few who were capable of founding a 
 colony in the wilderness. 
 
 28. The attention of the settlers was so occupied by 
 a glittering, yellowish sand, found in a small stream, 
 that for months nothing was thought or talked of but 
 to dig, wash, refine, and load gold. In this delusion 
 nearly all participated, and everything looking to per- 
 manent comfort was neglected. 
 
 29. For the utter disregard of the personal rights, 
 wishes, and needs of the colonists themselves. They 
 were dated 1606, 1609, and 1612; respectively. 
 
 30. The winter of 1609-10 was known as the 
 <« Starving Time." The influence of Smith, the con- 
 trolling spirit of Jamestown, being. removed by his re- 
 turn to England, the colonists became a prey to 
 laziness, disease, and famine. In six months they 
 were reduced from 490 to 60. 
 
200 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 31. It was called by Governor Yeardley at James- 
 town, June 19, 1619. This was the origin of the 
 " House of Burgesses " in Virginia. 
 
 32. Twenty negroes were sold to the Jamestown col- 
 onists by the captain of a Dutch trading vessel in 1619. 
 Their labor was found so profitable in the cultivation 
 of tobacco that many others were afterward imported. 
 
 33. It was passed in 1651, and enforced in 1660. 
 It required that all colonial commerce should be car- 
 ried on in English vessels, and that all tobacco should 
 be shipped to England. 
 
 34. Governor Berkley, of Virginia, failing to pro- 
 vide sufficient defence against the Indians, the people 
 in 1676 proceeded against them under a popular leader 
 named Nathaniel Bacon. The Governor denounced 
 Bacon as a traitor, and refused him a commission. 
 Bacon marched against the Governor, driving him and 
 his party out of Jamestown. The rebellion was ended 
 by the death of Bacon. 
 
 35. The first, in 1622; the second, in 1644. 
 
 36. (a) Pocahontas was the daughter of the Indian 
 chief Powhatan. (6) She saved the life of Captain 
 Smith, the leader of the Jamestown colony, often 
 brought food to the colonists, and in 1613 married 
 John Rolfe, an English planter. Through her influence 
 the friendship of the Indians was secured to the Eng- 
 lish. 
 
 37. New York was settled in 1618, on Manhattan 
 Island by Dutch traders. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 201 
 
 38. Peter Minuit, Wouter Van Twiller, William 
 Kieft, and Peter Stuyvesant. 
 
 39. Delaware, under the name of New Sweden, wa ( . 
 settled at Wilmington by Swedes and Finns in 1638, 
 under the auspices of Oxenstiern, the minister of Gus- 
 tavus Adolphus. New Sweden was claimed by the 
 Dutch, and in 1652 the whole region was conquered 
 and added to New Netherland. 
 
 40. It was applied originally in reproach to the dis- 
 senters from the established church of England during 
 the reigns of James I. and Charles I. They professed 
 to follow the pure word of God, in opposition to all 
 traditions and human institutions and ceremonies. 
 
 41. (a) They were earnest, sober-minded people, 
 governed in all things by religious principles and their 
 convictions of duty, (b) For twelve years they had 
 been wanderers in Holland, without a home, without a 
 country. They longed for an asylum where they could 
 rear their children free from evil influences, and 
 worship God according to the dictates of their con- 
 sciences. 
 
 42. (a) Most were governed by a community inter- 
 est, that is, they shared the results of their labor in 
 common. The practice was soon abandoned, (b) 
 The only advantage it possessed was in keeping the 
 settlers together for mutual defence, but it encouraged 
 improvidence among the indolent. 
 
 43. Roger Williams, an eloquent minister, after ex- 
 citing many bitter discussions, was banished for advo- 
 cating greater freedom of thought and action than was 
 
202 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 tolerated by the majority. Mrs. Anne Hutchinson, 
 claiming special revelations from heaven, aroused such 
 violent and bitter controversy among the clergy that 
 she, too, was soon after banished. Quakers were 
 whipped, fined, sent out of the colony, and four were 
 executed. 
 
 44. (a) Massachusetts Bay, Plymouth, New Haven, 
 and Connecticut, (b) It was formed for protection 
 against the Indians, French, and Dutch. 
 
 45. It opened July 14, 1675. 
 
 46. Its cause was the jealousy of the Indians at the 
 encroachments of the whites and an attempt to exter- 
 minate them before they became too numerous. Many 
 settlers were massacred, but at length uniting their 
 forces and pursuing the Indians to their retreats, the 
 whites within a few months destroyed nearly the en- 
 tire force of savages. Philip was shot by a faithless 
 Indian. 
 
 47. Massachusetts, refusing to comply with the 
 provisions of the Navigation Act, Charles II. seized 
 upon her conduct as an act of disobedience, and made 
 her a royal province, appointing Sir Edmund Andros 
 as royal governor of New England. 
 
 48. The Salem witchcraft. 
 
 49. The first English settlers were from Massachu- 
 setts. The Dutch had previously established trading 
 posts along the Connecticut River. 
 
 50. The Pequod War was begun in 1637 by the 
 massacre of thirty whites. The principal battle was 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 203 
 
 on the Mystic River. The tribe perished in the action 
 of June 4, 1637. 
 
 51. Rhode Island was settled first by Roger Will- 
 iams, and later, by exiles from Massachusetts, taking 
 refuge there on account of religious persecutions. 
 
 52. It was " the first legal declaration of liberty of 
 conscience ever adopted in Europe or America." 
 
 53. Bigotry and religious intolerance prevailed 
 among all the dominant sects, both in Europe and 
 America, to such an extent that the weaker denomina- 
 tions found security from persecution only among the 
 wilds of America. 
 
 54. The Duke of York, afterwards James II., 
 claimed the territory by virtue of a grant made by his 
 brother Charles II. The colonists, composed largely 
 of English, grew restless under the stern rule of Gov- 
 ernor Stuyvesant, and longed for the freedom granted 
 the neighboring colony of Connecticut. An English 
 fleet appearing in the harbor, demanded the surrender, 
 and the Governor, unable to resist the threatened 
 atack, was forced to surrender. 
 
 55. By Puritans, Quakers, and Scotch Presbyte- 
 rians. This was doubtless due to the benevolence and 
 charity of its illustrious founder, William Penn, who 
 desired to establish a colony for the persecuted of all 
 sects and nations. 
 
 56. Faith in Christ was a necessary qualification for 
 voting and holding office; but no one believing in 
 in "Almighty God " should be molested in his relig- 
 ious practices. 
 
204 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 57. " It was the only treaty never* sworn to ai.d 
 the only one never broken." While the Indians 
 waged war almost continuously with other colonies, 
 they never shed a drop of Quaker blood. 
 
 58. Maryland was settled in 1634, at St. Mary's,, by 
 Lord Baltimore [Cecil Calvert], as a refuge for perse- 
 cuted Catholics. 
 
 59. It secured to all Christians liberty to worship 
 God according to the dictates of their own conscience. 
 
 60. The Toleration Act, passed by Rhode Island in 
 1647, gave protection to every kind of faith and wor- 
 ship, thus including the universally persecuted Jew, 
 while that of Maryland extended protection to all 
 forms of Christianity alone. 
 
 61. Claiborne, a member of the Jamestown Council, 
 having established trading posts in territory claimed 
 by both the Virginia colony and the representatives of 
 Lord Baltimore, refused to submit to the latter's 
 authority. Being convicted of murder and other 
 crimes, he fled from the province; but returning in 
 1637 with a large mob, he broke up the government. 
 Governor Calvert the next year regained possession of 
 his government. Order was soon restored, and Clai- 
 borne was driven from the colony. 
 
 62. During the wars of Cromwell the Protestants 
 gaining supremacy in the Maryland Assembly, de- 
 prived the Catholics of the protection of the laws. A 
 civil war ensued, which continued till Cromwell's death, 
 when the rights of Lord Baltimore were restored. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 205 
 
 63. Mason and Dixon's line separates Pennsylvania 
 from Maryland, Virginia and West Virginia. It was 
 surveyed by Charles Mason and Jeremiah Dixon, two 
 Erglish surveyors, between 1763 and 1767. 
 
 64. It was named after Charles IX. of France, by 
 John Ribault. 
 
 65. Clarendon and others to whom Charles II. had 
 granted the region known as Carolina, contemplated 
 the founding of a great empire. John Locke, the most 
 eminent philosopher of his time, was engaged to draft 
 a scheme and charter for the new province. This in- 
 strument, known in history as the " Grand Model," 
 gave almost unlimited power to a body of nobles, but 
 entirely overlooked the rights of the masses. Among 
 a people accustomed to the hardships of pioneer life 
 and compelled to govern themselves, there was no 
 room for such a code, and the proposed constitution 
 failed. 
 
 66. Georgia was founded by James Oglethorpe, in 
 1733, as a home for English debtors. 
 
 67. The size of farms was limited, women could not 
 inherit land, and the importation of rum and slaves 
 was prohibited. These prohibitions occasioned discon- 
 tent and impaired the financial prosperity of the colon- 
 ists to such an extent that the trustees, growing tired 
 of their charge, gave up their claim, and Georgia be- 
 came a royal province. 
 
 68. By French Huguenots. 
 
 60. Eliot, M-irquette, Allouez, Hennepin. 
 
906 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 70. Every right the people had enjoyed was denied 
 them, while their taxes were largely increased. Con- 
 trary to the wishes of the people, the Church of 
 England was established, and the meetings of the peo- 
 ple, except for the election of town officers, were pro- 
 hibited. 
 
 71. The Dutch Reformed Church was introduced 
 into New York about 1614; the Episcopal, 1608; the 
 Roman Catholic, in 1634; the Mennonites, in Penn- 
 sylvania, in 1692; the Tunkers or General Baptists, 
 1719; the Moravians, in 1741 ; the Shakers, in 1774; 
 the Wesley an Methodists, in 1766 ; the Universalists, 
 in 1760. 
 
 72. With few exceptions, every settlement made 
 generous provision for the education of the children. 
 
 73. King James having fled to France upon the 
 opening of the English Revolution of 1688, France 
 espoused his cause, and declared war against England. 
 The natural jealousies existing between the subjects of 
 these two rival powers soon developed hostilities 
 among the colonies. 
 
 74. The influence of the French was ever exerted 
 in winning the Indians to their side. The missionaries 
 of France converted many of the tribes to the Catholic 
 faith. French traders and settlers mingled and mar- 
 ried among the Indians, and in every relation affiliated 
 with them upon terms of far greater intimacy than did 
 the English. 
 
 75. The attacks and massacres of Schenectady and 
 Haverhill by the French and their Indian allies, from 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 207 
 
 which the colonists suffered heavily and the capture of 
 Port Royal, Acadia by the English colonists under Gov- 
 ernor Phipps. 
 
 76. The treaty of Ryswick, by which each party 
 held the territory it had at the beginning of the war. 
 
 77. Queen Anne's War, known in Europe as the 
 War of the Spanish Succession, was caused by the 
 jealousy of William III., at the growing power of the 
 Bourbon family. The colonies were at once involved, 
 and from 1702 to 1713 experienced all the horrors of 
 Indian barbarity. 
 
 78. The principal events of Queen Anne's War were 
 the capture of St. Augustine and St. Marks, by the 
 South Carolinians, the attack on Charleston by a 
 French fleet, the attack and massacre of Deerfield and 
 the capture of Port Royal. The war was terminated 
 by the treaty of Utrecht, by which Acadia and New- 
 foundland were ceded to England. 
 
 79. King George's War, caused oy the conflicting 
 territorial claims of France and England, opened in 
 1744, and continued four years. Louisburg, on Cape 
 Breton Island, was wrested from the French by the 
 British and Colonists, but by the treaty of Aix-la- 
 Chapelle, was restored to the French. 
 
 80. The bitterest feelings existed between the 
 French and English settlers engendered by the three 
 preceding wa^s. 
 
 81. The French occupied and claimed the Ohio and 
 Mississippi valleys, from the lakes to New Orleans. The 
 English were scattered along the Atlantic Coast 
 
208 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 between Maine and Florida, and extending westward 
 to the Alleghanies, but claimed the territory between 
 their western settlements and the Ohio River. 
 
 82. Washington was descended from an old English 
 family whose original name was Wessyngton, mem- 
 bers of which were prominent in different periods of 
 English history. His great-grandfather, who came to 
 America in 1657, was distinguished in the early Indian 
 wars. His father, Augustine Washington, died when 
 he [George] was eleven years old. 
 
 83. Washington by nature possessed a vigorous and 
 robust constitution, and excelled in the youthful sports 
 of his time. In his studies he was surpassed by none. 
 His manuscript-school books, still preserved, attest 
 the precision and order of his mind. Like most men 
 who have excelled in military tactics, he had a marked 
 fondness for mathematics. His motives and morals 
 were as pure as his patriotism was incorruptible. 
 
 84. The French having erected forts upon territory 
 claimed by the English in western Pennsylvania for 
 the purpose of menacing the English settlers and 
 breaking up the trade of the Ohio Company, Governor 
 Dinwiddie, under orders of the General Assembly of 
 Virginia, despatched Washington to inquire into the 
 cause of the measures the French had pursued, and to 
 ask that the forts be evacuated and the troops re- 
 moved. 
 
 85. The capture of the following: Fort du Quesne, 
 Louisburg, Crown Point and Ticonderoga, Niagara, and 
 Quebec. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 209 
 
 8G. (a) It commanded the Ohio Eiver and formed 
 the gateway of the west, (b) General Braddock. 
 (c) His force was defeated and himself killed, (d) 
 It was captured by Washington in 1758. 
 
 87. Generals Amherst and Wolf captured Louisburg 
 in 1758, Crown Point and Ticonderoga were evacuated 
 at the approach of General Amherst in 1759, and the 
 same year Niagara was taken by General Johnson. 
 
 88. The capture of Quebec by General Wolf. 
 
 89. (a) The French lost their entire American 
 possessions, — giving to England all east of the Missis- 
 sippi except two small islands, south of Newfoundland, 
 and ceding to Spain New Orleans and all her territory 
 west of the Mississippi. (6) England obtained con- 
 trol of all North America, except the south west, and 
 the glory of a renowned military conquest, (c) The 
 Colonists lost 30,000 men and spent $16,000,000, a 
 third only of which was returned by the mother coun- 
 try; but the burdens of the war gave them the 
 strength, courage, and independence which developed 
 the revolution. 
 
 90. Washington, Gates, Arnold, Morgan, Putnam, 
 Montgomery, and Stark? 
 
 91. About two and a half millions. 
 
 92. Royal, Charter and Proprietary. 
 
 93. Harvard, William and Mary, Yale, Princeton, 
 King's, Brown, Queen's, Dartmouth, and Hampden 
 Sidney. William and Mary was the only college which 
 received a donation from the English government- 
 taking its name from its principal donors. 
 
 14 
 
210 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 94. At Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1639. The 
 " Boston News Letter," issued in 1704, was the first 
 permanent newspaper. 
 
 95. The people of NeAV England were until the 
 "Revolution more homogeneous than those of other 
 colonies. The influence of the early Puritans, with 
 their rigid adherence to the literal interpretation of the 
 Scriptures, shaped every motive of public and private 
 action ; gaming, racing, theaters, and nearly every form 
 of frivolity was prohibited. The middle colonies, 
 though peopled by representatives from nearly every 
 country of northern Europe, were essentially Dutch in 
 their social customs. While the severest laws of mor- 
 ality were inculcated and enforced, the people enjoyed 
 greater freedom and means of pleasure than their 
 northern neighbors. The Southern colonies being; 
 more sparsely settled, were less rigidly governed by 
 those religious and sumptuary laws peculiar to munici- 
 pal corporations, for which the New England colonies 
 were early distinguished. Greater freedom of conduct 
 and luxury of living prevailed than elsewhere, though 
 church attendance was obligatory in most of the 
 Southern colonies, as in New England. 
 
 9G. Oct. 12, 1492, Columbus discovered San Sal- 
 vador; May 23, 1607, Jamestown settled; June 28, 
 1619, first Representative Assembly in America; Dec. 
 
 21, 1620, landing of the Pilgrims at Plymouth; Feb. 
 
 22, 1732, Washington born. 
 
 97. De Soto discovered the Mississippi River, 1541 ; 
 Leonard Calvert colonized Maryland, 1634; Roger 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 211 
 
 Williams settled Rhode Island, 1636; D'Iberville 
 founded Mobile, 1702; Sir Win. Pepperell, in com- 
 mand of colonists, captured Louisburg, 1745. 
 
 98. (a) In 1696. (b) First exported in 1698. 
 
 99. In 1688 or 1690 at Kaskaskia, 111., by the 
 French. 
 
 100. With few exceptions, the early governors of 
 Virginia were aristocratic and tyrannical, and caring 
 nothing for the masses, opposed every measure calcu- 
 lated to elevate the people. Governor Berkley is cred- 
 ited with saying, "I thank God there are no free 
 schools nor printing presses here, and I hope we shall 
 not have them these hundred years." 
 
 101. With the utmost disregard for Colonial inter- 
 ests, the government sought to stifle with various re- 
 strictions the manufacturing and commercial spirit of 
 the colonists. 
 
 102. The only books published in America before 
 the Revolution were a few histories, religious treatises, 
 and political essays. Up to this time no great poem 
 or work of fiction had been produced in America. 
 
 103. English, Dutch, Scotch, Irish, French, Ne- 
 groes, Germans, Swedes, and a limited number of 
 Finns, Norwegians and Spaniards. 
 
 104. They were descendants of men who had fled 
 from oppression, and braved and suffered the hard- 
 ships of the wilderness for the blessings of civil and 
 religious liberty. They possessed a freedom, inher- 
 ited from these ancestors, as responsible as it was en- 
 joyable. The incompetence of the British officers and 
 
212 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 the heroism and prowess of their own officers and men 
 during the wars with the French had shown them the 
 power which they possessed within themselves. 
 
 105. 1st. The Navigation Act. 2nd. Writs of 
 Assistance, authorizing custom-house officers to break 
 open stores, dwellings, and ships, in search of mer- 
 chandise on which it was suspected no duty had been 
 paid. 3rd. The Stamp Act, requiring all legal in- 
 struments of writing, as notes, deeds, bonds, and even 
 newspapers, almanacs, and other printed matter to be 
 stamped. 4th. The Boston Massacre. 5th. The 
 Boston Tea Party, and the Boston Port Bill. 6th. 
 The Trade Restrictions imposed upon the colonies 
 by the English government. 7th. The General 
 Treatment of the settlers as an inferior class of 
 people. 
 
 106. Taxation Without Representation. The 
 British government attempted to tax the colonies with- 
 out their consent in order to raise money to defray the 
 expenses of the French and Indian War. 
 
 107. James Otis, in Boston, when he said in a 
 speech in reference to the Writs of Assistance, "To 
 my dying day I will oppose, with all the powers and 
 faculties God has given me, all such instruments of 
 slavery on the one hand, and villainy on the other." 
 
 108. The houses of stamp officers were mobbed, 
 prominent officials were hung in effigy; people agreed 
 to use no article of British manufacture ; associations, 
 called the " Sons of Liberty," were formed for the 
 purpose of resisting the stamp law The day upon 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 213 
 
 wnich the stamp act was to go into effect " was ob- 
 served as a day of mourning," and in everyway pos- 
 sible the people manifested their determination to 
 resist the oppression of the British Government. 
 
 109. (a) The Mutiny Act required the colonies to 
 provide British soldiers with quarters and supplies. 
 (6) The government, in order to quell the rebellious 
 spirit of the colonists determined to place a military 
 force among them, (c) The people were indignant ; 
 they thought it bad enough to be taxed, but to be com- 
 pelled to feed and shelter their oppressors seemed be- 
 yond all endurance. Most of the colonial assembliea 
 absolutely refused to furnish the shelter or subsist- 
 ence. 
 
 110. Faneuil Hall was erected by Peter Faneuil in 
 1742. It originally comprised a market place on the 
 ground floor and a town hall above. It was the ren- 
 dezvous of the Revolutionary spirits for which reason 
 it has been called the " Cradle of Liberty." 
 
 111. The Tories supported the British government, 
 the Whigs opposed it. 
 
 112. By the Boston Port Bill, passed by Parliament, 
 by which ships were forbidden to take in or discbarge 
 their cargoes at the port of Boston. 
 
 113. The first was convened at Albany, N. Y., in 
 1754, for the purpose of adopting a plan of union 
 against the French and Indians. The second, repre- 
 senting nine colonies, met in New York, October, 1765, 
 for the purpose of remonstrating against the Stamp 
 Act. The third, known as the " First Continental 
 
214 ANSWERS TO <8UKSTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 Congress," met in Philadelphia, Sept. 5, 1774, to con- 
 cert a plan of action and union against the tyrannical 
 measures of Parliament. 
 
 114. (a) The battle of Lexington April 19, 1775. 
 (5) The capture of military stores collected at Con- 
 cord, (c) The complete union of the colonies. 
 
 115. At Philadelphia, May 10, 1775. It voted to 
 raise 20,000 men and appointed General Washington 
 sommander-in-chief . A petition to the King was or- 
 dered and sent, but George III., regarding them as 
 rebels, refused to be petitioned. 
 
 116. To prevent the British using Canada as a ren- 
 dezvous and base of supply, an expedition under Gen- 
 erals Schuyler, Montgomery, and Arnold was sent to 
 occupy the province. St. Johns and Montreal were 
 captured by Montgomery; but in the attack on Que- 
 bec, the Americans were repulsed with the loss of 
 General Montgomery, and the expedition proved a 
 failure. 
 
 117. British evacuation of Boston; Attack on Fort 
 Moultrie ; Battles of Long Island, White Plains, and 
 Trenton. 
 
 118. By Eichard Henry Lee, June 7, 1776. 
 
 119. (a) By Thomas Jefferson, (b) July 4, 1776, 
 by a majority of one colony, (c) By all members 
 present, — 56. (d) It was everywhere in the States 
 just formed greeted with the firing of cannon, the 
 ringing of bells, and other demonstrations of exulta- 
 tion. 
 
 120. In the battles of Trenton and Princeton. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 215 
 
 121. La Fayette, Barons de Kalb and Steuben, 
 Count Pulaski, and Thaddeus Kosciusko. 
 
 122. (a) Burgoyne's purpose was to force his way 
 from Canada to New York, and thus cut off New Eng- 
 land from the other colonies. (6) His force consisted 
 of 10,000 regulars, Canadians and Indians. 
 
 123. By the two battles of Saratoga, Sept. 19 and 
 Oct. 7, 1777, in the latter of which he was so com- 
 pletely worsted that he was compelled to surrender his 
 entire army. 
 
 124. Generals Schuyler, Gates, Lincoln, Arnold, 
 Morgan, Stark, and Kosciusko. 
 
 125. June 20, 1782. 
 
 126. While Washington was encamped at Valley 
 Forge, using every means to keep the army together, 
 through that long, gloomy winter, intrigues were on foot 
 to supersede him in command by friends of Gates, whose 
 brilliant success was contrasted with the late reverses 
 of Washington. These were principally conducted by 
 one General Conway. So great was the indignation 
 upon this becoming known that the instigators were 
 ashamed to acknowledge the part they had taken in 
 the intrigue. 
 
 127. In a letter written by Washington at Valley 
 Forge, he says: " Without arrogance, or the smallest 
 deviation from truth, it may be said that no history, 
 now extant, can furnish an instance of an army suffer- 
 ing such hardships as ours has done, bearing them with 
 the same patience and fortitude." 
 
216 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS OV U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 128. The untiring exertions of Benjamin Franklin 
 and the surrender of Burgoyrie. 
 
 129. Without the assistance of France in money, 
 ships, and troops, it is scarcely probable that the colo- 
 nies would have succeeded without a struggle greatly 
 prolonged. 
 
 130. Princeton, Bennington, Brandywine, Saratoga, 
 Germantown. 
 
 131. («) In 1775, and in each year following till 
 1780, Congress issued bills of credit, called continen- 
 tal money, till the amount reached $200,000,000. (b) 
 For want of confidence of the people in the redemp- 
 tion of these bills, and the flooding of the country 
 with counterfeits by the British, this money depreci- 
 ated in value till $100 in bills were worth but a dollar 
 in specie. 
 
 132. Marion, Sumter, Pickens, Lee and Hayne. 
 
 133. (a) Indebtedness and disgrace caused by ex- 
 travagance, dissipation, and gambling, and charges re- 
 sulting in a reprimand by Washington, inflamed him 
 to resentment, (b) While it temporarily grieved the 
 Americans and caused apprehensions of more serious 
 results, it united the army and people in a more vigor- 
 ous effort in expelling the British, (c) His reward 
 was £6,315, a colonelcy in the English army, and the 
 contempt of everybody. 
 
 131. (a) The revolt of the Pennsylvania and New 
 Jersey troops on account of non-payment for service 
 and insufficient supplies and clothing, (b) Agents of 
 Sir Henry Clinton offered the mutineers large rewards 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 217 
 
 to join the British army ; but while they were in revolt, 
 they were not traitors ; they arrested the emissaries 
 and gave them up as spies. 
 
 135. Battle of Monmouth, arrival of the French 
 fleet, capture of Savannah by the British. 
 
 136. Stony Point, PaulJones's Naval battle, repulse 
 of the Americans and French at Savannah. 
 
 137. Robert Morris of Pennsylvania. 
 
 138. He never gained a decided victory, but his de- 
 feats had all the effect of -success. Again, it is to be 
 noticed that the British retreated after each victory 
 they claimed, and only pursued the Americans after 
 their defeat by Morgan at the Cowpens. 
 
 139. Surrender of Charleston to the British, battles 
 of Hanging Rock, Camden, and King's Mountain. 
 
 140. Battle of the Cowpens, Greene's Retreat, bat- 
 tles of Guilford Court House, and Eutaw Springs, and 
 Surrender of Cornwallis, Oct. 19, 1781. 
 
 141. («) By the treaty of Paris, September 3, 
 1783. (b) John Adams, Benjamin Franklin, John 
 Jay, Henry Laurens, and Thomas Jefferson, though 
 the latter did not serve. 
 
 142. Many of the officers at the close of the Revo- 
 lution, doubted the ability of the people to form an 
 efficient government; and many and urgent were the 
 proposals made to Washington that a monarchy be es- 
 tablished and he accept the crown. Washington indig- 
 nantly repelled the offer. 
 
 143. (a) The "Articles of Confederation " consti- 
 tuted the bond of union of the States which declared 
 
218 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 themselves independent of Great Britain, (b) They 
 were adopted by Congress, November 15, 1777. (c) 
 According to their own provisions they were not bind- 
 ing until ratified by all the States, which did not occur 
 till March 1, 1781. (d) By these articles Gongress 
 had power to declare war and contract debts, but could 
 not raise a dollar by taxation. It could advise all 
 things, but could enforce nothing. 
 
 144. The manifest failure of the Articles of Con- 
 federation, the deranged condition of the finances of 
 the country, and the numerous controversies verging 
 upon open hostilities between several of the States, con- 
 vinced the people that immediate steps must be taken 
 to revise the bond by which the States were united. 
 After several attempts to secure a meeting of represen- 
 tatives from the several States, on May 25, 1787, the 
 delegates present organized by electing George Wash- 
 ington president of the Convention, and proceeded at 
 once to the work in hand. The idea of revision was 
 early abandoned ; and after a deliberation of four 
 months and three days, the Constitution as we have it 
 to-day, except the Amendments and the manner of 
 electing the President, was published to the people. 
 
 145. (a) Federalists and Anti-Federalists, (ft). 
 The Federalists favored the Constitution and sought to 
 increase the powers of the national government, and 
 thus strengthen the Union at home and abroad. The 
 Anti-Federalists opposed the Constitution on the 
 ground that it gave too much authority to Congress; 
 thus weakening the power of the States and migh'. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 219 
 
 ditimately lead to the establishment of a monarchy, 
 (c) Alexander Hamilton, John Jay, and James Madi- 
 son were among the most prominent advocates of the 
 Constitution. 
 
 146. (a) March 4, 1789. (b) North Carolina and 
 Rhode Island, (c) George Washington, by a unani- 
 mous vote. 
 
 147. The change of occupation, associations and 
 general practice of the people produced a greater 
 looseness in morals and manners. That high sense of 
 integrity which had existed before the war, gave place 
 to more slippery notions of honesty and honor. The 
 atheistical philosophy, which was preparing the way 
 for the horrors of the French revolution, spread over 
 the country and threatened to wreck the religious sen- 
 timents of the people. Commerce was entirely ne- 
 glected, but cut off from foreign supply, the people 
 were compelled to look to their own ingenuity for the 
 manufacture of those articles needed in the struggle, 
 and for the usual avocations of life. 
 
 148. Thomas Jefferson, Secretary of State (then 
 styled Secretary of Foreign Affaire); Henry Knox, 
 Secretary of War; Alexander Kamilton, Secretary of 
 the Treasury; and Edmund Randolph, Attorney 
 General. 
 
 149. The treasury was empty and the government 
 without credit. The frontier was ravaged by hostile 
 Indians. Spain refused the navigation of the Missis- 
 sippi, and England ignored all commercial treaties thus 
 far proposed. 
 
220 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON IT. S. HISTORY. 
 
 150. (a) Hamilton proposed the payment of the 
 national debt, foreign and domestic, and the assump- 
 tion of the State debts contracted during the war. 
 (b) These measures at once gave confidence in the 
 stability and integrity of the government. 
 
 151. At the second session of Congress an act was 
 passed fixing the seat of government after the year 
 1800 on the Potomac River. In accordance with this 
 act, Maryland and Virginia ceded to theU. S. a tract 
 of land 10 miles square which was termed the " Dis- 
 trict of Columbia." The City of Washington was 
 founded on the Maryland side in 1792, Washington 
 himself laid the cornerstone of thecapitol. The Vir- 
 ginia portion, containing forty square miles, was re- 
 ceded to that State in 1846. 
 
 152. (a) The Republican and Federalist parties. 
 (&) Thomas Jefferson and Edmund Randolph were the 
 the leaders of the Republican party, Alexander Ham- 
 ilton and John Adams of the Federalists. 
 
 153. A majority of the people, grateful for the aid 
 of France in the American Revolution, fervently de- 
 sired the success of the French Republic. The Presi- 
 dent considering the true policy of this country was 
 non-interference in the affairs of Europe, issued a 
 proclamation of neutrality. 
 
 154. («) The Alien and Sedition laws passed in 
 1798. (b) The Alien law authorized the President to 
 order any alien, whom he should judge dangerous to 
 the United States, to leave the country. Under the 
 Sedition law, any person could be punished, by fine 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 221 
 
 or imprisonment, for speaking, writing, or publishing 
 anything false or malicious against the government, 
 the President, or Congress. 
 
 155. The legislatures of Virginia and Kentucky, in 
 response to the passage of the Alien and Sedition laws, 
 asserted that a State had a right to judge for itself 
 how far the national authority should be considered 
 binding:. 
 
 15G. Louisiana was purchased from France in 1803 
 for fifteen million dollars. 
 
 157. In August, 1807, by Robert Fulton, who made 
 the voyage from New York to Albany in the first 
 steamboat, the Clermont. 
 
 158. The aggressions committed by British cruisers 
 in executing the " Orders in Council," in maintaining 
 the right of search for alleged British subjects, and the 
 impressment of American seamen, often taken from 
 American vessels. 
 
 159. (a) The country was poorly prepared for 
 war. The army numbered but ten thousand men, 
 while to contend with the formidable naval power of 
 England, which included a thousand vessels, we could 
 boast but ten frigates and a few old worthless gunboats. 
 (6) The Federalists. 
 
 160. To invade and conquer Canada. 
 
 161. The general result of the military expeditions 
 into Canada was disastrous to the Americans, while the 
 naval engagements were almost without exception suc- 
 cessful. 
 
222 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 162. The Army of the West, under General Har- 
 rison, for the recovery of Michigan ; the Army of the 
 Center, under General Dearborn, for the invasion of 
 Canada by the way of Niagara River, and the Army 
 of the North, under General Wade Hampden, for the 
 protection of the northern frontier and ultimate 
 cooperation with the other armies in the invasion of 
 Canada. 
 
 163. Though New England generally opposed the 
 War of 1812, Massachusetts took the lead, considering 
 it ruinous to the interests of the country, wrong in its 
 origin, and in its progress, characterized by the gross- 
 est mismanagement. 
 
 164. (a) A convention of delegates from most of 
 the New England States, which met at Hartford, Ct., 
 Dec. 15, 1814. (b) The object was to consider the 
 condition of the Stales represented with reference to 
 the prosecution of the war. (c) Beyond the recom- 
 mendation of several amendments nothing was done. 
 
 165. Perry's Victory, battles of the Thames, 
 Lundy's Lane, Plattsburg, and New Orleans. 
 
 166. By the treaty of Ghent, Dec. 24, 1814. 
 
 167. While the terms of the treaty left the questions 
 of the war unsettled, the claims of England were 
 never renewed. The United States gained the respect 
 of European nations and at once took her place among 
 the leading powers of the world. 
 
 168. Restoration of the public credit; war with the 
 Indians in the Northwest Territory; Jay's Treaty; 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTOki". 223 
 
 admission to the Union of Vermont, Kentucky, and 
 Tennessee ; and the invention of the cotton gin. 
 
 169. Hostilities with France, death of Washington, 
 and removal of the national capital to Washington. 
 
 170. The Federalist party had become so weakened 
 by its opposition to the War of 1812, that Monroe, 
 the Kepublican candidate, was elected almost unani- 
 mously. 
 
 171. (a) The Whig party succeeded the Federalist ; 
 while the Kepublican party became known as the 
 Democratic party, (b) The Whigs advocated a pro- 
 tective tariff and a general system of internal im- 
 provements ; the Democrats opposed these. 
 
 172. The Seminole war; the purchase of Florida ; 
 the admission of Mississippi, Illinois, Alabama, Maine, 
 and Missouri into the Union ; adoption of the "Mis- 
 souri Compromise " and La Fayette's visit. 
 
 173. First ship built in New England — the " Bless- 
 ing of the Bay," July 4, 1631 ; the Declaration of In- 
 dependence, July 4, 1776; death of Adams and Jeffer- 
 son, July 4, 1826 ; death of James Monroe, July 4, 
 1831 ; surrender of Vicksburg, July 4, 1863. 
 
 174. Pending the admission of Missouri, violent 
 debate arose on the question whether it should be a 
 free or a slave State. It was finally agreed in 1820 
 that Missouri might come in as a slave State, but that 
 slavery should be prohibited in all territory, belonging 
 to the United States, west of the Mississippi, and 
 north of parallel 36° 30'. 
 
224 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 175. In 1819, the American Government agreeing 
 
 7 DO 
 
 to pay to citizens of the United States five million 
 dollars, due them from Spain, and give up all claim to 
 the present State of Texas. 
 
 176. In President Monroe's annual message, in 
 1823, alluding to the South American colonies, re- 
 cently recognized as sovereign powers, he declared 
 that " the American continents, by the free and inde- 
 pendent position which they have assumed and main- 
 tained, are henceforth not to be considered as subjects 
 for future colonization by any European powers." 
 
 177. Four candidates were in the field, and no one 
 receiving a majority of the electoral vote, John Q. 
 Adams was elected by the House of Representatives. 
 
 178. Both were early enlistled in their country's 
 cause. Both were bold, ardent, unyielding patriots. 
 They were both members of the committee appointed 
 to prepare the Declaration of Independence, and they 
 formed the sub-committee appointed by the other 
 members to make the draft of it. While Jefferson 
 was the author of the Declaration, Adams was its greaf 
 advocate on the floor of Congress. Both had beer 
 ministers abroad, both vice-presidents, and both 
 presidents, and both died on July 4, 1826 
 
 179. For unprecedented internal improvements. 
 During Mr. Adams's presidency the Erie Canal was 
 opened, in 1827 the first railroad was completed in 
 Quincy, Mass.; though steam locomotives were not 
 u^Uill 1829. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 225 
 
 180. The removal of officials belonging to an oppo- 
 site party and appointing political adherents. 
 
 181. France had acknowledged the claim of the 
 United States to live million dollars, but refusing to 
 make the payment, President Jackson proposed that 
 reprisals should be made upon the French property 
 until the claim was paid. 
 
 182. In 1832. 
 
 183 The political leaders of South Carolina, chief 
 of whom were Robert Y. Hayne, senator from that 
 State, and John C. Calhoun, then vice-president, held 
 that it is the right of a State to determine for itself 
 how far it would yield obedience to the laws of the 
 United States. South Carolina asserting the principle 
 of a protective tariff to be unjust and unconstitutional, 
 called a convention, which, November 24, 1832, passed 
 an ordinance of nullification, declaring t ae tariff laws 
 null and void. Preparations were mad to resist the 
 enforcement of these laws in that State, but the 
 prompt action of the President, and a compromise 
 tariff passed by Congress, averted the threatened 
 calamity. 
 
 184. 1st. The flooding of the country with a large 
 amount of paper currency by the banks holding the 
 public funds, thus favoring an unwarrantable spirit of 
 speculation. 2nd. The withdrawal of the surplus 
 public funds from the banks to be distributed among 
 the States, causing a sudden contraction of the specie 
 circulation from the inability of the banks to meet the 
 demand. 3rd. The President's specie circular, order- 
 
 15 
 
226 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 ing payment for public land? to be made in gold and 
 silver. 4th. Heavy importations, requiring p^rcsnt 
 in gold. 
 
 185. In 1842, by Daniel Webster and Lord Ash- 
 burton. 
 
 186. In vetoing the measures of the party which 
 had elected him to office. 
 
 187. 1st. That Texas should adopt a constitution, 
 and lay it before Congress on or before January 1, 
 1846. 2nd. That all mines, minerals, fortifications, 
 arms, navy, etc., should be ceded to the United Scates, 
 3rd. That new States might hereafter be formed out 
 of said territory. 
 
 188. First, an unwillingness to involve the countoy 
 in a war with Mexico, owing to unsettled disputes 
 regarding the boundary of Texas ; and, second, anti- 
 slavery men opposed its annexation on the ground 
 that Texas being slave territory, its admission would 
 extend the area of slavery. 
 
 189. («) The United States founded their claim to 
 Oregon upon the expeditions and explorations of Cap- 
 tain Gray, in 1792, and Lewis and Clark in 1804-5, 
 and on the purchase from Spain of her rights to that 
 territory. The English based their claim upon the 
 operation of British fur companies within the terri- 
 tory, (b) The present boundary was established by 
 treaty in 1846. 
 
 190. (ft) The annexation of Texas, (b) By an 
 action in which Captain Thornton, with some fifty dra- 
 goons, was captured, April 26, 1846, though war was 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 227 
 
 not formally declared till May 11. (c) Till February 
 2, 1848. (d) By the treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo, 
 (e) The United States gained a vast territory, extend- 
 ing south to the Gila River and west to the Pacific, 
 and agreed to pay Mexico fifteen million dollars, and 
 to assume her debts due to American citizens to the 
 amount of three million more. 
 
 191. All the important battles. 
 
 192. (a) 1st. The people of the slave States con- 
 tended that the territory acquired by the blood and trea- 
 sure of the whole Union from Mexico should be open to 
 slaveholders with their slaves as well as with their 
 other property. 2nd. California asked admission as a 
 free State, although a portion of her territory lay 
 south of the proposed line of compromise in which 
 slavery should be permitted. 3rd. Petitions were 
 pouring in from the north praying for the abolition of 
 slavery in the District of Columbia. 4th„ The south 
 was greatly exasperated by the assistance rendered 
 fugitive slaves to escape. 5th. Texas set up a claim 
 to a part of the acquired territory, which if allowed, 
 would extend slavery to the region claimed. (/>) By 
 the passage of the Omnibus Bill. 
 
 193. 1st. California was to be admitted as a free 
 State. 2nd. Utah and New Mexico were to be formed 
 as territories without any provision concerning slavery. 
 3rd. Texas was to be paid ten million dollars to give up 
 her claim on New Mexico. 4th. The slave trade was 
 to be abolished in the District of Columbia. 5th. A 
 Fugitive Slave Law was to be enacted providing for 
 
228 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON TJ. S. HISTORY. 
 
 the return to their owners of slaves escaping to a free 
 State. 
 
 194. (a) The Kansas-Nebraska Bill provided for 
 the organization of two territories — Kansas and 
 Nebraska, in which the question whether they should 
 be free or slave, should be determined in each territory 
 by its inhabitants. (6) Its author was Stephen A. 
 Douglas, (c) Its legal effect was the repeal of the 
 Missouri Compromise, (d) Its political effect was 
 the most bitter sectional strife the country had known. 
 
 195. The rescinding of the Missouri Compromise, 
 by the passage of the Kansas-Nebraska Bill in May, 
 1*855. 
 
 196. (1.) The federalists (2.) Republicans. 
 (3.) Democrats. (4.) Whigs. J5.) "Free Soilers. 
 (6.) Republicans (opposed to the extension of 
 slavery). (7.) Americans or Know-Nothings. (8., 
 Constitutional Union Party. ( 9. ) Liberal Republicans. 
 (10.) National Greenbackers. (11.) People's Party. (12) 
 Prohibition. (13.) Woman's National Rights. (14.) 
 Populists. (15.) Silver Republican. (16.) Socialist. 
 
 197. The repeal of the Missouri Compromise, civil 
 war in Kansas, and treaty with Japan. 
 
 198. (a) Dred Suott and his wife were slaves 
 belonging to a United States army surgeon, who took 
 them into Illinois and afterwards to United States 
 territory north of the Missouri Compromise line. 
 Claiming their freedom on the ground that they had 
 been carried into free territory by their master, the 
 United States Supreme Court, in 1857, through Chief- 
 Justice Taney, declared that slave-owners might take 
 their slaves into any State of the Uni^n without for- 
 
ANSWERS TO yJESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 229 
 
 feiting authority over them, (b) At the north it 
 produced great indignation, the effect boing it was 
 considered, the removal of the last barrier to the legal 
 extension of slavery throughout the country. The 
 people of the south regarded it as only a right guaran- 
 teed them by the Constitution. 
 
 199. The southern leaders declared after the election 
 of Mr. Lincoln that he was a sectional candidate, 
 pledged to the overthrow of slavery, and assuming the 
 right of secession, declared that its exercise was nec- 
 essary to protect them from aggression on the part of 
 the Federal Government. 
 
 200. South Carolina, Mississippi, Florida, Alabama, 
 Georgia, Louisiana and Texas, organized the govern- 
 ment; Virginia, Arkansas, Tennessee, and North 
 Carolina, entered the confederation later in the spring. 
 
 201. (a) April 14, 1861, by the capture of Fort 
 Sumter, by the Secessionists. (6) April 26, 1865, 
 by the surrender of Johnston's army to Sherman, 
 though the rebel forces west of the Mississippi did not 
 surrender till May 26. 
 
 202. Their interest in the cotton product of the 
 South, together with their jealousy of the growing 
 power -of United States, caused them to accord to the 
 Southern Confederacy the rights of belligerents, and 
 to furnish them aid in the way of arms and money. 
 
 203. With the exception of the victories of the 
 Union army in West Virginia, the occupancy of Mis- 
 souri by Union forces, and the capture of Hatteras 
 Inlet, North Carolina, and the forts at Port Royal 
 
230 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U.S. HISTORY. 
 
 Entrance, South Carolina, by the Union navy and 
 army, the military advantage was entirely with the 
 Confederates. 
 
 204. 1st. To confine the military operations within 
 the Confederate States. 2nd. To enforce the block- 
 ade of the Southern ports. 3rd. To open the Mis- 
 sissippi River. 4th. To capture Richmond, the 
 Confederate capital. 
 
 205. The result of the battle cf Bull Run convinced 
 the Northern people that the preservation of the Union 
 could be accomplished only by the most gigantic 
 struggle. After this battle extraordinary efforts, 
 extreme measures and unflinching determination char- 
 acterized every act of the people, the government and 
 the army till the great work was completed. 
 
 206. The Union victories of 1862 were Fort Donel- 
 son, Pea Ridge, Shiloh, Antietam, Iuka and Murfrees- 
 boro; the principal Confederate victories were the 
 Seven-Days' battles before Richmond, Second Battle 
 of Bull Run, Cedar Mountain and Fredricksburg. 
 
 207. The Union army numbered about 700,000 
 men, while that of the Confederate was about half this 
 number. 
 
 208. («) January 1, 1863, by President Lincoln. 
 (b) It included all slaves in the insurgent States 
 except such parts of Louisiana and Virginia as were 
 under national authority, (c) As the legitimate 
 issue of the rebellion. 
 
 209. (a) Two. (6) The first was checked by the 
 battle of Antietam, Sept. 17, 1862 ; the second by the 
 battle of Gettysburg, July \,J2, and 3 S 1863. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 231 
 
 210. (a) July 1, 2, 3, and 4, 1863. (b) The battle 
 of Gettysburg and surrender of Vicksburg, July 4, by 
 which the Confederates lost in killed, wounded, and 
 prisoners, 60,000 men. 
 
 211. Chickamauga and Chancellorsville. 
 
 212. To divide the Confederacy and ultimately to 
 cooperate in the attack on Richmond from the South. 
 
 213. 1st. Ignorance of the real intentions of the 
 Southern leaders. 2nd. Absence of any definite 
 preparation in the beginning. 3rd. Want of sufficient 
 number of trained officers. 4th The prudence, tact, 
 and military skill of the Confederate officers and valor 
 of the Southern soldiers, 5th. The need of a com- 
 manding officer for the first three years, regulating the 
 movements of the different armies for the accom- 
 plishment of a definite purpose. 
 
 214. The capture of Port Royal Entrance, the bat- 
 tle between the Monitor and the Merrimac, the de- 
 struction of the Alabama by the Kearsarge, and the 
 capture of the forts in Mobile Bay by Fairagut. 
 
 215. Irwin McDowell, George B. McClellan, John 
 Pope, Ambrose E. Burnside, Joseph Hooker, George 
 G. Meade, and U. S. Grant. 
 
 216. While thousands of men were fighting for the 
 preservation of the Union in the national armies, there 
 were many in the North who sympathized with the 
 Southern insurgents. These, with emissaries from the 
 South, too cowardly to enter the ranks, sought every 
 opportunity to thwart the efforts of the government in 
 subduing the rebellion. During the draft for troops 
 
232 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 in New York and elsewhere, forcible resistance was at- 
 tempted resulting in terrible riots, causing the destruc- 
 tion of millions of property and many lives. 
 
 217. 2,690,000 men. 
 
 218. («) Miy 1, 1865, when the number under 
 arms was 1,000,000 men. (b) The daily expense at 
 this time was $3,500,000 per day. 
 
 219. Including pensions up to 1883, the amount was 
 not far from $4,000,000,000. 
 
 220. The North emerged from the war richer and 
 stronger than ever before ; while the South was re- 
 duced to poverty and greatly diminished in numbers. 
 
 221. 1st. By a system of internal revenue, as taxes 
 on incomes, manufactures, etc. 2nd. By the issuing 
 of $500,000,000 treasury notes as a circulating medium. 
 3rd. By loans of various forms, for which the bonds 
 of the U.S. were given. 
 
 222. By the 13th Amendment, declared adopted by 
 the States as a part of the Constitution, December 18, 
 1865. 
 
 223. 1st. Equal civil rights shall be guaranteed to 
 all, without regard to race or color. 2nd. Represen- 
 tation in each State shall be in proportion to the number 
 of voters. 3rd. No man who broke his civil oath to 
 engage in rebellion shall hold office, or vote for presi- 
 dent till permitted by special act of Congress. 4th. 
 The national debt, including bounties and pensions to 
 soldiers, shall be held inviolable. 5th. The rebel 
 debt shall be held illegal and void. 6th. No compen- 
 sation shall be allowed for emancipated slaves. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 233 
 
 224. By general amnesty and pardon. 
 
 225. By military governors appointed by the Presi- 
 dent, because, according to the plan of reconstruction, 
 their own State governments were declared merely 
 provisional. 
 
 226. Troubles growing out of the difference of 
 opinion between President Johnson and Congress re- 
 specting the " readmission of the seceded States," 
 occasioned much bitterness of feeling between Johnson 
 and that body. No less than seventeen bills submitted 
 for the President's signature, were returned with his 
 veto — most of which were afterwards passed by the 
 requisite two-thirds majority of both houses. Finally, 
 upon the President's removing Mr. Stanton, Secre- 
 tary of War, without concurrence of the Senate, the 
 House of Representatives by a vote of 126 to 47 im- 
 peached Andrew Johnson, President of the United 
 States, of high crimes and misdemeanors in office. 
 The President was acquitted, but only by one vote. 
 
 227. The American government claimed reparation 
 from the English government for depredations com- 
 mitted by the Alabama and other English-built-and- 
 manned privateers during the Civil War. The refusal 
 of the English government to pay the damages caused 
 by these vessels, produced much bitter feeling, and 
 even threatened war. A tribunal consisting of five 
 arbitrators from different nations, acting under the 
 provisions of the treaty of Washington, met in Geneva, 
 Switzerland, and on Sept. 14, 1872, awarded the sum 
 of 15V2 million dollars in gold to be paid by Great 
 
234 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. 8. HISTORY. 
 
 Britain to the United States, for the satisfaction of all 
 the claims " known as the Alabama claims." 
 
 228. Both parties claiming the victory, Congress 
 agreed to refer the contest to a joint electoral commis- 
 sion, composed of five senators, five representatives, 
 and five judges of the Supreme Court This commis- 
 sion decided that 185 electoral votes had been cast for 
 Hayes and Wheeler, and 184forTilden and Hendricks. 
 
 229. John Adams, Thomas Jefferson, Martin Van 
 Bnren, John Tyler, Millard Fillmore, Andrew Johnson, 
 Chester A. Arthur, Theodore Roosevelt. 
 
 230. Harrison, Taylor, Lincoln, Garfield, McKinley 
 231. 
 
 Elected Inaugu. IZtksln 
 
 Presidents. from. Party. rated. office 
 
 ♦George Washington Virginia Federal 1789t 8 
 
 §John Adams Massachusetts Federal 1797 4 
 
 *§Thomas Jefferson Virginia Republican — 1801t 8 
 
 ♦James Madison Virginia Republican 1809f 8 
 
 ♦James Monroe Virginia Republican 1817f 8 
 
 John Quincy Adams Massachusetts — Whig 1825 4 
 
 ♦Andrew Jackson Tennessee Democratic — 1829f 8 
 
 §Martin VanBuren New York Democratic ....1837 4 
 
 JWilliam Henry Harrison.Ohio Whig 1841 1 
 
 §John Tyler Virginia Whig 1841 3 11 
 
 JameeK. Polk Tennessee Democratic. ..1845 4 
 
 JZachary Taylor Kentucky Whig 1849 1 4 
 
 § Millard Fillmore New York Whig 1850 2 8 
 
 Franklin Pierce New Hampshire. ..Democratic — 1853 4 
 
 James Buchanan Pennsylvania Democratic — 1857 4 
 
 *t Abraham Lincoln Illinois Republican — 1861f 4 1V4 
 
 §Andrew Johnson Tennessee Republican 1865 3 10 V4 
 
 ♦U. S. Grant Illinois Republican .... 1869f 8 
 
 R. B. Hayes Ohio Republican ....1877 4 
 
 tJames A. Garfield Ohio Republican ....1881 6 1 /, 
 
 §Chester A. Arthur New York Republican .... 1881 3 5H 
 
 ♦Grover Cleveland New York Democratic 1885f 4 
 
 Benjamin Harrison Indiana Republican 1889 4 
 
 Grover Cleveland New York Democratic 1893 A 
 
 William McKinley Ohio Republican .... 1897 
 
 *tIWilliam McKinley ....Ohio Republican .... 1897t 4 tPj 
 
 §Theodore Roosevelt New York Republican.... 1901 
 
 ♦Elected to the Presidency twice. 
 ■(■Inaugurated a second time four years later. 
 JDied in office. 
 §Had formerly been Vice-president. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 235 
 
 232. (a) In 1792, by Eli Whitney, (b) By its in- 
 vention, the annual production of cotton in the Southern 
 States was increased from five thousand to over five 
 million bales, a quantity equal in value to seven-eighths 
 of all the cotton produced on the globe. By this won- 
 derful increase in the civilized world's commodity, 
 " Cotton became king," and slavery, his scepter, with 
 which he sought to rule the world. Without this in- 
 vention the South would never have attained its present 
 agricultural importance, and slavery, for the want of 
 profitable continuance, would not have lingered on our 
 continent till its baleful influence drenched the country 
 with the people's blood. 
 
 233. Washington, Jackson, Harrison, Taylor, 
 Grant, Hayes, Garfield, Harrison, McKinley, Roosevelt. 
 
 234. For the first blood shed in the Revolution and 
 in the Great Civil War. 
 
 235. The Commissioner of Agriculture. 
 
 236. In 1690, at Vincennes, as a trading post by the 
 French. 
 
 237. General Lyon, August 10, 1861 ; Generals Stev- 
 ens and Kearney, September 1, 1862 ; Colonel Dah!- 
 gren, February, 1864 ; General Sedgwick, May 9, 1864 
 
 238. (a) A protective tariff is a duty imposed on 
 imported goods for the purpose of encouraging their 
 manufacture at home. Free trade means no duty what- 
 ever, or a light duty for revenue only, (b) The North 
 has generally favored a protective tariff, the South free 
 trade, (c) Clay, Webster and Calhoun (during his 
 earlier career). ((Z) Calhoun, Benton, and Hayne. 
 
236 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 239. Abraham Lincoln, Republican party; Stephen 
 A. Douglas, the northern wing of the Democratic par- 
 ty ; John C. Breckenriclge, the pro-slavery Demo- 
 cratic party : John Bell, the Constitutional Union 
 party. 
 
 240. (a) In 1755, at St. Genevieve, by the French. 
 (b) April 8, 1812. (c) August 10, 1821. 
 
 241. In 1769 at San Diego. 
 
 242. Revolutionary war; war with Indians in north- 
 west Territory, 1793—4; war with Tripoli, 1801— 5 ; 
 second war with Great Britain 1812 — 14 ; war with the 
 Creeks, 1811 — 14; war with Algiers, 1815; Black Hawk 
 War, 1832; Seminole War, 1835—37 : War with Mexi- 
 co, 1846—8; the Civil War, 1861—5; the war with the 
 Sioux, 1862, and again in 1877; with Spain in 1898. 
 
 243. (a) By conquest, purchase, annexation, ex- 
 ploration, and occupancy. (6) By conquest: the orig- 
 inal territory from England ; partly by conquest and 
 partly by purchase: California, Nevada, etc., from 
 Mexico, Porto Rica and Guam from Spain; by annexa- 
 tion : Texas from Texas, Hawaii from Hawaii-, by explor- 
 ation and occupancy: Oregon; by purchase: Louisiana, 
 from France, Florida from Spain; Gadsen tract from 
 Mexico, Alaska from Russia. 
 
 244. Bancroft's History, Webster's and Worcester's 
 Dictionaries. 
 
 245 They were required to rescind their ordinances 
 of secession, declare void all debts contracted in sup- 
 port of the Rebellion, and vote to adopt an amendment 
 to the Constitution abolishing slavery. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 237 
 
 246. In Massachusetts, Bunker Hill ; in New York, 
 Saratoga; in Pennsylvania, Gettysburg; in Maryland, 
 Antietam; in Virginia, Yorktown; in Tennessee, 
 Nashville, and Murfreesboro; in Georgia, battles 
 before Atlanta ; in Mississippi, battles in vicinity of 
 Vicksburg; in Arkansas, Pea Ridge; in Kentucky, 
 Perryville. 
 
 247. General George H. Thomas. 
 
 248. (a) Four; viz., 1857, 1858, 1865, and accom- 
 plished in 1866. (6) Cyrus W. Field. 
 
 249. 1st. The Articles of Confederation constituted 
 a mere bond of union between independent States; — 
 the Constitution is the expression of a people constitut- 
 ing and establishing themselves an independent and 
 indivisible nation. 2nd. The power of Congress, 
 under the articles of Confederation was only delegated 
 power, the States reserving the sovereignty to them- 
 selves; — the power of Congress, under the Constitu- 
 tion comes direct from the people. 3rd. Under the 
 Articles of Confederation, Congress could merely 
 recommend, leaving the sovereign States to act as their 
 focaJinterests might dictate ; — under the Constitution, 
 Congress, representing the will of the people, author- 
 izes, and the executive enforces. 4th. Congress, under 
 the Articles of Confederation, could apportion the 
 general debt among the States, and recommend that 
 each pay its just share; — under the Constitution, 
 the national debt is paid by appropriations from the 
 national treasury. 
 
238 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 250. During King William's War Massachusetts 
 issued bills of credit to pay the expense of Governor 
 Phipp's expedition against Canada. 
 
 251. Three orators: Patrick Henry, Clay and Web- 
 ster; statesmen: Hamilton, Madison and W. H. 
 Seward; poets: Longfellow, Bryant, and Whittier ; 
 historians : Bancroft, Prescott, and Motley; novelists: 
 Cooper, Irving, and Hawthorne : inventors : Eli 
 Whitney, Morse, and Edison. 
 
 252. John Hancock, John Adams, Benjamin Frank- 
 lin, Robert Morris, Roger Sherman, Thomas Jefferson, 
 Eldridge Gerry, Sichard Henry Lee, Charles Carroll, 
 Samuel Adams. 
 
 253. The rank of General has been held by George 
 Washington, U. S. Grant, W. T. Sherman and P. H. 
 Sheridan; Lt. General by Washington, Grant, Shcr 
 man, and Sheridan, — Scott, by brevet. 
 
 254. Under the Articles of Confederation no such 
 officer was provided as President. The Constitution, 
 which succeeded the Articles of Confederation, was 
 completed by the convention, September 17, 1787, but 
 owing to the delay in its ratification by the requisite 
 number [9] of States, it did not go into effect until 
 March 4, 1789 ; during the interim both executive and 
 legislative powers were exercised by Congress. 
 
 255. The purchase of Alaska, the Centennial Cele- 
 bration, settlement of the fishery dispute, the rail- 
 road riots, the assasination of President Garfield, Lin- 
 coln and McKinley, war with Spain, Columbian Expo- 
 sition, Chicago. 1893, the Louisiana Purchase Exposi- 
 ion, St, Louis. 1901. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 239 
 
 256. November 15,-1883, the United States Supreme 
 Court decidecHhat the first and second sections of the 
 Act of Congress of March 1, 1877, entitled "An act 
 to protect all citizens in their civil and legal rights " 
 were unconstitutional. These acts refer to granting 
 colored persons equal accommodations in hotels, rail- 
 road cars, and theatres. 
 
 257. On account of his concilatory policy toward 
 the South, President Hayes failed to receive the sup- 
 port of his own party. Regarding the states that had 
 been readmitted as no longer subject to the rules of 
 war, he withdrew the U. S. troops from the states 
 formerly in rebellion and prohibited their interference 
 in the elections in those states. 
 
 258. (a) The pratice of rotation in office, known 
 as the Spoils System established by Jackson when he 
 was first elected. (&) Appointments were made not 
 on account of special fitness for the place to be filled, 
 but as a reward for political services and with the 
 object of fortifying and perpetuating the party in 
 power. Such a policy led not only to incompetency but 
 to corruption in "high places." (<?) Under the Civil 
 Service Reform measure, which is now in operation in 
 most departments of the public service, appointments 
 are made from lists of applicants whose qualifications 
 have been determined by competitive examinations, 
 those securing the highest per cent being the first 
 chosen. 
 
 259. The Presidential Succession Bill and the Inter- 
 State Commerce Bill. 
 
230a answers to questions on u. s. history. 
 
 260. After the Vice President, the Secretary of 
 State, if there is one, then the Secretary of the Treas- 
 ury, Secretary of War, Attorney General, Postmaster 
 General, Secretary of the Navy, Secretary of the In- 
 terior, Secretary of Agriculture, Secretary of Commerce 
 and Labor, provided they are eligible to the office of 
 president. 
 
 261. The Tariff. The Policy of Protection was ad- 
 vocated by the Republicans and opposed by the Dem- 
 ocrats, who believed in reducing the tariff to a revenue 
 basis. The Republican candidates, Benj. Harrison of 
 Indiana and Levi P. Morton of New York, were 
 elected. 
 
 262. North Dakota, South Dakota, Montana, Wash- 
 ington, Idaho and Wyoming. 
 
 263. The tariff question was again the leading issue 
 in the election of 1892, and the decision of four years 
 previous was reversed. The Democratic candidates, 
 Grover Cleveland and Adlai E. Stevenson, were 
 elected by a very large majority. 
 
 264. The Republicans claimed that the "hard times" 
 were the result of a lack of confidence of the monied in- 
 terests in the Democratic party and to the fear that the 
 McKinley Bill would be repealed and a free trade 
 policy established. The Administration attributed the 
 financial stringency to the compulsory purchase of 
 silver by the Government, and an extra session of 
 Congress was called in the spring of 1903 to repeal the 
 Purchase Clause of the Sherman Act. This Mas ac- 
 complished by November 1, of this year. Confidence 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON" U. S. HISTORY. 239B 
 
 was restored, but failures continued and all business 
 became paralyzed. The Government had to resort to 
 the sale of bonds to maintain the gold reserve and to 
 meet the current expenses. $262,000,000 was there- 
 by added to the government debt. 
 
 205. At the regular session of Congress in Decem- 
 ber, 1893, William L. Wilson of West Virginia intro- 
 duced a new Tariff Bill, which greatly reduced the 
 schedules of the McKinley Bill. This became a law 
 the following year, but without the President's signa- 
 ture. One section of the Wilson Bill provided for a 
 two per cent tax on all incomes over $4,000. This 
 section of the law was contested and fmally the 
 Supreme Court declared it unconstitutional. 
 
 2GG. The boundary line between the British poses- 
 sions in South America and Venezuela had been in 
 dispute for years, and on account of certain gold dis- 
 coveries Great Britain became more aggressive. 
 President Cleveland recognized that Great Britain 
 was encoaching on the territory of Venezuela and in- 
 formed Great Britain that the policy of the U. S. was 
 to maintain the Monroe Doctrine. Great Britain re- 
 plied that the Monroe Doctrine did not apply to 
 present day conditions. A commission was appointed 
 by the President to investigate the question, and after 
 their report the President declared it his intention to 
 resist, with all the power of the United States, the 
 aggressions of Great Britain on the rights of Vene- 
 zuela. The firm position taken by the President 
 prevented any futher complications, and at length a 
 
239C ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 
 
 treaty of arbitration was signed between Great Britain 
 and Venezuela. 
 
 267. (a) The "Money Question." (h) The Silver 
 Question had been under discussion for some time 
 previous to the election of 1896. When the Republican 
 convention met in St. Louis in June and adopted a 
 platform declaring against the free and unlimited coin- 
 age of silver except by international agreement, some 
 of the delegates bolted the convention and gave their 
 support to the opposite party. Wm. McKinley of Ohio 
 was nominated for President without opposition, and 
 Garret A. Hobart was nominated for Vice President. 
 The Democratic party met in Chicago in July and 
 adopted a platform declaring for the free and unlimited 
 coinage of silver without waiting for the consent of any 
 other nation, and nominated Wm. J. Bryan of Nebraska 
 for President and Arthur Sewall of Maine for Vice 
 President. The campaign that followed was one of 
 the most enthusiastic and closely contested of any of 
 recent years. The silver forces, regardless of former 
 political affiliations, declared themselves for Bryan, 
 while the "Sound Money" adherents supported 
 McKinley. Party ties were broken and the controversy 
 developed into a campaign of education on the ' 'Money 
 Question." The election resulted in the election of 
 McKinley and Hobart. 
 
 268. To revise the tariff. The Dingley Tariff Law 
 was passed. 
 
 269. As the Dingley Tariff did not go into effect 
 for some time after it was passed, in the interim, 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON U. S. HISTORY. 239D 
 
 large importations of merchandise were made to take 
 advantage of the lower duties imposed by the Wilson 
 Bill. The Dingley Tariff failed to meet the expecta- 
 tions of its promoters, from the fact that it failed to 
 produce sufficient revenue to meet the expenditures of 
 the government. 
 
 270. For the cause of humanity and to protect 
 Americans in Cuba and American interests there. For 
 centuries the rule of Spain over her colonies had been 
 tyrannical. Rebellions in Cuba had been of frequent 
 occurrence and affairs had reached such a state by the 
 winter of 1898, that intervention on the part of the 
 U. S. seemed imperative. 
 
 271. The blowing up of the Maine in Havana Har- 
 bor Feb. 15, 1898, in which 266 American seamen 
 lost their lives. 
 
 272. Admiral Dewey's victory over the Spanish in 
 Manila Bay, May 1, 1898 ) without the loss of a man, 
 and the destruction of Admiral Cevera's fleet at Santi- 
 ago on July 3, by the American fleet under Com- 
 modore Schley with the loss of one man. The Spanish 
 loss in each engagement was very large. 
 
 273. See pages 427 to 431. 
 
 274 and 275. See note, page 431. 
 
 276. For the permanent improvements at Manila. 
 
 277. (a) To commemorate some important event in 
 history, to promote closer commercial or friendly rela- 
 tions between the American countries and to advertise 
 our resources. (5) 1st. The Centennial Exposition 
 held in Philadelphia, 1876, to commemorate the 100th 
 
239e answers to questions on u. s. history. 
 
 anniversary of the signing of the Declaration of Inde- 
 pendence. 2nd. World's Columbian Exposition held 
 at Chicago, 1893, to commemorate the 400th anniversary 
 of the discovery of America by Columbus. 3rd. Pan- 
 American Exposition held at Buffalo, N. Y., beginning 
 in May, 1901, to foster a closer relationship between 
 all Americans, as the name implies. 4th. The Charles- 
 ton Exposition held at Charleston, South Carolina, 
 beginning December 2nd, 1901; object, to promote a 
 closer commercial relationship between the United 
 States and the Latin countries surrounding the Carib- 
 bean Sea. 5th. St. Louis Exposition opened May 1, 
 1904; object, to commemorate the 100th anniversary of 
 the Louisiana Purchase. 6th. Lewis and Clark Exposi- 
 tion held at Portland, Oregon, in 1905; object, to com- 
 memorate 100th anniversary of the explorations of 
 Lewis and Clark. 
 
 278. He was instrumental in bringing about peace 
 between Russia and Japan. Through his influence 
 the two nations were induced to send their peace 
 envoys to the IT. S., where after several weeks of con- 
 ference and discussion terms of peace were agreed to, 
 which culminated in the signing of a treaty of peace 
 some weeks later. 
 
 279. To enact legislation for regulating or control- 
 ling the great corporations. 
 
 280. The Railroad Rate Bill and the Philippine 
 Tariff Bill. 
 
QUESTIONS ON CIVIL. GOVERNMENT. 
 
 1. Define government as applied to communities* 
 
 2. What does the term nation in a political sense 
 mean? 
 
 8. What should be the chief object of every govern- 
 ment? 
 
 4. (a) Name the various forms of government 
 known to history, (b) State which of these are now 
 in existence. 
 
 5. (a) Explain what is meant by a republican form 
 of government. (6) Give five examples. 
 
 6. What term defines the government of the U. S.? 
 
 7. What analogy exists between the government of 
 tbs U. S. and the several States? 
 
 8. Show whether the form of government under 
 wtrich we live is " the best " for all classes. 
 
 9. What do you mean by a written constitution? 
 aiid how does it differ from an unwritten constitution? 
 
 10. Whence are the laws of this country mainly de- 
 rived ? 
 
 11. By what bonds were the States united from 1775 
 to 1789? 
 
 940 
 
QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 241 
 
 12. State in the fewest words possible the objec- 
 tions to the Articles of Confederation. 
 
 13. Write correctly the Preamble to the Constitu- 
 tion. 
 
 14. Which of the several objects set forth in the 
 Preamble do you regard the most important? Give 
 your reason. 
 
 15. What is the Congress of the U. S. ? and of what 
 does it consist? 
 
 16. (a) How often, and when, does Congress as- 
 semble? (6) What is the constitutional term of its 
 existence ? (c) What do you mean by the forty-fourth 
 Congress? 
 
 17. («) What is the House of Representatives? 
 (6) Of how many composed (1906)? (c) Why are 
 the members called Representatives ? (J) Eligibility ? 
 (e) What is the basis of representation (1906) ? 
 
 18. What is the constitutional definition of a citizen? 
 
 19. Where and for what purpose does the word 
 slavery occur in the Constitution? 
 
 20. (a) What is the principal object in taking the 
 census? (6) How often taken? (c) Name some 
 other facts obtained by the census than population. 
 
 21. Define the following terms used in the Constitu- 
 tion: electors; oath ; affirmation ; judgment. 
 
 22. State what bills must originate in the House of 
 Representatives, and why. 
 
 23. Under what circumstances does the House of 
 Representatives elect the President? How many times, 
 and when did this occur? 
 
 10 
 
242 QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 
 
 24. How is the U. S. Senate composed? 
 
 25. What are the conditions of eligibility to the U. 
 S. Senate? 
 
 26. By whom and for what term are Senators chosen ? 
 
 27. Is the President of the Senate pro tempore, when 
 the Vice-President has succeeded to the presidency, 
 Vice-President of the U. S. ? Give your reason. 
 
 28. When does the Chief Justice preside over the 
 Senate? 
 
 29. What is impeachment? By whom made? By 
 whom tried? 
 
 30. What is an executive session of the Senate? 
 Why so called, and what business is transacted at such 
 session, and in what manner? 
 
 31. (a) When is the Vice-President of the U. S. 
 elected by the Senate? (6) When has such an elec- 
 tion occurred? 
 
 32. What punishment under the Constitution may 
 follow conviction, on impeachment, by the Senate? 
 
 33. What constitutes a quorum in Congress? 
 
 34. Name the objects in taking the vote by yeas and 
 nays in the U. S. Congress. 
 
 35. On what does the duration of Congress depend? 
 
 36. What is a bill as used in the Constitution? 
 
 37. (a) By how many processes may a bill become 
 a law? (b) Give the several steps of each process. 
 
 38. (a) Is the veto power of the President quali- 
 fied or absolute? (b) State what you can respecting 
 the exercise of this power by the different Presidents. 
 
 39. Give an explanation of a writ of habeas corpus. 
 
QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 243 
 
 40. When, why, and by whom may the writ of 
 habeas corpus be suspended ? 
 
 41. Why are export duties from States prohibited? 
 
 42. What is the object of the provision restricting 
 the disbursement of public money ? 
 
 43. State why army appropriations cannot extend 
 beyond two years. 
 
 44. State clearly what is meant by a bill of attainder. 
 
 45. What is an ex-post-facto law? 
 
 46. Who declares the punishment of treason? To 
 whom is the punishment limited? 
 
 47. Why does the Constitution in the 14th Amend- 
 ment prohibit the payment of certain debts? 
 
 48. Give a comprehensive definition of civil liberty. 
 
 49. What Constitutional provisions are made for 
 the exercise of religious freedom ? 
 
 50. What personal rights of speech, freedom of the 
 press and right of petition are guaranteed by the Con- 
 stitution ? 
 
 51. State a reason why the Senate suffrage can 
 never be changed by Constitutional amendment. 
 
 52. Why are insurrections more liable to occur 
 under our government than under a monarchy? 
 
 53. What rights and powers are reserved to the 
 respective States ? 
 
 54. What is the origin of the State obligation to the 
 Federal Union ? 
 
 55. Why are amendments equally binding on such 
 States as do not ratify them as upon others ? 
 
244 QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 
 
 56. What terms of the Constitution particularly es- 
 tablish the supremacy of the U. S. authority? 
 
 57. Name the commercial powers which the States 
 are forbidden to exercise. 
 
 58. Under what circumstances would a State be jus- 
 tified in raising troops without the consent of 
 Congress? 
 
 59. For what purpose are inspection laws enacted? 
 
 60. What is the term of office of Supreme Court 
 judges? 
 
 61. What was the origin of trial by jury? 
 
 62. What is the difference between a grand and 
 petit jury? 
 
 63. Under what conditions may a person be de- 
 prived of his property ? 
 
 64. How is treason against the U. S. defined? 
 
 65. In whom is the executive power of the U. S. 
 vested ? 
 
 66. What conditions of eligibility are required in 
 the President? 
 
 67. How many and what methods are provided for 
 the election of President of the U. S. ? 
 
 63. Give a brief outline of the method of electing 
 the President of the United States. 
 
 69. Who would become President if the Constitu- 
 tional methods prescribed failed in the election of that 
 officer? 
 
 70. State the extent of power given the President 
 over pardons and reprieves. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 245 
 
 71. Define the following terms : Ambassador, 
 Minister, Consul. 
 
 72. What officers constitute the President's cabinet? 
 
 73. Name the instances in our history in which the 
 Vice-President has been called to fill the unexpired 
 term of the President. 
 
 74. What special propriety i3 there in prescribing 
 the election of Vice-President by the Senate, in case 
 the electors fail in electing that officer? 
 
 75. In what respect do the duties of the President 
 of the Senate differ from those of the Speaker of the 
 House? 
 
 76. How is the Supreme Court of the United States 
 established, and how organized ? Of how many judges 
 does it consist? 
 
 77. How is a person having a claim against a State 
 to obtain relief? 
 
 78. Name the various offices and bureaus in charge 
 of the Department of the Interior. 
 
 79. Explain what is meant by " minority represen- 
 tation . ' ' 
 
 80. Name some exceptions to universal suffrage in 
 the several States. 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERN- 
 MENT. 
 
 1. The term government signifies the organized 
 means a nation employs for securing the rights of the 
 people and for perpetuating its own existence. 
 
246 AjfSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL. GOVERNMENT. 
 
 2. A nation is a political community, independent 
 of all others, creating and changing its own constitu- 
 tion and enacting its own laws without hindrance from 
 any other community. 
 
 3. The good of the governed. 
 
 4. (a) Patriarchal, Theocratic, Monarchial, Aristo- 
 cratic, Democratic, Republican, (b) Monarchial and 
 Republican. 
 
 5. («) A Republican government is one whose laws 
 are made and executed oy representatives chosen by 
 voters at stated times, (b) The United States, France, 
 Switzerland, Mexico, Chili. 
 
 6. A Federal-Republican government. 
 
 7. The National government and State governments 
 have each three distinct branches or departments : the 
 legislative, executive, and judicial. The President of 
 the nation corresponds to the Governor of the State ; 
 the vice-president of the former, to the lieutenant-gov- 
 ernor of the latter. The nation has its congress, and 
 the State has its legislature. The nation has its federal 
 judiciary, and the States have their system of courts. 
 
 8. It is the best for an intelligent and virtuous peo- 
 ple ; but for the ignorant and depraved it is the worst 
 form which could be devised, since the power is likely 
 to fall into the hands of corrupt intriguers and mer- 
 cenary demagogues influenced by no motive but self- 
 interest, and amenable to no power save that of might. 
 
 9. A written constitution is a written instrument 
 embodying the principles or fundamental laws which 
 govern the nation. An unwritten constitution is the 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 247 
 
 character of a nation as implied in the institutions and 
 usages of its society. 
 
 10. From England. 
 
 11. For the first six years, by the ties of common 
 interest, without any written bond of union; after that, 
 by the Articles of Confederation. 
 
 12. They were antagonistic to the spirit, genius, 
 and constitution of the people whom they were designed 
 to mould into one nation. 
 
 13. We, the people of the United States, in order 
 to form a more perfect union, establish justice, insure 
 domestic tranquillity, provide for the common defence, 
 promote the general welfare, and secure the blessings 
 of liberty to ourselves and our posterity, do ordain 
 and establish this Constitution for the United States of 
 America. 
 
 14. The 5th, to " promote the general welfare,' 1 '' be- 
 cause it implies, in a general way, all the others. 
 
 15. The law-making power of the United States. 
 It consists of a Senate and a House of Representatives. 
 
 16. (a) Congress must assemble at least once every 
 year, on the first Monday in December. (6) It can 
 never extend beyond two years. (c) The forty- 
 fourth Congress means the forty-fourth time a new 
 Congress, i.e, the House of Representatives has been 
 organized, which must occur every alternate year. 
 
 17. (a) The House of Representatives is the most 
 numerous branch of Congress. Its members are 
 elected by the people, (b) It is composed of 386 
 members, -vhich number will not be changed before 
 
248 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 
 
 March, 1906. (c) Because they act, and speak, and 
 vote as the agent of the people who elect them, (d) 
 A Representative must have attained the age of 25 
 years, must have been a citizen of the IT. S. seven 
 years, and must be an inhabitant of that State from 
 which he is chosen, (e) From March, 1903, to March, 
 1913, each State is entitled to one representative for 
 every 199,102 of its inhabitants. 
 
 18. All persons born or naturalized in the United 
 States and subject to the jurisdiction thereof, are citi- 
 zens of the United States and of the State wherein 
 they reside. 
 
 19. Only in the 13th Amendment for the purpose 
 of its abolition. 
 
 20. The apportionment of representatives, (b) Every 
 ten years. The first was taken in 1790. (c) Besides 
 the number of inhabitants, their ages, sex, color, and 
 ability to read and write, we obtain statistics of facts 
 relating to agriculture, commerce, manufacture, etc. 
 
 21. Electors in the Constitution means voters. An 
 oath is a solemn declaration made with an appeal to 
 God for the truth of what is said. An affirmation is a 
 solemn declaration made by one who is unwilling to 
 take an oath from conscientious scruples. A judg- 
 ment is a solemn determination of a fact by compe- 
 tent judicial authority. 
 
 22. "All bills for raising revenue shall originate in 
 the House of Representatives," because since the peo- 
 ple are to pay the taxes, if any are imposed, it is 
 proper that their representatives should be the prime 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNSlENT. 249 
 
 movers in any measures that require money to prose- 
 cute them. 
 
 23. When the electors shall fail to elect a President, 
 in the manner prescribed, the election devolves on the 
 House. This has occurred twice: the first time in 
 1801 , when Thomas Jefferson was elected on the thirty- 
 sixth ballot; the second instance was in 1825, when 
 John Quincy Adams was elected on the first ballot. 
 
 24. The Senate is composed of two members from 
 each State. 
 
 25. A Senator must be thirty years of age, have 
 been a citizen of the United States nine years, and must 
 be an inhabitant of the State from which he is chosen. 
 
 26. Senators are chosen by the Legislatures of their 
 respective States for a term of six years. 
 
 27. The President of the Senate pro tempore is not 
 Vice-President of the United States. The Vice-Presi- 
 dent is an officer of the United States, and cannot be 
 a member of Congress. A person may be eligible to 
 the office of Senator, and consequently to the position 
 of President pro tern., though ineligible to the Vice- 
 Presidency. Example : the President pro tem. might 
 not be a native-born citizen. 
 
 28. When the President is tried the Chief Justice 
 presides. 
 
 29. An impeachment is a solemn and specific accusa 
 tion brought against a public officer for misconduct in 
 office. The House has the sole power of preferring 
 articles of impeachment. The Senate has the pol* 
 power to try all impeachments 
 
250 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 
 
 30. An Executive Session is a special meeting of 
 Senators called for the purpose of confirming Presi- 
 dential appointments or ratifying treaties. It is so 
 called because in such cases the Senate acts on the 
 recommendations of the President. The meeting is 
 held with closed doors, the members being, gener- 
 ally, under an injunction of secresy. 
 
 31. (a) When the electors shall fail to elect a Vice- 
 President. (6) Richard M. Johnson in 1837 was 
 elected Vice-President by the Senate. 
 
 32. 1st, Removal from office ; and, 2nd, Disqualifi- 
 cation to hold and enjoy any office of honor, trust, or 
 profit under the United States. 
 
 33. A majority of each House. 
 
 34. To preserve a record of the vote of each mem- 
 ber on any matter voted upon. 
 
 35. 1st. On the Constitutional limitation which can 
 not extend beyond two years. 2nd. On the pleasure 
 of the two Houses, subject to the foregoing restric- 
 tions. 3rd. On the pleasure of the President of the 
 United States, when the two Houses cannot agree on 
 the time of adjournment. 
 
 36. A bill is the draft of a proposed law. 
 
 37. (a) Three processes. (6) First process: 1st. 
 the bill shall pass both Houses of Congress. 2nd. It 
 shall be presented to the President. 3rd. If he ap- 
 prove it he shall sign it. 
 
 Second Process: 1st. The bill shall pass both 
 Houses. 2nd. It shall be presented to the President. 
 3rd. If he disapprove it, he shall return it to that 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 251 
 
 House in which it originated. 4th. That House shall 
 enter his objections at large on their journal. 5th. 
 They shall proceed to reconsider it ; and if, after such 
 reconsideration, two-thirds of the House shall agree to 
 pass it, it shall be sent, with the objections, to the 
 other House. 6th. The other House shall reconsider 
 the bill; and if approved by two-thirds of that House, 
 it shall become a law. 
 
 Third Process : 1st. The bill shall pass both Houses. 
 2nd. It shall be sent to the President. 3rd. He neg- 
 lects to approve or return it. 4th. It becomes a law 
 at the end of ten days (Sundays excepted), unless 
 Congress by adjournment within that time prevent its 
 return. 
 
 38. (a) The veto power of the President is only 
 qualified, not absolute. In this respect it differs from 
 the veto power of the British Sovereign, in whom it is 
 absolute. (6) Nearly all the Presidents have exercised 
 the prerogative. Tyler vetoed five bills, and John- 
 son, twenty-one. Bills have been passed over the veto 
 of but five Presidents — viz., in the administrations of 
 Tyler, Pierce, Johnson, Cleveland and Harrison — seven- 
 teen in that of Johnson. 
 
 39. It is a writ of relief ordering the release of any 
 one imprisoned or wrongfully restrained of his lib- 
 erty. If the court on inquiry decide that the person 
 is justly restrained he is remanded to custody, other- 
 wise he is set at liberty. 
 
 40. The writ of habeas corpus may be suspended 
 during a rebellion, when the public safety may require 
 
252 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 
 
 it. The power of suspension belongs to Congress. 
 From 1861 to 1865, Congress vested the power in the 
 President. 
 
 41. The Prohibition is to prevent taxing the inter- 
 ests of any State to its detriment, and giving undue 
 advantages to others. The production of the several 
 States being different, the burden of taxation would 
 be as unequal as the exports. 
 
 42. To secure strict faithfulness in the public ex- 
 penditures. No officer of the U. S. or of Congress 
 can draw a dollar of public money except by appro- 
 priations made by law. 
 
 43. This constitutional provision was due to the 
 fear that the army might become a power too formid- 
 able to be consistent with the rights and liberties 
 of the people. 
 
 44. It is a special act of the legislative body, 
 inflicting capital punishment on a person for high 
 crimes, without having convicted him before a court 
 of law. A person against whom such an act was 
 passed was said to be attainted and outlawed. His 
 blood became so corrupted that he could neither 
 inherit from his ancestry, nor transmit by hereditary 
 descent to his heirs. 
 
 45. An ex-post-facto law is one which makes an act 
 criminal which was not so when committed. 
 
 46. Congress. The punishment is limited to the 
 person convicted ; in no legal sense does it reach his 
 posterity. 
 
ANS^TERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 253 
 
 47. These debts were incurred in aid of the rebel- 
 lion against the U. S. Their repudiation is designed 
 as a penalty on those who aided the rebellion by 
 investing in Confederate bonds. 
 
 48. " Civil liberty is the natural liberty of man- 
 kind so far, and only so far restrained as is consistent 
 with the public good." — Pliny. 
 
 49. " No religious test shall ever be required as a 
 qualification to any office or public trust under the 
 United States." 
 
 " Congress shall make no law respecting an estab- 
 lishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise 
 thereof." 
 
 50. No law shall be made " abridging the freedom 
 of speech or of the press; or the right of the people 
 peaceably to assemble, and to petition the government 
 for a redress of grievances." 
 
 51. Art. V. of the Constitution provides that " No 
 State, without its consent, shall be deprived of its, 
 equal suffrage in the Senate." 
 
 52. On account of the greater freedom our people 
 enjoy than those under other forms of government, 
 that freedom is, correspondingly, more liable to be 
 abused. 
 
 53. All such rights and powers are reserved to the 
 States as are not expressly, or by necessary implica- 
 tion, delegated to the general government. 
 
 54. It is based on their assent to the Constitution 
 of theU. S. Having accepted the terms of the union, 
 they became subordinate to the national authority. 
 
254 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 
 
 55. Because, having entered the Union, they agreed 
 to the terms upon which its Constitution might be 
 amended. 
 
 56. Sect. 2, Art. VI. : "This Constitution, and the 
 laws of the United States which shall be made in pur- 
 suance thereof, and all treaties made, or which shall 
 be made under the authority of the United States, 
 shall be the supreme law of the land; and the judges 
 in every State shall be bound thereby, anything in the 
 Constitution or laws of any State to the contrary not- 
 withstanding." 
 
 57. 1. To coin money. 2. To issue bills of credit. 
 3. To make anything but gold and silver coin a tender 
 in payment of debts. 4. To pass any law impairing 
 the obligation of contracts 
 
 58. Necessities for protection against invasion or 
 insurrection might be so great as to render a delay 
 dangerous; in which case the State government would 
 be justified in arming and equipping its own troops 
 for the emergency. 
 
 59. Inspection laws serve to maintain the standard 
 and purity of articles designed for exportation and 
 domestic use. 
 
 60. During good behavior, or life. Any judge of 
 the U. S. Court having held his commission ten years, 
 and having attained the age of seventy years, may 
 resign his office and receive the same salary during 
 life which was payable to him at the time of his res- 
 ignation. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 255 
 
 61. Trial by jury originated in England in the 9th 
 century during the reign of Alfred the Great. 
 
 62. A grand jury consists of from 12 to 23 men, 
 whose duty is to make careful inquiry of offenses 
 committed within the district for which they are 
 chosen, and to make presentment of the same. A 
 majority is required to find an indictment. A petit 
 jury consists of 12 " good and lawful men," selected 
 to try the offenses against which indictments are 
 found, or for the trial of issues of fact. A unanimous 
 vote in most States is necessary to convict. 
 
 63. The public good may require private property 
 for public roads, railroads, arsenals, forts, etc. In 
 these cases private property may be taken by authority 
 of law, but not without just compensation to the owner. 
 
 64. "Treason against the United States shall con- 
 sist in levying war against them, or adhering to their 
 enemies, giving them aid and comfort." 
 
 65. In the President of the United States. 
 
 66. He must be a natural born citizen of the U. S., 
 must have attained the age of 35 years, and have been 
 14 years a resident within the United States. 
 
 67. Two methods : first, by electors appointed for 
 that -purpose; if this method fail the election devolves 
 on the House of Representatives. 
 
 68; The following are the steps taken in the election 
 of President: 
 
 1st. The electors, previously appointed, shall meet 
 in their respective States on the first Wednesday in 
 
256 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 
 
 December, and vote by distinct ballots for President 
 and Vice-President. 
 
 2nd. The votes are signed, certified, sealed, and 
 addressed to the President of the Senate at the seat of 
 government of the United States. 
 
 3rd. The President of the Senate, at a joint meet- 
 ing of the two Houses of Congress, called the second 
 Wednesday of February, shall open the certificates, 
 and the votes are counted by tellers appointed by the 
 House and the Senate. 
 
 4th. The person having the greatest number of votes 
 for President, shall be President, if such number be a 
 majority of the whole number of the electors appointed. 
 
 5th. If no person have a majority of the electors 
 appointed, the election of President devolves on the 
 House of Representatives. 
 
 69. The Vice-President. 
 
 70. " He shall have power to grant reprieves and 
 pardons for offenses against the United States, except 
 in the cases of impeachment." 
 
 71. An Ambassador is an officer employed by gov- 
 ernment to represent, and to manage its interests, at 
 the seat of government of some other government. 
 A Minister has the same duties as an Ambassador, but 
 is regarded as inferior in rank. A Consul is an officer 
 whose duty it is to protect the rights, commerce, mer- 
 chants and seamen of his government in the country 
 to which he may be appointed, and to aid any com- 
 mercial transactions between his own and such foreign 
 country. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT 25? 
 
 72. Secretary of State, Secretary of the Treasury, 
 Secretary of War, Secretary of the Navy, Secretary 
 of the Interior, Postmaster-General, Attorney-General, 
 Secretary of Agriculture, and Secretary of Commerce 
 and, Labor. 
 
 73. 1. John Tyler succeeded William Henry Harris 
 son, who died April 4, 1841. 2. Millard Fillmore 
 succeeded Zachary Taylor, who died July 9, 1850. 3. 
 Andrew Johnson succeeded Abraham Lincoln, who 
 was assassinated April 14, 1865. 4. Cheste r A. Arthur 
 succeeded James A. Garfield, who died September 19, 
 1881. 
 
 74. This provision seems to be designed as a com- 
 pliment to the Senate on account of the position the 
 Constitution provides for the Vice-President in the 
 Senate. 
 
 75. The Speaker of the House has the appointment 
 of standing committees ; but since the President of the 
 Senate is not a member of that body, he has no such 
 privilege unless granted by the Senate. 
 
 76. The supreme court of the United States is es- 
 tablished by the Constitution and organized by Con- 
 gress. The judges of the Supreme Court are one Chief 
 Justice and eight associate justices. 
 
 77. He may petition the Legislature for redress, un- 
 less courts of claims are established for such purposes, 
 in which case he may present his claim by petition or 
 otherwise. 
 
 78. The Patent Office, Census Office, Land Office, 
 Bureaus of Mines, Indian Affairs, Pensions, Educa- 
 tion. 
 
 17 
 
258 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 
 
 79. In the case of election of representatives in 
 some States, each qualified voter may cast as many 
 votes for one candidate as there are representatives to 
 be elected, or may distribute the same, or equal parts 
 thereof, among the candidates, as he shall see fit. 
 
 80. In Connecticut and Massachusetts those who are 
 unable to read an article in the Constitution are ex- 
 cluded from voting. Seven States exclude paupers 
 from suffrage. Georgia, Nevada, Massachusetts and 
 New Hampshire make the payment of taxes a requisite 
 for voting, except in certain cases. 
 
QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 1. State resemblances and differences between 
 plants and animals. 
 
 2. What is meant by the flora of a country? 
 
 3. Explain the application of the terms species and 
 genus. 
 
 4. (a) How are plants designated as to their term 
 of life? (6) Define and give examples of the terms 
 you employ. 
 
 5. Distinguish between deciduous and evergreen 
 trees, and give two illustrations of each. 
 
 6. (a) Define germination, (b) What does it re- 
 quire ? 
 
 7. Name and define the parts of the embryo. 
 
 8. Upon what characteristic of the early growing 
 plant is founded the most important subdivision of 
 flowering plants? 
 
 9. Define and apply correctly the terms endogens 
 and exogens. 
 
 10. What distinction is observed between the leaves 
 of endogenous and exogenous plants? 
 
 256 
 
260 QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 11. Give a diagram-outline of the vegetable sub- 
 kingdoms known as Phaenogamia and Cryptogamia. 
 
 12. Name and locate the parts of a flower. 
 
 13. Define the terms, perianth, androecium, gynoe- 
 cium. 
 
 14. Enumerate the attributes possessed by a typical 
 flower. 
 
 15. Explain the terms used in distinguishing the 
 typical flower. 
 
 16. How are leaves of the calyx and corolla desig- 
 nated ? 
 
 17. When is a flower said to be (a) perfect? (b) 
 complete ? (c) apelalous? (d) staminate? (e) pistil- 
 late? 
 
 18. What are glumes and pales? 
 
 19. What is pollen ? Where found ? 
 
 20. Define the term -pericarp , and state which form 
 is dehiscent and which indehiscent. 
 
 21. Give examples of the following: Drupe, Tryma, 
 Pome, Hesperidium, Samara. 
 
 22. What are the offices of the root? 
 
 23. Name some of the principal forms of roots. 
 
 24. State the difference between epiphytes and para- 
 sites. 
 
 25. What terms are applied to those branches tend- 
 ing to produce adventitious roots? 
 
 26. Define the terms caulis, culm, trunk. 
 
 27. What peculiarity is observed with respect to the 
 twining: of different vines? 
 
QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 261 
 
 28. What distinction can you name between the 
 rhizome and the creeper? 
 
 29. Is the tuber a root? State your reason. 
 
 30. What is a bulb ? Name its most common forms. 
 
 31. How does a flower-bud differ from a leaf- 
 bud? 
 
 32. What various positions upon the plant may the 
 leaf -bud occupy? 
 
 33. Define vernation, and enumerate the various 
 forms of bud folding. 
 
 34. What are the common forms of leaf arrangement 
 on the axis? 
 
 - 35. Name the parts of a complete net-veined leaf. 
 
 36. How do leaves contribute to the nourishment of 
 plants ? 
 
 37. What is the characteristic venation of the three 
 grand divisions of the vegetable kingdom ? 
 
 38. Name and define ten of the most common forms 
 of leaf -outlines. 
 
 39. What are the divisions of a compound leaf 
 called? To what are they usually attached? 
 
 40. Give the terms used to describe the margin of 
 leaves. 
 
 41. What terms are employed in describing the sur- 
 face of leaves? 
 
 42. What is a tendril and its use? 
 
 43. What do you mean by the term metamorphosis, 
 as applied to flowers ? 
 
 44. (a) Define inflorescence. (6) Name the two 
 forms. 
 
: 
 
 262 QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 45. What is the peduncle? Pedicel? 
 
 46. Name the principal varieties of axillary inflores 
 cence. 
 
 47. Describe the following: umbel, spadix, panicle 
 catkin, raceme. 
 
 48. Name the parts of the anther. 
 
 49. Define and give an example of multiple fruit 
 
 50. How are plants nourished, clothed, pr 
 tected ? 
 
 51. (a) What are cryptogams? (6) Give illustra- 
 tions, (c) Where do they grow? (d) What useful 
 purpose do they serve ? 
 
 52. What is the elementary organism of the plant? 
 
 53. Name the different forms of cells. 
 
 54. What chemical elements compose the outer and 
 secondary cell walls ? 
 
 55. Name the contents of the vegetable celL 
 
 56. What is chlorophyll ? 
 
 57. (a) Of what does the growth of plants consist? 
 (6) Explain the process by which this is accom- 
 plished. 
 
 58. What different forms of tissue are formed of 
 cells ? 
 
 59. Describe the tissues found in vegetation. 
 
 60. (a) What are the breathing-pores of plants? 
 (6) How are these affected by moist and dry 
 weather ? 
 
 61. (a) What is the construction of vegetable 
 glands? (6) What is their use? 
 
QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 263 
 
 62. Into what four classes is the vegetable kingdom, 
 according to modes of growth, divided? 
 
 63. Name and locate the structural parts of Exogens. 
 
 64. What and where is the cambium layer? 
 
 65. State the characteristic structure of endogenous 
 plants. 
 
 66. Upon what peculiarity of growth is based the 
 distinction of Exogens and Endogens ? 
 
 67. Describe the mode of growth in Acrogens. 
 
 68. Name some of the lowest forms of vegetation, 
 and state to what class they belong. 
 
 69. Show wherein animal life is dependent upon the 
 vegetable kingdom. 
 
 70. Of what does the substance of plants mainly con- 
 sist, and how and whence is this derived? 
 
 71. Name the vital phenomena upon which the life of 
 a plant depends ? 
 
 72. In what respect are some plants and insects 
 mutually dependent ? 
 
 73. How are generic and specific terms in Botany 
 distinguished? 
 
 74. Upon what principle is the absorption of fluids 
 in a direction contrary to gravitation ? 
 
 75. What fact proves the importance of a rotation of 
 crops in agriculture? 
 
 76. Describe the upward and downward flow of the 
 sap and its use in the plant economy. 
 
 77. In what respect are plants and animals mutually 
 dependent? 
 
264 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON 'BOTANY. 
 
 78. Explain the principles upon which the " natural 
 system" of plant classification is based. 
 
 79. Contrast the characteristic differences between 
 Dicotyledons and Monocotyledons. 
 
 80. Name fruits belonging to the following orders : 
 Rosaceae, Saxifragaceee, Ebenacese, Artocarpaceae, 
 
 Crassulacese. 
 
 81. To what natural orders do the sunflower, pea, 
 lettuce, parsley, and sweet potato belong? 
 
 82. What is the fruit of the strawberry plant? 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 1. Plants, like animals, are organized bodies com- 
 posed of distinct parts, endowed with vitality but 
 without sensation. Like animals, the presence of 
 every organ is essential to completeness in plants, but 
 the power of volition and perception of animals is 
 absent in plants. 
 
 2. The flora of a country is the system of vegetable 
 species native in a given region or locality. 
 
 3. The term species embraces such individual plants 
 as may have originated from a common stock, bearing 
 essential resemblances to each other as well as to their 
 common parent. A genus is an assemblage of species 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 265 
 
 closely related to each other in the structure of their 
 flowers and fruit. 
 
 4. (a) Annual, biennial, and perennial, (b) Ai? 
 annual plant continues but one season; as, oats, corn; 
 a biennial germinates and bears leaves only the first 
 season, and blossoms, bears fruit and dies the second; 
 as, cabbage, turnip, parsnip; a perennial continues 
 many years; as, trees and shrubs. 
 
 5. Deciduous trees lose their foliage in autumn; as, 
 oak, hickory; evergreens retain their leaves and 
 verdure throughout the season; as, pines, mag- 
 nolias. 
 
 6. (a) Germination is the awakening and develop- 
 ment of the embryonic plant within the seed, (b^ It 
 requires warmth, moisture, air, and shade. 
 
 7. The embryo consists of the radicle, the descend- 
 ing part, forming the root; the plumule, a stem bud, 
 which forms the ascending axis of the plant ; and the 
 cotyledons, the seed lobes, destined to become the first 
 leaves of the plant, shown in the two thick leaves of 
 the bean as it emerges from the ground. 
 
 8. The number of cotyledons; as, monocotyledons 
 and dicotyledons. 
 
 9. Endogens are plants which grow by internal 
 accretions ; as, wheat, grass ; exogens are those whose 
 stems grow by external accretions ; as forest trees. 
 
 10. Endogenous plants have, in most cases, parallel 
 veined leaves, while leaves of exogenous plants are 
 net veined. 
 
266 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 ■a 
 
 o 
 
 ft 
 O 
 
 
 *-< 
 
 o 
 
 »■ 
 
 * 
 
 B 
 
 O 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 X 
 o 
 
 okewc 
 ines. 
 
 N 
 
 *? 
 
 Ph 
 
 Ph Pji 
 
 
 
 09 
 
 
 
 
 -f 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a> 
 
 
 
 
 w> 
 
 O 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 S3 «* 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 8> S 
 
 
 -s 
 
 O 
 
 8 ** 
 
 
 o 
 
 "3 
 
 
 w 1 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 s s 
 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 etal 
 one 
 
 
 »-. 
 
 s- 
 
 P. o 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 < 
 
 1 u 
 
 * 
 
 1-3 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 
 9 
 02 P«t 
 
 •«|TOBSouaBqj[ 
 
 "BnnuSo^d^J3 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 267 
 
 12. The floral envelopes and the essential floral or- 
 gans. The floral envelopes consist of one or more 
 circles of leaves surrounding the essential organs. 
 The outer circle is called the calyx; the inner, if any be 
 present, is called the corolla. Within the envelopes 
 are the stamens, small thread-like organs varying in 
 number from one to one hundred. The pistils occupy 
 the center of the flower. 
 
 13. Perianth is used to designate both the calyx and 
 corolla ; the stamens are collectively called androecium ; 
 gynoecium is used for the entire collection of pistils. 
 
 14. The typical flower should be complete, regular, 
 symmetrical, alternating, and each organ distinct. 
 
 15. The term complete implies that the four sets of 
 organs are arranged in as many concentric circles ; 
 regular, that the organ? of the same name are all simi- 
 lar ; symmetrical, that it has the same number of or- 
 gans in each circle; alternating, that the several 
 organs in each set stand not opposite to, but alternat- 
 ing with the organs of the adjacent set ; distinct, that 
 all organs are free from each other. 
 
 16. The leaves of the calyx are styled sepals, those 
 of the corolla, petals. 
 
 17. (a) A flower is perfect when it has both stamens 
 and pistils. (5 ) It is complete when it has stamens, pis- 
 tils, calyx, and corolla, (e) It is apetalous when the 
 calyx is present without the corolla. (cZ) It is staminate 
 when it has stamens without pistils, (e' It \& pistil- 
 late when it has pistils without stamens. 
 
268 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 18 . Glumes and pales represent the floral envelopes 
 J)f the grasses. 
 
 19. Pollen is the fecundating yellow dust contained 
 in the cells of anthers. 
 
 20. The pericarp is the envelope inclosing the seed. 
 The fleshy pericarp, as the berry, apple, cherry, etc., 
 is indehiscent ; the dry pericarp, as the pea, mustard, 
 etc., is dehiscent. 
 
 21. Drupe, — cherry, peach; Tryma, — butternut, 
 hickorynut ; Pome, — apple, haw; Hesperidium, — 
 orange, lemon; Samara, — ash, maple. 
 
 22. 1st. To support the plant in position. 2nd. To 
 imbibe from the soil the food necessary to the growth 
 of the plant. 
 
 23. The principal axial forms are the ramous, fusi- 
 form, napiform, and conical; the principal inaxial 
 forms are fibrous, tubercular, coralline, nodulous, and 
 moniliform. 
 
 24. Epiphytes, sometimes called air-plants, are 
 those whose roots are fixed upon other plants, while 
 the epiphyte itself derives its nourishment wholly from 
 the air. Parasites are those whose roots, penetrating 
 to the cambium layer of other plants and trees, appro- 
 priate the stolen juices to their own growth. 
 
 25. Cions, suckers, stolons, offsets, slips, layers, 
 cuttings, and runners. 
 
 26. Caulis is the term applied to the annual leaf- 
 .stems of herbaceous plants. The culm is the stem of 
 the grasses and the sedges. The term trunk is applied 
 to the stems of trees. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 2C9 
 
 27. The hop vine invariably winds with the sun, 
 that is, from left to right; while others, as the morn- 
 ing-glory, revolves in a contrary direction. 
 
 28. The rhizome is a prostrate, fleshy, rooting stem, 
 often marked with scars, as in bloodrool; while the 
 creeper is more slender, much branched, many jointed, 
 and sends out rootlets in every direction, binding the 
 soil into turfs wherever it abounds. 
 
 29. The tuber is not a root. It is the thickened 
 portion of the subterranean stem and produces buds. 
 
 30. The bulb is a thickened mass of scales with a 
 small axis, the whole forming a bud. The most com- 
 mon forms are tunicated, as the onion, and scaly, as 
 in the lily. 
 
 31. A leaf -bud contains the rudiments of a leafy 
 stem or branch folded up in such a manner as to 
 occupy as little space as possible ; the flower-bud con- 
 tains the same elements transformed into the rudimen- 
 tary organs of a flower. 
 
 32. With regard to position, the leaf -bud may be 
 terminal or axillary. In addition to these, buds may 
 be accessory or adventitious. 
 
 33. Vernation signifies the mode of arrangement 
 and folding of the leaf organs within the bud. The 
 following terms denote the leaf folding within the bud : 
 reclined, conduplicate, plicate, circinate, convolute, 
 involute, revolute. 
 
 34. Alternate; i.e., one above another on opposite 
 sides. Scattered; i. e., irregularly spiral. Opposite; 
 
270 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 i.e., two against each other, at the same node. Reso- 
 lute ; i.e., clustered regularly. 
 
 35. Blade, petiole, stipules, margin, apex, base, 
 midvein, veins, veinlets, veinulets. 
 
 36. The leaves are the organs of respiration and 
 digestion, without which the plant would soon die. 
 
 37. The leaves of Exogens, or Dicotyledons, are 
 net-veined; those of Endogens, or Monocotyledons, 
 are parallel-veined ; the leaves of Cryptogams are 
 fork-veined, dividing and subdividing in a forked 
 manner. 
 
 38. Ovate, having the outline of an egg; orbicular, 
 circular; lanceolate, lance-shaped, tapering gradually 
 toward the apex ; deltoid, like the Greek letter A ; el- 
 liptical, formed like an ellipse; cordate, heart-shaped; 
 auriculate, ear shaped lobes at base; sagittate, arrow- 
 shaped; cuneate, wedge-shaped; reniform, kidney- 
 shaped. 
 
 39. The divisions of a compound leaf are called 
 leaflets, and are usually attached to the rachis. 
 
 40. Dentate, toothed ; serrate, having teeth pointing 
 forward; crenate, with rounded teeth; undulate, 
 wavy-edged ; repend, indented like the margin of an 
 umbrella; spinous, projecting veins; incised, cut; 
 crispate, crisped. 
 
 41. The leaf surface may be glabrous (smooth), 
 scabrous (rough), pubescent, covered with soft, short 
 hair, villous, when the hairs are long and weak, seri- 
 cious, when the hair is fine and silky, lanuginous. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. . 271 
 
 wooly, tormentous, matted like felt, floccose, when soft 
 and fleecy. 
 
 42. A tendril is a thread-like appendage furnished 
 to weak-stemmed plants as their means of support. 
 
 43. The metamorphosis of a flower is the transfor- 
 mation of the leaf to form the flower. 
 
 44. (a^ Inflorescence is the arrangement of flow- 
 ers on the stem. (6) The two forms are axillary, in 
 which the flowers originate from axillary buds, and 
 terminal, in which the flower buds are terminal. 
 
 45 . The peduncle is the flower stalk. Divisions of 
 the peduncle are termed pedicels. 
 
 46. The spike, spadix, catkin, raceme, corymb, 
 umbel, panicle, thyrse, and head are the principal 
 varieties of axillary inflorescence. 
 
 47. An umbel consists of several pedicels of nearly 
 the same length radiating from the same point ; a 
 spadix is a thick, fleshy rachis, with flowers closely 
 sessile or imbedded on it ; & panicle is a compound in- 
 florescence formed by an irregular branching of the 
 pedicels of the raceme, as in oats ; the catkin is a 
 slender, pendent spike with scaly bracts, as in the oak 
 and willow; the raceme is a rachis bearing its flowers 
 on distinct, simple pedicels. 
 
 48. Filament, anther-lobe, connective, and valves. 
 
 49. Multiple fruits are formed by the union of 
 many separate flowers, as the pineapple. 
 
 50. The first nourishment the plant requires is de- 
 rived from the albumen contained within the seed; 
 afterward the sap, laden with the requisite food ele- 
 
272 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 ments, permeates every tissue, and deposits within 
 each organ its appropriate food. The leaves and other 
 parts of plants are covered with hairs, which, with the 
 bark, serve as clothing. The sharp thorns, spikes and 
 prickles, with which many plants are supplied, would 
 seem to imply a provision for self-defense. 
 
 51. (a) Cryptogams are flowerless plants. (6) 
 Mosses, ferns, lichens, seaweed, mushrooms, (c) They 
 grow on rocks, sand, tree-trunks, cinders, etc. (d) 
 They form the basis of all vegetable and animal life. 
 By the decay of successive generations of these simple 
 forms soil is formed and fertilized, and the growth of 
 higher orders, as grains, grasses and trees, is rendered 
 possible. 
 
 52. The cell, a closed sac of membrane containing a 
 fluid, by its multiplied aggregation, makes up the mass 
 of all vegetation. 
 
 53. Spiral, annular, porous, and reticulated. 
 
 54. Carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen. 
 
 55. While some cells contain nothing but air and 
 others solid matter, the greater number are filled with 
 both fluids and solids. These are the cytoblast, a glob- 
 ular atom, designed to form new cells, and protoplasm, 
 the nourishing semi-fluid. 
 
 56. Chlorovhyl is the green coloring matter of 
 leaves. 
 
 57. (a) The growth of plants consists of the de- 
 velopment of new cells. (6) The primordial utricle 
 divides into two or more parts by new walls growing 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 27? 
 
 from its sides till they meet, and thus cells multiplying 
 by millions, build up the fabric of the plant. 
 
 58. Cellular tissue, termed parenchyma; fibrous 
 tissue, or pleurencliyma ; vascular tissue, or trachen- 
 chyma; laticiferous tissue, or cienchyma. 
 
 59. Parenchyma, the most common form of tissue, 
 is composed of spheroidal cells. It is found in all 
 young growths, — the pith, leaf, and stem; in the 
 pulp of fruits, and in the soft parts of all plants. 
 
 Pleurencliyma consists of elongated cells cohering 
 by their sides in such a way as to form continuous 
 fibre, as in flax and hemp. 
 
 Trachenchyma is a tissue of vessels and tubes. 
 These extend lengthwise and form rows of cells joined 
 end to end, and fuse into one by the absorption of the 
 contiguous walls. 
 
 Cienchyma is a system of milk vessels, secreting 
 the peculiar juice of the plant, as opium, gamboge, 
 resin, etc. 
 
 60. (a) Little chinks in the leaf-epidermis, termed 
 stomata. (&) Each stoma is guarded by cells of such 
 construction as to open in moist weather and close in dry. 
 
 61. (a) Glands are cellular structures within the 
 epidermis, or at the base of a hair, or at its summit. 
 (5) Their use is to elaborate and contain the peculiar 
 secretions of plants, such as oils, resins, honey, 
 poisons, etc. 
 
 62. Into Exogens, or outside-growers, Endogens, or 
 inside-growers, Acrogens, or point-growers, and Thall- 
 ogens, or mass-growers. 
 
274 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 63. 1st. The pith, consisting of parenchyma, which 
 occupies the central part of the stem. 2nd. The 
 medullary sheath, a thin, delicate tissue, composed of 
 spiral vessels, which immediately surrounds the pith. 
 3rd. The wood proper, which is arranged in concen- 
 tric zones or layers about the central mass. This 
 consists of two kinds — the sap-wood and heart-wood. 
 4th. The bark, covering and protecting the wood. It 
 consists of the three parts — the inner or white bark, 
 the middle or green bark, and the outer or brown bark. 
 
 64. The cambium layer is a muscilagi nous-sap solu- 
 tion of the starchy deposits of the preceding year. It 
 is between the wood and white bark, serving to loosen 
 the latter, and thus render it easy to peel from the 
 wood. 
 
 65. The stem of an endogenous plant is composed 
 of tissues similar to those of the exogenous stem, but 
 there is no distinction of bark, wood, pith, or annual 
 layers in the endogen. 
 
 66. Upon the characteristic method of annual accre- 
 tions; --in the Exogens the yearly increments are 
 added to the outside, while the addition of new mate- 
 rial in the Endogens is to the interior. 
 
 67. The stems of Acrogens advance beneath or 
 above the ground, full formed, growing only at the 
 end. 
 
 68. Mildew, frog spittle, lichens, seaweeds , puff-balls 
 and mushrooms, belonging to the Thallogens, or mass- 
 growers, are among the lowest forms of the vegetable 
 kingdom. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 275 
 
 69. The process of vegetation consists in imbibing 
 the crude matters of the earth and air, and elaborating 
 into food the elements which animals require for their 
 growth and sustenance. 
 
 70. The substance of plants consists mainly of 
 water derived from the moisture of the air and the 
 soil, through the absorptive powers of the leaves and 
 roots. 
 
 71. Absorption, circulation, exhalation, assimila- 
 tion, and secretion. 
 
 72. The propagation and continuance of certain 
 species of plants in a given locality require cross-fer- 
 tilization. This is effected sometimes by insects, 
 which, attracted by the brilliant tints and savory 
 juices contained within the nectary, in return for 
 the honey they extract, carry the fertilizing pol- 
 len from the anther to distant plants of the same 
 species. 
 
 73. Generic names are nouns, and should always 
 begin with capitals. Specific names are generally 
 adjectives, and should not begin with capitals except 
 when derived from the name of a country or person, 
 or when the term may be a noun. 
 
 74. It is due to the physical principles of capillary 
 attraction and endosmose. 
 
 75. If wheat, buckwheat, peas, and cabbage be 
 grown upon the same land, it will be observed that the 
 wheat will select the silica, the buckwheat, the mag- 
 nesia, the pea, the lime, and the cabbage the potash, 
 each for its peculiar want. 
 
276 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 
 
 76. Starting from the roots as crude sap, in the 
 form of colorless water, charged with minute quanti- 
 ties of gases and mineral salts, it passes upward dis- 
 solving the dextrine and sugar of the cells and gaining 
 in density, till it reaches the leaves, where it parts with 
 a large portion of the water by exhalation, and receives 
 carbon in return. After undergoing important chem- 
 ical changes, under the action of the air and light, it 
 becomes rich in nutritive material and returns upon 
 its downward course through the barky tissues, dis- 
 tributing to every organ its due proportion of appro- 
 priate food. 
 
 77. The carbonic acid exhaled by animals if left to 
 accumulate would in time destroy all animal life upon 
 the globe. The necessities of the plant demand this 
 gas, and in the very process of its appropriation the 
 life-giving oxygen, so essential to animal existence, is 
 returned by the plant to the atmosphere. 
 
 78. The natural system is based upon the natural 
 affinities and resemblances of plants by which nature 
 has distinguished them into groups and families. 
 
 79. Dicotyledons grow by new layers external to 
 the wood, but inside of the bark ; their leaves are net- 
 veined, flowers rarely three-parted, seeds with two or 
 more cotyledons, and with an axial root extending 
 downward from the radicle. Monocotyledons grow 
 by scattered, internal wood bundles; their leaves are 
 parallel veined, flowers generally three-parted, seeds 
 with one cotyledon, while the radicle never produces 
 an axial root. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON BOTANY. 27? 
 
 80. Bosacce : cherry, apricot, plum, almond, peacb 
 Saxifragacese: hydrangea. Ebenaceaa, persimmon. 
 Artocarpacea? : tig, osage orange, mulberry. 0»8Sw- 
 lacea? : currant, gooseberry. 
 
 81. The sunflower belongs to the order of Compos- 
 ite; the pea, to the Leguminosae'; lettuce, to the 
 Composite; parsley, to the Umbellif eras ; the sweet 
 potato to the Convolvulacese. 
 
 82. It consists of the entire inflorescence developed 
 into a mass of united pericarps. 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOIiOGY. 
 
 1. Define the terms Anatomy, Physiology, and Hy- 
 giene. 
 
 2. Name the primary animal tissues. 
 
 3. (a) What are membranes? (6) State their uses. 
 
 4. Name the principal membranes of the body. 
 
 5. What is the number and names of the ultimate 
 elements composing the human body ? 
 
 6. Describe the bones and state their uses. 
 
 7. What is the composition of bone at different 
 periods of life ? 
 
 8. How many bones in the human body? 
 
 9. Draw an outline showing the relative position 
 of the different bones in the human skeleton. 
 
 10. (a) Name and illustrate the different kinds of 
 movable joints. (6) State how their movements are 
 facilitated. 
 
 11. («) With what are the bones covered? (b) 
 What is the purpose of this covering? (c) What 
 peculiar disease originates beneath this covering? 
 
 12. What is the use of the synovia? 
 
 278 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 279 
 
 13. What mechanical and botanical principle is 
 illustrated in the long bones? 
 
 14. State the process by which nature repairs a 
 broken bone. 
 
 15. (a) What are sprains ? (p) What care do they 
 require ? 
 
 16. («) Name the characteristic property and law 
 of muscles. (6) What diversity of form is observed 
 in the adaptation of the muscles to their various posi- 
 tion and uses? 
 
 17. What is the general arrangement of muscles 
 with respect to each other? 
 
 18. Into what two classes, with respect to action, 
 are the muscles divided? Illustrate each class. 
 
 19. (a) How many muscles in the human body? 
 (6) How are the muscles of the limbs distinguished 
 as to their use? 
 
 20. Name two important muscles in each of the 
 following regions: head, front part of trunk, back 
 part of trunk, upper limbs, lower limbs. 
 
 21. Name some of the uses which muscles serve in 
 the animal economy. 
 
 22. (a) Of what are tendons composed? (b) 
 State their use. 
 
 23. Show how the bones are used as levers of the 
 1st, 2nd, and 3rd classes. 
 
 24. State the effect upon the muscles of (a) use 
 (b) disuse, (c) misuse. 
 
 25. Why should one abstain from severe exercise 
 immediately before and after eating? 
 
280 QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 2G. State the proper method and necessary exteni 
 of educating muscles. 
 
 27. How does the character of a child's early mus- 
 cular training determine his habits of action in later 
 life? 
 
 28. What organs constitute the nutritive apparatus? 
 
 29. Name the digestive organs. 
 
 30. What preparatory changes does food undergo 
 before it becomes nourishment for the body? 
 
 31. Name, locate, and state the use of the salivary 
 glands. 
 
 32. Name and locate the fluids involved in the pro- 
 cess of digestion. 
 
 33. Trace a particle of food from the mouth until it 
 reaches the blood. 
 
 34. What is the principal use of the saliva? 
 
 35. State the conditions upon which the health of 
 the digestive organs depend. 
 
 36. Under what circumstances is digestion most 
 perfect ? 
 
 37. What does the terra absorption comprehend? 
 
 38. Name the absorbents. 
 
 39. What are the principal secretions and excretions 
 of the human body ? 
 
 40. What is the length of time required for diges- 
 tion ? 
 
 41. State the object of cooking food, and how this 
 is secured. 
 
 42. Mention the evils arising from rapid eating. 
 
 43. Name the organs of circulation. 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 281 
 
 44. Describe the heart. 
 
 45 . Why is there sometimes said to be two hearts ? 
 
 46. Describe the circulation of blood, distinguish- 
 ing between pulmonary and systemic circulation. 
 
 47. How does the blood differ in color in different 
 parts of its circulation? State the cause. 
 
 48. What time is required for the complete circula- 
 tion of the blood through the system? 
 
 49. How is a backward flow of blood prevented? 
 
 50. What is the normal temperature of the body? 
 
 51. Which end of a ruptured artery should be tied? 
 Why? 
 
 52. Define coagulation, and state its use. 
 
 53. State the use of circulation of the blood. 
 
 54. Name the three classes of organic substances 
 used for food. 
 
 55. How do you account for the arteries being 
 deep-seated, while the veins are generally superficial? 
 
 56. How and through what organ is the oxygen ad- 
 mitted to the blood? 
 
 57. State the functions of the lymphatics; of the 
 lacteals. 
 
 58. How can you distinguish in external hem- 
 orrhage, whether the blood comes from an artery or a 
 vein ? 
 
 59. Name the animal and vegetative functions of the 
 body. 
 
 60. What three evils result from tight lacing? 
 
 61. Name the respiratory and vocal organs. 
 
282 QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 62. State the immediate and ultimate object of 
 respiration. 
 
 63. How does the amount of air inhaled compare 
 with the quantity exhaled? 
 
 64. In what way may the variety of tones of differ- 
 ent voices be accounted for? 
 
 65. Upon what does the strength of the voice de- 
 pend? 
 
 66. Are the lungs filled and emptied completely by 
 respiration ? What is the importance of this provis- 
 ion? 
 
 67. What diseases are apt to attack the respiratory 
 organs? How can these be provided against in the 
 school room ? 
 
 68. What anatomical changes cause the change in a 
 boy's voice at puberty? 
 
 69. What three natural remedies for consumption 
 are suggested by physiology and hygiene ? 
 
 70. Explain the origin and progress of a cold. 
 
 71. What is congestion ? How indicated? 
 
 72. State the conditions upon which pure blood is 
 dependent. 
 
 73. What physical evils result from impure blood? 
 
 74. What is the usual number of respirations per 
 minute? How can the frequency be diminished? 
 
 75. Into what two secondary systems may the ner- 
 vous system be divided? 
 
 76. (a) Describe the two kinds of matter which 
 compose the nervous system, (b) State their func- 
 tions. 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 283 
 
 77. Give a brief description of the human brain. 
 
 78. "What is the spinal cord ? What means of pro- 
 tection suggest its importance ? 
 
 79. Where is the seat of pain? Illustrate. 
 
 80. Name in order the effects of alcohol on the ner- 
 vous system. 
 
 81. Why, in apoplexy, when the right side of the 
 body becomes paralyzed, is the left side of the face 
 usually affected? 
 
 82. Give examples of associated sensations in which 
 nerves are excited by sight, hearing, and smell. 
 
 83. What are the functions of the cerebrum and the 
 cerebellum respectively ? 
 
 84. Name the nerves of special sense and state in 
 what they differ from other nerves. 
 
 85. Name habits which particularly impair the ner- 
 vous system. 
 
 86. What conditions are essential to the highest 
 mental development and vigor? 
 
 87. («) What is meant by " reflex action of the 
 spinal cord?" (6) Give examples, (c) State its use. 
 
 88. Describe the globe of the eye and name its parts. 
 
 89. How do we change the vision in looking from 
 near objects to distant ones in the same direction? 
 
 90. («) What four classes of substances excite the 
 sense of taste? (6) Locate the sense of taste. 
 
 91. Where is the sense of touch most delicate? 
 How may this be shown ? 
 
 92. What purpose does the skin serve? 
 
 93. State the office of perspiration. 
 
284 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 94. What deleterious effects result from having the 
 air too dry in occupied rooms? 
 
 95. State briefly some important directions regard- 
 ing the manner of dressing most conducive to health. 
 
 96. What effect does the loss of sleeo have upon 
 the body and the mind ? 
 
 97. Show in what manner bathing is beneficial? 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 1. Anatomy is the description of the form and posi- 
 tion of the organs of animal bodies. Physiology is 
 the description of the uses of these organs. Hygiene 
 treats of the preservation of health. 
 
 2. The primary tissues are the fibrous, areolar, car- 
 tilaginous, which collectively form the connective tis- 
 sues, and the adipose, sclerous, muscular, tubular, and 
 nervous tissues. 
 
 3. (a) Membranes are thin, extended, soft, trans- 
 parent tissues, formed by fibers interwoven like net- 
 work, (b) They serve to cover some part of the 
 body, or to absorb or secrete certain fluids. 
 
 4. The principal membranes are the basement, ser- 
 ous, synovial, and mucous membranes. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 285 
 
 5. There are fourteen ultimate elements, viz. : oxy- 
 gen, hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, calcium, potassium, 
 sodium, chlorine, phosphorous, sulphur, silicon, iron, 
 magnesium, and fluorine. 
 
 6. The bones are firm and hard, combining strength 
 and lightness. They serve as a framework or skeleton 
 for preserving the shape of the body and for the pro- 
 tection of its most delicate organs, and for the attach- 
 ment of muscles. 
 
 7. The bones consist of animal and mineral matter. 
 In early life the animal matter predominates; at ma- 
 turity the proportion is about one part of animal to 
 two parts of mineral matter; while, as age advances, 
 the quantity of mineral matter greatly exceeds that of 
 animal substance. 
 
 8. The number of bones varies at different periods 
 of life. In childhood the number is greater than ih 
 later life, many bones consisting of two parts growing 
 together, forming but one bone in the adult. The 
 number usually given, exclusive of the teeth, is 208. 
 
286 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 The Cranium. - 
 
 The Head. 
 
 4) 
 
 M 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 ffl 
 
 H 
 
 The Trunk. 
 
 The Face. 
 
 The Ears. 
 
 The Spinal 
 Column. 
 
 Frontal bone. 
 Two Parietal bones. 
 Two Temporal bones. 
 Sphenoid bone. 
 Ethmoid bone. 
 Occipital bone. 
 
 'Two Superior Maxillary bones. 
 
 Inferior Maxillary bone. 
 
 Two Malar bones. 
 
 Two Lachrymal bones. 
 
 Two Turbinated bones. 
 
 Two Nasal bones. 
 
 Vomer. 
 [ Two Palate bones. 
 
 (Hammer. 
 Anvil. 
 Stirrup. 
 
 {Cervical Vertebra. 
 Dorsal Vertebra?. 
 Lumbar Vertebra. 
 
 The Kibs. / True Ribs. 
 
 1 Ealse Ribs. 
 The Sternum. 
 The Os Hyoides. 
 
 ,„. „,. f Two Innominata. 
 
 The Pelvis. 1 Sacrum. 
 
 (. Coccyx. 
 
 The Limbs. 
 
 The Upper 
 Limbs. 
 
 The Lower 
 Limbs. 
 
 The Shoulder. /Clavicle f2). 
 \ Scapula (2) . 
 
 The Arm. 
 
 The Hand. 
 
 The Leg. 
 
 The Foot. 
 
 / Humerus. 
 
 \ Radius and Ulna. 
 
 (8 Carpal bones. 
 5 Metacarpal bones 
 14 Phalanges. 
 (Femur. 
 Patella. 
 Tibia and Fibula. 
 7 Tarsal bones. 
 Metatarsal bones 
 Phalanges. 
 
 i. J.1D1 
 
 (7Ta 
 (14P 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 287 
 
 10. (a) Movable joints are of three kinds — the 
 Plant form, the Hinge, and the Ball and Socket joints. 
 The Planiform joint is found where gliding movements 
 are required, as in the carpus and metacarpus; the 
 hinge joint, where there is motion in two directions only, 
 backward and forward, as in the knee and the elbow; 
 the ball and socket joint, where there is free movement 
 in all directions, as in the hip and shoulder joints. (6) 
 They are provided with cartilage where the surfaces are 
 in contact, and supplied with synovial membrane and 
 connecting ligaments. 
 
 11. (a) The bones are covered, as with a sac, by a 
 dense, white, fibrous membrane called periosteum, (b) 
 It serves to transmit blood-vessels into the bone, thus 
 furnishing nutriment, and gives insertion to muscles, 
 tendons, and ligaments, (c) The disease called 
 " felon " commences in or beneath the periosteum. 
 
 12. The use of the synovia is that of a lubricating 
 fluid, enabling the surface of the bones to move more 
 freely upon each other, preventing friction and conse- 
 quent wear. 
 
 13. The shafts of long bones are made hollow, giving 
 not only lightness but strength, according to the prin- 
 ciple of mechanics, that with a given amount of mate- 
 rial, a hollow cylinder will sustain more weight than a 
 solid one of the same dimensions. The culms of 
 grasses illustrate the same principle. 
 
 14. The blood which flows in consequence of the in- 
 jury is gradually absorbed, and gives place to a watery 
 fluid, which, thickening from day to day, acquires at 
 
288 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 the end of two weeks, the consistency of jelly. This 
 begins to harden by a deposit of new bone-substance, 
 until in five or six weeks, the broken bone is united. 
 
 15. (rt) Sprains are caused by a twisting, straining, 
 or tearing of the connecting ligaments of bones from 
 their attachments, (b) As a sprain may be as serious 
 as a broken bone, care should be exercised, lest the 
 use of the limb before the ligament is restored to its 
 place may impair its usefulness. 
 
 16. (a) The characteristic property of muscles is 
 contractility, and the law is that they shall contract 
 toward the center. (6) The general forms or shapes 
 of muscles are spindle-shaped, radiate, penniform, bi- 
 penniform, and orbicular. 
 
 17. With the exception of twelve single muscles, they 
 are all arranged in pairs, each having its antagonist ; 
 so that as they contract and expand alternately, the 
 bone to which they are attached is moved tc and fro. 
 
 18. Into voluntary, those which are under the con- 
 trol of the will, as the muscles of the limbs, a id invol- 
 untary, those which cannot be controlled by the will, 
 as the muscles of the heart. 
 
 10. (a) The number exceeds five hundred, (b) In 
 regard to their use the limb muscles may be distin- 
 guished as flexors, those used to bend the limbs, 
 and extensors, those which are used to extend the 
 limbs. 
 
 20. Head and neck: oral, orbicular and masseter; 
 front part of trunk : the external obk'jue and the 
 straight abdominal ; back part of trunk : the tra*. 3zius 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 289 
 
 and the superior serrated muscles ; the upper limbs : 
 the biceps and the radio-carpal extensor; the lower 
 limbs : the gluteal and sartorius. 
 
 21. The}' - give form aDd symmetry to the body, en- 
 close the cavities, and form a firm, defensive, but 
 yielding wall in the trunk, cover and move the 
 limbs, and give to some of the joints their principal 
 protection. By means of muscular action, the heart 
 beats, the blood circulates, and respiration is carried on. 
 
 22. («) Tendons are composed of the inelastic, 
 white-fibrous tissue, and possess great strength. 
 (6) They serve to convey the contractile power of 
 muscles to the bones, and connect the muscles with 
 the bones. 
 
 23. The movements of the head illustrate a lever of 
 the first class : the back or front is the weight, the 
 backbone is the fulcrum, and the muscles at the back 
 or front of the neck are the powers by which we toss 
 or bow the head. 
 
 Raising the body on tiptoe illustrates a lever of the 
 second class: the toes resting on the ground is the 
 fulcrum, the weight of the body is the weight, and 
 the muscles of the calf, the power. 
 
 Raising the lower jaw illustrates a lever of the third 
 class. Another familiar example is the elbow, in which 
 the fulcrum is at the joint, the weight is the forearm 
 and hand, and the power is in the biceps and brachial 
 muscles. 
 
 24. (a) By judicious use muscle grows larger, 
 and becomes hard, compact, and darker-colored. 
 
290 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 (b) By disuse, it decreases in size, and becomes soft, 
 flabby and pale, (c) By misuse, the muscle is often 
 strained and blood vessels burst in our efforts to per- 
 forin feats beyond our muscular power. 
 
 25. Because the vigor of the system is needed 
 for the digestive functions. Nature can sustain in 
 vigorous activity but one function at a time. 
 
 26. The training of muscles to the performance of 
 any exercise in which the highest excellence is desired 
 should be begun in early life, and continued regularly 
 and systematically till every muscle and every fiber is 
 under the control of the will. 
 
 27. An individual's speech, writing, singing, atti- 
 tudes, walking, and actions are all determined by his 
 first movements in these exercises. If exactness is not 
 required in the beginning, and continued during the 
 formative period of habit, awkwardness and impropri- 
 ety must always characterize the exercises and move- 
 ments of the individual through life. 
 
 28. The nutritive apparatus includes the digestive, 
 the absorptive, the circulatory, the assimilatory , and the 
 respiratory organs. 
 
 29. The digestive organs are the mouth, teeth, sali- 
 vary glands, palate, pharynx, oesophagus, stomach, in- 
 testines, liver, pancreas, and spleen. 
 
 30. 1st. Digestion, by which the food is reduced to 
 a soluble condition. 2nd. Absorption, by which s when 
 digested, it is imbibed into the blood. 3rd. Circula- 
 tion, which carries the enriched blood to the various 
 parts of the system. 1th. Assimilation, by which 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 291 
 
 each tissue derives from the blood the materials nec- 
 essary for its support. 
 
 31. The salivary glands consist of three glands on 
 each side of the mouth. The parotid gland is situated 
 in front of the external ear and behind the angle of 
 the lower jaw. The submaxillary gland is situated 
 within the angle of the lower jaw. The sublingual 
 gland is situated on the floor of the mouth, beneath 
 the side of the tongue. They all secrete a liquid 
 called saliva. 
 
 32. 1st. The saliva in the mouth; 2nd. The gastric 
 juice, in the stomach; 3rd. The bile, in the small in- 
 testines. 4th. The pancreatic juice, in the small in- 
 testines. 5th. The intestinal juice, in the small 
 intestines. 
 
 33 From the mouth, where the food is chewed and 
 insalivated, it passes through the pharynx and oesopha- 
 gus at the cardiac orifice into the stomach. Here it 
 undergoes a churning process until every particle is 
 subjected to the action of the gastric juice, which di- 
 gests the albuminoid substances in it, and changes 
 them to albuminose. The work of the stomach being 
 completed, the food passes through the pyloric orifice 
 into the small intestines, where it is subjected to the 
 pancreatic fluid, the bile and the intestinal juice, which 
 digest the starch and fat, changing the starch into 
 sugar and the fat into chyle. Here the digested mass, 
 called collectively the chyle, is absorbed by the lacteals 
 and blood vessels and taken into the general circula- 
 tion. 
 
292 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 34. It moistens the food and thus facilitates diges- 
 tion. 
 
 35. 1st. The quantity of food ; this should simply 
 equal the waste of the system. 2nd. The quality of 
 food, which should be nutritive and digestible. 3rd. 
 manner of taking food. Food should be neither too 
 hot nor too cold ; it should be sufficiently masticated 
 and taken at regular intervals. 4th. The system 
 should be mentally and physically conditioned to re- 
 ceive food. 
 
 36. When the action of the cutaneous vessels is 
 energetic, the mind free from absorbing thought, ex- 
 citement or depression, the blood well purified, and the 
 muscular system duly exercised. 
 
 37. Absorption is the general term for that process 
 by which all soluble substances, external to the animal 
 body, are introduced into the tissues of the body. 
 It includes also the process by which portions of the 
 living tissues are themselves removed, or absorbed 
 within the body. 
 
 38. The absorbents are the lymphatic vessels of the 
 small intestines, termed lacteals, lymphatic glands, 
 vessels, and ducts, and the thoracic duct. 
 
 39. Mucus, sebaceous matter, perspiration, tears, 
 serous fluid, saliva, gastric juice, pancreatic juice, in- 
 testinal juice, and bile. 
 
 40. From two to four hours, according to the nature 
 of food, state of the system and perfection of mastica- 
 tion. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 293 
 
 41. The object of cooking food is to render it more 
 palatable and easily digested. Cooking breaks the 
 cells and softens the fibers of which the food is com- 
 posed. 
 
 42. 1st. The food is swallowed without sufficient 
 saliva. 2nd. The particles of food are so large as to 
 hinder the action of the gastric juice, which is often 
 weakened by the use of drinks poured down with the 
 food. 3rd. We do not realize the quantity eaten until 
 the stomach is overloaded. 4th. Failing: to get the taste 
 of our food we think it insipid, and resort to condi- 
 ments which over stimulate the digestive organs. 
 
 43. The heart, arteries, capillaries, and veins. 
 
 44. The heart is the hollow muscle enclosed in a 
 sac, termed pericardium. It is situated between the 
 lungs. It is conical in shape, the apex pointing down- 
 ward, forward, and to the left. Its only attachments 
 are the large blood-vessels by which it is joined to 
 the vertebral column. 
 
 45. On account of the division of the heart by a 
 muscular septum into two parts — the right and left. 
 Each of these contains two apartments, termed auricles 
 and ventricles, the ventricles being next the apex. 
 The two sides have no communication, each perform- 
 ing a separate function. The right is sometimes 
 termed the pulmonic heart, the left, the systemic heart. 
 
 46. In pulmonic circulation the right auricle after 
 receiving the blood from two large veins, contra^s 
 and sends it into the right ventricle. This in turn con- 
 tracts and sends it through the pulmonary artery to the 
 
294 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 lungs, where it is purified and becomes a bright arterial 
 blood. Here the systemic circulation begins by the 
 entrance of the blood into the left auricle, which, con- 
 tracting, sends it to the left ventricle, from which it is 
 transmitted through the aorta to all parts of the system, 
 from which it returns thro ugh the capillaries and veins 
 to the right auricle to repeat its course as before. 
 
 47. As the blood visits the different organs it both 
 gives out and gathers up materials. In the arterial 
 circulation it is enriched with food, and scarlet with 
 oxygen received in the lungs ; returning from the 
 organs it has fed, it is impoverished in quality and 
 purple in color. 
 
 48. The entire mass is believed to make the circuit 
 in from one to two minutes. 
 
 49. A backward flow in the auricles if prevented by 
 the contraction of muscular fibers about the mouths of 
 the veins, and by valves in the veins. 
 
 50. About 98° Fahrenheit. 
 
 51. The end next to the heart, because the blood in 
 arteries flows from the heart. 
 
 52. Coagulation is a thickening or hardening of the 
 
 O DO 
 
 blood. It is serviceable in stopping the flow of blood 
 from a wounded vein. 
 
 63. Circulation of the blood carries nutrition to all 
 parts of the system, and also carries impurities to the 
 lungs to be exhaled. 
 
 54. Farinaceous, saccharine, and albuminous. 
 
 55. An injury to the more important arteries would 
 soon result in death, hence, they are deep-seated for 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 295 
 
 protection. For the same reason the larger veins are 
 deep-seated. 
 
 56. By a process called endosmosis the oxygen of 
 the air passes through the tissues of the lungs. 
 
 57. The lymphatics gather up materials that may 
 still be of benefit to the blood. The lacteals carry 
 nutrition from the intestines to the thoracic duct. 
 
 58. By observing the manner of the flow. The 
 arteries throw out the blood by jets at each beat of the 
 heart, while the veins bleed regularly. 
 
 59. The animal functions are sensation and voli- 
 tion. The vegetative functions, which are common to 
 both animals and vegetables, are digestion, assimila- 
 tion, absorption, secretion, excretion, growth, respira- 
 tion, and generation. 
 
 60. 1st. It disturbs the circulation. 2nd. It re- 
 stricts the action of the stomach and impairs digestion. 
 3rd. It prevents proper and sufficient respiration. 
 
 61. The respiratory and vocal organs are the larynx, 
 the trachea, the bronchi, and the lungs. 
 
 62. The immediate object of respiration is the puri- 
 fication of the blood ; the ultimate object is the produc- 
 tion of heat, motion and nervous energy. 
 
 63. The volume of air inhaled in an ordinary in- 
 spiration is about one pint, the quantity expelled, a 
 little less than one pint. 
 
 64. The tones of different voices are modified by the 
 shape and size of the vocal apparatus. A large larynx 
 usually gives a deep-toned voice, a smaller one, a thin- 
 toned or high-pitched voice. 
 
296 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 65. Upon the capacity of the chest, the develop- 
 ment of the muscles used in vocalization, and the ex- 
 tent of vibration of the vocal cords. 
 
 66. No. If they were completely emptied the air 
 cells would collapse, and the blood then in the lungs 
 would not be purified. 
 
 67. Consumption, bronchitis, pneumonia, lungfever, 
 asthma, etc. By having the room ventilated and 
 warmed, and teaching the children to sit, stand, and 
 walk erect, and breathe deeply and vigorously. 
 
 68. The larynx grows larger, and the vocal cords 
 longer and coarser, thus deepening the tones and low- 
 ering the pitch. 
 
 69. Plenty of pure air properly breathed, sunlight, 
 and frequent bodily exercise. 
 
 70. A cold frequently arises from a change in cloth- 
 ing, putting on a thinner garment, or sitting in a cool 
 place, or a draft when heated. The skin becomes 
 chilled and the perspiration checked. The pores are 
 closed and the blood is driven to the lungs for purifi- 
 cation. Oppression of the lungs ensues, breathing 
 becomes difficult and the extra mucus is thrown 
 off by coughing. From this condition fever, head- 
 ache, pneumonia, or pleurisy is developed. 
 
 71. Congestion is an excessive accumulation of 
 blood in any part of the body. It is indicated by an 
 unusual redness in the parts affected. 
 
 72. Pure blood is obtained only by a healthy action 
 of the respiratory organs, which in turn depends upon 
 a constant and sufficient supply of pure air. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 297 
 
 73. The carbonic acid is retained in the blood ; the 
 brain works sluggishly; the muscles become inac- 
 tive ; the heart acts imperfectly ; the secretions are 
 deteriorated; the food is not properly assimilated; 
 and the whole body becomes weak. 
 
 74. About eighteen per minute. By training and 
 habit the number may be much diminished. 
 
 75. The cerebrospinal system, consisting of the 
 brain, the spinal cord, and the nerves given off by 
 them to all parts of the body, and the sympathetic 
 system, composed of nerves and ganglia, mainly dis- 
 tributed to the viscera of the body. 
 
 76. (a) The nervous system is composed of two 
 kinds of matter, — the gray and the white. The gray 
 consists of small, ashen-colored cells, forming a pulp- 
 like substance ; the white is composed of glistening, 
 white fibers, averaging about -g-oVir °^ an mcn m diam- 
 eter. (6) The gray cells act as generators of nervous 
 force, while the white fibers serve as conductors of this 
 nervous force, having a velocity of about 100 feet per 
 second. 
 
 77. The brain, the seat of the mind, is the great 
 volume of nervous tissue lodged within the skull ; it 
 consists of two parts : — the cerebrum, or brain proper, 
 and the cerebellum, or " little brain." The cerebrum 
 lies in the front and upper part of the skull, the cere- 
 bellum, in the lower and back part. The whole floats 
 securely in a bed of liquid surrounded by three mem- 
 branes, — the^'a mater and the dura mater and the 
 arachnoid. 
 
298 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 78. The spinal cord, or " marrow," is a cylindrical 
 mass of soft nervous tissue, which occupies the tunnel 
 fitted for it in the spinal column. It is composed of the 
 same substances as the brain ; but here the white mat- 
 ter surrounds the gray, instead of being encompassed 
 by it. The importance of the spinal cord is apparent 
 from the extreme care taken to protect it from exter- 
 nal injury. 
 
 79. In the mind. If the " funny bone'" behind the 
 elbow receives a blow, the effect is at once sent to the 
 brain, which refers the shock to the ends of the nerve 
 in the third and fourth fingers, where the pain will 
 seem to be. 
 
 80. 1. Excitement. 2. Muscular weakness. 3. Men- 
 tal weakness. 
 
 81. The nerves cross from the brain to the opposite 
 side of the body, while the facial nerves come from 
 the side of the brain affected. 
 
 82. Disagreeable odors and unpleasant sights pro- 
 duce nausea ; the savory odor of cooking food and the 
 peeling of a lemon make the mouth water ; while the 
 rasping sound heard in filing a saw produces in some 
 persons the utmost irritability. 
 
 83. The cerebrum is the instrument through which 
 the powers of memory, reason, and judgment mani- 
 fest themselves. The cerebellum presides over the 
 muscular movements of the body. 
 
 84. The nerves of special sense are the auditory, 
 optic, and olfactory nerves. They differ from other 
 nerves in being neither sensitive nor motor, their 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 299 
 
 office being simply to convey the sense of hearing, see- 
 ing, and smelling. 
 
 85. The opium habit, the use of alcohol, tobacco, 
 and the excessive use of tea and coffee. 
 
 86. Each faculty of mind should receive its due 
 share of cultivation and exercise. 
 
 87. (a) The reflex action of the spinal cord is the 
 involuntary action of certain muscles independent of 
 the agency of the will. An impression made on the 
 surface of the skin, is conveyed to the cord, which 
 reflects back the motor impulse to the muscles so as to 
 excite them to action. (6) Examples are numerous: 
 nearly every act of our daily routine is an illustra- 
 tion — walking, eating, standing erect, (c) By the 
 reflex action of the cord we are protected from a thou- 
 sand perils. We involuntarily throw up our hands as 
 a shield from danger, we instinctively wink to protect 
 the eye, and upon seizing a heated substance, we in- 
 stantly drop it before the command could come from 
 the brain. 
 
 88. The globe of the eye consists of three concen- 
 tric layers — the sclerotica, with the cornea in front; 
 the choroidea, with the iris in front; and the retina, 
 which is internal. These compose most of the solid 
 part of the eyeball, which is a hollow sphere filled with 
 three semi-fluid substances — the aqueous humor, the 
 crystalline lens, and the vitreous humor. 
 
 89. The convexity of the lens is changed by means 
 of ciliary muscles. The lens is made more convex for 
 near objects and less convex for those more distant. 
 
300 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHY8IOLOGT. 
 
 90. (a) The sour, as certain acids; the sweet, as 
 sirup and sugar ; the bitter y as quinine ; and the salt, as 
 common salt. (6) The margin and the tip of the 
 tongue. 
 
 91. The sense of touch is most acute on the palmar 
 surface of the fingers. If two needles one-twen- 
 tieth of an inch apart are pressed against the end 
 of the finger two impressions are felt. No where else 
 on the body will this occur when the needles are so 
 near together. 
 
 92. The skin aids in keeping the tissues and organs 
 in their places, and protects the delicate nerves, lym- 
 phatics and blood vessels found beneath it. 
 
 93. It regulates the temperature of the body. When 
 exercise warms the body the perspiration is exuded 
 upon the skin and its evaporation reduces the tempera- 
 ture and keeps the system from being overheated. 
 
 94. When the confined air is warm and dry it ab- 
 sorbs too much of the moisture from the lungs and 
 skin, and produces a dry and feverish condition of the 
 system . 
 
 95. All garments should be as light as is consistent 
 with the warmth and comfort of the wearer. Two or 
 three thicknesses of flannel is warmer than double 
 the weight of cotton or linen ; and in a climate subject 
 to sudden and extreme changes, flannel is preferable 
 at all seasons of the year. 
 
 96. Continued loss of sleep produces debility of the 
 nervous system, nervous excitability, disturbed breath- 
 ing, palpitation of the heart, and dyspepsia; while 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHYSIOLOGY. 301 
 
 insanity, particularly in those engaged in absorbing 
 mental labor, frequently follows as the final punish- 
 ment for disregarding Nature's laws. 
 
 97. The skin becomes covered with a mixture of oil, 
 dust, etc., which if permitted to remain interferes 
 with the excretory powers of the skin. In addition 
 to removing this accumulation, water, if moderately 
 cool, throws the blood back upon the internal organs, 
 quickens the action of the heart and communicates the 
 stimulus to the whole system ; reaction sets in, and a 
 return of the blood to the surface invigorates the vital 
 powers to an extent unknown by him who never in- 
 dulged the luxury. 
 
QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 1. Explain the terms biology, zoology, and natural 
 history. 
 
 2. How does the nutrition of plants differ from that 
 of animals ? 
 
 3. Give a comprehensive definition of animals 
 
 4. Name and define the three great physiological 
 functions. 
 
 5. Name some of the most celebrated naturalists 
 who have devoted much attention to zoology. 
 
 6. Show in what manner we are dependent upon the 
 animal creation. 
 
 7. How is mankind benefited by a knowledge of the 
 habits of animals ? 
 
 8. (a) What are fossils ? (b) In what way do they 
 aid the geologist ? 
 
 9. How is paleontology dependent upon zoology? 
 
 10. Name the systems of organs found in those 
 animals exhibiting the highest order of structure. 
 
 11. Define the terms absorption and exhalation. 
 
 12. State what is meant by a cell in animal struc- 
 ture. 
 
 302 
 
QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 303 
 
 13. Upon what is the study of zoology chiefly 
 based? 
 
 14. State the general plan of classification of the 
 animal kingdom by naming the groups beginning with 
 the highest division. 
 
 15. According to modern naturalists, what princi- 
 ples determine the classification of animals into classes, 
 orders, families, etc. ? 
 
 16. Upon what principle is all scientific classification 
 of animals based ? 
 
 17. Name the six subkingdoms into which the ani- 
 mal kingdom is commonly divided. 
 
 18. What animals constitute the Vertebrates? 
 
 19. Name the five classes composing the Vertebrata. 
 
 20. How do the bones of vertebrates differ from 
 shells of mollusks? 
 
 21. In what respect do the teeth differ from bone? 
 
 22. What are the characteristics of the Mammalia? 
 
 23. Name the orders of the Mammalia, and after 
 each give an example. 
 
 24. In what consists the superiority of the frame of 
 man over that of other animals? 
 
 25. Why are monkeys sometimes classed as 
 Pedimana? 
 
 26. State the anatomical distinctions between man 
 and the monkey. 
 
 27. Explain the meaning of complete and double 
 circulation as applied to mammals. 
 
 28. How can you prove that cartilage is the basis 
 of all the bones ? 
 
304 QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 29. Write the dental formula of man. 
 
 30. What is meant by "facial angle?" How does 
 man compare in facial angle with some of the lower 
 orders ? 
 
 31. Name the three families of the Quadrumana, 
 and state which most resembles man. 
 
 32. Can the Quadrumana be trained to be of any 
 service to man ? Give your reasons. 
 
 33. State to what families the following monkeys 
 belong: Mandrill, Spider Monkey, Aye Aye, Gorilla, 
 Chimpanzee. 
 
 34. What are the prominent characteristics of the 
 Carnivora ? 
 
 35. Into what families are the Carnivora divided? 
 
 36. Classify the Carnivora according to their means 
 of locomotion, and give examples. 
 
 37. How do the senses of the Carnivora compare 
 with those of other animals? Why this provision ? 
 
 38. What is the typical family of the Carnivora ? 
 Why? 
 
 39. Describe the digestion of the Ruminantia. 
 
 40. Name the more important families of the Un- 
 gulata, distinguishing those which are artiodaclyl from 
 those termed perissodactyl. 
 
 41. Name ten animals termed ruminants. 
 
 42. State resemblances and differences between the 
 three species of the camelidae? 
 
 43. What fossil animals are included in the Probos- 
 cidea ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 305 
 
 44. Describe and name the uses of the elephant's 
 trunk. 
 
 45. Name the families of the Cetacea, and state 
 from which whalebone and sperm are obtained. 
 
 46. To what order do bats belong? 
 
 47. What peculiar habits distinguish the bats? 
 
 48. Name some of the most important insectivora. 
 
 49. Describe the dentition of the rodents. 
 
 50. Classify the Rodentia according to families, and 
 give at least one example of each. 
 
 51. Which of the rodents is the most valuable to 
 man ? 
 
 52. State two characteristics of the Edentata. 
 
 53. What is the peculiar characteristic of the Mar- 
 supialia 9 
 
 54. For what are the Mammalia of Australia re- 
 markable ? 
 
 55. What structural phenomena are exhibited in the 
 Platypus? 
 
 56. Name the orders of birds, with an example of 
 ■each. 
 
 57. State the modifications in the form of birds 
 T ..hich adapt them for flight. 
 
 58. How is the bird's plumage rendered water- 
 proof ? 
 
 59. How do the bones of birds differ from the 
 bones of mammals ? 
 
 60. Describe the respiration of birds. 
 
 61. Explain the perching apparatus of birds. 
 
 62. Describe the digestive apparatus of birds 
 
306 QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 63. (a) What temperature is required for the 
 hatching of eggs? (b) How is the chick aided in es- 
 caping from the shell ? 
 
 34. Explain the terms, granivorows,, carnivorous, 
 gregarious, omnivorous, ruminants. 
 
 65. Give the orders of reptiles with an example of 
 each? 
 
 66. How does the digestive apparatus of reptiles 
 differ from that of mammals and birds? 
 
 67. Describe the circulatory system of reptiles. 
 
 68. What is the structural characteristic of the 
 thoracic cavity of reptiles? 
 
 69. Compare the special senses of reptiles with those 
 of the higher orders. 
 
 70. Name five extinct orders of the Reptilia. 
 
 71. Compare the heart of a serpent with that of a 
 fish. 
 
 72. Explain how serpents are capable of swallowing 
 animals larger than themselves. 
 
 73. How is the poison of a venomous snake com- 
 municated to the object bitten ? 
 
 74. Where are alligators and crocodiles respectively 
 found ? 
 
 75. Show the propriety of applying the term " am- 
 phibians " to the BatracJiia. 
 
 76. Name the orders of the Batrachia. 
 
 77. In what way is the toad helpful to the gardener? 
 
 78. Compare a fish with a land vertebrate in respect 
 to respiration, locomotion, digestion. 
 
 79. Name and locate the fins of a fish, and state 
 
QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 307 
 
 which correspond to the anterior and posterior limbs 
 of vertebrates. 
 
 80. Into what four classes are fishes divided accord- 
 ing to Agassiz? Give examples. 
 
 81. What enables the flying fish to " fly ? " 
 
 82. Name the subkingdoms which form the Inverte- 
 brates . 
 
 83. Name the classes of Articulata with examples. 
 
 84. Give some of the most prominent structural 
 characteristics of the Articulates. 
 
 85. How are insects distinguished from other Articu- 
 lates? 
 
 86. How do insects breathe? 
 
 87. Describe the sting of an insect, and state how it 
 differs from an " ovipositor." 
 
 88. Trace a particle of food in the digestive organs 
 of an insect by naming the organs through which it 
 passes to the intestine. 
 
 89. Describe the metamorphosis of insects. 
 
 90. Name and define the seven orders of insects, and 
 give two examples of each. 
 
 91. Are young flies smaller than old flies? 
 
 92. What orders belong to the Arachnida? 
 
 93. Give the characteristics of the arachnids. 
 
 94. Describe the Crustacea as a class. 
 
 95. What remarkable restorative power over lost 
 limbs is possessed by crustaceans ? 
 
 96. Explain the molting of a crustacean. 
 
 97. Name the orders of Crustacea according to the 
 most general authority, and give examples of each. 
 
308 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 98. State the different methods by which worms 
 multiply. 
 
 99. How does the earth-worm benefit the soil? 
 
 100. (a) Explain how the tape-worm is nourished. 
 (b) How it grows, (c) How it is developed in the 
 human system. 
 
 101. How do Mollusks differ from the higher 
 branches ? 
 
 102. Describe the circulatory system of Mollusks. 
 
 103. Name and briefly describe the commonly rec- 
 ognized classes of Mollusca. 
 
 104. What is the structure of the Radiata? 
 
 105. Describe the digestion of the Asteroids. 
 
 106. What is the simplest form of animal which has 
 been discovered? 
 
 107. Classify the following animals by naming the 
 Subkingdotn, Class, Order, and Family to which they 
 severally belong: Orang-outang, Jaguar, Otter, Goat, 
 Zebra, Mole, Armadillo, Swallow, River Tortoise, 
 Frog, Salmon, Butterfly, Locust, Scorpion, Hair- 
 snake, Slug, Oyster, Madrepore, Jelly-fish, Deer, 
 Sperm Whale, Rat, Sparrow, Hawk, Quail, Pelican, 
 Alligator, Katydid, Cuttle-fish, Sea Urchin. 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 1. Biology (bios, life; and logos, discourse) is the 
 study of living objects of all kinds. It includes the 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 309 
 
 sciences of Botany and Zoology. Zoology (zoon, ani- 
 mal; and logos, discourse) treats of animals. The 
 term Natural History, formerly applied to the study 
 of all natural objects, is now limited to Zoology. 
 
 2. Plants live upon purely dead or inorganic sub- 
 stances, as water, carbonic acid, ammonia, converting 
 these into organic substances ; as starch, cellulose, 
 sugar, etc. Animals have no power of living on in- 
 organic substances ; they require ready-made organic 
 compounds, which plants furnish. 
 
 3. Animals are living beings, nourished wholly by 
 organic food, and which have sensation and the power 
 of voluntary motion, consuming oxygen and giving 
 off carbonic acid. 
 
 4. 1. Functions of Nutrition, those by which an 
 animal is able to live, grow and maintain its existence 
 as an individual. 2. Functions of Reproduction, those 
 by which the perpetuation of the species is insured. 
 3. Functions of Relation, those by means of which 
 external objects are brought into relation with the 
 organism, and by which it in turn reacts upon the 
 outer world. 
 
 5. Aristotle, Linneas, Cuvier, Buffon, and Agassiz. 
 
 6. First, a great portion of our food is derived from 
 the animals of the forest, field and waters. Second, 
 all our most valuable articles of apparel we get from 
 this source. Third, dyes, varnishes, glues, ivory, 
 bone, and a thousand other articles employed in the 
 arts we take from the animal world. 
 
310 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 7. Zoology teaches mankind what animals are useful 
 to him, and what ones are harmful. It teaches us how 
 to protect those which may be of use, and how to de- 
 stroy those which do us harm. 
 
 8. (a) The remains of ancient organic bodies dis- 
 covered in the earth, (b) Fossils aid the geologist in 
 tracing out the different rock formations, and finding 
 the coal and other materials essential to supply the 
 wants of civilized man. 
 
 9. Fossil remains of animals can be understood only 
 when studied by the aid of facts and principles of 
 zoology. 
 
 10. Respiratory, digestive, absorbent, circulatory, 
 secretory, excretory, motory, reproductive and ner- 
 vous systems. 
 
 11. Absorption is the act by which organisms imbibe 
 into their tissues the fluids which surround them. 
 Exhalation is the act of sending forth fluids in the form 
 of vapor through the external and internal surfaces of 
 the animal. 
 
 12. A cell is the ultimate structural element of the 
 animal composition. It is a minute vesicle filled with 
 a viscid liquid named protoplasm ; i.e., the first to form. 
 Within the vesicle there is a central particle termed the 
 nucleus, and within this, there is, in many cases, a still 
 smaller particle called nucleolus. 
 
 13. Upon the classification of animals according to 
 their relations and affinities. 
 
 14. The first division is into Subkingdoms or 
 Branches; 2nd. Classes; 3rd. Orders; 4th. Families; 
 5th. Genera; 6th. Species. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 311 
 
 15. Subkingdoms are characterized by plan of struc- 
 ture; classes, by the manner in which the plan is exe- 
 cuted; orders, by the complication of structure; 
 families, by form, as determined by structure ; genera, 
 by details of execution in special parts; species, by 
 the relation of individuals to one another, and by the 
 proportion of their parts. 
 
 16. Upon structure and upon form as determined 
 by structure. 
 
 17. 1. Vertebrata. 2. Articulata. 3. Mollusca. 
 4. Echinodermata. 5. Coelenterata. 6. Protozoa. 
 
 18. All animals which have an internal jointed skel- 
 eton, and a brain and spinal cord along the dorsal side. 
 
 19. Mammalia, Aves, Reptilia, Amphibia, Pisces. 
 
 20. The bones are living and vascular animal tis- 
 sues, growing and changing by internal additions and 
 modifications. Shells grow only by additions to and 
 modifications of the circumference. 
 
 21. The teeth are in part composed of bony mate- 
 rial called cement, but iheir principal substances are 
 dentine aud enamel; enamel being harder than any 
 other tissue of the body, having but a trace of :r.:mal 
 tissue, the teeth are far more durable than the Denes. 
 
 22. The Mammalia are warm-blooded, air-breathing 
 vertebrates, which bring forth living young, and nour- 
 ish them with milk. Their skin is usually covered 
 with hair, fur or wool. Their lungs are separated by a 
 diaphragm from the abdominal cavity. The heart has 
 four cavities ; the circulation of the blood is double 
 and complete. 
 
312 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 23. Bimana> man; Quadrumana, monkey; Oar- 
 nivora, lion; Uhgulata, horse; Proboscidea, ele- 
 phant; Sirenia, dugong; Hyracoidea, daman; 
 Cetacea, whale; Chiroptera, bat; Insectivora, mole; 
 Modentia, beaver; Edentata, anteater; Marsupialia, 
 opossum ; Monoiremata, duckbill. 
 
 24. The framework of man is superior to that of 
 the animals in its adaptability for the greatest variety 
 of movements. , 
 
 25. Because of their power of opposing the great 
 toe to the other toes, making the hind feet become 
 hands. 
 
 26. Monkeys may be distinguished from man ana- 
 tomically by the spinal opening in the cranium being 
 in the posterior third of the base ; by the single curve 
 of the vertebral column ; by the shortness of the thumb 
 which does not reach the base of the index finger ; by 
 the long and narrow pelvis ; by the obtuse angle of the 
 foot with the leg ; and by the disproportionate length 
 of the arms, which in most species, reach to the knee. 
 
 27. The circulation in mammals is complete because 
 all the blood circulates through the lungs before going 
 through the body ; and it is said to be double because 
 the blood passes through two sets of capilliary vessels, 
 one set belonging to the lungs, the other set to the 
 body. 
 
 28. This may be shown by placing a bone in weak 
 muriatic acid for a few days, when the mineral sub- 
 stance will be dissolved, and the cartilage having the 
 same form and size as the bone will remain. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 313 
 
 2—2 1—1 2—2 
 
 29. Incisors, : Canine, ; Pre-molars, 
 
 2-2 1-1 2-2 
 
 Molars,^? = 32. 
 
 3-3 
 
 30. The " facial angle " is formed by the intersec- 
 tion of two lines projected in the following manner : 
 the first extends from the lower opening of the ear to 
 the base of the nose ; the second starting from the 
 most prominent part of the forehead, intersects the 
 first at the most prominent part of the upper jaw. 
 In the White race this angle varies from 75° to 95°; 
 in the ape it is 40° ; in the dog, 20°. 
 
 31. The three families of the quadrumana are the 
 Sirniidse, the Cebidse, and the Lemuridse. The Simiidse 
 resembles man most. 
 
 32. None have ever been trained to render any 
 useful service, and such training is probably impossi- 
 ble from their disposition, being selfish, crafty, 
 thievish, and malicious. 
 
 33. The Mandrill, to the Simiidse ; the Spider 
 Monkey, to the Cebidse ; the Aye Aye, to the Lemuri- 
 die ; the Gorilla and the Chimpanzee, to the Simiidge. 
 
 34. 1st. They feed wholly or mainly on flesh. 2nd. 
 They have long, sharp teeth, fitted for cutting and 
 tearing rather than grinding. 3rd. The stomach is 
 simple and the intestines relatively short, perfectly 
 adapted to their easily digestible food. 4th. Their 
 feet are provided with toes, which are often armed 
 with sharp claws. 5th. In most cases the Carnivora 
 are without clavicles. 
 
314 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 35. Pelidce, as the lion, cat ; Viverridce, civet, ich- 
 neumon ; Hyenidce, hyena ; Canidce, dog, wolf ; 
 MustelidcB, weasel, otter; Ursidce, bear ; Procyonidce, 
 raccoon; Otariidce, eared seal, sea bear; Phocidce, 
 common seal; Rosmaridve, walrus. 
 
 36. Digitigradesy those which walk on the toes 
 without touching the heel to the ground; as the cat, 
 tiger; Plantigrades, those which in walking place the 
 sole of the foot flat on the ground ; as the bear, rac- 
 coon ; Pennigrades, those which progress by means of 
 fin-like paddles; as the seal and walrus. 
 
 37. Since the carnivora live almost entirely by prey 
 which they must capture, their senses are more acute 
 than those of any other order. 
 
 38. The Felidse, because they exhibit the peculiar 
 characteristics of the order more than any other 
 family. 
 
 39. In the Raminantia the stomach is composed of 
 four compartments. The food is swallowed as the 
 animal grazes, and is passed directly into the paunch 
 or first stomach ; thence into the reticulum or second 
 stomach, where it is moistened and formed into 
 pellets, which afterward ascend through the oesophagus 
 to the mouth to be chewed while the animal rests. 
 The food, now in the form of chewed cuds, is again 
 swallowed, passing directly into the leaflet or third 
 stomach, sometimes called many plies, on account of 
 its numerous folds. From this it passes to the fourth 
 stomach or caillette- which is the true organ of diges- 
 tion. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 315 
 
 40. The artiodactyl Ungulata are : Camelidse, 
 Giraffidse, Bovidre, Antilocapridce, Cervidae, Hippo- 
 potamidaB, Suidas, Dicotylidoe; the perissodactyl Un- 
 gulata are : Equidse, Rhinocerotidse, Tapiradse. 
 
 41. The giraffe, bison, buffalo, goat, chamois, ox, 
 deer, moose, sheep, gazelle. 
 
 42. The camel, dromedary, and llama resemble one 
 another in having no horns, being provided with two 
 toes and cushioned feet, and being all ruminants. 
 They differ in their dorsal structure and habitat, the 
 camel having one hump, the dromedary, two and the 
 llama none. The camel is adapted to cold climates, 
 the dromedary to hot climates, and the llama, by rea- 
 son of its hooked toes, is adapted to the rugged moun- 
 tains of the Andes. 
 
 43. The mastodon and the dinotherium. 
 
 44. The elephant's proboscis or trunk is a long cylin- 
 drical organ composed of several thousand muscles, and 
 endowed at its terminus with the most delicate sensi- 
 bility. The trunk is remarkable for its power and 
 agility. It is the organ of touch, smell, prehension, 
 and defense. 
 
 45. The families of the Cetacea are delphinidce, bal- 
 aenidce, and physeteridce. Whalebone is obtained from 
 the upper jaw of the balaenidce. Sperm is obtained 
 from cranial cavities in the physeteridce. 
 
 46. To the Chiroptera. 
 
 47. The bats fly during the night, concealing them- 
 selves in daylight in caves, hollow trees, and dark 
 places, hanging by the hooks or nails of their hind 
 
316 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 feet. Their large ears and broad wings possess such 
 a delicate sensibility that they are enabled to fly 
 quickly and safely through the most complicated 
 passages. 
 
 48. The mole, shrew, hedgehog, kabung. 
 
 49. In each jaw they have two chisel-shaped inci- 
 sors, between which and the molars there is a space 
 without teeth, canines being wanting. The incisors are 
 long, slightly curved and deeply rooted. The edges 
 ore kept sharp by friction and growth. The molars 
 are usually ridged transversely, and the jaws have 
 a backward and forward motion as required in 
 gnawing. 
 
 50. Muridce, rats and mice; Geomyidce, gophers; 
 Castoridce, beaver; Sciuridce, squirrels; Hystricidoe, 
 porcupine ; Caviidce, Guinea-pig ; Leporidm, hares and 
 rabbits. 
 
 51. The beaver on account of its fur. 
 
 52. They are all toothless and painfully deliberate in 
 their movements. 
 
 53. The Marsupialia at birth are extremely small, 
 and are immediately received into a pocket or pouch, 
 formed by folds of the skin of the mother's abdomen. 
 Here they are nourished till they are able to take care 
 of themselves. 
 
 54. In belonging, with a few exceptions, to the order 
 of Marsupialia. 
 
 55. It has the form of an otter with many of his 
 habits, and the bill of a duck and webbed feet. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 317 
 
 56. 
 
 Passeres, sparrows. Hebodtones, herons. 
 
 Picari^:, woodpeckers. Axectorides, rails. 
 Psittaci, parrots. Lamellirostres, geese. 
 
 Raptores, vultures. Steganopodes, pelicans. 
 
 Columbjs, doves. Longipennes, gulls. 
 
 Galling , turkeys. Pygopodes , auks . 
 
 Brevipennies , ostriches . Sphenisci , penguins . 
 Limicol^e, snipes. 
 
 57. The breast bone is greatly enlarged to furnish 
 support for the muscles which move the wings ; while 
 the fore limbs below the elbow are more or less consol- 
 idated to give firmness in striking the air in flight. 
 
 58. By the oil with which the feathers are dressed, 
 and which is furnished by a gland situated on the tail. 
 
 59. In being much lighter. The marrow found in 
 the bones of mammals is replaced by air in the bones 
 of birds. 
 
 60. Respiration in birds is most complete. Not only 
 the lungs perforin this function, but the bones and 
 feathers aid in the act of breathing. It is claimed that 
 if the windpipe be tied a bird will breathe through a 
 broken bone. 
 
 61. A large muscle extends down the thigh-bone, 
 terminating in a tendon, which passes in front of the 
 knee, and continuing downward and backward, passes 
 behind the heel-bone; here it divides, sending branches 
 to all the toes. When the bird stands erect the toes 
 are extended, but as it crouches, the limbs being bent, 
 the muscle and tendon are shortened, and in the act 
 
318 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 the toes are flexed and grasp the perch. This flexion 
 is seen in the stepping of fowls, the flexing of the toes 
 being involuntary. 
 
 62. The stomach is composed of three parts, — the 
 crop, which is an enlargement of the gullet, a membran- 
 eous stomach lined with numerous glands which furnish 
 juices to moisten the food, and the gizzard, in which 
 the food is finally digested. 
 
 63. (a) 104° Fahr. (6) By a horny point at the 
 extremity of the bill by which the shell is pierced. 
 
 64. Granivorous, living upon grains or other seeds. 
 Carnivorous, living upon animal food. Gregarious, 
 living in numbers or herds. Omnivorous, feeding 
 indiscriminately on all kinds of food. Ruminants, 
 animals which chew the cud. 
 
 65. Testudinaia, turtles; Loricata, alligator; Lac- 
 ertilia^ lizards; Ophidia, snakes. 
 
 66. It is shorter in proportion than in warm blooded 
 vertebrates. The transition from the oesophagus to 
 the stomach is by a pouch-like dilatation. The small 
 intestines have but few coils, and the large intestines 
 are short. Digestion is sluggish. 
 
 67. The blood of reptiles is much cooler than in 
 animals or birds. The heart has only three cavities 
 instead of four, two auricles and one ventricle. The 
 arterial blood from the lungs goes into the left auricle, 
 and the venous blood from all parts of the body into 
 the right auricle ; both are poured into the single ven- 
 tricle, thus mixing the pure and impure blood; hence 
 tne sluggishness of these animals. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY 319 
 
 68. Reptiles having no diaphragm, there is no divi- 
 sion between the cavities of the thorax and abdomen, 
 and the lungs are not connected with air-sacs placed in 
 various parts of the body. 
 
 69. The eyes of reptiles differ but little from those 
 of birds; the hearing is less complete than it is in 
 either mammals or birds ; the sense of smell is but 
 little developed ; while the sense of touch is almost 
 wanting. 
 
 70. Ichthyopterygia, 8auropterygia, Ptcrosauria, 
 Anomodontia, Deinosauria. 
 
 71. The heart of a serpent has three cavities, — two 
 auricles and one ventricle; while a fish has but two 
 cavities, — one auricle and one ventricle, containing 
 only impure blood. 
 
 72. The lower jaw articulates with the skull by 
 means of a quadrate bone, and this in turn is movably 
 jointed to the cranium. The two halves of the lower 
 jaw are loosely united by ligaments and muscles. By 
 reason of this peculiar arrangement serpents have the 
 power of opening the mouth to an astonishing extent. 
 
 73. The upper jaw contains a pair of long, curved 
 fangs, which, when not in use, are pointed backward, 
 and concealed in a fold of the gum. Each fang is 
 perforated by a fine tube, connecting with the duct of 
 the "poison-gland," located under and behind the 
 eyes. When the snake strikes at any object, the poi- 
 son is forced through the fang into the wound, partly 
 by the contraction of the muscles of the glands, and 
 partly by the action of the jaw. 
 
320 ANSWERS TO QUESTION'S ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 74. The alligator in the New World, the crocodile 
 in the Old World. 
 
 75. The term " amphibians " is applied to the Ba- 
 tracltia on account of their " double life," — the tadpole 
 stage passed in water during which they breathe by 
 gills like a fish, and a mature stage passed in air, dur- 
 ing which they breathe by lungs. 
 
 76. Anoura, as frogs and toads; Urodela, as sala- 
 manders and newts; Amphipneustra , as siredons; 
 Apoda, as the blind worm. 
 
 77. The toad is an enormous eater; his daintiest 
 food is the insect tribe that infest the gardens. A half 
 dozen toads in a large garden will devour all the in- 
 sects that destroy the young plants. 
 
 78. While respiration in the land vertebrates is per- 
 formed by means of lungs, in fishes it is effected by 
 means of gills; the limbs of fish corresponding to the 
 locomotive members of land vertebrates are but little 
 developed. Owing to the simplicity of the intestinal 
 canal, digestion in fishes is very rapid. 
 
 79. The fins of fish are termed pectorals, corre- 
 sponding to the fore or anterior limbs of the higher 
 vertebrates; ventrals, corresponding to the posterior 
 limbs, dorsal, on the back; anal, beneath the tail; and 
 caudal, at the end of the tail. 
 
 SO. Into Salachians (cartilaginous skeleton), as 
 Sharks, Rays; Ganoids (enameled), as Gar-pikes ; 
 Sturgeons ; Telliosts (perfect bone), as Perch, Salmon, 
 Mxrsipobranchii (pouch gills), as Lampreys, Lan- 
 celet. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 321 
 
 81. The so-called flying of this fish is due to an 
 excessive development of the pectoral fins, by which it 
 is enabled to sustain itself in air for only a few 
 seconds. 
 
 82. The Articulata; the Mollusca; the Echinoder- 
 mata; the C oelenterata ; the Protozoa. 
 
 83. Insecta, as insects ; Myriapoda, as centipedes; 
 Arachnida, as spiders; Crustacea, as lobsters; An- 
 nelida, as worms. 
 
 84. The bodies of Articulates consist of a series of 
 transversely jointed rings, more or less movable, com- 
 posed of a substance termed chitine. The external 
 parts are usually hard, and constitute the only skele- 
 ton the animal may be said to have. The limbs, when 
 present, are like the body — composed of jointed rings. 
 Each distinct segment of the body possesses an inde- 
 pendent nerve center, though these are all connected, 
 both with each other and with the outer integument. 
 
 85. In the true insects the three divisions of the 
 body, the head, thorax, and abdomen, are always dis- 
 tinct from one another; there are never more than 
 three pairs of legs in the adult, and these are borne 
 upon the thorax ; the abdomen has no locomotive ap- 
 pendages. 
 
 86. Breathing in insects is effected by means of air- 
 tubes which branch throughout the animal, and which 
 receive the air through air-holes, arranged along the 
 side or posterior part of the body. The biood is 
 aerated by absorbing air through delicate membranes 
 of the tubes. 
 
 21 
 
322 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 87. The sting is a kind of hollow lancet connected 
 with an internal sac of poison, which the insect injects 
 into the wounds it inflicts when enraged. The oviposi- 
 tor, or piercer, is a jointed tube used for conducting 
 eggs into holes where they are left to be hatched. 
 
 88. The food in some insects is chewed by means of 
 mandibles by a horizontal motion ; in others it is mere- 
 ly sucked in, and passes into a more or less folded 
 cavity, termed the crop, from which it goes into a 
 second muscular cavity or gizzard. The gizzard is 
 adapted for crushing the food, by having, in many 
 cases, teeth-like plates of chitine. From this the food 
 passes into the true digestive organ, termed the chylific 
 stomach, and thence to the intestine. 
 
 89. The metamorphoses comprise three stages. The 
 moth in passing from the egg state becomes a larva. 
 If legs are present, the larva is a caterpillar ; if absent, 
 a grub or maggot. In this state the larva is a voracious 
 eater, and grows astonishingly, as may be seen in the 
 common tobacco worm. At growth it usually rolls itself 
 into an apparently lifeless oval or conical body called a 
 pupa or chrysalis. After a time, varying in length in 
 different species, it sheds its pupa covering and comes 
 forth an imago, or perfect insect. 
 
 90. 1. Hymenoptera (membrane-winged), bees, 
 wasps. 
 
 2. Lepidoptera (scaly-winged), butterflies, moths. 
 
 3. Diptera (two-winged), flies, mosquitoes. 
 
 4. Coleoptera (sheath-winged), beetles, weevils. 
 
 5. Hemiptera (half-winged), harvest-flies, bugs. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 323 
 
 6. Orthoptera (straight-winged), locusts, crickets. 
 
 7. Neuroptera (nerve-winged), dragon-flies, ant- 
 lion. 
 
 91. They are not. Flies come forth in the imago 
 full grown. The small flies belong to a different 
 species. 
 
 92. Aranece, as the spider; JPedipalpi, as the 
 scorpion; Acarina, as the mite, cattle tick. 
 
 93. The Arachnids have the head and thorax closely 
 united ; four pairs of legs ; they are without antennas 
 or wings; and, in general, undergo no metamorphosis, 
 but molt their skin six times before coming to ma- 
 turity. 
 
 94. The Crustacea (hard covering) are covered 
 with a crust or shell. The body consists of segments, 
 most of which, in the higher orders, are united into 
 one piece, called the cephalo-thorax. Most crustaceans 
 live in water, and breathe by means of gills or 
 branchice. 
 
 95. All Crustaceans have the power of repairing 
 injuries to themselves. Thus, if a leg or other ap- 
 pendage is broken off another soon grows in its 
 place. 
 
 96. As the Crustacean grows it becomes too large 
 for its shell. A rent is formed through the back and 
 the animal slips out, leaving a shell as much like itself 
 as when it encased the living creature. 
 
 97. Decapoda, ten-footed, as lobsters, crabs, and 
 shrimp ; Tetradecapoda, fourteen-footed, as wood-lice 
 
324 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 and sand-fleas; Entomostraca, insect-like, as horse- 
 shoe crabs and barnacles. 
 
 98. Most worms multiply by eggs; some by self- 
 division, called germination or fission ; while a few are 
 viviparous. 
 
 99. The earth or angle worm eats the organic mat- 
 ter found in the earth. The rejected worm casts 
 together with the burrowing and working of the worms 
 over the soil often converts barren wastes into pro- 
 ductive land. 
 
 100. (a) The tape worm is without digestive organs 
 or alimentary canal, hence all nourishment is absorbed 
 through the walls of its body, (b) The worm grows 
 by increase in the number of joints near the head, the 
 older ones, containing eggs, ripening and falling away, 
 (c) The detatched joints escaping to the world scatter 
 the eggs, which enter the system of other animals, 
 usually some omnivorous feeder like the hog. Here 
 only the eggs will hatch. The embryo pierces the 
 flesh and becomes hydatids. The meat of such tainted 
 hogs, containing, the larvae of these is eaten raw or 
 insufficiently cooked, and develop in the human system 
 the tape worm. 
 
 101. Mollusks are neither jointed nor radiated in 
 their internal structure, but are composed of yielding 
 tissues of great concractile power enveloped by a mus- 
 cular skin called the mantle. In most cases the mol- 
 lusk is protected by a hard shell. 
 
 102. The circulatory system of the higher orders 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 325 
 
 of the Mollusca consists of a distinct heart, having an 
 auricle and a ventricle, arteries and veins. The auricle 
 receives the colorless aerated blood from the gills, while 
 the ventricle drives it through the body. 
 
 103. 1st. The Cephalopoda have muscular append- 
 ages or arms around the head, two stout horny jaws; 
 two large eyes ; and the body is sometimes covered 
 by a shell. 2nd. The Gasteropoda have the abdomen 
 provided with a single foot by which all movements 
 are effected. While some are naked, most live in an 
 univalve shell. 3rd. The Acephala or Lamellibran- 
 chiata have no apparent head, and live in a shell com- 
 posed of two valves. 4th. The Tunicata or Ascidians 
 have a soft, elastic covering instead of a shell. 5th. 
 The Brachiopoda (arm-footed) have two ciliated arms, 
 the shell composed of two valves, one above and one 
 below opening by a system of muscles instead of 
 hinge ligaments as in the oyster. 6th. The Pohjzoa 
 grow in clusters, hence the name (many animals). 
 They resemble plants in their general appearance so 
 much as to be sometimes called mass-animals. 
 
 104. The Radiata diverge in all directions from a 
 central axis, — they are without ends or sides. The 
 lateral symmetry observed in the higher forms is here 
 replaced by a circular symmetry from the center, 
 similar to the growth of plants, from which resem- 
 blance the radiates are often called plant-animals. 
 
 105. The Asteroids force their prey into a cavity 
 on the under side by means of tentacles, when the 
 
326 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ZOOLOGY. 
 
 stomach by a peristaltic movement protrudes and en- 
 velopes the food, which by the action of the fluids 
 secreted by the animal, goes through the process of 
 digestion. 
 
 106. The Bathybius, belonging to the Monera, a 
 structureless living albuminous jelly. 
 
 107. Consult Tenny's Elements of Zoology or 
 Steel's Fourteen Weeks in Zoology. 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 1. Define Natural Philosophy. Physics. 
 
 2. Give the general properties of matter. 
 
 3. What are the specific properties of matter ? 
 
 4. How does a molecule differ from an atom? 
 
 5. Name the great forces in nature. 
 
 6. State and illustrate the difference between cohe- 
 sion and adhesion. 
 
 7. In what three forms does matter exist? 
 
 8. What is the difference between annealing and 
 welding? 
 
 9. State Newton's Laws of Motion. 
 
 10. What is the absolute unit of force? 
 
 11. Give the law of reflected motion. 
 
 12. What are the two laws of gravitation? 
 
 13. (a) How does weight decrease above and below 
 the earth's surface, (b) Where is it nothing? 
 
 14. Write the three formulas for falling bodies, ex- 
 plaining the characters you employ. 
 
 15. How does the initial velocity of a body pro- 
 jected upward compare with the final velocity of a fall- 
 ing body ? 
 
 327 
 
328 QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 16. What is meant by the random of a projectile? 
 
 17. How far will a body fall in ten seconds? 
 
 18. Give the laws of the pendulum. 
 
 19. (a) What is the length of a second's pendulum 
 in the United States? (6) Where would it be longer? 
 
 20. Explain what is meant by a 10 horse-power en- 
 gine. 
 
 21. What are the three general laws of machines? 
 
 22. Describe the three classes of levers. 
 
 23. Give formulas for the solution of lever problems. 
 
 24. With a lever of the first class in which the 
 distance between the power and fulcrum is 4 feet, and 
 the distance from the weight to the fulcrum is 2 feet, 
 how great a weight can be balanced by a man weighing 
 150 pounds? 
 
 25. Write a formula for the wheel and axle. 
 
 26. State the law of wheel-work. 
 
 27. What is a pulley? How many kinds? 
 
 28. How do you find the weight balanced by a given 
 power with a system of pulleys having a continuous 
 rope? 
 
 29. Give rules for determining the advantage gained 
 by using an inclined plane. 
 
 30. How is the advantage gained by the use of a 
 screw estimated? 
 
 31. What means are employed for diminishing the 
 friction between two surfaces? 
 
 32. State the law of liquid pressure. 
 
 33. How is the pressure of a hydrostatic press 
 found ? 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 329 
 
 34. Give a rule for finding the liquid pressure on the 
 oottoni of any vessel. 
 
 35. How may the pressure of water against the side 
 of a vessel be found ? 
 
 36. Upon what property of liquids is the spirit level 
 constructed? 
 
 37. State clearly what is meant by specific gravity? 
 
 38. How would you find the sp. gr. of a piece of 
 iron ? 
 
 39. Give a rule for finding sp. gr. of a body lighter 
 than water. 
 
 40. How is the weight of any substance determined 
 from its specific gravity? 
 
 41. («) What is the pressure of the air at sea level? 
 (5) How high a column of mercury does this pressure 
 sustain? (c) What height does it raise water in a 
 pump ? 
 
 42. Describe and state the uses of the barometer. 
 
 43. State the velocity of sound in air and in water. 
 
 44. With what velocity will water flow from an 
 opening 64.32 feet below the surface of the water? 
 Give the work, and state the law upon which this is 
 based. 
 
 45. How would you determine the volume of water 
 discharged by a river in a given time? 
 
 46. Name the different kinds of water-wheels in use, 
 and state how much of the water power is made avail- 
 able by each. 
 
 47. What is Mariotte's law governing the compress- 
 ibility of air? 
 
330 QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 48. Explain the action of the lifting pump. 
 
 49. How is the earth's magnetism shown by polar- 
 izing a bar thrust in the ground ? 
 
 50. State the law of electric action. 
 
 51. What is the velocity of light? 
 
 52. How does the intensity of light and heat vary? 
 
 53. Give three laws for the refraction of light. 
 
 54. Upon what principles are sounds transmitted by 
 the telephone? 
 
 55. Nameand define the methods of diffusion of heat. 
 
 56. Upon what facts does the action of the ther- 
 mometer depend ? 
 
 57. How much steam will a cubic foot of water 
 make? 
 
 58. Give the law of thermodynamics. 
 
 59. How is the vibrating movement of the piston in 
 a steam-engine produced? 
 
 60. How do images appear in convex mirrors? 
 
 61. Name the different kinds of lenses. Into what 
 two classes may they be divided ? 
 
 62. Explain how objects are perceived by the 
 organs of the eye. 
 
 63. A, who can row 6 miles an hour in still water, 
 heads his boat straight across a stream flowing 4 
 miles an hour: how far and with what velocity does 
 his boat move to reach the opposite shore, if the 
 stream is 4 miles wide? 
 
 64. A body weighs 50 lbs. at the earth's surface; 
 what is its weight 500 miles below the surface? 
 
 65. What would be the difference in weight of a 
 
QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 331 
 
 100 lb. ball 1000 miles above the earth's surface and 
 1000 miles below the surface ? 
 
 66. How far above and below the earth's surface 
 should a Troy pound be taken to weigh 3 ounces ? 
 
 67. How far will a two-pound weight fall during 
 («) the fourth second of its descent? (b) What will 
 be the entire distance fallen? (c) With what velocity 
 will it strike the earth? 
 
 68 . A body is thrown directly upward with a veloc- ' 
 ity of 112.56 feet; (a) What velocity will it have at 
 the end of the fourth second? (6) In what direction 
 is it moving? 
 
 69. What will be the time of vibration of a pendu- 
 lum 30 inches long, and how many vibrations will it 
 make in a minute? 
 
 70. How long must a pendulum be to beat once in 
 2 2 /3 seconds ? 
 
 71. A pendulum 5 feet long makes 400 vibrations 
 during a certain time; how many vibrations will it 
 make in the same time after the pendulum rod has 
 been expanded x /4 of an inch ? 
 
 72. What is the horse-power of an engine that can 
 raise 2000 lbs. 4800 feet in 3 minutes? 
 
 73. How long will it take a 10 horse-power engine 
 to raise 50 tons 200 feet? 
 
 74. How far can a 20 horse-power engine raise 80 
 tons in 40 seconds? 
 
 75. What weight can be balanced by a lever having 
 the following elements: power arm 7V2 feet, weight 
 arm 8 inches, power 100 lbs.? 
 
332 QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 76. Required the power to balance a weight of 150 
 lbs., and the class of lever, if the power arm is 3 
 feet and the weight arm 4 feet. 
 
 77. Two men, A and B carry a barrel of flour 
 (weight 210 lbs.) suspended from an 8-foot pole be- 
 tween them, but as B is only 7 /8 as strong as A, it is 
 required to know how far from each the weight should 
 be placed. 
 
 78. Where should be the fulcrum of a 5-foot lever 
 so that a weight of 40 lbs. at one end shall be balanced 
 by 8 lbs. at the other? 
 
 79. What is the class and length of lever and dis- 
 tance from power to fulcrum of that lever with which 
 a power of 1 kilogram will balance a weight of 4 kilo- 
 grams placed 50 centimeters from the fulcrum ? 
 
 80. What power will be required to move the pilot- 
 wheel of a boat if the resistance of the rudder is 
 80 lbs. and the diameters of the wheel and axle are 
 4 feet and 8 inches respectively ? 
 
 81. A weight of 540 lbs. is balanced by 60 lbs. on 
 a wheel 12 feet in diameter; what is the diameter and 
 circumference of the wheel's axle? 
 
 82. How much power will be required to draw 10 
 gallons (80 lbs.) of water from a well with a windlass 
 12 inches in diameter fitted with a winch 20 inches 
 long? 
 
 83. What weight can be balanced by a system of 
 4 movable and 5 fixed pulleys, the power being 100 
 lbs.? 
 
QUESTIONS OX PHILOSOPHY. 333 
 
 84. In a system of pulleys of two blocks, each 
 containing 4 sheaves, the friction is V6 the power; 
 required the power which will support 1200 lbs. 
 
 85. A? inclined plane has a base of 12 feet and a 
 height o:' 3 feet. What force acting («) horizontally, 
 that is parallel to the base, will balance a weight of 
 3 tons? (b) What force will be required if the force 
 acts parallel to the plane? 
 
 86. A screw whose threads are V4 of an inch apart 
 is turned by a lever 6 feet long. How great a force 
 will be exerted by a power of 25 lbs., applied at the 
 end of the lever, allowing 200 lbs. for friction? 
 
 87. Find the pressure on the base of a cylindrical 
 cistern whose diameter is 5 feet, the water being 6 
 feet deep. 
 
 88. A dam 20 feet high and 100 feet from shore to 
 shore is filled with water ; what is the average pressure ? 
 
 89. What is the total liquid pressure on the sides 
 and bottom of a prismatic vessel containing 2 cubic 
 yards of water, the bottom of the vessel being 2 by 
 3 feet? 
 
 90. What is the pressure on the bottom of a pyra- 
 midal vessel filled with water, the base being 3 by 4 
 feet, and the height being 10 feet? 
 
 91. The lever (2nd class) of a hyarostatic press is 
 8 feet long, the piston rod is one foot from the ful- 
 crum; the area of the tube is V2 square inch, that of 
 the cylinder is 120 square inches. Find the weight 
 that may be raised by a power of 100 lbs. 
 
 v 
 
334 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 92. The temperature of a school-room, as shown 
 by a Fahrenheit's thermoneter, is 68 deg., what tem- 
 perature would be indicated by a Centigrade thermome- 
 ter? By Reaumer's thermometer? 
 
 93. What is the specific gravity of a piece of metal 
 which weighs 88.19 ounces in air, and when placed 
 in a vessel even full of water displaces 11 ounces of 
 the liquid? 
 
 94. A 16-ounce ball weighs 7 ounces in water, but 
 upon being transferred to another liquid, weighs 11 
 ounces; what is the specific gravity of the second 
 liquid ? 
 
 95. Find the specific gravity of apiece of ice from 
 the following conditions: a lump of ice weighing 8 
 lbs. is tied to 16 lbs. of lead. In water the lead 
 alone weighs 14.6 lbs., while the lead and ice in water 
 weigh 13.712 lbs. 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON NATURAL. 
 PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 1. Natural Philosophy is the science which treats of 
 all those phenomena of matter in which there is no 
 change in the composition of the body. Physics is 
 only another term for Natural Philosophy. 
 
 2. Extension, Impenetrability, Weight, Indestructi- 
 bility, Inertia, Mobility, Divisibility, Porosity, Com- 
 pressibility, Expansibility, and Elasticity. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 335 
 
 3. Hardness, Tenacity, Brittleness, Malleability, 
 Ductility. 
 
 4. A molecule is the smallest particle of matter that 
 can exist by itself; while an atom is the smallest parti- 
 cle of matter that can enter into composition. 
 
 5. Internal or Molecular Forces, Attraction of 
 Gravitation, Heat, Light, Electricity, Magnetism, Vi- 
 tal Force. 
 
 6. Cohesion is the force which holds together like 
 molecules ; adhesion is the force which holds together 
 unlike molecules. Cohesion preserves the forms of 
 bodies, as the parts of a stone, while adhesion holds 
 the crayon marks to the blackboard. 
 
 7. In the solid, the liquid, and the gaseous forms. 
 
 8. Annealing is the process of rendering metals, 
 glass, etc., soft and flexible by heating and gradually 
 cooling. The process of welding is the union by cohe- 
 sion of two pieces of iron or platinum by heating and 
 hammering them together. 
 
 9. First Law. A body unaffected by any exter- 
 nal force continues in its state of rest or of uniform 
 motion in a straight line. 
 
 Second Law. A force produces the same effect 
 whether the body on which it acts is at rest or in mo- 
 tion, whether it acts alone or with other forces. 
 
 Third Law. Action and reaction are equal and in 
 opposite directions. 
 
 10. It is the force, which acting for a unit of time 
 upon a unit of mass, will produce a unit of velocity. 
 
336 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 11. The angle of incidence is equal to the angle of 
 reflection, and lies in the same plane. 
 
 12. 1st. Gravitation varies directly as the mass. 
 2nd. Gravitation varies inversely as the square of the 
 distance from the centers of gravity. 
 
 13. Above the surface of the earth weight decreases 
 as the square of the distance from the center of the 
 earth increases. Below the surface it decreases sim- 
 ply as the distance from the surface toward the center 
 increases. At the center of the earth there is no 
 weight, because the influence of gravity there ceases. 
 
 14. v = velocity; s = space fallen each second; 
 S = total distance fallen; g = 32.16 ; t = time; V = 
 g X t; s = J/2 g (2t— 1); S = Va g Xt 2 . 
 
 15. It is the same for any given distance. 
 
 16. The random of a projectile is the horizontal dis- 
 tance from its starting point to where it strikes the 
 ground. 
 
 17. S = J/ 2 gXt 2 ; that is J/2 of 32.16 X 10 2 = 1608 
 feet. 
 
 18. 1st Law. Vibrations of small amplitude are 
 made in equal times. 
 
 2nd Law. The times of vibrations of two pendu- 
 lums are to each other as the square roots of their 
 lengths. 
 
 3rd Law. The lengths of two pendulums are di- 
 rectly proportional to the squares of their times of vi- 
 bration, or inversely proportional to the squares of 
 the number of their vibrations in a given time. 
 
 19. («) 39.1 inches, (b) Toward the Poles. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 337 
 
 20. A 10 horse-power engine is one having power to 
 do 10X33,000 foot-pounds of work in a minute. 
 
 21. First. What is gained in intensity of power is 
 lost in time, velocity, or distance. 
 
 Second. The power multiplied by the distance 
 through which it moves equals the weight multiplied 
 by the distance through which it moves. 
 
 Third. The power multiplied by its velocity equals 
 the weight multiplied by its velocity. 
 
 22. In a lever of the first class the power and 
 weight are at the ends, the fulcrum is between them. 
 
 In a lever of the second class the power and fulcrum 
 are at the ends, the weight is between them. 
 
 In a lever of the third class the weight and fulcrum 
 are at the ends, the power is between them. 
 
 23. P (power) : W (weight) :: WF (weight arm) : 
 P F (power arm). 
 
 24. P: W:: WF: PF; 
 
 150: A^:: 2: 4; whence X= 300 pounds. 
 
 25. The power : Weight:: the radius, diameter, or 
 circumference of the axle: the Radius, Diameter, oi 
 Circumference of the wheel. 
 
 JHQ, The continued product of the power and the 
 radii of the wheels equals the continued product o) 
 the weight and the radii of the axles. 
 
 27. A pulley is a wheel usually fixed in a block, and 
 turning on its axis by means of a cord running in a 
 oroove formed on the edge of a wheel. There are 
 two kinds — fixed and movable. 
 
 22 
 
338 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 28. Multiply the power by the number of folds of 
 '.he rope supporting the weight attached to the mova 
 ble block. 
 
 29. P (power): W (weight):: h (height): 1 
 (length). This rule applies only when the power acts 
 parallel to the plane. If the power acts parallel to the 
 base, we apply this formula: P: W:: h (height): 
 b (base). 
 
 30. A given power will support a weight as many 
 times as great as itself as the circumference described 
 by the power is times as great as the distance between 
 the threads. 
 
 31. 1st. By increasing the smoothness between the 
 surfaces. 2nd. By placing some lubricant between 
 the surfaces, as soap and black lead for woods, and oil 
 for metals. 3rd. By making the surfaces of different 
 material. 
 
 32. Liquids under the pressure of gravity only, 
 press equally in all directions. 
 
 33. Multiply the pressure exerted by the piston by 
 the quotient obtained by dividing the area of the cyl- 
 inder by the area of the piston. 
 
 34 Multiply the area of the base in feet by the 
 depth of the water in feet, and this product by 62 1 /o 
 (the number of pounds in a cubic foot of water). 
 
 35. Multiply the area of the side in feet by one-half 
 the height of water in feet, and this product by 
 62V 2 . 
 
 36. It is constructed upon the property of liquids 
 to assume a horizontal surface. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 339 
 
 37. The specific gravity of a body is its weight 
 compared with the weight of an equal volume of an- 
 other body taken as the standard. 
 
 38. Weigh the piece of iron in air and in water; 
 divide its weight in air by the loss it sustains by weigh- 
 ing it in water. 
 
 39. Attach the lighter body to a piece of metal 
 heavy enough to sink it ; weigh the combination in air 
 and in water. 
 
 Find the loss of weight of the combined mass when 
 weighed in water. Weigh the heavy body in air and 
 in water, and find the loss. From the loss which the 
 combined mass sustains in water subtract the loss 
 which the heavy body alone sustains in water; the 
 remainder will be the weight of water equal to the 
 bulk of the lighter body. Divide the weight of the 
 lighter body by this remainder. 
 
 40. Multiply the sp. gr. of the substance by 62 V2 ; 
 the product is the weight of a cubic foot of the sub- 
 stance. 
 
 41. (a) 15 pounds per square inch. (6) It sup- 
 ports a column of mercury 30 inches high, (c) 
 Theoretically, it raises water 34 feet : practically 
 about 28 feet. 
 
 42. The barometer consists of a straight glass tube 
 about 33 inches long, filled with mercury and inverted 
 in a vessel containing mercury. It is used to indicate 
 changes in the weather, and to measure the heights of 
 mountains. 
 
340 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 43. Sound travels in air, at 32° Falir., 1,090 feet 
 per second; in water, about 4,700 feet per second. 
 
 44. 64.32 feet -*- 16.08 = 4 ; The square root of 4 
 is 2, the number of seconds; 32.16 X 2= 64.32 ft., 
 Ans. The law upon which this is based is: The veloc- 
 ity of a stream flowing through an orifice is the same 
 as that acquired by a bod}" falling freely from a height 
 equal to the depth of the liquid. 
 
 45. Multiply the area of a cross section of the 
 river's bed by the velocity of the stream, and this 
 product by the time. 
 
 46. The undershot wheel, using about 25% of the 
 water power, the breast wheel, about 65 %, the over- 
 shot wheel, about 72 %, and the turbine wheel, using 
 from 80 to 85 %. 
 
 47. The volume of space which air occupies is in- 
 versely as the pressure upon it. 
 
 48. The lifting pump consists of a hollow cylinder, 
 within which is a piston working air-tiglit. At the 
 lower end of both piston and cylinder is a valve open- 
 ing upward. The cylinder is attached to a tube or 
 "suction pipe" communicating with the water. As 
 the piston is worked the air below it is gradually re- 
 moved. The downward pressure in the pipe being 
 thus removed, the pressure of the air, exerted upon 
 the surface of the liquid, pushes the liquid up through 
 the suction pipe and the lower valve into the cylinder. 
 When the piston is again pressed down, the lower 
 valve closes, the reaction of the water opens the piston 
 valve, the piston sinking below the surface of the 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 341 
 
 water in the cylinder. When next the piston is raised, 
 its valve is closed by the weight of the water, and at 
 the same time the water is lifted toward the spout and 
 thrown out. 
 
 49. If an iron bar be placed in the earth and struck 
 a sharp blow upon the upper end, that end becomes 
 polarized. 
 
 50. Two bodies charged with like electricities repel 
 each other; two bodies charged with opposite elec- 
 tricities attract each other. 
 
 51. About 186,000 miles per second. 
 
 52. The intensity of light and heat varies inversely 
 as the square of the distance. 
 
 53. First. Light entering a medium at right angles 
 to its surface is not refracted. 
 
 Second. Light passing obliquely from a rarer to a 
 denser medium is refracted toward the perpendicular. 
 
 Third. Light passing obliquely from a denser to a 
 rarer medium is refracted from the perpendicular. 
 
 54. The sounds uttered cause air waves to beat 
 upon the diaphragm and cause it to vibrate. Each 
 vibration of the diaphragm produces an electric cur- 
 rent in the wire. These currents are transmitted to 
 the coil of the connected telephone, and there produce 
 in the diaphragm of the connected instrument vibra- 
 tions exactly like the original vibrations produced by 
 the voice of the speaker. 
 
 55. Heat is diffused in three ways: Conduction, 
 Convection, and Radiation. Conduction is the trans- 
 fer of heat from molecule to molecule. Convection 
 
342* ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 is the transfer of heat by circulation. Radiation is the 
 transfer of heat by waves moving in straight lines in 
 all directions. 
 
 56. The action of the mercurial thermometer de- 
 pends upon the facts that heat expands mercury more 
 than it does glass, and that when two substances of dif- 
 ferent temperatures are brought into contact, the 
 warmer one will give heat to the colder one until they 
 have a common temperature. 
 
 57. About 1700 cubic feet of steam. 
 
 58. When heat is transformed into mechanical 
 energy, or mechanical energy into heat, the quantity 
 of heat equals the quantity of mechanical energy. 
 
 59. In a double-acting steam-engine, the steam is 
 admitted by means of sliding valves, to the cylinder 
 alternately above and below the piston. 
 
 60. In convex mirrors the images are virtual, erect, 
 and smaller than their objects. 
 
 61. The Double-convex, Plano-convex, and Concavo- 
 convex, or meniscus, are thicker in the middle than 
 at the edges; while the Double-concave, Plano-con- 
 cave, and Convex-concave, or diverging meniscus, are 
 thinner in the middle than at the edges. 
 
 62. Rays of light entering the eye from an object, 
 are refracted by the cornea and crystaline lens, and 
 made to converge to a focus at the back of the eye, 
 and form an image upon the retina. This image pro- 
 duces a sensation on the optic nerve, and conveys, in 
 some unknown way, to the mind, a perception and 
 knowledge of the external object. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 343 
 
 63. (6 mi.) 2 +(4 ini.) 2 =52 sq. mi.; ^J~h2 = 1.2l 
 + mi. velocity. If he rowed with a velocity of 4 mi. 
 an hour he would drift 4 miles, but he rows 6 miles an 
 hour, and therefore drifts -| or | of 4 miles, or 2§ 
 miles. (2f ) 2 + (4) 2 = 23j ; yjW% = 4.8 + miles. 
 
 64. The weight below the surface : the weight at 
 the surface : : the distance from the earth's center : 
 the distance from the center to the surface ; that is 
 
 w: W:: d: D; 
 
 x lbs. : 50 lbs. : :3500 mi. : 4000 mi. 
 
 Ans. 43.75 lbs. 
 
 65. w: W :: d :B; 
 
 x : 100 : : 3000 : 4000. Weight 75 lbs. below 
 the earth's surface. 
 
 w : W : : D 2 : d 2 ; 
 
 x : 100 : : (4000 ) 2 : (5000 ) 2 . Weight 64 -lbs. 
 above the earth's surface. 75 lbs. — 64 lbs. = 11 lbs., 
 difference. Ans. 
 
 66. w: Wild: D; 
 
 3 : 12 : : x : 4000. 
 Ans. 1000 miles from the earth's center. 
 w : W : : D 2 : d 2 ; 
 
 3 : 12 : : (4000) 2 : x 2 . 
 
 1 12 X 16000000 = V 64000000 = 8000 miles from 
 x - 
 
 -J: 
 
 3 
 the center, or 4000 miles above the surface. 
 
 67. (a) 16.08 ft. X 7 (twice the number of seconds 
 less one)= 112.56 ft., distance fallen during the 4th 
 second; (b) 16.08x16 (the square of the number of 
 
344 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 seconds) = 257.28 ft., the entire distance fallen; (c) 
 32.16 (gravity) X 4 = 128.64 ft., velocity at the end 
 of the 4th second. 
 
 68. 112.56 ft. (initial velocity) -J- 32.16 (gravity) 
 = 3|- seconds in rising. Since it rises but 3i seconds, 
 at the end of the 4th second it has been falling ^ sec- 
 ond, and has a velocity of 32.16 X j or 16.08 ft. 
 
 69. 39.1 : 30 : : l 2 : t 2 , or t = .87 + seconds. Since 
 the pendulum vibrates once in .87 seconds, it will 
 vibrate as many times in one minute, or 60 seconds, 
 as 60 -f- .87+ = 68.9+. Ans. 
 
 70. 39.1 inches X (2 2 ) 2 = 278+ inches. 
 
 71. The length of the given pendulum : the length 
 of the pendulum increased by \ of an inch : : the 
 square of the required number : 400 2 . 60 inches 
 : 60.25 inches : : x 2 : 400 2 . Ans. 399.04+. 
 
 ,, 2000 X ^800 nn n . 
 
 72. Horse power = g 3Q0Q ^ — <p = 96.9. Ans. 
 
 73. 2000 X 50 X 200 = 20000000 minutes ; 33000 
 X 10 = 330000 foot pounds ; 20000000 min. -*- 330000 
 
 = 60|| minutes. Ans. 
 
 _ M „ Weight X distance ,„ r ,, ,. 
 
 74. Horse power = D!lnnn J./ ■ = — r— . W . X dis- 
 
 1 33000 X time in minutes. 
 
 tance = 33000 X time X H. P. ; that is, (2000 X 80) 
 X x = 33000 X | [40 sec] X 20. 160000 x = 440000, 
 and x, or the distance, = 2| feet. 
 75. 
 
 76. 
 
 P: 
 
 W : 
 
 : WF : PF; 
 
 
 100: 
 
 : x : 
 
 : 8 in. : 90 in. 
 
 Ans. 1125 lbs. 
 
 P: 
 
 :W : 
 
 ::WF : PF; 
 
 
 x : 
 
 150 ; 
 
 : : 4 ft. : 3 ft. 
 
 
 Ans. 200 lbs., lever of 3d class. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 345 
 
 77. 7 _|_ 8 = y 9 strength of both compared with A. 
 210 -4- y = 11.2 lbs. carried by A ; 210 — 112 = 98 
 lbs. carried by B. If B acts as fulcrum and A as 
 power, we have 
 
 P : W : :WF : PF; 
 112 : 210 : : x ft. : 8 feet. 
 Performing indicated operation, we have 4 T 4 7 feet as 
 the distance the weight is from B ; and 8 — 4 T 4 T = 3|i 
 feet from A. 
 
 78. Since the weight is five times as great as the 
 power, the power arm should be five times as long as 
 the weight arm ; the weight arm plus 5 times the Weight 
 arm, or 6 times the weight arm, equals 60 inches, or 
 the weight arm equals 10 inches and the power arm 
 equals 50 inches. 
 
 79. The lever may be of the 1st or 2nd class. 
 Of 1st class: P: W :: WF :PF; 
 
 1 kg. : 4 kg. : : 50 cm. : x cm. 
 The power arm, or distance from fulcrum to power, 
 is 200 cm., and the length of lever is 200 cm. + 50 
 cm. = 250 cm. As a lever of the 2nd class the whole 
 length would be 200 cm. 
 
 80. P: W:: d (diam. axle): D (diam. wheel); 
 x: 80: : 8 inches : 48 inches. 
 
 Performing operation, x equals 13^; but since the 
 wheel is to be moved, the power must be anything 
 greater than 13^ lbs. 
 
 81. P: W:: d: D; 
 
 60: 540:: x ft.: 12 ft. Diam. axle, l^ft. 
 1£ ft. X 3.1416 = 4.1888 ft., circumference of axle. 
 
346 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 82. P: W:: d: D; 
 
 x : 80: : 12 : 2 X 20; power equals 24 lbs, 
 
 83. Since the number of fixed pulleys is one greater 
 than the number of movable pulleys, the number of 
 cords is one greater than twice the number of mova- 
 ble pulleys, or 9 ; and 100 lbs. X 9 = 900 lbs. Ans. 
 
 84. 4X2=8, number of cords. 
 
 1200 1b.-^-8 = 150 lbs.; 150 lbs.— 25 lbs. (deducted 
 for friction) equals 125 lbs. Ans. 
 
 85. (a) P: W :: h (height) : b (base); 
 
 x : 6000 : : 3 ft. : 12 ft. Ans. 1500 lbs. 
 (6) (12ft.) 2 = 144sq. ft. 
 
 (3ft.) 2 = 9 sq.ft. 144 + 9 = 153; V153 
 = 12.3+ ft. 
 
 P: W: : h (height) : 1 (length) ; 
 x: 6000:: 3 ft: 12.3+ ft. 
 
 Ans. 1463.4+. 
 
 86. 6 X 12 X 2 X 3.1416 = 452.3904 inches circum- 
 ference described by power. 
 
 P : W : : d (distance between threads) : c (circum. ) ; 
 25: a; :: \ inch : 452.3904 in. 
 
 Performing operation, x = 45239.04 lbs. ; subtracting 
 200 lbs. for friction, we have 45039.04 lbs. Ans. 
 
 87. Area of the base equals 19.635 sq. feet. 19.635 
 X 6 X 62.5 lbs. = 7363.12+ lbs. Ans. 
 
 86. 20 X 100 = 2000 sq. ft. 2000 sq. ft. X 10 (half 
 the height) = 20000 cu. ft. ; 62.5 lbs. X 20000 = 
 1250000 lbs. Ans. 
 
 89. The water in the vessel stands (\ 4 = ) 9 ft. 
 deep. The sides subjected to lateral pressure have an 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON PHILOSOPHY. 347 
 
 area of [(2 + 2 4- 3 4- 3) X 9] 90 square feet. 90 
 X 4| = 405, number of cu. feet in a column producing 
 lateral pressure. There are (2X 3X 9) 54 cubic feet 
 in the vertical column. 405 4- 54 = 459 ; 62£ lbs. X 
 459 = 286871- lbs. Ans. 
 
 90. 3 X 4 X 10 = 120 cu. ft. 62£ lbs. X 120 = 
 7500 lbs. Ans. 
 
 91. The piston will move with a force of (8 X 100) 
 800 lbs. The area of the cylinder being 240 times 
 greater than that of the piston, the weight will be 240 
 times 800 lbs., or 192000 lbs., or 96 tons. 
 
 92. The differences between the freezing and boil- 
 ing points of Fahrenheit's, the Centigrade, and Reau- 
 mer's thermometers are respectively (212 — 32) 180°, 
 100° and 80° ; hence, 1° Fahr. = f C. and f R. Sub- 
 tracting 32° from 68°, we have 36° Fahr. above the 
 freezing point. -§ of this equals 20° C, and | of it 
 equals 16° R. 
 
 93. 88.19 ounces -f- 11 = 8.01 4- specific gravity. 
 
 94. 16 oz. — 7 oz. = 9 oz. ; 16 oz. . — 11 oz. = 5 oz. 
 5 h- 9 = §. Ans. 
 
 95. Combined weight in air, 24 lbs. 
 Combined weight in water, 13.712 lbs. 
 
 Weight of water displaced by ice and lead, 10.288 lbs. 
 Weight of water displaced by lead, 1.4 • lbs. 
 
 Weight of water displaced by ice, 8.888 lbs 
 
 Specific gravity of ice (8 -j- 8.888) = .9+. Ans. 
 
QUESTIONS ON THEORY AND PRACTICE OF 
 TEACHING. 
 
 1. Give n comprehensive definition of education. 
 
 2. What is the essential process of education ? 
 
 3. Explain what is meant by the " natural order of 
 educating the faculties." 
 
 4. Show the difference between "Learning and 
 Education." 
 
 5. State as many fundamental educational truths 
 recognized by educators as you can. 
 
 6. What three kinds of knowledge should the teacher 
 possess? 
 
 7. Into what three general classes are the mental 
 powers commonly divided? Illustrate. 
 
 8. Define the following terms : Perceptive Facul- 
 ties, Conceptive Faculties, Reflective Faculties, Intui- 
 tion. 
 
 9. Explain the distinction between a mental power 
 and a mental faculty. 
 
 10. What is included in the " Theory and Practice 
 of Teaching?" 
 
 11. What items are included in the " History of 
 Education? " 
 
 348 
 
QUESTIONS ON THEORY AND PRACTICE, ETC. 34iJ 
 
 12. Name the six methods of instruction commonly 
 recognized by educators. 
 
 13. Explain the difference between mere teaching 
 and t raining. 
 
 14. State the commonly recognized requisites of a 
 successful teacher. 
 
 15. What is meant by " School Government? " 
 
 16. Is it true that good teachers, like true poets, are 
 born, and not made by cultivation ? Give your reasons 
 for your answer. 
 
 17. Explain how a good teacher may be a poor 
 educator. 
 
 18. Enumerate the means through which the percep- 
 tives are cultivated. With which is the teacher most 
 concerned ? 
 
 19. What training should the reflective powers of 
 children under 15 years of age receive? 
 
 20. Name the most prominent mental qualities 
 sought in the cultivation of the conceptive faculty. 
 Give your reasons. 
 
 21. What course should a teacher pursue during the 
 first day of school? 
 
 22. What items should be included in a teacher's 
 contract? 
 
 23. Name four hygienic conditions which should 
 receive daily attention by the teacher. 
 
 24. To what extent should a child of average mental 
 power be trained during his first year at school? 
 
 25. Name five of the most common methods in 
 teaching children to read. 
 
350 QUESTIONS ON THEORY AND PRACTICE, ETC. 
 
 26. Explain the advantaged of instruction in phonics. 
 
 27. Explain the Word Method of teaching children 
 to read. 
 
 28. Give the successive steps usually taken in teach- 
 ing the Word Method. 
 
 29. What should be the teacher's purpose in teach- 
 ing reading? 
 
 30. State how a teacher may learn his pupils' names 
 during the first day of school. 
 
 31. Show whether it is or it is not necessary for 
 teachers of the primary and intermediate grades to 
 acquaint themselves with the higher branches. 
 
 32. What item should be daily recorded by the 
 ieacher? 
 
 33. What monthly summary is required to be re- 
 ported by the teacher? 
 
 34. Enumerate five of the principal objects of a 
 recitation. 
 
 35. Why should physiology and hygiene in some 
 form be taught in all schools? 
 
 36. Name one or more studies which call into exer- 
 cise the different faculties. 
 
 37. How far and when should the pupil be assisted 
 in the preparation of his lesson? 
 
 38. Of what advantages is a daily programme? 
 
 39. What can you say regarding a teacher's tones 
 in lils school room? 
 
 40. Is a marked degree of excellence in the per- 
 formance of reading, writing and arithmetic essential 
 \o success in teaching these branches? 
 
QUESTIONS ON THEORY AND PRACTICE, ETC. 351 
 
 41. Show clearly that the teacher is equally responsi- 
 ble for the physical and moral training of his pupils as 
 for their intellectual training. 
 
 42. Name and illustrate the three methods com- 
 monly employed in conducting a school exercise. 
 
 43. State four advantages of school records. 
 
 44. How is moral responsibility best taught to 
 pupils in school? 
 
 45. What methods should be employed in school 
 to train the pupils in oral expression ? 
 
 46. Is a teacher legally justified in correcting pupils, 
 by punishment or other means, for misconduct on the 
 road to and from school? 
 
 47. Is a teacher required to be at his school before 
 the time of opening? 
 
 48. Name certain incentives to study which a teacher 
 may not employ. 
 
 49. Enumerate what are commonly regarded as 
 proper incentives to study. 
 
 50. In what respect are most unsuccessful teachers 
 deficient? 
 
 51. Explain the Grube method of teaching numbers. 
 
 52. Why should Long Division be taught before 
 Short Division? 
 
 53. How should written arithmetic be taught? 
 
 54. How should such subjects as long, square and 
 cubic measures be taught? 
 
 55. How should dry and liquid measures and weights 
 be taught? 
 
 56. What are the two chief purposes in studying 
 the history of one's own country? 
 
352 QUESTIONS ON THEORY AND PRACTICE, ETC. 
 
 57. How should writing be taught? 
 
 58. What is the standard of excellence in teaching 
 penmanship? 
 
 59. What are the advantages of oral spelling? 
 
 60. State briefly the advantages of written spelling. 
 
 61. How should the spelling lesson be prepared? 
 
 62. How may a written spelling lesson be most 
 advantageously conducted? 
 
 63. Of what value is concert reading? 
 
 64. By what names should children in primary and 
 grammar schools be addressed? 
 
 65. Of what advantage is the daily record of reci- 
 tations? 
 
 66. State fully the disadvantages of keeping a daily 
 record of recitations. 
 
 67. Why are pupils required to form lines in enter- 
 ing and leaving school buildings? 
 
 68. Specify the advantages of the self-reporting 
 system. 
 
 69. What objections may be urged against the self- 
 reporting system? 
 
 70. Explain the phonetic method of teaching chil- 
 dren to read, and state its chief advantage. 
 
 71. In what does the phonic method of teaching 
 children to read consist? State its advantage. 
 
 72. Name five or more educational reformers. 
 
 73- Who was Froebel ? For what is he noted ? 
 What particular educational theories did he advocate? 
 
 74. Who was the author of " Emile? " What was 
 the object of its publication? 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 353 
 
 75. For what is Roger Ascham chiefly noted? 
 
 76. State briefly the more prominent characteristics 
 of Pestalozzi's educational principles. To what ex- 
 tent have these principles influenced the education of 
 the present time? 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS OX THEORY AND 
 PRACTICE OP TEACHING. 
 
 1. Education is the process of securing rational 
 freedom through the subordination of every power of 
 the mind and organ of the body to the laws of reason 
 and morality. 
 
 2. Education from due, to lead, and the prefix e, 
 out, is the leading out, or the developing of those 
 powers whose germs are found in earliest childhood. 
 
 3. The natural order of educating the faculties is 
 in the order of their development and activity, viz. : 
 1st. The " perceptives," 2nd. The " conceptives," 
 3rd. The " reflectives." 
 
 4. Learning is merely the possession of knowledge, 
 as facts of history, science and literature ; while edu- 
 cation signifies that mastery over one's own powers 
 through training and development which enables him 
 tc accomplish more than would be possible with uned- 
 ucated faculties. Learning gives us knowledge, but 
 often leaves us with a barren possession. Education 
 enables us to use whatever knowledge we have to the 
 
 best advantage. 
 
 23 
 
354 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 
 
 5. I. Any power under the control of the will may 
 be cultivated or trained. 
 
 II. The powers are trained in one way, and in one 
 way, only ; viz., by wist use. This law of work is the 
 one unchangeable law of progress everywhere. 
 
 III. The wisest training will be directed to thoso 
 powers which are conspicuously active at the time. 
 
 IV. An indispensable prerequisite to any profitable 
 training is careful attention to the matter in hand. 
 [Hewett.] 
 
 6. First, a knowledge of the matter to be taught; 
 second, a knowledge of the being whom he is to teach; 
 and, third, a knowledge of the methods by which the 
 matter is to be taught. 
 
 7. First, the intellect proper, as the capacity to 
 comprehend ; second, the sensibility as the capacity to 
 sympathize with the sufferings of others; third, the 
 will, as the power to choose or determine. 
 
 8. The perceptives are those faculties by which we 
 obtain a knowledge of the outside world through the 
 senses. 
 
 The conceptive faculties enable us to conceive or 
 reproduce the image ot absent objects. 
 
 The reflectives are those faculties by which we see 
 the relations of objects through the agency ot com- 
 parison, judging, reasoning, etc. 
 
 Intuition is that, power by which we know certain 
 truths or ideas without being taught. 
 
 9. A mental power is t lie ability to perform an in- 
 tellectual operation ; while a mental faculty is a mental 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 355 
 
 power acting entirely under the will; as observing, 
 memory, judgment. 
 
 10. The Theory and Practice of Teaching includes 
 the investigation of the various susceptibilities, powers 
 and faculties of mind and the harmonious development 
 of these powers and faculties so as to secure the best 
 result of which they are capable. 
 
 11. I. The statement of the different theories, plans 
 and processes of educators of the past. II. The suc- 
 cess or failure of the theories described*. 
 
 12. The Oral, Socratic, Text-Book, Discussive, Top- 
 ical, and Lecture Methods. 
 
 13. Teaching is telling, explaining, illustrating ; and 
 stops short of requiring any action on the part of the 
 pupil. It is exemplified in the lecture method of in- 
 struction. Training includes as a preliminary step all 
 employed in teaching, and requires the pupil to repeat, 
 illustrate, amplify and do until every detail is familiar 
 and every act performed with facility and precision. 
 
 14. First, he must have good health: this ensures 
 that cheerful buoyancy which inspires respect and love 
 in the minds of pupils. Second, he must have a knowl- 
 edge of the branches which he proposes to teach : 
 without this he can not have the confidence of his 
 pupils. Third, he must possess skill in teaching : the 
 lack of this soon engenders indifference and discontent 
 among the scholars. Fourth, he must be a mastei to 
 manage and command : that is, he must possess skill 
 in management. He must foresee and forestall every 
 tendency toward th«' disintegration of his educational 
 forces. 
 
356 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 
 
 15. School government is the subordination of all the 
 elements involved in a given educational system to the 
 demands of an enlightened and conscientious standard 
 of human development of mind, body and heart. 
 
 16. This statement is often made by people of ex- 
 tended observation among the educational classes. 
 Some facts which may be given in support of its truth 
 are, — 
 
 I. The prominent characteristics of the most noted 
 educators of all countries and ages were such as seem 
 to have fitted them for their peculiar vocation and for 
 no other. 
 
 II. It is observed that those ladies and gentlemen 
 of our own time who have great success in teaching 
 possess certain peculiarities of disposition which dis- 
 tinguish them by a marked contrast from their less 
 successful colleagues. 
 
 III. It has been noted that persons without the 
 greater number of the following traits have never been 
 successful in the work of teaching: patience, human 
 sympathy, cheerfulness, self-control, kindness, moral 
 courage, enthusiasm, persistence, order, method, pru- 
 dence, energy, governing power, will, vigilance, firm 
 ness, tact and promptness. 
 
 17. The teacher who imparts facts and drills his 
 pupils with reference to impressions to be made on 
 visitors on examination day, may be regarded as a 
 fair teacher, since he " larns the scholars ; " but if he 
 confine himself to data, definitions and rules, and 
 ignore the relation of these facts, the impulses, motives 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 357 
 
 and susceptibilities of his pupils, — if he neglect those 
 mental germs of power whose development alone de- 
 cides the cultured man, — in short, if he work not to 
 secure that highest development of human power styled 
 self-control, the results of his labors must class him as 
 a poor educator. 
 
 18. The five senses: — seeing, hearing, feeling, 
 tasting and smelling. The teacher is much concerned 
 with the first and second of these, since the successful 
 mental training of children is largely dependent upon 
 the cultivation of the sight and hearing. 
 
 19. Experience teaches that if the perceptive and 
 conceptive powers receive the attention of the teacher 
 during the activity of these powers, little time or oc- 
 casion will be afforded for the distinctive training of 
 the reflective faculties of children under fifteen. The 
 teacher should constantly avail himself of the pass- 
 ing activities of perception, memory and imagination 
 displayed by his pupils to impart impressions con- 
 ducive to the noblest manhood. Of course the slight- 
 est manifestations in pupils of any age to seek for 
 causes, results and relations should never be dis- 
 couraged. 
 
 20. I. Versatility , that the mind may have a wide 
 range of observation and constant activity. 
 
 II. Strength, that the attention maybe fixed in con- 
 templation, and that impressions ma}' be recalled with 
 freshness and distinctness. 
 
 III. Precision, that the ideas and impressions ob- 
 tained by observation and experience may be properly 
 
35S ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 
 
 arranged for service in the higher exercise of reason- 
 ing: and generalizing. 
 
 21. I. He should at once furnish every pupil some- 
 thing to do. 
 
 II. He should during the first half day learn the 
 name of every pupil. 
 
 III. Within three hours he should have every mem- 
 ber of the school engaged in the regular order of bus- 
 iness. 
 
 IV. He should discourage disorder by his own de- 
 liberate and methodical movements. 
 
 V. He should at once establish the system he pro- 
 poses to continue. 
 
 22. A teacher's contract should specify the time of 
 opening, length of term, hours per day, holidays, 
 wages, care of grounds, building and apparatus, and 
 provisions for fuel, janitor work, suspension of pupils 
 and agreement as to resignation of teacher. 
 
 23. I. The pupils' positions and movements in sit- 
 ting, standing and walking. 
 
 II. Proper and sufficient ventilation of the school- 
 room. 
 
 III. Sufficient light and proper position of pupils 
 with respect to light. 
 
 IV. Calisthenic exercises to bring into judicious use 
 neglected muscles. 
 
 24. He should be trained to write on slate or black- 
 board sufficiently well to have his writing easily read, 
 to read without drawling words of one and two sylla- 
 bles, to spell orally by sound and by letter, the greater 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 359 
 
 number of words found in his reading lessons, to 
 count by ones and twos to 100, to write numbers to 
 100, to count and write by the Roman method to L, 
 and to name the days of the week, the months of the 
 year and his county and State. 
 
 25. The Word Method, the Sentence Method, the 
 Phonic Method, the Object Method, the Alphabet 
 Method. Two or more of the above are usually 
 employed by nearly all teachers. 
 
 26. A daily drill in phonics for a few months gives 
 to the pupil a clearness and precision of speech which 
 will permanently distinguish him from one who has 
 not had this advantage. 
 
 27. The Word Method consists in presenting words 
 as objects and teaching children to recognize them as 
 individual units of the sentence. This method has to 
 a great extent supplanted the old method of teaching 
 the alphabet before words. 
 
 28. The attention of the pupils is called to some 
 familiar object, upon which many questions are asked. 
 As soon as the children's attention is secured and in- 
 terest aroused a picture of the object is displayed, or 
 drawn upon the board. The picture is discussed for 
 some minutes, when the name of the object is printed 
 beside the picture, and the children are informed that 
 this too is a picture, — a word-picture. After holding 
 their attention to this for a few moments they are 
 directed to find other word-pictures like this on the 
 chart. This comprises the first lesson. The pupils 
 are dismissed to their seats and directed to copy the 
 
360 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 
 
 word-picture. At a later lesson other words arc 
 treated as the first, and words previously learned are 
 reviewed, hunted for on the chart and formed into 
 sentences. All words learned are printed on the board 
 by the teacher and copied by the pupils, at first in 
 Roman and afterward in script, until their forms be- 
 come familiar. 
 
 29. I. To develop clear, pleasant and impressive 
 speech in the delivery of extemporaneous or written 
 language 
 
 II. To cultivate the power of instantly grasping the 
 thought as presented on the printed or written page. 
 
 30. Send as many pupils to the board as can be ac- 
 commodated, and require them to write their names 
 at the top in their best writing. Assign some simple 
 exercise, to be placed on the board ; when the work is 
 completed, call pupils to face you. As each in turn is 
 named to explain, his voice, face and name (written 
 over his head) will assdciate themselves in your mind 
 until you can, without difficulty, call the name of each 
 pupil before you. 
 
 31. The so-called higher branches all extend^ the 
 teacher's intellectual resources, and strengthen his 
 power over difficulties. As the teacher's work con- 
 sists mainly in " managing" his pupils, and cultivat- 
 ing in them a desire for knowledge aud improvement, 
 his familiarity with the higher branches gives him ad- 
 vantages in these efforts which render him infinitely 
 more successful than he could be without them. 
 
 32. The daily attendance of all pupils belonging to 
 the school. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 361 
 
 33. The total enrollment and average daily attend- 
 ance of pupils, together with such special items as may 
 be required by the officers of the school. 
 
 34. I. To test the pupil's knowledge of the subject. 
 
 II. To cultivate the habit of careful preparation and 
 accurate expression. 
 
 III. To supplement the information gained from the 
 text-book. 
 
 IV. To direct the pupils in their preparation of the 
 lessons. 
 
 V. To stimulate the pupils, arouse their attention 
 and cultivate in them habits of investigation. 
 
 35. That the pupils may early learn the function 
 and care of every organ of their bodies, that they may 
 know the necessity of pure air, sufficient and whole- 
 some food, alternation ot rest and exercise and under- 
 stand the dependence of the mental powers upon 
 bodily health, physical restraint and moral culture. 
 
 36. The perceptive faculties are exercised by writ- 
 ing, drawing, spelling and botany ; the conceptive 
 faculties by reading, history, geography and compo- 
 sition ; while the reflective faculties are best exercised 
 and developed by mathematics, rhetoric and logic. 
 
 37. Only so far as to aid a partial comprehension 
 of principles, — never in their application to the as- 
 signed lesson. A teacher may illustrate a principle by 
 its application to work similar to that required. As- 
 sistance should be withheld until the teacher is satisfied 
 the pupil has exhausted his own resources, and evinces 
 signs of discouragement. Individual assistance should 
 
3(52 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 
 
 be given rarely in the presence of the class. Explain 
 difficulties to the class, and command the attention of 
 every member. 
 
 38. " A programme conduces to good order, dimin- 
 ishes the teacher's labor, cultivates methodical habits, 
 and makes his teaching more effective." 
 
 39. Clearness of voice and distinctness of speech 
 are indispensable in the management of classes; but 
 the force must be constantly subdued and the pitch 
 slightly below the natural to secure the respectful 
 attention of pupils. 
 
 40. It is difficult to understand how a teacher un- 
 skilled in rapid, elegant penmanship, natural impres- 
 sive and effective reading, and accurate and rapid 
 arithmetical calculations, can inspire his pupils with 
 sufficient admiration for these arts to desire more than 
 the teacher presents as models. The highest skill in 
 these branches, upon the part of the teacher, is essen- 
 tial to their successful teaching. Few teachers insist 
 upon a higher standard than they, themselves, possess. 
 Hence, but moderate skill in these branches may be 
 expected from pupils whose teachers are not proficients. 
 
 41. To secure the highest intellectual attainments, 
 certain previous conditions are essential: these are 
 mental vigor and sensual restraint. The first of these 
 is secured only through the judicious exercise and em- 
 ployment of the mental and physical organs. The 
 second condition is attained by the training of the 
 moral faculties to acts of justice, duty and self-denial. 
 The vigorous body gives energy to the brain, and the 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 363 
 
 self-poised convenience imparts accuracy and decision 
 to the perceptions of the senses and conceptions of the 
 mind. 
 
 42. I. Teaching, or instruction, by which the teache** 
 orally or through the text-book, presents the principles 
 of the subject in definition tind illustration. 
 
 II. Development, or Socratic questioning, by which 
 the teacher tells the pupil nothing, but by a series of 
 skillful questions, beginning with what is already clear 
 to the pupil's mind, he leads him step by step to com- 
 prehend the principle and its application. 
 
 III. Training, or drilling, by which through instruc- 
 tion, practice and criticism, the subject in all its 
 details is fully mastered. 
 
 43. Accurate school records afford the following 
 advantages: 1. They aid the teacher in classification 
 and promotion of pupils. 2. They give information 
 to parents and school officers. 3. They furnish im- 
 portant educational statistics. 4. They exert a bene- 
 ficial influence upon both teachers and pupils. 
 
 44. By first explaining the rights and duties ol 
 pupils, and then insisting that these shall be mutually 
 observed and respected. In addition, pupils should 
 be taught early in their school life that the greatest 
 success and happiness come only from individual in- 
 dependence, and that independence exists alone in a 
 ready performance of duty, a cheerful self-denial and 
 a conscious rectitude. 
 
 45. I. The pupils should be taught to breathe 
 properly. 
 
364 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 
 
 II. They should be drilled on the oral elements un- 
 til every sound and combination can be distinctly a. id 
 correctly uttered. 
 
 III. They should be subjected to frequent drills in 
 voice slides and waves. 
 
 IV. The test of all reading: exercises should be the 
 ability of the teacher to understand every word read 
 without referring to the text-book. 
 
 46. The Supreme Courts of a number of States have 
 decided that school directors have the right to make 
 rules governing the conduct of scholars on the grounds 
 or on the road to or from school. The teacher is the 
 directors' authorized agent and executive in all matters 
 pertaining to the management of the school so far as 
 their authority may be delegated to him. Before pun- 
 ishing pupils for misdemeanors committed on the road 
 to or from school, teachers should have this authority 
 duly given. 
 
 47. He is rarely required by law or contract to be 
 present before the time of opening, but his intere-t 
 in the welfare of his pupils and his zeal in his work 
 should prompt him to be at his post early enough t > 
 forestall difficulties and make the necessary prepara- 
 tion to begin on time. A good teacher, like a good 
 scholar, is always a little ahead of time. 
 
 48. Ridicule, force, additional tasks, fear of punish- 
 ment, prizes, merit marks, and the granting of special 
 privileges. 
 
 49. I. The desire for knowledge. 
 II. The hope to secure perfection. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 365 
 
 III. The approbation of the teicher. 
 
 IV. The approbation of parents and friends. 
 
 V. The pleasure of overcoming difficulties. 
 
 VI. The enjoyment of useful employment. 
 
 VII. The prospect of a successful manhood. 
 
 50. They are deficient in management, otherwise 
 termed tact, or governing power. 
 
 51. The Grube method consists in teaching begin- 
 ners the combinations of numbers less than ton in 
 addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. 
 Various articles, such as buttons, beans, grains of 
 corn, pebbles, etc., are at first employed until the 
 children can perform the operations without these aids. 
 
 52. Since every step in the process of long division 
 is placed before the pupil in figures, he can hold each 
 step with his eye until the next is taken; and if an 
 interruption occur or the teacher wish to repeat or 
 impress the operation, the work as far as completed, 
 remains before the eye. This is but an application of 
 object-teaching, and presents the principle of division 
 much more clearly than the process of short division, 
 in which the operations are carried on almost entirely 
 in the mind. 
 
 53. Always in connection with mental arithmetic, 
 and, as far as possible, with practical illustrations taken 
 from the school-room, yard, and neighboring stores. 
 A subject will be sooner mastered and longer retained 
 if practically applied at the time and presented with 
 small numbers which can be easily held in the mind. 
 
366 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 
 
 54. By having pupils supplied with yard sticks 
 divided into feet and inches, and hy requiring them 
 to measure distances, surfaces and solids in and about 
 the school-house. 
 
 55. The teacher and pupils may borrow pint, quart, 
 gallon, peck and bushel measures, and construct the 
 usual tables by actually measuring water and sand. 
 This practice fixes the relative capacity of these meas- 
 ures as no drill upon tables and problems can ever do. 
 The same course should be pursued with the various 
 weights. 
 
 56. I. To cultivate the virtue of patriotism. 
 
 II. To teach the embryonic citizen that a certain 
 train of causes produces certain definite results whose 
 evils may be avoided or remedied by appropriate and 
 timely action. 
 
 57. After the necessary instruction in position, pen- 
 holding and movement is given, individual elements, 
 letters, words and sentences should be presented on the 
 blackboard. Attention should be called to one thing 
 at a time. The characters should be accurately formed 
 and analyzed before the pupils are called upon to re- 
 produce them. Much time and many efforts may be 
 required to master one element or letter, but the ex- 
 penditure will be amply repaid in the rapid progress 
 secured as the pupil advances from letter to letter. 
 Writing is an art and skill in its execution is possible 
 to all who are taught. 
 
 58. The standard of excellence in penmanship to 
 which every teacher should endeavor to bring his 
 
ANSWERS To QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 3l)7 
 
 pupils is the ability to write a uniformly legible stylo 
 of writing, free from meaningless flourishes, and exe- 
 cuted with an easy, rapid, graceful, movement, which 
 may be continued for hours without weariness. 
 
 59. Oral spelling, if properly conducted, cultivates 
 the ear to hear quickly and accurately. If the teacher 
 is a correct speaker and exacting in securing correct- 
 ness in articulation, the pupil acquires a facility and 
 accuracy in pronunciation that will dispense with much 
 laborious research in later years. 
 
 To secure these results the teacher should observe 
 these cautions : Never repeat a word :r a syllable, nor 
 permit a pupil to repeat syllables. No pupil should 
 try a second time to spell a word. Require pupils to 
 pronounce the words correctly before and after spell- 
 ing. Each letter and syllable should be distinctly and 
 accurately uttered in passing, but not repeated, i.e., 
 not uttered a second time. 
 
 60. Since skill in spelling is required chiefly for 
 writinsr, it follows that what one does most with a 
 constant purpose of improvement in view, he does 
 best. Hence, the practice of writing wcrds through 
 several years of school life, familiarizing their forms 
 to the eye, finally fixes the order o*' letters composing 
 a word permanently in the mind. 
 
 61. Correct spelling must be mastered through hand 
 and eye. As soon as the child has learned to form the 
 letters in script he should prepare all spelling lessons 
 bv writinff the words two or more times on 4ate or 
 paper. 
 
iH5$ ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 
 
 62. I. Require pupils to use pen, ink and a blank- 
 book. 
 
 II. Pronounce each word accurately and but once. 
 
 III. Require words written neatly in plain char- 
 acters. 
 
 IV. Allow no alterations, additions or erasures. 
 All omissions, interlineations, or indistinct letters 
 should be counted as errors. 
 
 V. Have pupils exchange books and mark each 
 other's errors with lead pencil, noting also the grade 
 of the work, each corrector writing his name below. 
 
 VI. Have monitors collect books for teacher's ex- 
 amination. 
 
 VII. If violations of No. IV. are found mark the 
 word zero. 
 
 VIII. If any corrector has failed to correct an erro»- 
 mark him zero for the error he has failed to note. 
 
 Another method equally good is to have each pupil 
 correct his own work. This plan has the advantage 
 of time, since the delay of exchanging is avoided, and, 
 further, the teacher marks all the errors (the speller's 
 and the corrector's), in a given book at once. 
 
 63. As a substitute for the reading exercise it is of 
 too little value to justify its employment. As a means 
 of developing purity, force and flexibility of tone, it is 
 of sufficient value to warrant the teacher in using it 
 
 )cc;isionally at the beginning of the lesson. 
 
 64. Always by their Christian names — never as 
 "Brown," "Smith," "Jones," etc., nor Miss " So 
 and So," or Master "This or that," nor "Sonny," 
 "■ Honey " or " Darling.'' 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. 369 
 
 65. The pupils, conscious that a daily record of 
 their recitations and deportment is kept, are dis- 
 posed to recite and act more uniformly well than they 
 would with an occasional record of these items. The 
 cards of record being promiscuously arranged for each 
 recitation, pupils are called unexpectedly and are kept 
 on the alert. Again, the teacher, anxious to mark his 
 pupils upon a common basis, assigns to each about the 
 same amount of duty. 
 
 66. The teacher having to estimate the value ot 
 each answer, recitation or exercise, consumes in the 
 calculation and record of such value, much time that 
 were better spent in the management of his classes. 
 
 67. I. To secure better order in movements. 
 
 II. To prevent the smaller children from being in- 
 jured by the rushing of large boys. 
 
 III. To train pupils to habits of order, system, and 
 deliberate movements. 
 
 68. The better class of pupils in whom the influ- 
 ence of conscience and love of approbation are strong, 
 fearful of disgrace by prevarication, are restrained, 
 and thus constitute the nucleus of a well ordered 
 school. A large portion of well inclined, but weaker 
 children, more or less under the influence of the 
 former, out of consideration of dependenoe or " pop- 
 ularity," fall into the practice of their stronger 
 neighbors. These two classes being left to govern 
 themselves in a measure, the teacher has opportunity 
 to attend to the idle, mischievous and dilatory pupils. 
 
 69. The report of conduct being left entirely with 
 
 '24 
 
370 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC 
 
 the scholars, there is, even among the well inclined; a 
 daily temptation to violate the truth. Those pupils 
 whose motives and habits are bad, seeing the opportu- 
 nity afiorded to stand as high as their more deserving 
 schoolmates, do not hesitate to take advantage of this 
 reliance upon their honor ; and unless they know their 
 statement will be challenged, claim " perfect," after 
 doing their utmost to escape every requirement of the 
 teacher. 
 
 70. The phonetic method, which might properly be 
 termed phonotypic, requires modified characters rep- 
 resenting all the sounds of the language. Its purpose 
 is to enable the child after the sounds have been 
 taught, to help himself in the pronunciation of each 
 new word. 
 
 71. The phonic method consists in teaching the 
 sounds of words through the powers of the letters 
 composing them. It employs no modified letters. 
 Words containing silent letters are at first omitted, 
 the attention being confined to words containing short 
 vowels. The advantages claimed for the phonic and 
 phonetic methods are an earlier recognition of sounds 
 and a greater skill and accuracy in articulation. 
 
 72. Roger Ascham, Friedrich Froebel, Desiderius 
 Erasmus, John Amos Comenius [Komenski], Jean 
 Jacques Rousseau, Johann Heinrich Pestalozzi, and 
 Immanuel Kant. 
 
 73. Froebel, born in Thuringia, 1782, was the 
 founder of the Kindergarten. Many of the improve- 
 ments in primary teaching may be ascribed to him 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON THEORY, ETC. '171 
 
 The principles involved in his theory of education 
 may be summed up in the single sentence: "Free 
 creativeness is at once the means and end of educa- 
 tion." 
 
 74. " Emile " was written by Rousseau (born in 
 1712), in which he portrays an ideal education accord- 
 ing to his peculiar views. The book attracted much 
 attention at the time of its publication, but the atheist- 
 ical tendencies of the author's writings and his general 
 erratic conduct brought condemnation upon this as 
 upon his other works. 
 
 75. Roger Ascham was Queen Elizabeth's teacher 
 of Greek and Latin. His only educational work of 
 importance was the " School Master" [Scholemas- 
 ter], in which he advocated a milder and more careful 
 training of youth than that in vogue at his time. The 
 work deals mainly with the teaching of Latin and 
 Greek. 
 
 76. Pestalozzi's principles of education were 
 founded upon natural development. He considered 
 :md taught that the end of education is the harmoni- 
 ous development of all the natural powers. Recog- 
 nizing the existence of a certain order of growth and 
 activity, he taught that all instruction should harmon- 
 ize with this order in time and character. He has 
 exerted a greater influence over the general theory 
 and practice of teaching than any man of modern 
 Umes. 
 
QUESTIONS ON ALCOHOL. AND ITS EFFECT ON 
 THE HUMAN BODY. 
 
 1. (a) What is alcohol? (6) Of what is it made? 
 (c) When, how and by whom was it discovered? 
 
 2. (a) What are the chemical properties of alcohol? 
 (&) State the formula represented in its manufacture. 
 
 3. («) Name some alcoholic drinks. (6) State the 
 percentage of alcohol in each. 
 
 4. («.) What is the effect of alcohol on the nerves? 
 (6) The heart? (c) The brain? (d) The man? 
 
 5. Why does alcohol intoxicate and cause a man who is 
 under its influence to stagger? 
 
 6. (o) What diseases result from the continued and 
 excessive use of alcohol? (b) Name six other fatal diseases 
 of the brain and nervous system resulting fiom excessive 
 use of alcohol. 
 
 7. Has the use of alcohol tended to increase or lessen 
 crime? 
 
 8. Is the appetite for alcoholic beverages hereditary? 
 
 9. Aside from delirium tremens and insanity, what other 
 legacies do drunkards transmit to their posterity? 
 
 10. Why do persons who use alcohol desire highly sea- 
 soned foods? 
 
 11. Can a man addicted to the use of alcohol accom 
 plish as much (except crime) as one who is not? 
 
ANSWEBS TO QUESTIONS ON ALCOHOL. 
 
 • 2. What is true of persons slightly under the effects 
 i f alcohol? 
 
 13. How does the continued use of alcohol affect the 
 will? 
 
 14. What is the effect of alcohol upon the moral sense 
 of the habitual drinker? 
 
 15. In what way does alcohol .interfere with the di- 
 gestion? 
 
 16. What risks do people take who begin to drink 
 alcoholic liquors? 
 
 17. (a) What effect do epidemics — contagious diseases — 
 have upon the habitual drinker? (b) Why? 
 
 18. («) Give a short comparison between food and 
 alcohol. (&) Between water and alcohol. 
 
 19. Why is the face, and especially the nose, of the 
 habitual drinker inflamed, bloated — having the appearance 
 of the headlight on a locomotive? 
 
 20. Qi) What is fibrine? (b) What proportion of the 
 blood is fibrine? (c) How is it affected by alcohol? 
 
 21. Knowing the evil effects of drink, why do people 
 continue to harbor its presence, protect its sale and defend 
 its influence? 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALCOHOL. AND ITS 
 EFFECT ON THE HUMAN BODY. 
 
 1 . («) Alcohol is a colorless fluid essence of pure spirit, 
 lighter in weight than water and boils at 172° Fahrenheit 
 It contains 91 per cent, of ethyl alcohol and 9 per cent, 
 water. Diluted alcohol (proof spirit) contains 45.5 percent. 
 
374 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALCOHOL. 
 
 by weight of ethyl alcohol and 54. 5 per cent, of water. 
 (//) It is the fermentation and distillation of various vege- 
 table juices and infusions of a saccharine nature which 
 have undergone vinous fermentation. (c) Its discovery, 
 in 1527, was by accident, attributed to Paracelsus, an emin- 
 ent Swiss alchemist and physician, born in 1490 and died 
 in 1541. 
 
 2. (a) Alcohol gives off a faint blue flame without 
 smoke and does not freeze. It is used to dissolve gums, 
 preserve fruits, meats and jellies. It is used in the manu- 
 facture of perfumes, in thermometers, paints, oils, varn- 
 ishes, medicines, spirit lamps and in the arts. (A) Radical 
 ethyl forms common or ethyl alcohol (C 2 H 5 OH); methyl 
 forms methyl alcohol (CH 3 OH) or wood spirit; amyl forms 
 amyl alcohol (C 5 Hj . OH) or fusil oil, etc. It forms part 
 of all intoxicating drinks, and its nature is not changed by 
 anything with which it is mixed. 
 
 3. 
 
 Spirits— Beverages. Alcohol by volume. 
 
 Whiskey about 45 per cent. 
 
 Cognac " 55 
 
 Rum " 48 " 
 
 Brandy " 52 " 
 
 Schnapps " 45 " 
 
 Sherry Wine " 22 " 
 
 Champagne " 11 " 
 
 Ales and Ports " 10 " 
 
 Beer, Cider " 8 " 
 
 4. (a) Alcohol, passing from the stomach into the 
 blood, is quickly swept through the system and brought 
 into contact with the nerves, which it paralyzes in propor- 
 tion to the amount taken. (b) The same, (c) The same. 
 (</) The same, it paralyzes everything it touches. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALCOHOL. 375 
 
 5. Alcohol has a greater attraction for the brain and 
 nerve matter than for any other part of the body. In cases 
 of death from alcohol the post mortem reveals more poison 
 ia the brain and nerves than in any of the other organs. 
 Enough has been found in the brain to burn and to dissolve 
 camphor. 
 
 6. (a) A fearful disease called delirium tremens, or 
 trembling madness, often ends with death the story of the 
 effects of alcohol upon the human system. Bright's disease, 
 while not always resulting from indulgence in alcoholic 
 liquors, yet their excessive use is responsible for the preva- 
 lence of this disease, (b) Softening of the brain, dementia, 
 or general failure of the mental powers, paralysis, vertigo, 
 epilepsy and apoplexy. 
 
 7. The use of alcohol makes criminals. Our jails, asy- 
 lums and penitentiaries are well patronized by men and 
 women brought there by King Alcohol. 
 
 8. Yes. The drinking habits of, parents often cause 
 idiocy in their descendants, involving not only their chil- 
 dren, but grand-children. 
 
 9. Every bad quality: Unreliability, untruthfulness, 
 dishonesty; in brief, not only the drunkard, but ofttimes 
 the descendants, become charges of the State, or objects of 
 pity and public charity. 
 
 10. Because the nerves of taste have become blunted — 
 partially destroyed by the excessive use of alcohol. 
 
 11. No ! The mind is excited and feverish. The work 
 is poorer in quality, as well as in quantity, than that done 
 when the mind is in a natural state. 
 
 12. They are very often noisy and vulgar, and say and 
 do many things which they would condemn when sober. 
 
376 AN3WRB3 TO QUESTIONS ON ALCOHOL. 
 
 13. It greatly weakens the will-power to make and 
 carry out any good resolutions conceived in moments of 
 sober reflection. 
 
 14. He becomes indifferent to duty, selfish, unkind 
 and often brutal and vicious, and ready to commit any 
 crime — even murder. 
 
 15. Experiments tend to prove that alcohol coagulates 
 and precipitates the pepsin from the gastric juice, and so 
 puts a stop to its work in the process of digestion. There 
 is more or less poison in alcohol — fermented fruits and 
 vegetables — and if the digestive organs are impaired the 
 poison mixes with the food which nature intended should 
 enrich the blood, and through the arteries it is transmitted 
 to all parts of the body. 
 
 16. The risk of blighting their own lives and those of 
 their children, with the great probability that the same fate 
 will overtake them that swells the accidental death rate to 
 vast proportions, and renders them easy victims in epi- 
 demics of cholera and yellow fever. Contagious diseases 
 move more rapidly and with greater mortality among drunk- 
 ards than among abstainers, because disease is attracted by 
 poison, uncleanliness and foulness. 
 
 17. The mortality is very great. In the great choler;i 
 epidemics that ravished the country in 1849, 1866, and 
 1873, and the periodical yellow fever pest of the south, it 
 was the habitual drinkers of maltuous o r vinous liquors 
 who were affected first, and, with few exeeptions, the result 
 was fatal. [See questions 16 and 17.] 
 
 18. («) Food is digested, alcohol is not. Food warm.s 
 the blood directly or indirectly ; alcohol lowers the temper- 
 ature. Food nourishes the body in the sense of assimilu- 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALCOHOL. 377 
 
 ting itself to the tissues; alcohol does not. Food makes 
 blood ; alcohol never does anything more innocent than 
 mixing with it. Food feeds the blood-cells ; alcohol des- 
 troys them. Food excites in health to normal action only ; 
 alcohol tends to inflammation and disease. Food gives force 
 to the body ; alcohol excites reaction and wastes force, in 
 the first place, and in the second, as a true narcotic, re- 
 presses vital action and corresponding nutrition. (&) If 
 alcohol does not act like food, neither does it behave like 
 water. Water is the subtle but innocent vehicle of circu- 
 lation, which dissolves the solid food, holds in play the 
 chemical and vital reactions of the tissues, conveys the 
 nutritive solutions from cell to cell, from tube to tube, and 
 carries off and expels the effete matter. Water neither irri- 
 tates tissues* wastes force, nor suppresses vital action: 
 whereas alcohol does all three. Alcohol hardens solid 
 tissue, thickens the blood, narcotizes the nerves, and in 
 every conceivable direction antagonizes the operation and 
 function of water. — Lees. 
 
 19. The nerves, which have their seat in the brain, 
 being the first parts affected, the poison must make its es- 
 cape by the shortest and easiest route, which is through the 
 skin. The nose, which is composed of muscles> nerves, 
 cartilage and fourteen very thin, sieve-like bones, offers the 
 least resistance for elimination, and the pores and the blood- 
 vessels become enlarged by this exertion. Alcohol mixing 
 with the blood tends toward discoloration, which explains 
 the presence of this fiery danger-signal which kind nature 
 Las very properly caused to be worn in so conspicuous a 
 place. 
 
 -O. (a,) A peculiar organic compound, whitish in color, 
 inodorous and insoluble in cold water, tough, elastic and 
 
378 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALCOHOL. 
 
 composed of thready fibers. It is found in animals and 
 vegetables, (b) The proportion of fibrine is about two and 
 a half parts in a thousand, (c) An excess of alcohol in 
 the blood coagulates the fibrine; this, in its solidified state, 
 retards the circulation of the blood, especially in the minute 
 blood-vessels. Frequently these tiny clots of fibriue 
 obstruct the current of blood in the brain, and thus pro- 
 duce the beginnings of paralysis. In other instances these 
 obstructions occur in the liver or the kidneys, making these 
 organs the seat of fatal diseases. 
 
 2 1. It still remains a mystery why the liquor traffic is 
 defended and protected by the law-making powers of our 
 country, and tolerated and indulged in by both men and 
 women who abhor crimes far less damning in their effect 
 upon society and moral laws of our land. Colonel Ingersoll 
 used the following language to a jury before whom he was 
 pleading: "I believe, from the time alcohol issues from 
 the coiled and poisonous worm in the distillery until it 
 empties into the hell of death, that it is demoralizing to 
 everybody that touches it, from the source to where it ends. 
 I do not believe that anybody can contemplate the subject 
 without being prejudiced against the crime. All they have 
 to do is to think of the wrecks on either side of the stream 
 of death, of the suicides, of the insanity, of the poverty, 
 of the destruction, of the little children tugging at the 
 breast, of weeping and despairing wives asking for bread, 
 of the man struggling with imaginary serpents produced by 
 this devilish thing ; and when you think of the jails, of the 
 almshouses, of the asylums, of the prisons and of the 
 scaffolds, on either bank, I do not wonder that every 
 thoughtful man is prejudiced against this vile stuff called 
 alcohol." [From Brown's Popular Readings.] 
 
OPENING AND CLOSING OF SCHOOL. 
 
 "How shall I open my school?" is a question that 
 arises frequently in the mind of the experienced teacher 
 as well as in that of the beginner. The former thinks 
 upon it from a force of circumstances, either he himself 
 tires of the same old method, or else his pupils show 
 by their listless observance of the form that it has tc 
 them no attraction. The latter, most likely, has no 
 clearly defined idea of just what to do. The opening 
 of his school is perhaps the most difficult duty he has 
 to perform. 
 
 A variety in the manner of opening school day after 
 day may be necessary in order that both teacher and 
 pupil keep up their interest in this important part of 
 the day's exercises. 
 
 For the benefit of those who desire to know how 
 other teachers do, the following methods of opening 
 school are given here. 
 
 METHODS OF TEACHERS. 
 
 The school does not know what the opening exercises 
 are to be, for I constantly change them. The following 
 is a partial list : Singing by the whole school. Song by 
 one or more. Declamation. Recitation. Essay. Se- 
 
 (379) 
 
880 
 
 lected Reading. Pronouncing exercise from list of words 
 on hoard. Important facts presented and suggestions 
 made by pupils. Biographical sketches or anything 
 else of interest that may present itself. I of course 
 have the matters arranged before-hand with the parties 
 to act so that preparations will be duly made. — L. B 
 Irvin. 
 
 I open with singing, encouraging all to assist ; prayer 
 short, pointed, and practical, and sometimes reading a 
 few verses from the Bible which contain a practical 
 lesson. I frequently read a short comic, pathetic, or 
 instructive selection from the best standard authors, 
 always endeavoring to say something which will interest 
 or sometimes amuse the pupils, but never weary them. 
 — W. H. Campbell. 
 
 We have roll-call, Scripture reading, (pupils alternat- 
 ing with teacher), chanting Lord's Prayer, and singing 
 some piece of glee music. — A. K. Carmichael. 
 
 Immediately after roll-call, I have various pupils (six 
 or eight) rise and repeat a proverb or moral maxim 
 previously prepared and made known to me, so that no 
 two have the same. — Anonymous. 
 
 I open my school as follows: I. Singing. 2. Short 
 Scripture lesson. 3. The Lord's Prayer in concert. 4 
 Singing. 5. Roll-call. — A. F. Jenks. 
 
 I open school by reading (myself) a few verses from 
 the Bible without comment. The pupils then stand 
 and (as many as will voluntarily) repeat the Lord'. c 
 
OPENING AND CLOSING OF SCHOOL. t8] 
 
 Prayer with me. We then ling some familial p 
 perhaps one they have learned in Sunday school. — S. 
 C. Bond. 
 
 The method to be used in obtaining pupils' names 
 will depend to a great extent upon the grade of pupils. 
 
 According to circumstances the tea( her may call for 
 all those whose last name begins with "A" to stand, or 
 raise the hand until all are taken. Then foi those 
 bej ining with "B," and so on. This method is used 
 very satisfactorily in taking the names of pupils in the 
 various classes. 
 
 Or, slips on paper may be passed to the pupils by the 
 tea* her, upon which they are to write theii name, 
 and perhaps the studies which they pursued during tin- 
 last term of school. 
 
 Or, if the teacher does not care to take the names 
 alphabetically, he may call for those in whose last 
 lame there are three letters, and next four letters, etc.; 
 \his will attract their attention. 
 
 Or, he may for a diversion call for those whose last 
 name ends with a certain letter , as "a," " b," "c," etc.; 
 this will cause all eyes to be open and attentive. 
 
 Or, a paper may be started in a certain corner of the 
 room to be passed from pupil to pupil regularly up and 
 down the rows until all are taken. 
 
 Or, if but few are present, time may be taken to go 
 
 ' h one individually. 
 
,82 
 
 i 
 
 Or, each pupil may be requested simply to leave his 
 name with the teacher by writing or communicating it 
 verbally. 
 
 Or, if the old roll of the school be preserved it would 
 be well to call it and mark those not present. In this, 
 to familiarize the teacher with the pupil, it is a good 
 idea to have the pupil rise as his name is called, that 
 the teacher may see him and thereby know him. 
 
 On the first day of school, after obtaining the 
 names of the pupils, select some branch such as Spell- 
 ing or Arithmetic, in which you can assign all work, 
 and get them all to studying as soon as possible, thereby 
 giving you opportunity to organize at greater leisure. 
 Have your plan so well laid that you can keep them 
 profitably busy the whole of the first day. 
 
 It is too much to ask of pupils that they understand 
 absolutely the meaning of every word they read. The 
 teacher frequently calls for meanings which he himself 
 is unable to give. The pupil may have an idea of the 
 meaning of a word and yet be unable to express it. — 
 A nonymous. 
 
 We vary our opening exercises by having occasionally 
 concert drill on History, Civil Government, Botany, or 
 some other branch. — G. W. Cullison. 
 
 Assign a number to each pupil, beginning at I. 
 
 At the time for roll-call the pupils present name their 
 numbers in order, the teacher calls the names of the 
 absent ones and writes them on the board. This place 
 
OPENING AND CLOSING OF SwaOOL. 383 
 
 should be near the entrance, that tardy ones may cross 
 their n ambers and mark opposite the number of minutes 
 late. At the close of the session tardy pupils and those 
 absent at previous sessions remain at desks to give 
 verbal or written excuses. — Anonymous. 
 
 Instead of the Bible reading and prayer, the school 
 recite together some appropriate prose or poetry verse 
 as for instance : 
 
 If wisdom's ways you would wisely seek, 
 
 These things observe with care : 
 Of whom you speak, to whom you speak, 
 And when, and how, and where. — A nonymous. 
 
 We open by singing, followed by short talks on 
 familiar topics or matters pertaining to school work 
 and discipline. — H. E. Hale. 
 
 The roll may be called by the pupils calling their 
 own numbers from one up. Or by the teacher calling 
 names, and pupils responding. Or by monitors report- 
 ing rows. Or some pupil especially delegated may 
 report delinquents at night. 
 
 The Scripture reading may be varied by pupils read- 
 ing after the teacher; reading alternately; reading 
 responsively, the teacher giving the first and the pupil 
 che last part of the verse. The teacher may read first, 
 then the boys, and next the girls. Various pupils 
 called on individually may read. The teacher or the 
 school may read the selection ; or the teacher and 
 school together. 
 
384 
 
 I read short appropriate selections, and offer a short 
 prayer while the pupils stand. — J. C. Gregg. 
 
 I have no formal method of opening school, but 
 proceed to work as soon as pupils are seated. — F. A. 
 Fogg. 
 
 We open school by reading a chapter in the Bible 
 and on Monday mornings vary by having each pupil 
 recite a "Scriptural quotation." — J. B. EcJiling. 
 
 We open school with singing. The music is not 
 necessarily of a devotional character. — H. C. Speer. 
 
 We have no regular stereotyped method of opening 
 school. My belief is that more depends upon the 
 manner than the matter of the exercises. — C. S. Locke. 
 
 The most satisfactory opening is the simplest. — H. 
 H. Ballard. 
 
 During the opening exercises have all books put 
 away and let there be no studying. 
 
 "Memory Gems," published by D. Appleton & Co., 
 N. Y., is an excellent work from which to select 
 exercises suitable for opening. 
 
 Various subjects may be taken up, such as honor, 
 truthfulness, neatness, promptness, accuracy, economy, 
 pleasantness, dignity, politeness, cheerfulness, forbear- 
 ance, etc., upon any one of which the teacher may 
 make some remarks that are to the point and practical 
 
OPENING AND CLOSING OF SCHOOL. 385 
 
 enough to leave upon the minds of the pupils the 
 thought that they -must put into practice particularly 
 during the day the things he mentions. If the subject 
 spoken of be Economy, let the idea be in each and 
 every thing done by both teacher and pupil throughout 
 the day in all the little details — ECONOMY ; in time, in 
 chalk, in paper, in ink, in space at board and upon 
 slates, etc. If the subject be Cheerfulness, let the idea 
 of cheerfulness in conversation, in work, in recess, in 
 difficult or unpleasant tasks, in going to and from school, 
 etc., be impressed. One word may be used for such 
 a period as the teacher thinks necessary. — Samuel 
 Paisley. 
 
 Any rule or remark that is necessary, I make at the 
 opening, since it is a good time to make an impression. 
 — A nonymous. 
 
 A general question left over from one day to the 
 next may very properly be called up before the first 
 recitation. 
 
 It is also the time to inform those who have been 
 absent where the lessons are ; or permit them to find 
 out for themselves. 
 
 Long speeches as a rule are unfruitful of good results. 
 — A nonymous. 
 
 The following is suggested as a good way of keeping 
 
 the daily register : Let an absence be indicated by | , 
 
 this crossed, (+) will stand for tardy. A withdrawal 
 
 from the school bv W. returned or registered by R, 
 
 2 
 
386 
 
 and transferred by T, after this placing the "whence" 
 or "whither" of the transfer. Let the register be a 
 complete history of each pupil's school life, his age, 
 time of entering, time of leaving, cause, etc. — Teacher's 
 Hand Book. 
 
 I close the opening exercises with remarks of en- 
 couragement, admonition, or instruction, as the case 
 may be, striving to induce the feeling that I am in- 
 terested in all their welfare — spiritual, mental, and 
 physical, and their duties and recreations. — W. A. 
 Buxton. 
 
 Leave a short study period between the opening 
 exercises and the first recitation. 
 
 All lists of names for the convenience of the teacher 
 should be alphabetically arranged. 
 
 I was present at the opening exercises at the West- 
 field Normal School a few days ago and was much 
 pleased. First a psalm was read responsively, then a 
 few verses from a chapter in James by the principal. 
 Two verses of a hymn were sung, a short prayer was 
 offered by the principal, and all joined in repeating the 
 Lord's Prayer. — W. B. Rice. 
 
 The teacher should especially guard against having 
 such a rush of work come to a focus at the hour of 
 closing that the school must be dismissed in confusion, 
 some pupils with their work half done, others restless 
 and confused, going out without regard to order or 
 quiet. Better call all work to 3 close a few minutes 
 
OPENING AND CLOSING OF SCHOOL. 387 
 
 before the time for dismissal and have all pass out 
 quietly and in order. — Anonymous. 
 
 I have lying upon my desk a plot of the room with 
 the name of each pupil written upon the desk he 
 occupies. A glance over the room and then at the plot 
 will tell me just who are absent. — D. R. Hatch. 
 
 Sometimes I wrote upon the board a form for open- 
 ing every day in the week and continued the course for 
 several weeks. These the pupils recited with me in the 
 opening exercises. — Fowle. 
 
 To check and perhaps prevent noise when the pupils 
 are dismissed at night, let the girls go first one night 
 and the boys the next, etc., to see who can pass out 
 the more quietly. 
 
 Occasionally put the question in the evening, "What 
 have you learned to-day that you did not know before ?" 
 and let the answer be taken from a number of pupils. 
 
 Teachers desiring a variety of daily devotional ex- 
 ercises already arranged can find the same in "Brooks' 
 School Manual of Devotion," published by A. S. Barnes 
 &Co. 
 
 Have the pupils rise during roll-call and as each calls 
 his number let him be seated. This teaches the scholars 
 to pay close attention and saves time. — Clytnan. 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS, 
 
 The teacher should creat an interest in study, incite 
 curiosity, promote inquiry, prompt investigation, inspire 
 self-confidence, give hints, make suggestions, and tempt 
 pupils to try their strength and test their skill. — Wick- 
 ersham. 
 
 Never punish when angry. 
 
 Subscribe for some educational journal. 
 
 Require prompt and exact obedience. 
 
 The true order of learning should be : First, what is 
 necessary ; second, what is useful ; third, what is orna- 
 mental. To reverse this order is like beginning to 
 build at the top of the edifice. 
 
 Never indulge in anything inconsistent with true 
 politeness. 
 
 Human perfection is the grand aim of all well direct- 
 ed education. The teacher should have ever present 
 
 (388) 
 
SAYINGS OP EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS- 
 
 389 
 
 the ideal man whose perfection he would realize in the 
 children committed to his care, as the sculptor would 
 realize the pure forms of his imagination on the rough 
 marble that lies unchiseled before him. 
 
 Remember that your work, if done aright, will make 
 you a complete man or woman ; it will, like any busi- 
 ness, give you a better judgment, more information, 
 and a wider range of thought. 
 
 Avoid all undue self-sufficiency. 
 
 Avoid servile imitation of any model. 
 
 Never attempt to teach too many things. 
 
 Ask two questions out of the book for every one in it. 
 
 Let every lesson have a point, either immediate or 
 remote. 
 
 Activity is the law of childhood ; accustom the child 
 to do, and educate the hand. 
 
 Guard against prejudice on entering a school. 
 
 Never speak in a scolding, fretful manner. 
 
 The teacher must understand that on which he oper- 
 ates. 
 
 Never use a hard word where an easy one will ans- 
 wer as well. 
 
390 SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 Make the school room cheerful and attractive. 
 
 Do not allow pupils to direct their own studies. 
 
 Remember that your capital is your health, your 
 education, your liberty, your determination to brighten 
 and improve yourself and your power to teach others 
 
 Proceed from the known to the unknown, from the 
 particular to the general, from the concrete to the 
 abstract, from the simple to the difficult. 
 
 Avoid reciting for a pupil or class ; it will do the 
 pupil no more good than to eat his dinner for him. 
 
 Teach your pupils how to study and think systemat- 
 ically and connectedly. 
 
 Remember that in teaching, as in everything else, 
 you must have a good deal of capital invested to obtain 
 large proceeds. 
 
 Never tell a pupil to do a thing unless convinced he 
 can do it. 
 
 Never let your pupils see that they can vex you. 
 
 Cultivate faculties in their natural order ; first form 
 the mind, then furnish it. 
 
 Remember that you ought to be more deeply inter- 
 ested in your school every day, as every business man 
 is in his business. 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS- 301 
 
 Avoid invidious comparisons of one child with an- 
 other. 
 
 Remember that your duty consists not in keeping 
 your pupils still and getting replies to questions, many 
 of which you could not answer yourself. 
 
 Never be slow to commend a pupil for good work or 
 deportment. 
 
 Teach self-government. It is the only government. 
 
 Speak grammatically to your pupils ; speak kindly, 
 too. 
 
 Never let any known fault go unnoticed. 
 
 Be prompt in beginning and dismissing. 
 
 Leisure is sweet to those who have earned it, but 
 burdensome to those who get it for nothing. 
 
 Cultivate a pleasant countenance. 
 
 He that studies books alone will know how things 
 ought to be. He that studies men will know how 
 things are. 
 
 , Reduce every subject to its elements ; one difficulty 
 at a time is enough for a child. 
 
 Cultivate the voice, eye, ear and hand ; avoid loud, 
 harsh speaking or singing. 
 
392 SAVINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 As the treasures of knowledge are mainly contained 
 in books, pupils should be early taught how to use 
 them. The rapid, discursive and thoughtless manner 
 in which books are now read by our youth is one of the 
 greatest obstacles to the progress of a sound education. 
 
 Never magnify small offenses. 
 
 Do not be hasty in word or action. 
 
 Teach both by precept and example. 
 
 Proceed step by step — be thorough ; the measure of 
 information is not what the teacher can give, but what 
 the pupil can receive. 
 
 Know what you desire to teach. 
 
 Teachers should be judged not by the amount of 
 knowledge which they seemingly impart, but by their 
 efforts to induce the child to acquire knowledge for 
 himself. 
 
 Other things being equal, the most intelligent are 
 the most industrious. 
 
 Do not continue recitations beyond the regular time 
 appointed for them. 
 
 Govern by quiet signals as far as possible. 
 
 Natural fitness for the duties of the teacher should be 
 the first consideration by those intending to enter the 
 12 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 393 
 
 profession. No amount of training can compensate for 
 natural deficiencies. Earnest determination to excel 
 may do much to stimulate one on against his natural 
 bent ; but, when a crisis comes, the artificial character 
 so laboriously induced will break down, and the unfit- 
 ness of the teacher will become apparent to himself and 
 his district - *W. E. Bellows. 
 
 The common schools are the stomachs of the country 
 in which all people that come to us are assimilated 
 within a generation. When a lion eats an ox the lion 
 does not become an ox, but the ox becomes lion. So 
 the emigrants of all races and nations become Amer- 
 icans, and it is a disgrace to our institutions and a 
 shame to our policy to abuse them or drive them away. 
 — Henry Ward Beecher. 
 
 The teacher is like the crutch ; its object is not to 
 support the child through life, but to support him until 
 he has strength enough to walk without it. — Educa- 
 tional Weekly. 
 
 The marking down of courses of study, and the cal- 
 culation of per centages, have given the public the idea 
 that educaticr is synonymous with the acquirement of 
 an amount of information. The fixing of a course of 
 study has done an infinite deal of harm. Subjects 
 should be studied, and even these may be so pursued 
 as to render the advantage a mere verbal one. — N. Y. 
 School Journal. 
 
 Every thought and action of your life, from infancy 
 to manhood, has a bearing more or less direct on your 
 
394 SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 work as a teacher. In other words, the teacher com- 
 mences to develop an influence and constantly adds to 
 his character that which will make him either a good 
 teacher or an inferior one. — G. Dallas Lind. 
 
 The one thing indispensable to the success of a school 
 lis a good teacher. 
 
 The knowledge demanded for the successful conduct 
 ©f even a primary school is varied and extensive. 
 
 It is incumbent upon all teachers to continually study 
 and improve themselves. 
 
 To teach, whether by word or action, is the greatest 
 function on earth. — Channing. 
 
 The tap root of a system of government in school is 
 to furnish all with employment that is interesting to 
 them, and at the same time conducive to their highest 
 mental and moral development. To keep the imps of 
 mischief away, put the angel of business on guard. — 
 G. Dallas Lind. 
 
 An enthusiastic teacher can rouse a lethargic class 
 or room in a few moments, and a great exertion to 
 overcome personal languor for a little while can make 
 the whole day a success in lessons. 
 
 Teachers should learn how to read character, how to 
 read the dispositions of each pupil, and how, therefore, 
 to manipulate each one in the best manner to secure 
 the highest success. — Nelson Sizer. 
 
SAYING'S OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 305 
 
 The teacher need say little about government. A 
 system of rules laid down is of more harm than good. 
 — G. Dallas Lind. 
 
 Do not encourage pupils to report each other for 
 misdemeanors. 
 
 Experience is beginning to show that teaching, like 
 every other department of human thought and activity, 
 must change with the changing conditions of society or 
 it will fall in the rear of civilization and become an ob- 
 stacle to improvement. — James Johonnot. 
 
 Now, I believe that a school, in order to be a good 
 one, should be one that will fit men and women, in the 
 best way, for the humble positions that the great mass 
 of them must necessarily occupy in life. I do not care 
 how much knowledge a man may have acquired in 
 school, that school has been a curse to him if its influ- 
 ence has been to fill him with futile ambitions. — J. G. 
 Holland. 
 
 Do not lower yourself, but endeavor to bring your 
 pupils up to your level. 
 
 Never attempt to ferret out mischief without being 
 successful. 
 
 The teacher, while he does not make a show of 
 watching his pupils, should ever be on the alert to 
 detect departures from propriety and at once check 
 them. A firm stand at the beginning is of great im- 
 portance. — G. Dallas Lind. 
 
306 SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 The teacher should observe closely the results of his 
 plans and note where they are successful and where a 
 failure, and should govern his future accordingly. Let 
 him review each evening the work of the day and try 
 and find a mistake he has made, and resolve to do bet- 
 ter the next day. — G, Dallas Lind. 
 
 Make no noisy assertions of authority, and do not 
 threaten. Be quiet, but be firm ; be dignified, but not 
 distant. Let pupils feel that your friendship is desira- 
 ble. Talk little, but do what you say you will. 
 
 The faithful and competent teacher never fails to 
 secure the confidence, respect, and even affection of his 
 pupils. He is, as he ought to be, esteemed " in place 
 of a parent." He is thought to be infallible. He ought, 
 therefore, to be correct. — Wm. H. McGuffey. 
 
 If you would profit by what you read and think, 
 write your thoughts down. It is a good habit always 
 to read with a pen or pencil in hand. Many an idea is 
 lost because not written down. — G. Dallas Lind. 
 
 The moral impressions made by the indirect method 
 of teaching need be supplemented by direct lessons 
 bearing upon the same subject. In teaching morals 
 the same laws prevail as in teaching other branches. 
 The mind must first be trained to observe, compare, 
 and classify facts, and then to draw inferences from 
 them. — James Jokonnot. 
 
 See that pupils in discussing or reciting a subject use 
 
 proper language. 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 397 
 
 The teacher should teach pupils to govern them- 
 selves, and only when his best endeavors to this end 
 fail should he resort to coercive measures. — G. Dallas 
 Lind. 
 
 Have no pet pupils. 
 
 See that the recitations are as nearly perfect as possi- 
 ble under existing circumstances. 
 
 I have found to make my pupils work heartily with 
 me and feel that our interests are one, is to treat them 
 with uniform courtesy and respect. It takes time and 
 patience before the good results are seen, and I suffer 
 many discouragements and heart-aches, but I do think 
 that little by little it cultivates in them a self-respect, 
 a kindness of feeling, and habits of courtesy toward 
 others which gives a happier atmosphere to the room 
 and stimulates them to better work. 
 
 When the lesson is assigned, explain somewhat its 
 more difficult features, and show pupils how to study it 
 to advantage. Lacking this preliminary aid, they will 
 needlessly waste much time and energy and perhaps 
 come to the recitation discouraged. 
 
 The great conspicuous evil practice in our schools, 
 once almost universal and still widely prevalent, is that 
 of obliging pupils to commit to memory the words of 
 the text-book. This practice seems to have its origin 
 either in the ignorance or indolence of the teacher, and 
 is one calculated directly to stultify, rather than ex- 
 pand, the mind. — James Johonnot. 
 
398 SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 Lectures upon teaching, talks upon methods, etc., 
 may greatly aid in securing their object, but it is 
 practice only, under the eye of criticism, that will 
 make successful oral teaching. 
 
 Object-lessons, giving pupils ideas and thoughts with 
 which they are already familiar, are to be avoided. 
 The interest of a lesson depends very much upon its 
 novelty ; and if this element is wanting, there is very 
 little left to create a permanent impression. — James 
 Johonnot. 
 
 Avoid wounding the sensibilities of a dull child. 
 
 Never lose your patience when parents unreasonably 
 interfere with your plans. 
 
 Remember that good business men watch the mar- 
 ket ; they mark what others are doing, note how they 
 do it, and take papers and journals that give them 
 specific information. You will be very short-sighted if 
 you do not imitate their example. 
 
 The teacher who finds not pleasure in the pursuit of 
 his profession, or in the action of his intellect, would 
 better quit the profession at once, and engage in some 
 other pursuit. — G. Dallas Lind. 
 
 Give due credit to those who work with and for you 
 for what they do. 
 
 If you cannot make study attractive to your pupils, 
 quit the profession. 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 399 
 
 The teacher who possesses the ingenuity to con- 
 trive plans and methods is wise, but he exhibits 
 the more wisdom who studies the peculiarities of his 
 pupils, so as the better to know and adapt his teaching 
 to each individual mind. 
 
 Convince your scholars by your actions that you are 
 their friend. 
 
 Take especial care that the schoolhouse and its ap- 
 pendages are kept in good order. 
 
 Study to acquire the art of aptly illustrating a diffr 
 cult subject. 
 
 Never deprive a child of anything of value without 
 returning it at the proper time. 
 
 In all things, set before the child an example worthy 
 of imitation. 
 
 Take advantage of unusual occurrences to n tke a 
 moral or religious impression. 
 
 Pull forward and not back, and lend a hand. 
 
 Be slow to promise, but quick to perform. 
 
 Do not tolerate slovenliness. 
 
 Never break a promise. 
 
 Be accurate. 
 
400 SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 Teaching pupils to draw their own conclusions pro- 
 perly stands above almost any other consideration. 
 
 Be thoroughly in earnest and your energy and spirit 
 will cause interest and enthusiasm in the class. 
 
 Be courteous ; do not gossip, especially about other 
 teachers. 
 
 Never find fault without showing why, and indicating 
 the better way. 
 
 Do not complain to the directors about little things ; 
 nor to your principal. Attend to them yourself. 
 
 Monotony in school exercises produces dull, listless 
 scholars. 
 
 Commend often, but judiciously ; never scold. 
 
 The art of teaching consists in starting the right 
 questions and urging them along the track of inquiry 
 toward their goal in finding the truth. 
 
 Encourage the use of books of reference by refer- 
 ring to them frequently yourself. 
 
 During monthly examinations, make one study topi- 
 cal ; assign a topic and have the work written in the 
 form of an essay. 
 
 Moral teaching should not be neglected. Direct in- 
 struction may be given in a few set lectures, by anec- 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 401 
 
 dotes or biographies of the great and good, at recita- 
 tion time, in reading lessons, etc., or from books on 
 morals and manners. Indirect instruction is given by 
 the personal influence of the pupils on each other. 
 
 Be wise in the selection of the matter for declama- 
 tion. Do not allow your pupils to memorize trash. 
 Use only standard authors. 
 
 If you cannot speak well of your co-laborers, say 
 nothing of them. 
 
 In difficult cases of discipline, let your pupils see that 
 you think before you act. 
 
 You can never exhibit vexation without losing the 
 
 pupils' respect. 
 
 It seems to me a most enervating practice to shrink 
 from demanding even irksome attention when it is 
 
 necessary. 
 
 Voluntary and conscious instruction and teaching 
 are the handmaids of education and are ways of ap- 
 proaching mind. 
 
 Good examiners always judge answers by their gen- 
 eral style as well as by their contents. 
 
 Whatever qualifications of mind and person the 
 teacher may have, he is still lacking in a most impor- 
 tant element of success, if he has not a quick apprehen- 
 sion of adapting means to ends. 
 
402 SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 All teaching of pupils " how to study," which does 
 not demand of them their maximum efforts in practice, 
 is a delusion and a fatal deception to the learners. 
 
 Neglect of demanding maximum amounts of work 
 from children accustoms them to superficial scholar- 
 ship. 
 
 He is most fortunate in the classroom who inspires 
 his pupils with a zeal and determination for an in- 
 creased power on the morrow's lesson. 
 
 If your work drags, take more interest in it. Away 
 with the teacher whose daily routine is like drudgery. 
 The good teacher does not complain that his business 
 is a treadmill. 
 
 Is your dress a model of neatness and taste for your 
 pupils? 
 
 Gentlemanly and lady-like treatment of scholars at 
 school, upon the street, everywhere, will win. 
 
 It is the exception that the teacher receives, without 
 cause, insolence from pupils. There is generally a 
 lurking weakness somewhere that renders the teacher 
 liable. 
 
 Avoid doing the reciting yourself — that should be 
 the work of the class. 
 
 Noisy recesses can be obviated by allowing and en- 
 couraging instructive games or puzzles. 
 
SAYINGS OP EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 403 
 
 Remember that when you may be thinking least 
 about it, some pupil is observing some action of yours 
 which he will remember through life. 
 
 When an error has been made and corrected by the 
 pupil who made it, the same question should be given 
 again to him a few minutes afterward. 
 
 Have a regular specified time during each day in 
 which you can pass around among pupils and give 
 needed explanations and assistance. 
 
 To show a pupil that he does not know anything is 
 often a necessary part of the teacher's duty, but it is 
 never his whole duty. 
 
 Don't be discouraged if your work does not appear 
 to be producing great results. " In due time ye shall 
 reap if ye faint not." 
 
 Do not allow pupils to come to you with words to 
 be pronounced, or questions to be answered, while you 
 are busy. 
 
 Begin every recitation with an object in view and 
 a matured plan for the accomplishment of that object. 
 
 Do not stop in the midst of a recitation to reprove a 
 refractory pupil. 
 
 Do not be satisfied with one correction of an error. 
 
 Open the windows during recess and purify the air. 
 
404 SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 Business men often meet and consult. They have 
 exchanges, boards of trade, hold fairs, etc. Teachers 
 who do not pursue a similar line of conduct have them- 
 selves to blame when they fail. 
 
 Supervise the study of pupils. 
 
 Give the last few minutes of the hour to the assign- 
 ment of the lesson. Be judicious as to length of lesson 
 assigned. 
 
 Detecting errors is not correcting them. 
 
 Drill when about three facts have been communi- 
 cated. 
 
 Add something to the text-book at every recitation 
 if possible. 
 
 Be moderate in all things. 
 
 The "thank you's" and "if you please's" of school 
 intercourse are more important than might at first 
 thought appear. 
 
 Do not answer questions in asking them. 
 
 Concentrate the pupils' work on fewer subjects and 
 thus develop the power of continuous work. 
 
 Test the pupil's advancement in an art by calling 
 upon him to practice the art, rather than to tell how it 
 ought to be done. 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPKRIENCED EDUCATORS. 4(1;") 
 
 Hold well to the essential points. Be on guard 
 against diversion from main issues. Know your scheme 
 thoroughly and stick to it. 
 
 Be patient with those who, though they may not do 
 as well as you desire, are yet doing as well as they 
 can. 
 
 Do your work heartily. 
 
 The best method to adopt in teaching any subject is 
 that by which the greatest amount of work can be ac- 
 complished in a given time. 
 
 Education pays — ignorance costs. 
 
 Distinguish between knowledge and skill ; and re- 
 member that skill can be obtained only by practice. 
 
 Always do your very best 
 
 Questions should be varied, logical, be given to 
 pupils in a promiscuous order, be put rapidly, and 
 should not hint the answer. 
 
 As is the teacher, so will be the schooL 
 
 Classify according to scholarship, natural ability, and 
 age. Make reading and arithmetic the basis of your 
 classification. 
 
 We defraud ourselves when we do not rise up to the 
 tun measure of our ability. 
 
40b SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 The pupils rely on themselves when studying and 
 writing. Don't hear a lesson unless it has been well 
 studied. Primary classes may be exempt from this 
 rule. Always assign short lessons. 
 
 Attend to but one thing at a time. 
 
 It is what the child does for himself and by himself, 
 
 under wise instruction, that educates him. 
 
 Endeavor to improve your methods of teaching. 
 
 The most perfect clearness and definiteness must be 
 regarded as indispensable in all stages. 
 
 Fasten every principle by frequent repetition. 
 
 Provide occupation upon parts of the lesson for each 
 member of the class. 
 
 Never attend to extraneous business in school hours. 
 
 Time spent in making your school happy is never 
 thrown away. 
 
 Give instruction frequently in morals and manners. 
 
 When a pupil feels that he has too many studies he 
 is in a bad way. 
 
 The teacher who does not secure from his pupils 
 thoroughly prepared lessons, by compulsion, if need be., 
 has no place in the schoolroom. 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 407 
 
 The learning of arithmetic, grammar, geography, etc., 
 is valuable ; but the influence of none of these can be 
 compared with the acquisition of good morals, business 
 and social habits, bodily and mental. 
 
 Certainty of punishment is more effectual than se- 
 verity. 
 
 Children must have incentives that are not remote. 
 
 Direct attention to the most important things to be 
 noticed. 
 
 The spirit in which a thing is done is more import- 
 ant than the form. 
 
 The highest good of the individual pupil, so far as it 
 is compatible with tne highest good of the whole 
 school, is regarded as fundamental in all discipline. 
 
 The pupil must be made to feel that he has mastered 
 some one thing. 
 
 Lack of interest in study is the result of poor teaching. 
 
 Respect should be taught toward all men, under all 
 
 circumstances. 
 
 It is to make men, not to fill them that we want 
 
 schools. 
 
 Do unto others as ye would that they should do to 
 you. 
 
408 SAVINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 The boy should have an education which, when com- 
 pleted, will make him better prepared to pursue the 
 work for which he is fitted, and which makes him not 
 afraid to do it, thus dignifying labor. 
 
 Always be industrious in the schoolroom yourself. 
 
 If you are not getting the salary you think you de- 
 serve, or if you do not occupy a position which you 
 know your talent deserves, do not slight your work and 
 permit yourself to grow careless. 
 
 Control your school by seating it properly. 
 
 Do not march pupils around the room in getting 
 them to their seats from a recitation when two or three 
 steps will answer the same purpose. 
 
 Be self-possessed. If you find that from hearing a 
 class recite, watching the order of the room, and giv- 
 ing individual attention to pupils you are becoming 
 confused, stop work for a moment until the fog clears 
 away and you can act intelligently. 
 
 Let your position of body in the schoolroom be dig- 
 nified, but not stiff and formal. It is not necessary 
 that the teacher be on his feet continually. 
 
 Avoid awkwardness in managing the body. Some 
 teachers, to the amusement of pupils, are continually 
 stumbling, jostling against pupils, etc. In his move- 
 ments in the schoolroom, as a rule, the teacher should 
 be deliberate and thoughtful. 
 13 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 409 
 
 In the great scramble for life, there is a notion 
 at the present moment of getting hold of as much gen- 
 eral superficial knowledge as you can. That, to my 
 mind, is a fatal mistake. On the other hand, there is a 
 great notion that if you can get through your examina- 
 *ion and "cram up" a subject very well, you are being 
 educated. That, too, is a most fatal mistake. There is 
 nothing which would delight me so much, if I were an 
 examiner, as to baffle all the "cramming" teachers 
 whose pupils came before me. 
 
 It seems to me that one very prominent tendency of 
 
 the competitive system is extremely valuable ; namely, 
 that of securing from the teacher attention to the pro- 
 gress of his pupils. 
 
 Do the best you can for those large boys who are in 
 school but a short portion of each year. 
 
 Authority has a great deal to do through the whole 
 course of school life, but we cannot command attention 
 by simply demanding that it be given. 
 
 Discouragement has blighted the growth of many a 
 promising mind. 
 
 The individuality of a teacher is exhibited in the 
 way that one teacher illustrates a point differently from 
 another — in the way he speaks — in the way he looks — 
 in the way he thinks it may be — in the way in which 
 his questions are conceived — in the impromptu expedi- 
 ents which he devises — in what, in general, is called 
 "his way of doing things." 
 
410 SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 It is a great mistake to think that they (younger 
 boys) should understand all they learn ; for God has 
 ordered that in youth the memory should act vigorous- 
 ly, independent of the understanding — whereas a man 
 cannot usually recollect a thing unless he understands it. 
 
 Always do one thing at a time. Do not pernufc your- 
 self to get confused and out of patience. 
 
 A radical mistake is made if a teacher lean on his 
 authority in the school as the guarantee for attention 
 T iy the scholars. 
 
 Be neat in all your records. Let them be a model 
 for the succeeding teacher. 
 
 Never tell a pupil to do that which you would not 
 wish to do yourself. 
 
 Do not measure the ability of the duller pupils to 
 comprehend a demonstration with that of the older 
 ones. 
 
 A vacillating policy is a sure index of a want of ex- 
 ecutive ability. 
 
 Do not allow your school to become a public nui- 
 sance by insulting travelers, or destroying fences of 
 crops in the vicinity. 
 
 The teacher should avoid set phrases. They come to 
 have no meaning for himself, and they hinder his chil- 
 dren. 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 41] 
 
 The educator of youth does not merely communicate 
 so much instruction from year to year ; he develops 
 the receptive and acquisitive tendencies of mind which 
 are afterwards to play their parts in the intellectual 
 activity of the nation. 
 
 A teacher who neglects moral instruction fails essen- 
 tially in one of the chief duties of his profession. 
 
 Do not attach a specific penalty to a rule, but leave 
 that for circumstances to determine. 
 
 Protect the school property as though it were your 
 own. It will pay. 
 
 Teaching, to be successful, must be adapted to win 
 
 attention. 
 
 Garfield's educational aphorisms : 
 
 School houses are less expensive than rebellions. 
 
 , That man will be a benefactor of his race who shall 
 teach us how to manage rightly the first years of a 
 child's education. 
 
 One-half of the time which is now almost wholly 
 wasted, in district schools, on English grammar, at- 
 tempted at too early an age, would be sufficient to 
 teach our children to love the republic, and to become 
 its loyal and life-long supporters. 
 
 The old necessities have passed away. We now 
 have strong and noble living languages, rich in litera- 
 ture, replete with high and earnest thought, the lan- 
 guage of science, religion and liberty, and yet we bid 
 
412 SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 
 
 our children feed their spirits on the life of the dead 
 ages, instead of the inspiring life and vigor of our own 
 times. I do not object to classical learning — far from 
 it ; but I would not have it exclude the living present. 
 
 Greek is, perhaps, the most perfect instrument of 
 thought ever invented by man, and its literature has 
 never been equaled in purity of style and boldness of 
 expression. 
 
 The graduate would blush were he to mistake the 
 place of a Greek accent, or put the ictus on the second 
 syllable of Eolus ; but the whole circle of the liberalutn 
 artiutn, so pompously referred to in his diploma of 
 graduation, may not have taught him whether the 
 jejunum is a bone, or the humerus an intestine. 
 
 The student should study himself, his relation to so- 
 ciety, to nature and to art ; and above all, in all, and 
 through all these, he should study the relations of him- 
 self, society, nature, and art to God, the author of them 
 all. 
 
 It would be unjust to our people, and dangerous to 
 our institutions, to apply any portion of the revenues of 
 the nation, or of the States, to the support of sectarian 
 schools. 
 
 Here two forces play with all their vast power upon 
 our system of education. The first is that of the local, 
 municipal power, under our State governments. There 
 is the center of responsibility. There is the chief edu- 
 cational power. There can be enforced Luther's great 
 thought of placing on magistrates the duty of educating 
 children. 
 
 The best system of education is that which draws : ,*3 
 chief support from the voluntary effort of citizens, and 
 
SAYINGS OF EXPERIENCED EDUCATORS. 43'd 
 
 from those burdens of taxation which they voluntarily 
 impose upon themselves. 
 
 Next in importance to freedom and justice is popular 
 education, without which neither justice nor freedom 
 can be permanently maintained. 
 
 Use several text-books. Get the views of different 
 authors as you advance. In that way you can plow a 
 broader furrow. I always study in that way. 
 
 The student should first study what he needs most to 
 know ; the order of his needs should be the order of 
 his work. 
 
 This generation is beginning to understand that edu- 
 cation should not be forever divorced from industry ; 
 that the highest results can be reached only when 
 science guides the hand of labor. With what eagerness 
 and alacrity is industry seizing every truth of science 
 and putting it in harness. 
 
 Grecian children were taught to reverence and emu- 
 late the virtues of their ancestors. Our educational 
 forces are so wielded as to teach our children to ad- 
 mire most that which is foreign, and fabulous and dead. 
 
 At present the most valuable gift which can be be- 
 stowed on women is something to do which they can 
 do well and worthily, and thereby maintain themselves. 
 
 Is it of no consequence that we explore the bounda- 
 ries of that wonderful intellectual empire which encloses 
 within its dominion the fate of succeeding generations 
 and of this republic? 
 
 The children of to-day will be the architects of ouf 
 country's destiny in 1900. 
 
MEMORY GEMS. 
 
 FOR PRIMARY WORK. 
 
 Pupils should memorize one of the following gems each day, 
 which should be placed on the blackboard. 
 
 1. We should try to do some good every day. 
 
 2. Better be an hour too early than a minute too late. 
 
 3. Better be alone than in bad company. 
 
 4. Every day in thy life is a leaf in thy history. 
 
 5. Whatever is worth doing at all, is worth doing well. 
 
 6. Slow and steady wins the race. 
 
 7. A merry heart doeth good like a medicine. 
 
 8. Handsome is that handsome does. 
 
 9. Ill habits gather by unseen degrees. 
 
 10. Never leave 'till tomorrow what you can do to-day. 
 
 11. It is better to do well than to say well. 
 
 12. What can't be cured must be endured. 
 
 13. If we would do good, we must be good. 
 
 14. Kind words bring back kind echoes. 
 
 15. Do your best and leave the rest. 
 
 16. Refuse to do a mean action, be it ever so small. 
 
 17. Keep thy tongue from evil 
 
 18. We should be punctual in performing every duty. 
 
 19. It is the second word that makes the quarrel. 
 
 20. Time is precious — do not waste it. 
 
 21. He who does his best does well. 
 
 22. Be kind and affectionate one to another. 
 
 23. Who cannot rule himself can never rule a state. 
 
 414 
 
M1M0RT OEMS. 415 
 
 24. Quarrels require tiro ; both are to blame. 
 
 25. A light heart lives long. 
 
 26. Crosses are ladders leading to Heaven. 
 
 27. What is not right must be wrong. 
 
 28. He overcomes a stout enemy that overcomes his 
 own anger. 
 
 2t>. Every young person is a sower of seed in the field 
 of life. 
 
 30. Let's have heads that think and hearts that beat. 
 
 31. Be ashamed to catch yourself idle. 
 
 32. He giveth the snow like wool. 
 
 33. God helps those that help themselves. 
 
 34. He doeth much who doeth a thing well. 
 
 35. It is well to think well. It is divine to act well. 
 
 36. Action, not speech, proves the man. 
 
 37. Make the truth thine own for truth's own sake. 
 
 38. There is not a moment without some duty. 
 
 39. To he good is the mother of to do good, 
 
 40. Grumblers never work and workers never grumble. 
 
 41. He that is good at making excuses is seldom good 
 at anything else. 
 
 42. We should never trouble others to do for us what 
 we can do for ourselves. 
 
 43. If we do not plant knowledge when young, it will 
 give us no shade when we are old. 
 
 44. Take care of the minutes and the hours will take 
 care of themselves. 
 
 45. If you desire to be happy, be good natured . No 
 one gains anything by being cross and crabbed. 
 
 46. Learn something every day — even though it be but 
 to spell one word. 
 
416 MEMORY GEMS. 
 
 47. We cannot always oblige, but we can always speak 
 obligingly. 
 
 48. Never put off 'till tomorrow what should be done 
 to-day. 
 
 49. The world is an echo that returns 10 each of us what 
 we say. 
 
 50. He is never alone who is accompanied with noble 
 thoughts. 
 
 51. Keep your head and your uearc full of good 
 thoughts, and then bad ones will have no chance to enter. 
 
 52. He only is a well educated boy or girl who has a 
 good determination. 
 
 53. Life is not so short but there is always time for 
 courtesy. 
 
 54. Do not ask another to do what you would not be 
 glad to do under similar circumstances. 
 
 55. You can do more good by being good than in any 
 other way. 
 
 56. Never be cruel to a dumb animal, it cannot tell how 
 
 much it suffers. 
 
 57. Never excuse a wrong action by saying some one 
 else does the same thing; this is no excuse. 
 
 58. Do all the good you can in the world and make as 
 little noise about it as possible. 
 
 59. It is not what a m&njinds that does him good, but 
 what he does. 
 
 60. Drinking water neither makes a man sick, nor in 
 debt, nor his wife a widow. Whisky does all three. 
 
 61. Small faults indulged are little thieves that let in 
 greater. 
 
MEMORY GEMS. 417 
 
 62. Learn all you can here, and God will teach you the 
 rest in Heaven. 
 
 63. What you keep by you you may change and mend, 
 but words once spoken can never be recalled. 
 
 64. If you wish your neighbors to see what God is like 
 you must let them see what He can make you like. 
 
 65. Little enemies and little wounds are not to be de- 
 spised. 
 
 66. We grow like what we think of, so let us think of 
 the good, the true and the beautiful. 
 
 67. The world is so full of a number of things, I am 
 sure we should all be as happy as kings. 
 
 68. Children are magnets drawing age back to youth 
 again. 
 
 69. Children are the to-morrow of society. 
 
 70. To tell a lie is like the cut of a saber; the wound 
 may heal, but the scar will remain. 
 
 71. Kindness is the golden chain by which society is 
 bound together. 
 
 72. It is as easy to draw back a stone thrown with 
 force from the hand as to recall a word once spoken. 
 
 73. Goodness consists not in the outward things we do, 
 but in the inward things we are. To be is the great thing. 
 
 74. Of all the schoolrooms in east or west, the school- 
 room of nature I love the best. 
 
 75. It is ever true that he who does nothing for others, 
 does nothing for himself. 
 
 76. Live for something. 
 
 77. No wrong by wrong is righted. 
 
 78. It matters not how long we live, but how. 
 
418 MEMORY GEMS. 
 
 79. To think kindly of each other is well; to speak 
 kindly of each other is better, but to act kindly to each 
 is best of all. Whether we think, speak or act, let us do it 
 kindly. 
 
 80. We can do more good by being good than in any 
 other way. 
 
 81. Be not simply good, be good for something. 
 
 82. Be loving and you will never want for love; be 
 humble and you will never want for guiding. 
 
 83. Truth is the highest thing a man may keep. 
 
 84. He has but one great fear that fears to do wrong, 
 
 85. Harbor no thought, neither do any act you would 
 be unwilling the whole world should know. 
 
 86. How poor are they that have no patience. 
 
 87. Nothing is more simple than greatness; indeed, to 
 be simple is to be great. 
 
 88. The finest fruit earth holds up to its Maker is a 
 finished man. 
 
 89. We rise in glory as we sink in pride. 
 
 90. If there is any person to whom you feel a dislike, 
 that is the person of whom you ought never to speak. 
 
 91. Most people would succeed if they were not 
 troubled with great ambitions. 
 
 92. He who thinks his place below him will some day 
 find himself below it. 
 
 FOR INTERMEDIATE WORK. 
 
 1. How is character formed? Gradually; just as our 
 mothers used to knit stockings — one stitch at a time. 
 
 2. Lost time is never found again and what we call 
 time enough always proves little enough. 
 
MEMORY GEMS. 419 
 
 3. Our greatest glory is not in never falling, but in ris- 
 ing every time we fall. 
 
 4. I cannot promise to be an Agassiz, or a Sumner, but 
 I do promise to be an honest man. 
 
 5. Faithfulness in little things fits one for heroism when 
 the great trials come. 
 
 6. Who does the best his circumstance allows, does well, 
 acts nobly; angels do no more. 
 
 7. God who made man what he is, would have him im- 
 prove and employ what he has. 
 
 8. You can always discover a true gentleman by his 
 address. 
 
 9. Out of good men choose acquaintances; of acquain- 
 tances, friends. 
 
 10. Few things are impossible to diligence and skill. 
 
 11. No man doth safely rule but he that hath learned 
 gladly to obey. 
 
 12. Live as though life were earnest, and life will be so. 
 
 13. Thanks duly felt and kindly expressed cost little 
 and are of great worth. 
 
 14. It is better to fall short of a high mark than to 
 reach at a low one. 
 
 15. From the lowest depth there is a path to the lof- 
 tiest height. 
 
 16. A clear conscience can bear any trouble. 
 
 17. From labor health, from health contentment 
 springs. 
 
 18. Things don't turn up in this world unless somebody 
 tnrns them up. 
 
 19. I would rather be right than President. 
 
 20. All things come round to him who will but wait. 
 
420 MEMORY GIM8. 
 
 21. Learn the luxury of doing good. 
 
 22. They are never alone who are accompanied by noble 
 thoughts. 
 
 23. A late moon is of use to nobody. 
 
 24. The chains of habit are generally too small to be felt 
 'till they are too strong to be broken. 
 
 25. Method is the very hinge of business, and there is 
 no method without punctuality. 
 
 26. Happiness consists in the enjoyment of little 
 pleasures. 
 
 27. You were made to be kind, boys, generous, mag- 
 nanimous. 
 
 28. Lost yesterday, somewhere between sunrise and 
 sunset, two golden hours, each set with sixty diamond 
 minutes. No rewai'd is oftered, for they are gone forever. 
 
 29. If a man empties his purse into his head, no one 
 can take it away from him. An investment in knowledge 
 always pays the best interest. 
 
 30. Any man may commit a mistake, but none but a 
 fool will continue in it. 
 
 31. There are a thousand different ways to tell a lie, but 
 there is only one way to tell the truth. 
 
 32. A man must become wise at his own expense. 
 
 33. There is some good in everyone and some good 
 everywhere. 
 
 34. If you would make the best use of your time, look 
 after the minutes. 
 
 35. Character is what a man is — the sum total of him- 
 self. 
 
 36. Economy is no disgrace ; it is better living on a lit- 
 tle than out-living a great deal. 
 
SUBJECTS FOR CONVERSATION, «TC. 421 
 
 37. I would rather be beaten ia right, than succeed in 
 wrong. 
 
 38. 'Tis better to talk wisdom in one language than 
 nonsense in five. 
 
 39. He who waits to do a great deal of good at once will 
 never do anything. 
 
 40. Rich gifts wax poor when givers prove unkind. 
 
 41. I fear that man most who fears God least. 
 
 42. Be just in all you say and all you do. 
 
 43. Guard well thy thoughts; our thoughts are heard in 
 Heaven. 
 
 44. One flag, one law, one heart, one land, one nation 
 evermore. 
 
 45. It is not lawful to do evil that good may come. 
 
 46. The mind grows narrow in proportion as the soul 
 grows corrupt. 
 
 47. It is better to wear out than rust out. 
 
 48. Strength of mind is exercise, not rest. 
 
 49. A man may know his own mind, and still not know 
 a great deal. 
 
 50. Toil, I repeat — toil either of the brain, or of the 
 heart, or of the hand, is the only true manhood, the only 
 true nobility. 
 
 SUBJECTS FOR CONVERSATION, ESSAY OR 
 COMPOSITION. 
 
 1. Our last picnic. 
 
 2. Habits of economy. 
 
 3. Gossipers as a class. 
 
 4. The scandal monger. 
 
 5. Order and confusion. 
 
 6. The study of history. 
 
422 SUBJECTS FOR DEBATE, ETC. 
 
 7. The value of system. 
 
 8. What I saw in a dream. 
 
 9. Views from our postoffice. 
 
 10. An incident on a railroad train. 
 
 11. The value of a good reputation 
 
 12. The influence of money. 
 
 13. The evils of society gossip. 
 
 14. The history of a dime [dated 1830]. 
 
 15. The dangers of bad company. 
 
 16. The influence of habits of neatness. 
 
 17. Advantages one may have by traveling. 
 
 18. My impressions of the last fair I attended. 
 
 19. My opinion of [some kind of amusement]. 
 
 20. The influence of Longfellow's poetry. 
 
 21. An impressive sermon I heard. 
 
 22. My first sight of a steamboat, mountain or lake. 
 
 23. A description of a large mill or factory I visited. 
 24-. A certain incident I witnessed on the street. 
 
 25. Changes in this city which I have witnessed. 
 
 SUBJECTS FOR DEBATE OR ORIGINAL. 
 DISCOURSE. 
 
 1. Ought education to be compulsory? 
 
 2. Would a congress of nationsbe desired? 
 
 3. Does climate affect the character of people? 
 
 4. Has the National Government a right to interfere in 
 education? 
 
 5. Will America decay as the great nations of antiquity 
 have done? 
 
 6. Is commerce or agriculture more beneficial to tb« 
 best interests of the nation? 
 
SUBJECTS FOR DEBATE, ETC. 423 
 
 7. Is the unanimity required by juries conducive to the 
 attainments of justice? 
 
 8. Has the discovery of gun powder been beneficial to 
 mankind? 
 
 9. Are great men made by circumstances, or do great 
 men make circumstances? 
 
 10. Would the annexation of Mexico be to the best in- 
 terests of the United States? 
 
 11. Was the career of Napoleon Bonaparte of greater 
 benefit than evil to the world? 
 
 12. Would it not be expedient to elect United States 
 Senators by a popular vote, instead of by legislative vote? 
 
 13. Should the mints of the United States be opened to 
 the free and unlimited coinage of both gold and silver at a 
 specified ratio? 
 
 15. Is the "protective policy" best for American 
 interests? 
 
 16. Is universal suffrage conducive to the greatest pros- 
 perity of the United States? 
 
 17. Is frequency of elections a source of corruption? 
 
 18. Ought there be a national law limiting the amount 
 of a man's wealth? 
 
 19. Is a lawyer justified in defending what he knows to 
 be wrong? 
 
 20. Has the introduction of labor-saving machinery 
 been beneficial to the laboring class? 
 
 21. Has the annexation of the Hawaiian Islands been 'o 
 the best interests of the United States? 
 
 22. Should the United States retain control with a view 
 to future annexation of Cuba, Porto Rico and the Philip- 
 trine Islands? 
 
424 SUBJECTS FOR DEBATE, ETC- 
 
 23. Was the execution of Mary Queen of Scotts 
 justified? 
 
 24. Which was the greater orator, Demosthenes or 
 Cicero — Webster or Clay? 
 
 25. Which is the more despicable character, the hyp- 
 ocrite or the liar? 
 
 26. Has the fear of punishment or the hope of reward 
 the greater influence on human conduct? 
 
 27. Is corporal punishment justifiable? 
 
 28. Was Brutus justified in killing Caesar? 
 
 29. Should emulation be encouraged in education? 
 
 30. Which was the greater poet, [a] Chaucer or Spen- 
 ser? [6] Milton or Homer, [c] Dryden or Pope, [d] Chat- 
 terton or Cowper, [e] Wordsworth or Byron? 
 
 31. Is military or naval renown a fit object of ambition? 
 
 32. Is ambition a vice or a virtue? 
 
 33. Has novel reading a moral tendency? 
 
 34. Is the character of Queen Elizabeth deserving of 
 our admiration? 
 
 35. Is England rising or falling as a nation? 
 
 36. Has nature or education the greater influence in the 
 formation of character? 
 
 37. Which is the more valuable metal, [a] gold or iron, 
 [6] silver or lead? 
 
 38. Is war justifiable in any case? 
 
 39. From which does the mind gain the more knowledge, 
 reading or observation? 
 
 40. Have the gold mines of Spain or the coal mines of 
 England been more beneficial to the world? 
 
SUBJECTS FOR DEBATE, ETC. 425 
 
 41. Which was the greater general [a] Hannibal or Alex- 
 ander, [6] Napoleon or Wellington, [c] Washington or 
 Cornwallis, [t/] Grant or Lee. 
 
 42. Which has done the greater service to truth, phil- 
 osophy or poetry? 
 
 43. Which is the greater civilizer, the statesman or the 
 poet? 
 
 44. Which was the greater writer [a] Dickens or Lytton, 
 [6] Irving or Hawthorne? 
 
 45. Is a classical education essential to an American 
 gentleman? 
 
 46. Are colonies advantageous to the mother country? 
 
 47. Which does the most to produce crime, poverty 
 or wealth? 
 
 48. Are the intellectual faculties of the dark races of 
 mankind essentially inferior to those of the white? 
 
 49. Is eloquence a gift of nature or may it be acquired? 
 
 50. Is genius an innate capacity? 
 
 51. Which produce the greater happiness, the pleasures 
 of hope or of memory? 
 
 52. Is there any ground for believing in the ultimate 
 perfection and universal happiness of the human race? 
 
 53. Is co-operation better adapted to promote the virtue 
 and happiness of mankind than competition? 
 
 54. Does happiness or misery predominate in life? 
 
 55. Could not arbitration be made a substitute for war? 
 
 56. Are public schools to be preferred to private? 
 
 57. Is the system of education pursued at our universi- 
 ties in accordance with the requirements of the age? 
 
 58. Which was the worst monarch, Richard the Third 
 or Charles the Second? 
 
426 SUBJECTS FOB DEBATE, ETO. 
 
 59. Are not the rudiments of individual character dis- 
 cernible in childhood? 
 
 60. Has not the faculty of humor been of essential serv- 
 ice to civilization? 
 
 61. Does national character descend from age to age? 
 
 62. Is it possible that the world will ever again possess 
 a writer as great as Shakespeare? 
 
 63. Is the cheap literature of the age on the whole ben- 
 eficial to general morality? 
 
 64. Should not practice in athletic games form a part of 
 every system of education? 
 
 65. Which is more baneful, skepticism or superstition? 
 
 66. Are there good reasons for supposing that the ruins 
 recently discovered in Central America are of very great 
 antiquity? 
 
 67. Do titles operate beneficially in a community? 
 
 68. Is not intemperance the chief source of crime? 
 
 69. Which is the more happy, a barbarous or a civilized 
 man? 
 
 70. Are brutes endowed with reason? 
 
 71. Which are of the greater importance in education, 
 the classics or mathematics? 
 
 72. Which does the greater injury to society, the 
 miser or the spendthrift? 
 
 73. Is a college education essential to a business man? 
 
 74. Which has been the most destructive to human life, 
 war or intemperance? 
 
 75. Which is the best philosophy, Hegel's or Herbart's? 
 
BPANISH-AMERICAN WAR. 427 
 
 WAR WITH SPAIN. 
 
 Feb. 15 1898, to Aug. 12, 1898. 
 
 CHRONOLOGY OF THE WAR. 
 
 February 15. — Maine blown up in Havana harbor and 268 
 
 American seamen perish. 
 
 February 17. — Court of Inquiry appointed to investigate 
 cause of explosion. 
 
 February 21. — The Inquiry begun at Key West. 
 
 March 7. — A fifty-million-dollar bill for National defence 
 introduced into the Senate and House of Representatives. 
 
 March 8. — Bill passed by tbe house. 
 
 March 9. — Bill passed by the Senate unanimously. 
 
 March 28. — Maine inquiry report sent to Congress. 
 
 April 5. — Consul-General Fitz-hugh Lee recalled from 
 Havana. 
 
 April 10. — Consul-General Lee leaves Cuba. 
 
 April 11. — President McKinley asks Congress for power 
 to intervene in behalf of the oppressed Cubans. 
 
 April 19. — Armed intervention ordered by Congress. 
 
 April 20. — Resolutions signed by the president; ulti- 
 matum sent to Spain. 
 
 April 21. — Minister Woodford leaves Spain and the war 
 begins. 
 
 April 22. — Rear- Admiral Sampson's fleet begins the 
 blockade of Cuba. The gunboat Nashville fires the first 
 shot. 
 
 April 23. — The president calls for 125,000 volunteers. 
 
428 SPANISH-AMERICAN WAB. 
 
 April 25. — Declaration of war by the United States. 
 
 April 27. — Matanzas bombarded. 
 
 May 1. — Commodore George Dewey destroys the Spanish 
 fleet of eighteen vessels in Manila bay without the loss of 
 a man. 
 
 May 1 1 . — Engagement between the forts at Cardenas and 
 the gunboats Wilmington and Hudson and the torpedo boat 
 Winslow. Ensign Bagley killed; the first fatality of the 
 war. 
 
 May 12. — Sampson's fleet bombards San Juan, Port Rico. 
 
 May 19. — Arrival of Admiral Cervera's fleet at Santiago 
 de Cuba. 
 
 May 20. — Commodore Dewey made Rear- Admiral . 
 
 May 24. — The battleship Oregon, Captain Clark com- 
 manding, arrives at Jupiter, Florida, after a voyage of 
 13,000 miles from San Francisco around Cape Horn. 
 
 May 25. — The president issues the second call for troops— 
 75,000. 
 
 May 28. — Commodore Schley "bottles" Cervera's fleet in 
 Santiago harbor. 
 
 June 3. — Lieutenant Hobson sinks the collier Merrimac 
 in the neck of the harbor to prevent Cervera's escape. 
 Hobson and six seamen taken prisoners — the first of the 
 war by Spain. 
 
 June 10. — Six hundred American marines landed at 
 Guantanamo. Invasion of Cuba begins. 
 
 June 11. — Spanish troops seek to drive the marines from 
 their position, but are repulsed. 
 
 June 13. — First expedition leaves for Santiago under the 
 command of Major-General Shafter. 
 
 June 22. — Shaffer's army landed at Baiquiri. 
 
SPANISH-AMERICAN WAR. 429 
 
 June 24. — The Rough Riders under command of Theo- 
 dore Roosevelt have a fierce fight with the Spaniards at 
 Quasina. Sevilla captured by General Chaffee . The battle 
 of Baiquiri. 
 
 July 1-2. — The American army makes a general assult 
 upon the Spanish lines at Santiago, capturing and holding 
 the ememy's works. 
 
 July 3. — Admiral Cervera's attempt to escape from Santi- 
 ago with his fleet, which is destroyed by the American fleet 
 under Commodore Schley. Cervera with thirteen hundred 
 seamen and officers taken prisoners and six hundred killed. 
 The Americans lost but one man. 
 
 July 4. — News of the arrival of the first military expe- 
 dition at Manila. The Cruiser Charleston stopped on the 
 way and captured one of the Ladrone Islands. 
 
 July 6. — Lieutenant Hobson and his six associates ex- 
 changed. Admiral Dewey chases the German cruiser Irene 
 out of Subig bay with the Raleigh and Concord. 
 
 July 10. — Three Spanish gunboats and three transports 
 destroyed at Manzanillo, Cuba, by American gunboats. 
 Santiago bombarded. 
 
 July 14. Santiago de Cuba surrenders. 
 
 July 17. — The American flag raised over Santiago. 
 
 July 20. — Lieutenant Hobson transferred to line officer 
 and made assistant naval constructor. 
 
 July 21. — General Garcia withdraws his forces because 
 the Americans ignored the Cubans in the surrender of 
 Santiago. 
 
 July 22. — Aguinaldo declares a dictatorship and martial 
 law over the Philippines. 
 
430 8PAN1SH-AMERICAN WAR. 
 
 July 23. — The United States gunboats Topeka, Annapolis, 
 Wasp and Leyden, silence Spanish fortifications on Nipe 
 bay, Santiago province. 
 
 July 25. — General Miles lands 3,500 troops at Guanico, 
 Porto Rico. 
 
 July 26. — Spain makes known her desire for peace. 
 
 July 28. — The town and port of Ponce, Porto Rico, sur- 
 renders to the American army and navy without a shot 
 being fired. 
 
 July 30. — The arrival of General Merritt at Manila re- 
 ported. 
 
 July 31. — The Spaniards make a fierce attack on Amer- 
 icans at Malate, near Manila, and are driven back with great 
 slaughter. Spanish attacks on the two following nights 
 were also repulsed with great loss. 
 
 August 2. — Arroyo and Guayama, Porto Rico, sur- 
 renders. 
 
 August 3. — French ambassador, M. Cambon, confers 
 with the president in behalf of Spain. 
 
 August 5. — Spanish forces in Porto Rico ordered not to 
 resist. 
 
 August 6. — American troops advanced in four columns 
 toward San Juan, the capital of Porto Rico. 
 
 August 12. — The protocol which practically ended the 
 war signed by the French ambassador, M. Cambon, acting 
 for the Spanish government, and Secretary of State Day. 
 The president proclaims an armistice pending the drawing 
 up of a treaty of peace, and notifies the naval and army 
 commanders to cease hostilities. The news of peace stops 
 the bombardment of Manzinillo, Cuba. 
 
SPANISH-AMERICAN WAR. 431 
 
 August 13. — News of the treaty of peace not having 
 reached Admiral Dewey, in conjunction with the army under 
 General Merritt, Manila surrenders to the Americans. 
 
 August 29. — Parade of returned warships in New 
 York harbor. 
 
 September 27. — Peace Commissioners, William R. Day, 
 Whitelaw Reid, Cushman K. Davis, William P. Fry and 
 Edward W. White arrived in Paris, where they met a like 
 commission from Madrid to negotiate a treaty of peace. 
 
 December 10. — A Treaty of Peace was signed in Paris. 
 Spain surrenders all title over Cuba and cedes to the United 
 States, Puerto Rico and other islands of the West Indies, 
 the island of Guam in the Ladrones, and the archipelago 
 known as the Philippine Islands, near Asia. The United 
 States pays Spain $20,000,000. 
 
 Note. — By destroying the Spanish fleet in Manila bay May 1st, 
 Commodore Dewey opened hostilities; in the final surrender of 
 the city of Manila Aug. 13 — one hundred and five days later — Ad- 
 miral Dewey closed hostilities. The total cost of the war was 
 very large. To pay this the government had the proceeds of 
 the sale of $200,000,000 three per cent, government bonds sold at 
 par. In addition, the war tax placed upon telegrams, express, 
 freight, proprietary medicines, drafle, checks, bills of exchange, 
 contracts, etc., brings a large revenue. So instead of the war pro- 
 ducing a deficit there is now a surplus, and like all other wars in 
 which this country has been involved, she has emerged richer 
 and stronger, and to-day stands among the first nations of the 
 world in military and naval strength. 
 
QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 1. Define Algebra. 
 
 2. "What is an algebraic expression? 
 
 3. How many kinds of algebraic quantities are there? 
 
 4. (a) What are known quantities? 
 (b) What are unknown quantities? 
 
 5. What is a factor? 
 
 6. (a) What is a simple expression? 
 
 (b) What is a compound expression? 
 
 7. (a) What is a coefficient? 
 
 (6) What is a literal coefficient? 
 
 (c) What is a power? 
 
 (d) What is an exponent? 
 
 8. What is the sign of deduction? 
 
 9. What is the radical sign? 
 
 10. (a) What are positive quantities? 
 (6) What are negative quantities? 
 
 ADDITION. 
 
 11. Give rule for addition of like terms. 
 
 12. For what are brackets used? 
 
 13. Give examples of addition of unlike terms. 
 
 433 
 
434 QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 SUBTRACTION. 
 
 14. Give rule for subtraction of unlike terms. 
 
 MULTIPLICATION. 
 
 15. Give rule for multiplying two simple numbers to- 
 gether. 
 
 DIVISION. 
 
 16. Give rule for division. 
 
 17. Give rule for compound expressions. 
 
 18. What forms of brackets are used? 
 
 19. How may a parenthesis be removed from an alge- 
 braic expression? 
 
 20. How may an algebraic expression be enclosed in a 
 parenthesis? 
 
 21. Give a converse use of factors. 
 
 22. Give law of signs in addition, subtraction, multipli- 
 cation and division. 
 
 23. Give law of coefficients and exponents in multipli- 
 cation. 
 
 24. Give formula for the square of a binomial. 
 
 25. Give formula for the product of the sum and dif- 
 ference of two quantities. 
 
 26. , Give law of coefficients and exponents in division. 
 
 27. Prove that any quantity having a negative exponent 
 is equal to the reciprocal of that quantity with an equal 
 positive exponent. 
 
QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA, 435 
 
 28. (a) « 3 -|-& 3 is divisible by what? Explain. 
 
 (b) a 3 — b 3 is divisible by what? Explain. 
 
 (c) a 4 — h* is divisible by what? Explain. 
 
 (d) a 10 -\- b 10 is divisible by what? Explain. 
 
 29. What is an equation? 
 
 SO. What is meant by the reduction or solution of an 
 equation? 
 
 31. In how many ways may a simultaneous equation be 
 eliminated ? 
 
 32. (o) What is a power? 
 (b) What is a root? 
 
 33. (a) How is evolution indicated? 
 (b) What is a surd? 
 
 34. Give a Binomial Formula. 
 
 35. Expand by Binomial Theorem: 
 
 (a) (a+i) 5 
 
 36. Expand by Binomial Theorem: 
 («) (2-2)' 
 
 
 (6) (a* -f &")*. 
 
 37. 
 
 Give formula for factoring. 
 
 38. 
 
 Factor 
 
 
 (a) 1 — 343x s . 
 
 
 (6) (a +6)*— 1. 
 
 
 (c) 8x 3 — (x — y) 3 
 
 
 (d) x 2 + a 2 + 2ax 
 
36 
 
 
 QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 39. 
 
 Factor 
 
 
 
 
 
 (a) 
 
 x 2 — 4y 2 4- x — 2y. 
 
 
 
 (*> 
 
 x*y — x z y 3 — x 3 y 2 -j- xt/* 
 
 
 
 («> 
 
 a 12 — & 12 . 
 
 
 
 ('0 
 
 Sx s j/ 4- 52»3/ + 60y 
 
 40. 
 
 Factor 
 
 
 
 
 
 («) 
 
 3x 2 — 19x — 14. 
 
 
 
 P) 
 
 36a; 2 — 256*. 
 
 
 
 («) 
 
 «2 _|_ a — 20. 
 
 41. 
 
 Factor. 
 
 
 
 
 
 («) 
 
 4x m — 12x n 4- 9. 
 
 
 
 (6) 
 
 ^> 2 — z 2 — 4z — 4. 
 
 42. Find the H. C. F. and L. C. M. of 
 
 (a) x 2 4- 4x + 4 and x 2 4- 5x 4- 6. 
 (ft) (f 2 4- ah and aft 4- ^ 2> 
 
 43. Find the H. C. F. of 
 
 4x 3 — 3x 2 — 24x — 9 and 8x 3 — 2x 2 — 53x — 39 
 
 44. What is the G. C. D. of 
 
 9 x s _ 7358 4- 8x 2 4- 2x — 4 and 
 6x* — 7 x 3 — 10x 2 4- 5x 4- 2. 
 
 45. Reduce to its lowest terms: 
 
 x* — x 3 — x 4- 1 
 (a) 
 
 (b) 
 
 (c) 7 X 3__ i8x 2 4- 6x4-5 
 
 24aW 
 
 36a 'x- 
 
 X*- 
 
 - x 3 — x 2 4- 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 3z 3 
 
 - 13x 2 4- 
 
 23x 
 
 — 
 
 21 
 
 15x ; 
 
 * _ 38x 2 - 
 £s + 3^ 2 _ 
 
 - 2x 
 -4x 
 
 4 
 
 21 
 
QUESTIONS OX ALGEBRA. 437 
 
 46. Solve 
 
 (a) 2(x— 4) — x? + x — 20 = 4x 2 — (5x + 3) 
 
 (x— 4) + 64. 
 (ft) x- [3+ jx — (3 + sg)}] =5. 
 47- Simultaneous equations involving three unknown 
 quantities. 
 
 6a+ 2y — 5* =±13 ..... (1) 
 3x+ 3y — 2a = 13 .... (2) 
 7x + 5y — 3a = 26 . . . . (3) 
 48. Solve 
 
 x y 
 
 . (;> 
 
 10 6 „ 
 
 —+-=7 . . 
 x y 
 
 . . (2). 
 
 49. How reduce radicals to ther simplest form? 
 
 50. How reduce a rational quantity to a radical? 
 
 51. How may radicals of different degrees be reduced 
 to a common radical index? 
 
 52. Give method of addition and subtraction of radicals. 
 
 53. Give method of multiplying and dividing radicals. 
 
 54. How may a radical sign be removed? 
 
 55. What is meant by the root of an equation? 
 
 56. Simplify — 
 
 1/8, i/27, l/50, l/32, i/54a6 s 
 57. Simplify— 
 
 (a) |/(J» _ a ») ( a _ h). 
 
438 QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 (6) 2. 
 
 (c) 
 
 slf- 
 
 1 (28 
 2\T' 
 
 58. "Write the square root of the following; 
 
 (a) 9x 2 — 42xy 4- 49?/ 2 . 
 
 (b) 25x 2 a 2 — 12x a 3 -f 16.x* + 4a* — 24x s a. 
 
 ( C ) 24+ 1 -¥-^ + ^-^. 
 a,** 2/ y a; 
 
 59. Write the cube root of the following: 
 8x 3 — 36x 2 y + 54xj/ 2 — 27y s . 
 
 60. Multiply 3x-£ 4- x 4- 2x% by x* — 2. 
 
 61 . Divide 16a" 3 — 6«" 2 + 0a" 1 + 6 by 1 + 2a~\ 
 
 62. The fore wheel of a carriage is a feet, and the hind 
 wheel is b feet in circumference. Find the distance passed 
 over when the fore wheel has made c revolutions more than 
 the hind wheel. 
 
 63. The perimiter of a rectangle is 400 feet, the differ- 
 ence between the length and breadth is 40 feet. Find the 
 area. 
 
 64:. A square pond is sixty feet on a side. Change it 
 into a circular one and use the same fence as before. What 
 is the radius? 
 
 65. Find two numbers such that the smaller divided by 
 5 
 the greater gives — , and the greater divided by the smaller 
 
 gives 2 for a quotient and 5 for a remainder. 
 What are the numbers? 
 
QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 439 
 
 66. The sides of a right triangle are 15 and 18 feet. 
 The hypotenuse of a similar triangle is 20 feet. Find its 
 sides. 
 
 67. The sum of two numbers is 420 and their sum is 
 to the first as 7 :4. Find the numbers. 
 
 68. Find two numbers whose sum and difference are as 
 5:1, and their sum and product are 5:8. 
 
 69. A man has two horses and a saddle which are worth 
 $150. If he puts the saddle on the first horse, it is worth 
 twice the other; but, if he puts the saddle on the second 
 horse, he is still worth $300 less than the other. What is 
 each horse worth? 
 
 70. A is twice as old as B, and 4 years older than C. 
 In 4 years their combined ages will be 100 years. Find (7s 
 age. 
 
 71. A certain number is expressed by two digits. The 
 difference is 3, and the units digit is to the tens as 5 is to 
 2. Find the number. 
 
 72. A boat sails 20 miles down a river and back in 8 
 hours. It takes as long to sail 3 miles up the river as 5 
 miles down. Find the time to sail the 20 miles each way. 
 
 73. Find two numbers such that the first added to 4 
 times the second equals 29; the second added to 6 times the 
 first is 36. 
 
 74. The circumference of the fore wheel of a carriage 
 is a feet; of the hind wheel b feet. Whatdistance is passed 
 over when the fore wheel has made n more revolutions than 
 the hind one? 
 
440 QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 75. At what time between 2 and 3 o'clock are the hands 
 of a clock at right angles? 
 
 76. Find two numbers which produce the same result, 7, 
 whether one be subtracted from the other, or the latter be 
 divided by the former. 
 
 77. Find two consecutive numbers the difference of 
 
 whose squares is 51. 
 
 78. When are the hour and minute hands of a clock 
 together between 10 and 11 o'clock? 
 
 79. A is thrice as old as B. Seven years ago A was 4 
 times as old as B. Find their ages now. 
 
 80. A colonel has his regiment in a solid column. If 
 there were 2 ranks less, each would have 10 more. If there 
 were three ranks more, each rank would have 10 men less. 
 Find the number in the regiment. 
 
 8 1 . The diameter of a globe is 7 in. Find the diameter 
 of a globe whose volume is 3 times that of the first. 
 
 82. A grocer buys 15 lbs. of figs and 28 lbs. of currants 
 for $2.60; by selling the figs at a loss of 10 per cent., and 
 the currants at a gain of 30 per cent., be clears 30 cents 
 on his outlay; how much per pound did he pay for each? 
 
 83. Two persons, A and B, start at same time from 
 two places, c miles apart, and walk in the same direction. 
 A travels at the rate of d miles an hour, and B at the rate 
 of e miles ; how far will A have walked before he overtakes 
 B1 
 
 84. A train traveled a certain distance at a uniform rate. 
 Had the speed been 6 miles an hour more, the journey 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 441 
 
 would have occupied 4 hours less; and had the speed been 
 6 miles an hour less, the journey would have occupied 6 
 hours more. Find the distance. 
 
 85. A person invested $3,770, partly in 3 per cent 
 Bonds at $102, and partly in Railway Stock at $84, which 
 pays a dividend of 4£ per cent. ; if his income from these 
 investments is $136.25 per annum, what sum is invested in 
 each? 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 1. Algebra is that branch of Mathematics in which the 
 operations are indicated by signs and the quantities are rep- 
 resented by letters. 
 
 2. An Algebraic expression is a collection of symbols; 
 it may consist of one or more terms, which are the parts 
 separated from each other by the signs -f- and — , thus: 
 4a-\-3b—Gc—x+4y. 
 
 Note. — When no sign precedes the term the sign -f- is under- 
 stood. 
 
 3. Two kinds — known and unknown. 
 
442 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 4> (a) Known quantities are those whose values are 
 given, and are represented by the leading letters of the 
 alphabet. 
 
 (6) Unknown qantities are those whose values are 
 to be determined, and are represented by the final letters of 
 the alphabet. 
 
 5. Each of the quantities multiplied together to form 
 a product is called a factor, — thus 5, a, and o are factors 
 of bob. 
 
 6. (a) A simple expression consists of one term, as 
 5 a. 
 
 (6) A compound expression consists of two or more 
 terms. 
 
 Note. — Simple expressions are frequently termed monomials 
 and compound expressions polynomials. 
 
 A Compound expression consists of two or more terms. 
 
 Compound expressions are sometimes termed a binomial, as 4a — 
 26 or a trinomial as a-\-b-\-2c. 
 
 7. (a) A coefficient is the numerical value of a quan- 
 tity or expression. 
 
 (6) A literal coefficient is a coefficient which is not 
 merely numerical. 
 
 Note. — When a coefficient is unity, it is usually omitted, and we 
 write simply a instead of 1 a. 
 
 (c) A power of a quantity is the product obtained 
 by repeating that quantity any number of times as a factor, 
 and is expressed by writing the number of factors to the 
 right of the quantity and above it. 
 
 a X a is called the second power of a and is written a*. 
 
 a X a X o is called the third power of a and is written a 3 , etc. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 443 
 
 (d) An exponent is the number which expresses 
 the power of any quantity, thus 3, 4 and 5 are respectively 
 the exponents of a in a 3 , a* and a 5 . 
 
 8. Sign of deduction is read therefore or hence. 
 
 Note.— Fractional coefficients, which are greater than unity, are 
 
 usually kept in form of improper fractions. Ex. — If a=2, x=K, 
 
 13 13 13 
 
 g=5, find value of — a z z. Here — axz = ~ X 2 X 6 X 5, which 
 
 equals 78. 
 
 2ax=2 X 2 X6 = 24 
 
 x" = 6 2 = 36. 
 
 i a * = 72 4 = jXl6 = 4. 
 
 4 4 4 
 
 Note. — If one factor of a product is equal to 0, the product 
 must be equal to 0, whatever values the other factors may have. — Ex. 
 .r=0, then ab 3 xy 2 =0. 
 
 9. The symbol j/, used in connection with roots, — 
 thus, if a=8, k=9. Example: 
 
 3 l(*!\ _ 3 l[2*\ _H 
 
 If d = 9, c = 2. 
 
 Vd° = i/9» = 9. 
 If c = 2, x = 5. 
 
 \\4cx 3 ) \U X 2 X 125/ 
 \|1000 10' 
 
 Note.— If a = 2, b = 3, c = 1, d = 0, 
 then 3a — 46 -f- 6 c -4- 5c? = because one of the factors is 0. 
 
444 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 2a 2 + 36 3 — 4 c 4 , 
 
 8 + 81 - 4 = 85. 
 
 10. (a) Expressions having the sign plus -f- are posi- 
 itive quantities. 
 
 (6) Expressions having the sign minus are the 
 negative quantities. 
 
 11. Rule I. The sum of a number of like terms is a 
 like term. 
 
 Rule II. If all the terms are positive, add the 
 coefficients. Ex. 3 a-f-2 o=5a. 
 
 Rule III. If all terms are negative, add the co- 
 efficients numerically and prefix the minus sign to the sum. 
 Ex.— 3x— §x=— 8x. 
 
 Rule IV. If the terms are not all of the same 
 sign, add together separately the coefficients of all the posi- 
 tive terms and the coefficients of all the negative terms; the 
 difference of these two results, preceded by the sign of the 
 greater, will give the coefficient of the sum required. Ex. 
 17x— 8x=9x. 
 
 12. Brackets ( ) are used to indicate that the terms en- 
 closed within them are to be considered as one quantity. 
 
 Ex. a -f (6 -f c) = a + 6 -\- c. 
 Ex. a — (6 -f- c) = a — b — c. 
 
 13. 3a — 36+ 2c 
 2a + 36 — d 
 
 —4a + 26 -\-_e 
 
 a -j- 2c — d -f- e. 
 
 Note. — In Addition and Subtraction, Multiplication and Divis- 
 ion, it is more convenient to arrange all the expressions according 
 to the different powers of the same letter. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 445 
 
 14. Rule — .Change the sign of every term in the ex- 
 pression to be subtracted, and add it to the other expres- 
 sion. Ex. — Subtract 3 a — 2 b — c from 4 a — 3 b-\-h c. 
 
 4a — 36 -\- 5c 
 — 3a -\- 2b -\- c 
 a — b -\- 6c. 
 
 15. Rule — .Multiply together the coefficients and prefix 
 their product to the product of the different letters, giving 
 to each letter an index equal to the sum of the indices of 
 that letter in the separate factors. Ex. — The product of 
 £c 2 X.«' 3 X aj 8 =x 13 . 
 
 The product of three or more expressions is called the 
 continued product. 
 
 16. The exponent of each letter in the quotient is ob- 
 tained by subtracting the exponent of that letter in the 
 divisor from that in the dividend. To the result obtained 
 prefix with its proper sign the quotient of the coefficient of 
 the dividend by that of the divisor. 
 
 Ex.— Divide 45a 6 6 2 x 4 by — 9a 3 bx*. 
 The quotient equals ( — 5) x a 6-3 b 2 ' 1 x i_2 or — 5a s ox a . 
 
 17. (1) Arrange divisor and dividend according to the 
 ascending or descending power of some letter. 
 
 (2) Divide the term on the left of the dividend by 
 the term on the left of the divisor and put the result in the 
 quotient. 
 
 (3) Multiply the whole divisor by this quotient 
 and put the product under the dividend. 
 
 (4) Subtract and bring down from the dividend as 
 many terms as may be necessary. Repeat these operations 
 till all the terms from the dividend are brought down. 
 
446 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 Ex.— Divide x z + llx + 30 by x + 6 
 x 2 4. Hx -|- 30 \x+ 6 
 a?* -f- 6a- \t> -}- 5 
 
 5x+ 30 
 
 bx 4- 30 
 
 18. Those most common are { }, [ ] and the vinculum 
 which are to be drawn over the symbols to be connected, 
 thus, a — 6 + c is the same as a — (6 + c) hence a — 6 -\- c 
 = a — 6 — c. 
 
 19. When preceded by the plus sign a parenthesis may 
 be removed and the enclosed terms written with proper 
 signs, but when preceded by the sign minus, the signs of 
 all the enclosed terms must be changed. 
 
 20. Any number of terms with their proper signs may 
 be enclosed by a parenthesis and the plus sign written be- 
 fore the whole, or the minus sign may be written before the 
 whole, provided that all the signs of the given terms be 
 changed. 
 
 21. The difference of two squares is equally useful in 
 enabling us to write at once the product of the sum and 
 difference of two quantities. 
 
 ' Ex.— Multiply 2a 4- 36 — c by 2a — 3b + c. 
 Arrange expressions thus, 2a -f (36 — c) and 2a — (36 — c). 
 Hence the product equals 
 
 {2a + (36 — c)} |2a — (36 — c) \ =(2a) 2 — (36 — c)» 
 
 =4a 2 — (96 2 — 66c + c 8 ) = 4a 8 — 96 2 -f 66c — c s . 
 
 22. In addition add like signs; in subtraction, unlike 
 signs. In subtracting assume the signs of the subtrahend 
 to be changed, and then add or subtract. In multiplying, 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 447 
 
 when the two factors have like signs the product is positive, 
 when the factors have unlike signs, the product is negative. 
 Note. — Same rule holds in Division. 
 
 23. In multiplication the exponents are added, the co- 
 efficients are multiplied. 
 
 24. The square of the first term plus twice the product 
 of the first by the second, plus the square of the second if 
 both terms are positive, or minus twice the product of the 
 first by the second if one term is minus. 
 
 Ex. (a + bf = a 2 + 2ab + 6 2 
 (a— b) 2 = a 8 — 2a6+ b\ 
 
 25. The product of the sum and difference of two quan- 
 tities is equal to the difference of their squares. 
 
 26. The coefficient of the quotient is found by dividing 
 the coefficient of the dividend by that of the divisor. 
 
 The exponent of any letter in the quotient is found by 
 subtracting the exponent of this letter in the divisor from 
 its exponent in the dividend. 
 
 27. Ex. - 1 = - a ^ =a 5-7 = a -. 
 
 a' or a' 
 
 Therefore a -2 = — . 
 
 a 2 
 
 Note. — Any factor may be transferred from one term of a frac- 
 tion to the other, if, at the same time, the sign of its exponent be 
 changed. 
 
 28. (a) By a-f- b. The sum of two equal odd powers 
 is divisible by the sum of the quantities. 
 
 (6) By a — b and a-f- 6. The difference of equal 
 
448 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 even powers is divisible by both the sum and the difference 
 of the quantities. 
 
 (c) By a — ft and by a-\-b. The difference of two 
 equal even powers is divisible by both the sum aud the dif- 
 ference of the quantities. 
 
 (d) By a 2 -\-b z . The sum of two equal even powers 
 can not be factored unless the exponent is composed of the 
 factor 2 or an odd number, in which case it is divisible by 
 the sum of the squares of the quantities. 
 
 Note. — Even powers of 2 can not be factored. Odd powers of 2 
 can be. 
 
 29. An equation is an expression of equality between 
 two quantities. 
 
 30. Finding the value of the unknown quantity. 
 
 31. In three ways; by addition, subtraction, comparison 
 and by substitution. 
 
 32. (a) A power is the product obtained by taking a 
 quantity several times as a factor. 
 
 (b) A root is the quantity repeated to produce a 
 power. 
 
 33. (a) By the radical sign -j/. 
 
 (b) A surd is the indicated root of an imperfect 
 
 power. 
 
 / 3? 2 v \ 
 
 34. In the example ( — + — J use (a -|- 6) 4 then expand 
 
 a 4 + 4a*b + 6a 2 6 2 + 4ab 3 -f b\ 
 
 « (::i)?+<f)'(f)+«(?)'(f)'+ 
 
 *(f)(?Hif)- 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 449 
 
 Further expanded 
 
 x 8 x 6 y . 2x 4 y 2 lGx'y 3 16y 4 
 16 + T + 3 + 27 + ~8T' 
 
 35. (a) (a+&) B =a + 5a 1 &+10a s &*+10a s & 3 +5a&*+&^ 
 (6) (a+Z>) 6 =a 6 +6a 6 &4-15a 4 6 8 
 
 + 20a'6 3 + 15a 2 6 4 + 6ab*+ b 6 . 
 
 36. (a) By substituting = a-f- &• 
 
 3/ x 
 
 then 
 
 39. 
 
 a 8 — 3a 2 6 + 3a&» + 6 8 , 
 x s 3x 2 y . 3xy 8 y 8 
 
 y 3 y 8 x yx* x 3 
 (b) (a* + 6")* = a* -f 6*, 
 
 then a 4 * -f 4a 3 *& + 6a to 6«" + 4a* r c*'+ ft*. 
 
 37. x* - y> = (x 8 - y 2 ) (x 2 + y 8 ), 
 
 X 2 _ y % _ (3, _|_ ^) (J,. ^ 
 
 * 3 + y % = ( x + 2/) (*" — xy + y 8 )f 
 
 x 5 — y 5 = (x — y) (x* + x 8 y + a; 2 / + ay 8 + y'), 
 
 X h _|_ ^5 _ (3. _|_ y ) ^4 _ 3.8^ _|_ ^.2^2 _ Xy i _|_ y 4^ 
 
 x 6 -)- y 6 = (a; + y) (x 8 — » 4 y -f- x 3 y 8 — x 8 y 3 -f- xy* — y 8 ). 
 
 38. 
 
 (a) 
 
 (1 - 7x) (1 - 7x) (1 — 7x), 
 
 (6) 
 
 (a + 6) (a 9 + 2a6+6 2 )— 1, 
 
 (c) 
 
 (x + y) (7x* — 4xy + y 8 ), 
 
 (<*) 
 
 (x + a) (x 4- a)— y. 
 
 (a) 
 
 x4-2y-l. 
 
 (6) 
 
 *y + y) — y). 
 
 (c) 
 
 (a 8 4- a& 4- 6 2 ) (a 2 — a6 4- 6«), 
 
 (d) |4y(£ fl3y4-15), 
 
 4y(2x4-3)(» + 5). 
 
450 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 40. (a) (3a + 2) (.x - 7). 
 
 (b) (6x — 56 2 ) (6x -f 56 2 ). 
 
 (c) (a -4) (a + 5). 
 
 41. (a) (2x» — 3) (2x n — 3). 
 
 (J) p 2 _( 2 2 ± 4z ± 4) =p -(z -4- 2) [> + (z + 2)]. 
 
 42. (a) x + 2 = H. C. T. 
 
 (x + 2) 2 (x + 3) = X. 6 T . JJf. 
 (b) a + b =H. C. T. 
 
 ab (a+b) = L. C. M. 
 
 43. 8x 3 — 2x 2 — 53x — 39 1 4x 3 — 3x 2 — 24x — 9 
 
 8x 3 — 6x 2 — 48x— 18 2 
 
 4x 2 — 5x — 21 
 
 4x 3 — 3x 2 — 24x — 9 |4x 2 — 5x — 21 
 4as 3 — 5x 2 — 21x x 
 
 2x 2 — 3x — 9 
 4x* — 5x — 21 |2x s — 3x — 9 
 
 4x 8 - 
 
 ■ 6x — 
 
 X 
 
 18 
 -3 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 2x 8 - 
 
 ■ 3x — 
 
 "9| 
 
 x — 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 a 
 
 T. 
 
 2x 8 - 
 
 ■ 6x 
 
 
 |2x 
 
 + 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 3x- 
 
 -9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3x- 
 
 -9. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 44. 3x a + x — 2 = #. C. D. 
 
 Notk. —Arrange the letters according to some power of x. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 45 \ 
 
 x* — X 3 — 05+1 X 2 4- x 4- 4 
 45. (a) — fl— = —f -V— or x + 1, 
 
 (6) Dividing the numerator and denominator by 
 3x — 7, we obtain the quotients 
 
 x 9 _ 2.c 4 3 and 5x 2 — x — 3, 
 thus 
 
 3x 3 — 13x 2 4-23x— 21 _ (3x— 7) (x 2 — 2x4-3) _ x 2 — 2x 4- 3 , 
 15x 3 — 38x 2 — 2x421~(3x— 7) (5x 2 — x— 3)~5x 2 — x— 3' 
 
 x 3 4 3x 2 — 4x 
 (c) 7x 3 — 18x 2 4 6x + 5' 
 
 The numerator = x (x 2 4- 3x — 4) = x (x 4 4) (x — 1). 
 Of the factors the only one which can be a common divisor 
 is x — 1. Hence, arranging the denomintor, 
 
 x(x4 4) (x — 1) 
 
 the li 
 
 •action 
 
 ~ 1x*(x — l)—llx(x—l) 
 
 -5(x — 1) ~ 
 
 
 
 x (x 4- 4) (x — 1) 
 
 x (x 4 4) 
 
 
 (x — 1) (7x 2 — llx — 5) 
 
 ~ 7x 2 — llx— 5 
 
 
 (<*) 
 
 24a 3 c 2 x 3 2c 2 x 
 36a 5 x 2 " 3a 2 ' 
 
 
 46. («) 2 (x — 4) — x 2 4- x — 20 = 4x 2 — (5x -f 3) 
 ( x _ 4) 4 64 
 2x — 8 — x 2 4. x — 20 = 4x» — 
 5x s — 17x — 12 4- 64, 
 20x = 80 
 x = 4, 
 (6) Removing parenthesis x = 5. 
 
 (c) a — 26 — [4a — 66 — |3a — c-\- (5a — 26 
 3a_ c4-26)}] =. 
 
452 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 Removing the brackets one by one, we have a — 26 — 
 |"4a— 66 — -J3«— c-f (5a — 26 — 3a + c — 26)}1 = a — 
 2b —Ua — 6b — -J3a— c + 5a— 26 — 3a 4- c — 26}] = a — 
 26 — l~4a — 66 — 3a + c —5a + 26 -f 3a — c + 2&] = a — 
 2b — 4a + 66 + 3a — c -f 5a — 26 — 3a + c — 26 = 2a, 
 by collecting like terms. 
 
 47. 6*4-2?/ — 5* = 13 . . . . (1) 
 3x+ 3y — 2z = 13 . . . . (2) 
 1x + by — 3z = 26 . . . . (3) 
 Choose y as the unknown to be eliminated. 
 Multiply (1) by 3 and (2) by 2. 
 
 18x+6t/ — 15« = 39, 
 6<k+ 6y — 4s = 26; 
 subtracting, 12x — llz = 13 .... (4) 
 
 Again, multiply (1) by 5 and (3) by 2. 
 
 30x -f lOy — 2bz = 65, 
 14x + 10y — 6s = 52; 
 subtracting 16x — 19z = 13 .... (5) 
 
 Multiply (4) by 4 and (5) by 3. 
 
 48a; _ Uz = 52, 
 48x — 57« = 39 ; 
 
 subtracting 
 
 1 
 
 3z =13; 
 
 z =1,1 
 
 
 and from (4) 
 
 
 x = 2, L 
 
 
 from (1) 
 
 
 2/ =3, J 
 
 
 48. Solve - — - = 
 x y 
 
 1 
 
 
 (l) 
 
 10 6 _ 
 
 x y 
 
 = 7 
 
 . . : 
 
 • (2) 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 453 
 
 Multiply (1) by 2 
 
 and (2) by 3 
 
 : thus; 
 
 
 16 
 
 18 _ 
 
 2, 
 
 
 X 
 
 y 
 
 **) 
 
 
 30 
 
 X 
 
 18 _ 
 
 y 
 
 21; 
 
 adding, 
 
 46 
 
 X 
 
 23; 
 
 
 multiplying across, 46 = 23a;, 
 .-. x= 2; 
 and by substituting in (1), y = 3. 
 
 4t>. Resolve the quantity under the radical sign into 
 factors, one of which shall be a perfect power of the degree 
 of the radical. Determine the root of that factor 
 
 SUPPLEMENT No. 1.— A. 
 
 52. (a) Ex. The sum of 3l/2 and 5 i/2 equals 3]/ 2 
 
 -f 5y 2 = 8i/2. 
 
 Note. — Similar quantities can be added. 
 (b) The sum of 2)3 and5l/7 = 2i/3 + 5l/7 
 
 Note. — Dissimilar quantities can not be collected into one sum; 
 these expressions can only be added by placing the sign of addi- 
 tion between them. 
 
 (a) The difference between bV 2 and 3V 2 is 2 1 j 
 
 (5i/2 — 3i 2 = 2i/2). 
 
 (ft) The difference between hVb and 3;/a is 5 1/6 
 — 3l/a. 
 
454 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 SUPPLEMENT No. 2 B. 
 
 53. (a) Ex. — Since \/ab = ]/a X V^b, therefore, 
 l/a X V~b — Vab, 
 
 (b) The product of 2 i/li and 3 l/2 is 
 2i/l4x3i/2 = 6i/28 = 6i/ix 7=6x2 l/7=12i/7. 
 
 (a) Ex.— 8i/72 divided by 2i/§ 
 
 _ 8t/72 
 2i/6 
 
 [2 8 172 _ 
 6 =2\6 " 
 
 4i/l2=4i/4x3=8i/3. 
 
 Note. — When the fraction is of the form — 7= if we multiply 
 terms by Vb, the denominator will become rational. Thus, 
 
 a _ ay^Vb __ aVb 
 Vb VbxVb h 
 
 Since the sum of two quantities multiplied by their difference is 
 equal to the difference of their squares, if the fraction is of the 
 form 7 ~> and we multiply both terms by b—Vc, the denomi- 
 nator will be_ made rational, since it will be 6 8 — c ; thus, 
 _a^_ x b =zJ l± __ ab-aVc and lace it before the radical sign 
 
 as a coefficient to the other factor under the sign. 
 
 50 Involve it to the same power as th« required index 
 and write the result under the corresponding radical sign. 
 
 51. Reduce the indices to a common denominator. Per- 
 form upon the quantities the operations represented by the 
 numerators (involution) and indicate the operations signified 
 by the denominator (evolution). 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AIGEBRA. 
 
 455 
 
 52. Reduce each radical to its simplest form. If the 
 resulting radicals are similar, add or subtract the coefficients, 
 as the case may be, and to the result annex the common 
 radical, if dissimilar, indicate the addition or subtraction 
 by the proper signs. — Example. (See Sup. No. 2, Page A.) 
 
 53. If necessary, reduce the given radicals to a com- 
 mon radical index. Multiply or divide, as the case may be, 
 the radical parts, and write the results under the common 
 radical sign. — See Sup. No. 2 for Ex., Page B. 
 
 54. Involve the radical quantity to a power correspond- 
 ing to the radical index. 
 
 55. Such a value as when substituted for the unknown 
 quantity will satisfy the equation. 
 
 56. V 2 • 2 • 2 = l/4 • 2 = 2 i/2 
 l/3 • 3 • 3 = 3 l/3. 
 1/2-5-5 = 5 j/2. 
 l/2 • 2 • 2 • 2 • 2 = l/2 X 16 = 4 l/2. 
 
 57. 
 
 58. 
 
 1/2 
 
 •3-3-3a-6-6-6 = 36l/6a6. 
 
 (a) 
 
 a — b l/a -J- &• 
 
 (b) 
 
 2l/l0"x'. 
 
 (c) 
 
 ^17 = 2 X £X £1/7 or £l/7. 
 
 (a) 
 
 9 x 2 — 42 xy + 49 y 2 
 
 
 9 x 2 — 42 xy + 49 if | 3 x — 7 y. 
 
 
 9x 8 
 
 6x — 7 y 
 
 — 42 xy + 49 y 2 
 
 — 42 xy + 49 y 2 . 
 
 (6) 25x 2 a 2 — 12xa 3 +16x 4 + 4a 4 — 24x 3 a. 
 
456 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 Arrange in descending powers of x. 
 16 x 4 — 24 x 3 a-f25 x 2 a 2 — 12 xa 3 4-4 a 4 [ 4 x 2 — 3 xo + 2 a 8 
 16 x 1 
 
 8 .,-2_ 3 xa _24x 3 a4-25 x 2 a* 
 
 — 24x s «- 
 
 8x 2 — 6xa+2« 2 
 
 9 x 2 a 2 
 
 16x 2 a 2 — 12xa 3 4-4a* 
 16 x 2 a 8 — 12 xa. 3 4- 4 a 4 . 
 
 w 2* + ^ 
 
 8x x 2 _ 32 y 
 
 o 
 
 2/ 2/ 
 
 x* 
 Arrange the expression in descending powers of y 
 
 4y 
 
 16 y 2 32 # 
 x» 
 
 16 y« 
 
 x 
 
 24 1- — 
 
 y y* 
 
 4+5 
 x y 
 
 8y 
 
 ^_4 
 x 
 
 -32y 
 
 x 
 -32y 
 
 x 
 
 24 
 16 
 
 x 
 
 8 + - 
 
 y 
 
 8x x 2 
 1 i 
 
 y 2/ 
 
 3/ 2/ 2 
 
 Here the second term in the root, — 4, arises from division 
 
 QO y ft if x 
 
 of a by -^ and the third term, - > arises from division 
 
 x - 8 y 
 
 of8by^; thns8-^=8 X |- = -- 
 J a; ' x ~ 8y y 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 457 
 
 59. 8x 3 — 36x 2 t/ + 54x?/ 2 — 27y 3 . 
 
 8x 3 — 3Gx 2 y+54xy 2 — 27y 3 12a;— 3y 
 8x 3 
 3 (2 x) 2 = 12x 2 
 
 3x2xx(-3y) = -18x2/ 
 
 (_3y) 2 = + 9y 5 
 
 — 36X 2 ?/ + 54xt/ 2 — 273/ 3 
 
 — 36x 2 y -f 54xy 2 — 27y 3 . 
 
 12x 2 — 18xy+9y : 
 
 60. Multiply 3x~i + x + 2x1 by x& — 2. - 
 Arrange in descending power of x. 
 
 x _|_ 2x1 + 3x"i 
 
 xfr-2 
 
 x i _j_ 2x + 3 
 
 — 2x — 4x? — 6x _ ff 
 
 x | — 4x1 -(-3 — 6x~£\ 
 
 61. Divide 16a" 3 — 6a" 2 -f- 5a" 1 + 6 \ 2a~ l + 1 
 
 16a- 3 +8a- 2 | 8«- 2 — 7a~ 1 + 6 
 
 — 14a" 2 4- 5a" 1 
 _ I4a~ 2 _ la~ l 
 
 12a" 1 4- 6 
 12a" 1 4- 6. 
 
 62. Let x = the distance.' 
 
 - = number of revolutions fore wheel makes, 
 a 
 
 5_ 
 6 ~" 
 
 x x 
 
 -= c 
 
 a o 
 
 x (b — a) = a6c 
 
 bind 
 
 x = 
 
 abc 
 b — a' 
 
458 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA 
 
 63. Let 
 
 x = the length 
 
 
 y = the width. 
 
 (1) 
 
 x — y = 40 
 
 (2) 
 
 2x + 2y = 400 
 
 Multiply (1) by 2 
 
 x — y = 40 or 2x — 2y = 80 
 
 2x—2y= 80 
 
 2x -4- 2y = 400 
 4x = 480 
 
 x = 120 
 
 120 — 3/ = 40 
 -2/ = -80 
 y = 80. 
 
 64. 60x4 = 240. 
 
 / ' 22\ 
 
 ( Circumference equals radius x 2 n or — } 
 
 22 „ 44 
 T X2= y 
 
 (44\ 44x rtJ/v 
 
 then 44x = 1680 
 
 x = 38 +. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 459 
 
 65. Let x = the greater number, 
 
 y = " smaller " 
 
 66. 
 
 then 
 
 X 
 
 5 
 11 
 
 
 X 
 
 y " 
 
 2 + * 
 
 y 
 
 
 lly — 5x = 
 
 
 
 
 — 2y + x = 
 
 5 
 
 
 lly — 5x = 
 
 
 
 
 10y + 5x = 
 
 y = 
 
 25 
 25 
 
 
 — 50 + x = 
 
 5 
 
 
 X = 
 
 55. 
 
 
 20 s 
 
 = 400 
 
 
 x» 
 
 = X* 
 
 
 ** — 400* 
 
 = 
 
 
 l/20 2 — X* 
 
 
 15:18 ::x : 
 
 l/20 8 — 
 
 X 2 
 
 15« : 18 2 : : a 
 
 : 2 : 20 8 — 
 
 X 8 
 
 324x 8 
 
 = 90000 
 
 — 225x« 
 
 549x 8 
 
 = 90000 
 
 
 23.43x 
 
 = 300 
 
 
 X 
 
 = 12.8, 
 = 15.36, 
 
 Altitude. 
 
 t/20 2 — x* 
 
 Base. 
 
460 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 67. 420 : x : : 7 : 4 
 
 7x = 1680 
 x = 240 
 420 — 240 = 180. 
 
 ©8, x + y : x — y : : 5 : 1 
 
 x + y = 5x — by 
 x + y : xy : : 5 : x 
 8x + 8y = bxy 
 — 4x + 62/ = 
 
 8x + 81/ = 5xy 
 
 
 
 
 -8x+12y = 
 
 8x -)- 8?/ = bxy 
 
 20y = bxy, 
 
 divide by by 
 
 x = 4 
 
 2 
 
 y= 3- 
 
 69. 
 
 Let 
 
 
 x = cost of 1st horse 
 y — " " 2nd " 
 x + 150 =2j/ 
 
 
 
 y + 
 
 150 + 300 =x 
 
 x — 2y= — 150 
 — x+ ?/ = — 450 
 
 _ y — ._ 600 
 
 ?/ = 600 
 *— 1200 = — 150 
 x= 1050. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 46I 
 
 70. Let ' x = B's age 
 
 2x = A'a age 
 
 2x — 4 = C's age 
 
 4 
 2x = 36- ^4's age 
 
 
 
 36^ — 4 = 32^C"8age 
 
 x -{- 2x + (2x — 4) + 12 = 100 
 5x = 92 
 
 71. Let 
 
 
 
 x = 
 
 4 
 
 .B's. 
 
 
 
 X = 
 
 tens 
 
 digit 
 
 
 
 y = 
 
 units 
 
 K 
 
 
 lOx 
 
 + 2/ = 
 
 the number 
 
 - 
 
 X 
 
 — 2/ = 
 
 X 
 
 y ~ 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 
 (1) 
 
 | X- 
 
 \2x- 
 
 -y = 
 
 of 
 
 
 (2) 
 
 - 5y = 
 
 
 Multiply (1) by 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 5x- 
 
 -By = 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 2x- 
 
 -5y = 
 3x = 
 
 x = 
 
 y = 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 5 
 2 
 
 
462 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 72. Let x = time to sail 20 miles down stream 
 
 << it ii 1 << 
 
 20 ~ 
 
 8 — x 
 
 _ ii i« it J ii up 
 
 20 
 
 5» _ 3cc 
 
 20 20 
 
 5x = 24 — 3* 
 8x = 24 
 
 05= 3 
 
 8—3 = 5. 
 
 73. Let x = the first number 
 
 y = " second " 
 
 (1) a; + 42/ = 29 
 
 (2) 6a; + y = 36 
 
 (3) x + 4y = 29 [multiply (2) by (4)] 
 
 (4) 24x + 4y = 144 
 
 - 23x = — 115 
 
 SEs5 
 
 5a; 4- 4y = 29 
 4y=24 
 
 y = « 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 4(33 
 
 74. Let x = distance passed over, 
 
 then - = number revolutions of fore wheel 
 
 a 
 
 " " hind «« 
 
 
 X 
 
 1 « 
 
 b~ 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 a 
 
 - b = n; 
 
 bx — 
 
 ax = abn 
 
 x(b- 
 
 ■ a) = abn 
 
 
 abn 
 
 b — a 
 
 75. Let x =. space hour hand moves, 
 
 12x = " minute •' •' 
 llx = space gained. 
 12x = 25 + x 
 llx = 25 
 
 3 3 
 
 25 + 2— = 27 — minutes past 2. 
 
 76. Let x — one number 
 
 y — other '« 
 x — y = 7 
 
 * = 7 
 2/ 
 
 x — ly = 
 
 g — y = 1 
 62/ = 7 
 
 »5 + * = 4 
 
464 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 77. Let x = one of the numbers, 
 
 x-l r l= other " " » 
 
 JC8_(X+ 1) 2 = 51 
 
 2x = 50 
 x = 25 
 x 4- 1 = 26. 
 
 78. Let x = spaces hour hand moves, 
 
 12x = " minute «« " 
 
 12x = 50 + x 
 Use = 50 
 
 x = 4 A 
 11 
 
 6 5 
 
 2x = 54— past 10 or 5— minutes to 11. 
 
 79. Let x = A'b age 
 
 x = B'b " 
 x = 3y 
 
 7 — x = 4y 
 x — 3?/ = 
 — x — 4?/ = — 7 
 
 — x.— 28= — 49 
 — x = — 21 
 x = 21 years 
 y = 3 x 21 = 63 years. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 4.(35 
 
 80. Let x = number in the rank, 
 
 y = " of men, 
 
 xy = " " " in regiment 
 
 (x - 2) [y + 10) = xy 
 
 (a;-t-3)(y-10) = xy 
 
 xy — 2y -\- 10 x — 20 = xy 
 
 xy -j- 3y — lOx — 30 = xy 
 
 y = 50 
 
 x = 12. 
 
 81. Let x = diameter of large sphere 
 
 7 s : x s : : 1 : 3 
 
 x 3 = 1029 
 x = 10.095 + 
 (Cubes are to each other as the cubes of their radii. ) 
 
 82. Let x and y = number of cents in the price of a 
 pound of figs and currants respectively: then he paid 
 
 15x -L- 28?/ cents 
 .-. 15x + 28y = 260 .. . (1) 
 
 The loss upon the figs is — X 15x cents, and the gain 
 
 3 
 upon the currants is ~— x 28y cents; therefore, the total 
 
 gain is 
 
 42y 3x 
 ___ cent8 . 
 
 42y 3x 
 
 ••• 5-T= 30 --- <2) 
 
 from (1) and (2) we find that x = 8, and y = 5 ; that is, 
 the figs cost 8 cents per pound, the currants 5 cents per 
 pound. 
 
466 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. 
 
 83. Let x — distance A lias walked; then B has walked 
 x — c miles. If A walks at the rate of d miles an hour, 
 
 he will travel x miles in - hours; and B will travel x — c 
 d 
 
 miles in hours; these two times being equal, we have 
 
 e 
 
 X 
 
 = 
 
 x — 
 
 c 
 
 d 
 
 e 
 
 
 ex 
 
 = 
 
 dx — 
 
 - dc; 
 
 
 
 dc 
 
 
 pip 
 
 (1 
 
 d — 
 dc 
 
 > 
 e 
 
 - mil 
 
 therefore A has traveled . 
 d 
 
 84. Let x = speed of train per hour, 
 
 y = time in hours occupied, 
 xy = distance in miles traversed, 
 then x -\- 6 = number of miles per hour, 
 
 y — 4 = time taken in hours, 
 (x -|- 6) (y — 4) = distance traveled. 
 
 xy = (aj+6) (y — 4) = (aj-6)(y + 6) 
 from these equations we have, 
 
 xy = xy -f- 6y — 4.x — 24 
 6y _ 4.x = 24 . . . * (1) 
 
 xy = xy — 6y -\- 6x -\- 36 
 6x — 6y = 36 . . . , . . (2) 
 
 from (1) and (2) we get x = 30, y — 24. 
 the distance is 720 miles. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON ALGEBRA. ' 4(J7 
 
 85. Let x = number of dollars invested in 
 
 Bonds, 
 
 y = number of dollars invested in 
 Railway Stocks, 
 then x -f- y = 3770 ... (1) 
 
 $ — - or $ — = income from Bonds, 
 102 34 
 
 $ 2^ or $-^ = income from R. R. Stock, 
 
 | + |=136i... (2 
 
 51 
 
 from (2) x+ — i/=4632i, 
 
 23 
 
 by subtracting (IJjjgS^ 862 £'» 
 
 y =28x 37| = 1050; 
 
 from (1) x = 2720, 
 
 therefore he invests $2720 in Bonds and $1050 in Railway 
 
 Stock. 
 
QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 1. How does American Literature compare with the 
 English during the latter part of the 18th Century? 
 
 2. Into how many periods is American Literature 
 divided? 
 
 3. In what part of the country was most of the litera- 
 ture produced until the close of the 17th Century? 
 
 4. What was the style of writings during the Colonial 
 Period? 
 
 5. Name some of the writers of the First Colonial 
 Period. 
 
 6. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 7. Name principal writers of the Second Colonial 
 Period. 
 
 8. G-ive time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 '.>. "What was the style of literature during the Revolu- 
 tionary Period? 
 
 lO. Name some of the principal writers of the Revolu- 
 tionary Period? 
 468 
 
QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 4gQ 
 
 11. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 12. What was the style of the literature during the 
 National Period? 
 
 13. Name most prominent writers of the First National 
 Period. 
 
 .14. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 15. Name later writers of this time. (Knickerbocker 
 School.) 
 
 16. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 17. Name the principal contemporaries of Wm. Cullen 
 Bryant. 
 
 18. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 19. Name contemporaries of Nathaniel Hawthorne. 
 
 20. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 21. Name contemporaries of James Russell Lowell. 
 
 22. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 23. Who were associated with Emerson in the Concord 
 School, so called Transcendental School? 
 
 24. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 25. Name the Ethical Novelists. 
 
470 q^jSstions on American literature. 
 
 26. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 27. Name some miscellaneous prose and verse writers. 
 
 28. Give time, form, class and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 29. Name the best known humorists. 
 
 30. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 
 each. 
 
 31. Name some writers of fiction pointing out provincial 
 
 characteristics. 
 
 32. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 33. Name principal writers of recent critical fiction. 
 
 34. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 35. Name principal writers of recent fiction. 
 
 36. Give time, class, form and representative works of 
 each. 
 
 37. Name the style and representative works of the more 
 prominent writers of the Second National Period. 
 
 38. Give brief biographical sketch of Longfellow, Whit- 
 tier, Holmes, Bryant, Lowell, Howells, Holland, Haw- 
 thorne, Stowe, Browne, Alcott, Warner, Poe, Dana, Irving, 
 Curtis, Cooper, Emerson, Webster, Franklin, Edwards, 
 Bancroft, Motley, Prescott, Fiske. 
 
 39. Estimate the position and influence in America and 
 England of the preceding writers. 
 
QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 47 \ 
 
 40. When and by whom was the "North American 
 Review" established? 
 
 41. Who is the author of 
 
 (a) "The Star Spangled Banner," 1812. 
 
 (6) " Home Sweet Home." 
 
 (c) "America." 
 
 (d) "My Life is Like a Summer Rose." 
 
 (e) "I would not Live Alway." 
 
 (/) "The Doxology" — Praise God, etc. 
 (g) "Lead, Kindly Light." 
 (h) ' < The Old Oaken Bucket. " 
 
 42. Study the Raven. Selections from " Mosses From 
 an Old Manse, "Marble Faun," Gray's Elegy, "In the 
 Twilight," from "Under the Willows," " Thanatopsis, " 
 President Lincoln's Gettysburg Speech. 
 
 43. (a) Who was the greatest American novelist? 
 (6) Who was the greatest poet of temperament? 
 
 (c) Who was. the first anti-slavery writer? 
 
 (d) Who was the greatest American lexicographer? 
 
 (e) Who was the greatest American educational 
 reformer? 
 
 (/) Who was the greatest American political writer? 
 (g) What novel had the greatest sale? 
 
 44. Who wrote the following: 
 
 (a) ' The Reveries of a Bachelor and Dr. Johns? 
 
 (b) The historical novel "Aurelian, " "Julian" and 
 " Zenobia?" 
 
 (c)* Sir Launfal? 
 
 (d) The Gettysburg Speech? 
 
 (e) To Have and to Hold? 
 
472 QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 (/) The School and Society? 
 
 (g) The Tempest? 
 
 (h) The Ring and the Book? 
 
 (i) Walden Pond? 
 
 (J) The One Hoss Shay? 
 
 (/r) Modern Painters? 
 
 (/) Janice Meredith? 
 
 (m) Richard Carvel? 
 
 (») When Knighthood was in Flower? 
 
 (o) Alice of Old Vincennes? 
 
 {p) David Harum? 
 
 (q) Redemption of David Corson? 
 
 45. (r) John Quincy Sawyer? 
 
 (s) A Lord's Courtship; An American King. 
 (t) Elsie Venner? 
 
 (u) Outre Mer and Voices of the Night? 
 (v) The Biglow Papers? 
 
 (w) Nathan Hale, Paul Jones, Paul Revere and 
 Ethan Allen? 
 
 46. (a) Who was the author of "American Conflict?" 
 
 (b) Who wrote a short history of the English Col- 
 onies in America? 
 
 (c) Who were the orators on Tariff and Slavery? 
 
 (d) (1) Who founded the Concord School? 
 (2) Name some of his followers. 
 
 (e) What authors represent Technical American 
 Literature? 
 
 47. Name the principal ethical novelists of the Nine- 
 teenth Century. 
 
QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 473 
 
 48. Name the principal miscellaneous writers of prose 
 and verse of the Nineteenth Century. 
 
 49. Name principal satirical poets of the Nineteenth 
 
 Century. 
 
 50. Characterize American Humorists with those of 
 England. 
 
 5 1 . Characterize briefly some recent novel. 
 
 52. Describe some scene or the plot of one of Shake- 
 speare's plays. 
 
 53. Compare the writings of Edwards with those of 
 Franklin; Bryant with Holmes. What effect had their 
 writings on the times in which they lived? 
 
 54. Who is your favorite author in Sciences? In Ameri- 
 can poetry? Name two or three masters of the short story. 
 Tell a short story. 
 
 55. Name a poem or prose selection you would like to 
 use in an eighth grade class of boys or girls for the purpose 
 of developing a taste for real literature. Give in brief 
 your method. 
 
 56. What style of writing increased between the years 
 1861 and 1900? 
 
 57. Justify the statement: "Poor Richards Almanac" 
 was the most famous piece of literature the colonies pro- 
 duced? 
 
 58. How does the autobiography of Franklin rank as a 
 literary production? 
 
 59. How does the Federalist rank as a literary produc- 
 tion? 
 
474 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 60. Who gave literary form to the Declaration of Inde- 
 pendence ? 
 
 61, Study Irving and Cooper, following this outline: 
 
 (a) Brief sketch of life of each. 
 
 (b) What prompted each to write? 
 
 (c) What did each draw upon? 
 
 (d) In what respect was each a pioneer? 
 
 (e) What did each write? 
 
 (/) We-re their writings popular at the time they 
 
 were written? 
 (g) How are they now regarded? 
 (h) State the leading characteristics of each. 
 (i) Did the writer have a moral purpose? 
 
 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN 
 LITERATURE. 
 
 1. America at this time had neither poets, historians 
 nor novelists to be compared with the writers of England. 
 The fame of American writers had not passed beyond this 
 country. During the colonial period our people were in no 
 condition to produce permanent literature. They were un- 
 settled; had no cities, were living in villages scattered along 
 a thousand miles of sea-coast and were annoyed by savages, 
 poverty and pestilence. Sectional jealousies existed. They 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 475 
 
 received no inspiration from civilized countries. Further- 
 more they had no demand for literature, as the expense of 
 printing was so great. 
 
 2, Into three: 
 First Colonial, 1607 to 1689 
 
 ( John Smith. 
 1 Cotton Mather. 
 
 Second Colonial, 1689 to 1763 \ Ben J amin Franklin 
 
 ( Johnathan Edward 
 
 Revolutionary Period, 1763 to 1815 
 
 Edwards. 
 ( Thomas Jefferson. 
 1 Alexander Hamilton. 
 
 First National, 1815 to 1861 
 
 Irving. 
 
 Cooper. 
 
 Bryant. 
 
 Poe. 
 
 Emerson. 
 
 Hawthorne. 
 
 Longfellow. 
 
 Lowell. 
 
 Whittier. 
 
 Holmes. 
 
 Second National Period, 1861 to 1903 jSee question 37. 
 
 3. It was confined to Virginia and New England. 
 
 4. Religious. 
 
 5. Hooker, Shepard, Williams, Bradstreet, the Mathers, 
 Edwards and Franklin. 
 
 6. Winthrop of Massachusetts Bay and Bradford of 
 Plymouth. 
 
 Thomas Hooker 1586 Eng.— 1647. 
 
47 1 ; ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS OX AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Religious writer. Representative works — A Survey of 
 the Summe of Church Discipline. The Poor Doubting 
 Christian. Drawn to Christ was the most popular. 
 
 Thomas Shepard 1605 Eng.— 1649. 
 
 Religious writer. Much quoted by Colonial writers of 
 his time. 
 
 John Cotton 1585 Eng.— 1652. 
 
 Religious writer. It was the man more than his writings, 
 that was most admired. 
 
 Roger Williams 1606 Wales— 1683. 
 
 Religious writer. Most famous work: 
 
 The Bloody Tenet of Persecution for Cause of Conscience. 
 
 John Eliot (1604 Eng.— 1690). 
 (Apostle to the Indians.) 
 
 Translation of the Bible into the Indian language was his 
 chief work. 
 
 Anne Dudley Bradbtreet (1612 Eng. —1672). 
 (A Puritan poet.) 
 
 Style — Historic, Scientific and Religious. 
 
 The Mathers (father, son and grandson.) Richard, 
 Increase and Cotton. 
 
 Richard Mather (1596 Eng.— 1669.) 
 Style — Religious. 
 
 Increase Mather (1639 Mass.— 1723.) 
 Style — Religious. 
 
 Cotton Mather (1663 Mass.— 1728.) 
 Style— Religious. 
 
 (For the above see Shaw-Backus, Kellogg, Cleveland 
 and Brooks.) 
 
 7, Jonathan Edwards, Benjamin Franklin. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 477 
 
 8, Jonathan Edwards (1703 Conn.— 1758.) 
 G lass— Metaphysician. 
 Form — Religious. 
 
 Representative work — "Freedom of the Will." 
 Benjamin Franklin (1706 Mass. —1790.) 
 Glass — Physicist. 
 F orm — Essay, Letters, History. 
 
 Representative works— Letters and papers on Electricity, 
 Essay and general politics, Economy and Commerce. 
 
 Essay on religious and Moral subjects and the economy 
 of life. 
 
 Tracts, Historical and Political. 
 Letters — Correspondence. 
 History — Autobiography. 
 E J wards and Franklin had same object in life, namely, 
 to benefit mankind, but they went at it differently. See 
 Shaw-Backus and Kellogg. 
 
 t). Largely political, with some few theological works. 
 lO. John Witherspoon. 
 Ezra Stiles. 
 James John Otis. 
 Alexander Hamilton. 
 Thomas Jefferson. 
 George Washington. 
 John Adams. 
 John Jay. 
 James Madison. 
 James Monroe. 
 John Trumbul. 
 Benjamin Franklin. 
 David Ramsey. 
 
478 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 11. John Witherspoon (1722 S.— 1794.) President 
 Princeton College. 
 
 Glass — Humorist, scholarly satirist. 
 
 Form — Political and religious. 
 
 Representative works — Ecclesiastical Characteristics. 
 Thoughts of American Liberty. 
 
 Ezra Stiles (1727 Conn.— 1795.) President Yale 
 College. 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — Religious and political. 
 
 Representative work — History of Three of the Judges. 
 
 James Otis (1725 Mass.— 1783.) 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 Form — Political. 
 
 Representative works — Rights of the British Colonies 
 Asserted and Approved, Vindication of the British Colonies. 
 
 Alexander Hamilton (1757 W. I. — 1804.) 
 Class — Rhe torician. 
 Form — Political essay. 
 
 Representative works — The Federalist, 51 numbers and 
 numerous political essays on International Law. 
 
 Thomas Jefferson (1743 Va.— 1826.) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — History and political essay. 
 
 Representative works — Most famous. Declaration of 
 Independance, Notes on Virginia, Rights of British America, 
 State papers and correspondence. 
 
 George Washington (1732 Va. — 1799.) 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 Form — Essays, political and agricultural. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 479 
 
 Representative works — Official papers and agricultural 
 topics. 
 
 John Adams (1735 Mass.— 1826.) 
 
 C lass — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — History and political essay. 
 
 Representative icorks — History of the Dispute with the 
 American Colonies. Essay on Cannon and Feudal Law. 
 Defence of the American Constitution and letters to his wife. 
 
 John Jay (1745 N. Y.— 1829.) Statesman. 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — Essay. 
 
 Representative works — Assistant author of The Feder- 
 alist. Essay on State Papers. Address to the People of 
 Great Britain. 
 
 James Madison (1751 Va. — 1836.) Statesman. 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 Form — Essays, history and debates. 
 Representative works — Reports of the Debates in the 
 National Convention of 1788. 
 
 James Monroe (1758 Va. — 1831.) Statesman. 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 Form — History. 
 
 Representative works — State papers. Tour of Observa- 
 tion 1817. The People. The Sovereigns. 
 
 John Trumbull (1750 Conn.— 1831.) 
 Class — Satirist. 
 Form — Poet. 
 
 Representative works — The Progress of Dulness and 
 Mac Fingal, a Hudibrastic poem. 
 
480 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Benjamin Rush, M.D. (1745 Pa.— 1813.) 
 
 Medical writer. Wrote Treatise on Diseases of the 
 Mind and other works. Scientific and Social Papers. 
 David Ramsey (1745, 1812.) 
 Glass — Rhetorician. 
 Form — History. 
 
 Representative works — History of the American Revo- 
 lution. History of U. S. Life of Washington. 
 (See Shaw-Backus, Kellogg and Cleveland.) 
 
 12, Writers no longer exclusively ministers and women. 
 During the opening years of this period the influence of 
 French thought was very distinctly marked. Thomas Paine, 
 author of Common Sense, influenced the colonists to enter 
 the struggle for Independence. His Rights of Man and the 
 Age of Reason also had great influence, thus changing the 
 style of American literature. 
 
 13, Thomas Paine, Philip Freneau, Timothy D wight, 
 Charles Brockden Browne, Theodore Parker and William 
 Channing, Washington Irving and the Knickerbockers, Wm. 
 Cullen Bryant and minor poets. 
 
 Longfellow, Whittier, Holmes, Dana, Hawthorne and 
 minor novelists. 
 
 James Russell Lowell and the historians. 
 
 Emerson and the Concord School. 
 
 Ethical novelists, miscellaneous writers, humorist writers 
 and writers of fiction. 
 
 14, Thomas Paine (1737 Eng.— 1809.) 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — Political and deistical essays. 
 Representative works — Pamphlet. Common Sense and The 
 Right of Man. The Age of Reason is a deistical argument. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE 481 
 
 Philip Freneau (1752 N. Y.— 1832.) 
 
 Class— Satirist. 
 
 Form — Poet. 
 
 Representative works — Events of the Revolution. 
 Timothy Dwight (1752 Mass. — 1817.) President Yale 
 College. 
 
 Glass — Rhetorician, satirist. 
 
 form — Congregationalist, theologian and poet. 
 
 Representative icorks — Theology. A revision of Watt's 
 version of the Psalms. 
 
 Charles Brockden Browne (1771 Pa. — 1810.) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — Narration. (Vivid, often morbid and inventive.) 
 
 Representative icorks — Edgar, Huntley, Wieland, 
 Ormoncl. 
 
 Theodore Parker (1810 Mass.— 1860.) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — (Unitarian radical) theologian. 
 
 Representative works — Sermons and other works. Wrote 
 on slavery and moral reform. 
 Wm. Channing. 
 
 Class — Metaphysician. 
 
 Form — Essay and address. 
 
 Representative works — Milton and Napoleon — Essay. 
 National Literature — Address. Wrote on temperance, slav- 
 ery and morals. 
 
 15. Washington Irving, James Paulding, Julian Ver- 
 planck, Joseph Rodman Drake, Fitzgreen Halleck and 
 James Fenimore Cooper, all of the Knickerbocker School. 
 
 16. Washington Irving (1783 N. Y.— 1859.) 
 Class — Humorist and sentimentalist. 
 
482 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE 
 
 Form — Essay, tale, narration, history. 
 
 Representative works — Salmagundi, Tales of a Traveler, 
 Knickerbocker's History of New York, Sketch Book, Brace- 
 bridge Hall, Lives of Columbus, Washington and Gold- 
 smith. 
 
 Jas. Paulding (1778 Ind.— 1860.) 
 Class — Humorist, satirist. 
 Form — Essay, narration. 
 Representative works — Salmagundi, John Bull and Brother 
 Jonathan. 
 
 Julian Verplanck (1786 N. Y. — 1870.) (Shakespearean 
 scholar. ) 
 
 Class — Critic. 
 
 Form — Essay. 
 
 Representative works — Edited Shakespeare, Essays on 
 Revealed Religion, Discourses on American History, Art 
 and Literature. 
 
 Joseph R. Drake (1795 N. Y.— 1820.) 
 Class— Sentimentalist. 
 Form — Poet. (Delicate and imaginative.) 
 Representative works — The Culprit Fay, The American 
 Flag. 
 
 Fitzgreen Halleck (1795 Conn. —1869.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Tale. 
 
 Representative works — Fanny, Burns and Marco Boz- 
 zaris. 
 
 J. F. Cooper (1789 N. J.— 1851.) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — Narration, history. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 433 
 
 Representative works — Deerslayer, Red Skins, Spy, Last 
 of the Mohicans. 
 
 History of the Navy of the United States. 
 Lives of American Naval Officers. 
 
 17. Richard Henry Dana. 
 Henry W. Longfellow. 
 Edgar Allan Poe. 
 John G. Whittier. 
 Alice Cary. 
 
 Oliver Wendell Holmes, and minor poets. 
 
 18. Bryant (1794 Mass.— 1878.) 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — Tale and narration. 
 
 Representative works — Tale — Thanatopsis. 
 
 Narration — The Embargo, The Ages. 
 Dana (1787 Mass. — 1879.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form— Poetry and lectures. 
 
 Representative works — Poem, The Buccaneer. 
 
 Lectures — The Idle Man and Ten Lectures on Shakes- 
 peare. 
 
 Poe (1809 Mass.— 1849.) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — Tale, (verse of wonderful melody). 
 
 Representative works — Annabel Lee, The Raven. 
 Longfellow (1807 Me.— 1882.) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — Narration, tale, history. 
 
 Representative works — Hyperion, Evangeline, Hiawatha, 
 Miles Standish, Excelsior, Psalm of Life, The Divine 
 Tragedy. 
 
484 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Whittier (1808 Mass.— 1892.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form— Tale. 
 
 Representative works — Voices of Freedom, In War 
 Times, Snow Bound. 
 
 Alice Gary (1820—1871.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Tale, narration. 
 
 Representative works — Poems. Pictures of Memory, 
 Clovernook, Hagar. 
 
 Holmes (1809 Mass.— 1894.) 
 
 Class — Humorist, Satirist. 
 
 Form — Essay, tale, narration. 
 
 Essay — Autocrat of the Breakfast Table. 
 
 Tale— Old Ironsides, The One-Hoss Shay. 
 
 Narration — Elsie Venner. 
 
 19, George William Curtis. 
 
 Donald G. Mitchell ("Ik Marvel"), Mrs. Lydia Maria 
 Child. 
 
 20, Hawthorne (1805 Mass.— 1864.) 
 
 Class — Metaphysician. 
 
 Form — Tale, narration. 
 
 Representative works — Tanglewood Tales, Mosses from 
 an Old Manse, Twice-Told Tales. 
 
 Narration — House of the Seven Gables, The Scarlet 
 Letter, Marble Faun. 
 
 Curtis (1824 R. I.— 1892.) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician, humorist. 
 
 Form — Essay, narration and oration. 
 
 Essay— Potiphar Papers. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 4§5 
 
 Narration — Nile Notes, Lotus Eating, Trumps, Prue 
 and I. 
 
 Oration — Duty of the American Scholar to Politics of 
 the Times. 
 
 Mitchell (1822 Conn.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Narration. 
 
 Representative works — Dream Life, Reveries of a 
 Bachelor. 
 
 Child (1802 Mass.— 1880.) 
 
 C lass — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — History, narration. 
 
 Representative works — Biographies of Good Women. 
 
 Hobomok Philothea. 
 
 21, Henry Cabot Lodge. 
 Richard Hildreth. 
 George Bancroft. 
 John Lothrop Motley. 
 William Hickling Prescott. 
 Benson J. Lossing. 
 
 22, Lowell (1819 Mass.— 1891.) 
 
 Class — Humorist, critic. 
 
 Form — Narration and essay. 
 
 Representative works — Table of the Critics, Biglow 
 Papers. 
 
 Essay— Among My Books, My Study Windows, Some 
 of the Old Poets. 
 Lodge (1850 Mass.) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — History. 
 
486 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Representative works — Lives of Webster and Hamilton 
 in American Statesmen Series. 
 
 Hildretii (1807 Mass.— 1865.) 
 C lass — Sentimentalist. 
 Form — Essay, treatise, history. 
 Representative works 
 Essay — Contributions to Review. 
 Theory of Politics. 
 History of the United States. 
 
 Bancroft (1800 Mass.— 1891.) 
 Class — Critic. 
 
 Form — History, tale, essay. 
 
 Representative works — History of the United States. 
 Tale — Poems. 
 
 Essay — Contributions to the North American Review. 
 
 Motley (1814 Mass.— 1877.) 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 Form — History. 
 
 Representative works — History of United Netherlands, 
 Rise of the Dutch Republic, Life of John Barneveld. 
 
 Prescott (1796 Mass.— 1850.) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. « 
 
 Form — Essay, History. 
 
 Representative ivorks — Biographical and Critical Miscel- 
 lanies, Reign of Ferdinand and Isabella, Conquest of Mexico, 
 The Conquest of Peru, Philip II. 
 
 23. Margaret Fuller Ossoli. 
 Henry L\ Thoreau. 
 Amos Bronson Alcott 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 437 
 
 24. Emerson (1803 Mass.— 1882.) 
 Class — Metaphysician. 
 
 Form — Tale, essay. 
 
 Representative works — 
 
 Tale — His poems. 
 
 Essay — Conduct of Life and Representative Men. 
 
 (See American Men of Letters. ) 
 
 Margaret Fuller Ossoli (1810 Mass. —1850.) 
 Glass — Rhetorician. 
 Form — Essay, critic. 
 
 Representative works — Author of Women in the Nine- 
 teenth Century, Essay of Literature and Drama. 
 (See American Men of Letters.) 
 
 Thoreau (1817 Mass.— 1862.) 
 Class — Naturalist. 
 Form — Narration. 
 
 Representative works — A Week on the Concord and 
 Merrimac Rivers, Excursions, etc. 
 
 Alcott (1799 Conn.— 1888.) 
 Class — Philosopher. 
 Form — Essay. 
 
 Representative works — Conversations, Essays, Concord 
 Days, Sonnets 
 
 25. Josiah Gilbert Holland (Timothy Titcomb.) 
 Edward Everett Hale. 
 
 Edward Payson Roe. 
 
 26. Josiah Gilbert Holland (1819 Mass.— 1881.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 Form — Essay, Narration. 
 
488 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Representative works — Timothy Titcomb's Letters. 
 Narration— Marble Prophesy, Kathrina, Bitter Sweet, The 
 Bay Path. 
 
 Hale (1822 Mass.) 
 
 C lass — Metaphysician. 
 
 Form — Narration. 
 
 Representative works— Short Stories, The Man Without 
 a Country, several volumes of Sermons. 
 E. P. Roe (1838 N. Y.-1888.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Narration, Novelist, Tales. 
 
 Representative works — Barriers Burned Away, Opening 
 a Chestnut Burr, The Earth Trembled. 
 
 27. Bayard Taylor. 
 
 Thomas Wentworth Higginson. 
 
 Richard Henry Stoddard. 
 
 Edmund Clarence Stedman. 
 
 John C Saxe. 
 
 William A. Butler. 
 
 Celia Thaxter. 
 
 Mary Abigail Dodge. (Grail Hamilton.) 
 
 28. Bayard Taylor (1825 Pa.— 1878.) 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form — Tale, Narration, Essay. 
 Tale — Rhymes of Travel. 
 Narrative — Eldorado, Land of the Saracens. 
 Essay — At Home and Abroad. Visit to China, India 
 and Japan. 
 
 Higoinson (1823 Mass.) 
 Class — Critic. 
 Form — Essay, History. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 439 
 
 Representative works — Army Life in a Black Regiment, 
 Atlantic Essays, Young Folks' History of the United States. 
 
 Stoddard (1825 Mass.) 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 Form— Poet, Editor. 
 
 Representative works — Songs of Summer, King's Bell. 
 Editor Bric-a-Brac Series. 
 
 Stedman— (1835 Conn.) 
 
 Class — Critic. 
 
 Form — Poet. 
 
 Representative works — Alice of Monmouth, The Blame- 
 less Prince, Pan in Wall Street, Lord's-Day Gale, Victorian 
 Poets. 
 
 John G. Saxe (1816 Vt.— 1887.) 
 Class — Humorist. 
 Form — Narration, Tale. 
 
 Representative works — The Money King, The Times, 
 Progress, Rape of the Lock. 
 
 Tale — Humorous and Satirical Poems, 
 
 William A. Butler (1825 N. Y.) 
 
 Class — Satirist. 
 
 Form — Essay, Narration. 
 
 Representative works — Contributions to Democratic Re- 
 view. Essay. 
 
 Narration — Nothing to Wear. Two Millions. 
 Celia Thaxter (1836 N. H.) 
 
 C lass — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Poet, Narration. 
 
 Representative works — Drift- Weed, Poems for Children. 
 
 Narration — Among the Isles of Shoals. 
 
490 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Mary Abigail Dodge (1838 Mass.— 189-.) 
 Class — Humorist. 
 Form — Miscellaneous. 
 
 Representative works — A New Atmosphere, Gala Days, 
 Woman's Wrongs, Red-Letter Days. 
 
 29, Walt Whitman. 
 
 Cincinnatus Heine Miller (Joaquin). 
 
 Francis Bret Harte. 
 
 Charles Farrar Browne (Artemus Ward). 
 
 David Ross Locke (Petroleum V. Nasby). 
 
 Samuel Langhorne Clemens (Mark Twain). 
 
 George W. Peck. 
 
 Edgar Wilson Nye. 
 
 John Hay. 
 
 Will Carleton. 
 
 Henry W. Shaw (Josh Billings). 
 
 30. Whitman (1819 N. Y.— 1892.) 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Poet. 
 
 Representative, works — O Captain, My Captain, Leaves 
 of Grass, Drum Taps. 
 
 Miller (Joaquin Miller) — (1841 Ind.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Poet, Novelist. 
 
 Representative works — Song of the Sierras, The Ship in 
 the Desert, Songs of the Sunlands, Sunrise in Venice. 
 
 Novels — The Danites in the Sierras, Shadows of Shasta. 
 Bret Harte (1839 N. Y.) 
 
 Class — Humorist. 
 
 Form — Poet, Novelist. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 491 
 
 Representative works — The Heathen Chinee, The Luck 
 of Roaring Camp, Gabriel Convoy. 
 
 Browne (Artemus Ward)— (1834 Me.— 1867.) 
 Class — Humorist. 
 Form — Narration. 
 
 Representative works — Among the Mormons. Artemus 
 Ward in London. 
 
 Locke (1833 N. Y.— 1888.) 
 
 Class — Political, Humorist, Satirist. 
 Form — Narration, History. 
 
 Representative works — A Paper City, Swinging Round 
 the Circle. 
 
 Clemens (1835 Mo.) 
 Class — Humorist. 
 Form — Narration. 
 
 Representative works — Innocents Abroad, Roughing It, 
 Tom Sawyer. 
 Hay (1839 111.) 
 Class — Humorist. 
 Form — Poet. 
 
 Representative works — Pike County Ballads, Castilian 
 Bays (travels), Dialect Poems, Jim Bludsoe. 
 Carleton (1845 Mich.) 
 
 Class — Humorist, Sentimentalist. 
 Form — Poet. 
 
 Representative works — Farm and City Ballads, Farm and 
 City Festivals, Farm and City Legends. 
 
 Henry Shaw (Josh Billings) (1818 Mass.— 1885.) 
 C lass — H umorist. 
 Form — Narration. 
 Representative works — Wit and Wisdom. 
 
492 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 31. Sylvester Judd. 
 R. H. Stoddard. 
 Theodore 'Winthrop. 
 W. M. Baker. 
 Edward Eggleston. 
 Harriet Beecher Stowe. 
 J. T. Trowbridge. 
 
 A. W. Tourgee. 
 
 32. Judd (1813 Mass.— 1853.) 
 C lass — S entimentalist. 
 Form— Tale. 
 
 Representative works — Margaret, A Tale of the Real 
 and Ideal. 
 
 Stoddard (1825 Mass.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Novelist, poet. 
 
 Represmtative works — Songs of Summer, The King's 
 Bell, The Book of the East. 
 
 Winthrop (1828 Conn.— 1861.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Novelist. 
 
 Representative works — John Brent, Cecil Dreeme, Canoe 
 and Saddle. 
 
 Baker (1825 D. C— 1883.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Novelist (style original). 
 
 Representative works — The Virginians in Texas, Inside, 
 The Timothy. 
 
 Eggleston (1837 Ind.) 
 
 C lass — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Novelist. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS OX AMERICAN LITERATURE. 493 
 
 Representative works— The Hoosier School-master, The 
 End of the World, The Circuit Rider, Roxey. 
 Stowe (1812 Conn.— 1S9-.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form— Essay, Narration, Poet. 
 
 Representative works — The Minister's Wooing, Old 
 Town Folks, Pearl of Orr's Island, My wife and I, Uncle 
 Tom's Cabin. 
 
 Trowbridge (1827 N. Y.) "Paul Creyton." 
 
 Class — Humorist, (juvenile. ) 
 
 Form— Tales, Novel, Poetry. 
 
 Representative works — Neighbor Jackwood, Cudjo's Cave, 
 The Three Scouts, Coupon Bonds; The Vagabonds is best 
 known. 
 
 Tourgee (toorzhay) (1838 Ohio .) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician. 
 
 Form— Political Novelist. 
 
 Representative works— A Fool's Errand, Bricks Without 
 Straw, Figs and Thistles, Hot Plowshares, also editor of the 
 Continent. 
 
 33. William Dean Howells. 
 Henry James, Jr. 
 George P. Lathrop. 
 W. H. Bishop. 
 Frank R. Stockton. 
 
 34. Howells (1837 Ohio .) 
 
 Class — Humorist, Satirist. 
 Form — Novelist, Poet. 
 
 Representative works— Venetian Life, Italian Journeys, 
 The Wedding Journey, A Foregone Conclusion, A Woman's 
 Reason, The Parlor Car. 
 
494 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 James (1843 N. Y. .) 
 
 Class — Critic. 
 
 Form — Novelist. 
 
 Representative works — Roderick Hudson, The American. 
 The European, The Portrait of a Lady. 
 
 (Strength of works in delineation of character, not in 
 plots.) 
 
 Lathrop (1851 H. I. .) Son-in-law of Hawthorne. 
 
 Class — Critic. 
 Form — Novelist, Poet. 
 
 Representative works — Rose and Roof -Tree, An Echo of 
 Passion, Newport, A Study of Hawthorne. 
 
 Bishop (1847 Conn. .) 
 
 Class — Satirist. 
 
 Form — Novelist, Narration. 
 
 Representative works — Detmold, House of a Merchant 
 Prince, Vol. of Travels entitled, ' ' Old Mexico and her Lost 
 Provinces. 
 
 Stockton (1834 Pa. .) 
 
 Class — H umorist. 
 Form — Tales. 
 
 Representative works — Rudder Grange, Tales out of 
 School, Floating Prince and other Fairy Tales. 
 
 35. Charles Dudley Warner. 
 Thomas Bailey Aldrich. 
 George Washington Cable. 
 Mrs. Frances Hodgson Burnett. 
 Julian Hawthorne. 
 Harriet P. Spofford. - 
 Elizabeth Stuart Phelps. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS OX AMERICAN LITERATURE. 495 
 
 36. Warner (1829 Mass. -1900.) 
 
 Class — Humorist (author of Juvenile Literature.) 
 
 Form — Essay. 
 
 Representative works — My Summer in a Garden, Being 
 a Boy, Hunting of the Deer, Backlog Studies. 
 Aldrich (1836 N. H. .) 
 
 Class — Rhetorician, Humorist. 
 
 Form — Novelist, Poet. 
 
 Representative works — Baby Bell, Marjorie Daw, The 
 Story of a Bad Boy, Queen of Sheba, Still Water Tragedy. 
 Cable (1844 La. .) 
 
 Class — Sentiment. 
 
 Form — Tale, Narration, History. 
 
 Representative works — Old Creole Days, The Grand - 
 issimes, Madame Delphine. « 
 
 Mrs. Burnett (1849 Eng. .) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist (Juvenile. ) 
 
 Form — Novel. 
 
 Representative works — The Lass o' Lowries, Louisiana, 
 Esmeralda, Little Lord Fauntleroy, Little St. Elizabeth, 
 Sarah Crew. 
 
 Hawthorne (1846 Mass. 18—.) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Novelist, Essay. 
 
 Representative narks — Bressant, Idolatory, Dust, Fort- 
 une's Fool, Saxon and English Studies. 
 Spofford (1835 Me. .) 
 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 
 Form — Novel and poetry. 
 
 Representative works — The Amber Gods, The Theft in 
 the Night, Sir Rolan's Ghost. 
 
496 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Mrs. Phelps (1844 Mass.) 
 Class — Sentimentalist. 
 Form — Novel and poetry. 
 
 Representative works — Gates Ajar, , Hedged In, The 
 Silent Partner, Men, Women and Ghosts. 
 
 37, Constance Fenimore Woolson. 
 Style — Novelist and poet. 
 Representative works — Castle Nowhere. 
 
 Francis K. Stockton. 
 Style — Novelist. 
 Representative work — The Lady or the Tiger. 
 
 Professor H. H. Boyesen. 
 Style — Poet, novelist. 
 Representative work — Norse Idyls. 
 
 Mrs. Rebecca Harding Davis. 
 .Style — Novelist. 
 Representative work — Waiting for the Verdict. 
 
 Marion Crawford. 
 Style — Novelist. 
 Representative work — Mr. Isaacs. 
 
 Rose Terry Cooke. 
 
 Style — Poems and tale. 
 
 Representative work — The Two Villages. 
 Lucy Larcum. 
 
 Style— Poet. . 
 
 Representative work — Skipper Ben. 
 Joel Chandler Harris. 
 
 Style — Short Stories. 
 
 Representative work — Uncle Remus. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 497 
 
 Samuel A. Lynch. 
 
 Style — English Criticism. 
 
 Representative work — Lessons on English Literature. 
 Louisa May Alcott. 
 
 Style — Juvenile stories. 
 
 Representative work — Little Men and Little Women. 
 Thomas Nelson Page. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — In Ole Virginia. 
 Mary Johnston. 
 
 Style— Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — To Have and to Hold. 
 Winston Churchill. 
 
 Style — ^iovel, historical romance. 
 
 Representative works — Richard Carvel, The Crisis. 
 Maurice Thompson. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — Alice of Old Vincennes. 
 Edward Bellamy. 
 
 Style — Reformist. 
 
 Representative work — Looking Backward. 
 Lew Wallace. 
 
 Style — Historical Romance. 
 
 Representative work — Ben Hur. 
 Richard Harding Davis. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — Soldiers of Fortune. 
 Isaac Hinton Brown. 
 
 Style — Educational. 
 
 Representative work — Rational Elocution and Oratory 
 
498 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Edward Markham. 
 
 Style — Poeru. 
 
 Representative work — The Man with the Hoe. 
 Henry George. 
 
 Style — Economist. 
 
 Representative work — Progress and Poverty. 
 James Lane Allen. ' 
 
 Style — Tale, romance. 
 
 Representative work — The Choir Invisible. 
 Mary E. Wilkins. 
 
 Style — Short stories. 
 
 Representative work — The Heart's Highway. 
 Eugene Field. 
 
 Style — Juvenile poems. 
 
 Representative work — Child Verses. 
 John Kendrick Bangs. 
 
 Style — Satirist. 
 
 Representative work — The House-Boat on the Styx. 
 Theodore Roosevelt. 
 
 Style — Biographer. 
 
 Representative work — Life of Thomas H. Benton. 
 Stephen Crane. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — The Red Badge of Courage. 
 John BuiToughs. 
 
 Style — Essayist, Naturalist. 
 
 Representative work — Wake- Robin. 
 Miss Mary Murfree — (Charles Egbert Craddock. ) 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — In the Tennessee Mountains. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 499 
 
 Helen Hunt Jackson. 
 
 Style — Poet and Romance. 
 
 Representative ivorks— Poppies on Wheat. Ramona. 
 
 John Fiske. 
 
 Style — History and essay. 
 
 Representative work — The Critical Period of American 
 History. 
 
 Charles M. Shelden. 
 
 Style — Religious novels. 
 - Representative work — In His Steps. 
 
 Mrs. Anna S. Stevens. 
 Style — Novelist. 
 Representative work— Fashion and Famine. 
 
 Kate Douglas Wiggin. 
 Style — Juvenile. 
 
 Representative works — The Birds' Christmas Carol, 
 Kindergarten. 
 
 Louise Chandler Moulton. 
 Style — Juvenile. 
 Representative work^- Bed Time Stories. 
 
 Lillian Bell. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — From a Girl's Point of View. 
 
 Lillian Whiting. 
 Style — Essays. 
 Representative work — The World Beautiful Series. 
 
 S. R. Crockett. 
 Style— Novelist. 
 Representative work — The Gray Man. 
 
500 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Ella Wheeler Wilcox. 
 Style— Poet. 
 Representative work — Poems of Passion, 
 
 Horace Mann. 
 
 Style — Educational. 
 Representative work — Pedagogy. 
 
 Denton J. Snider. 
 
 Style — Commentaries. 
 
 Representative work — Commentary on Shakespearian 
 Dramas. 
 
 Horace H. Morgan. 
 Style — Educational. 
 Representative work — Literary Studies. 
 
 Opie Read. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — A Kentucky Colonel. 
 
 Benjamin P. Shillaber. 
 Style — Humorist. 
 
 Representative work — Life and Sayings of Mrs. Part- 
 ington, Mrs. Partington. 
 
 Edgar Wilson Nye (Bill Nye). 
 Style — Humorist. 
 Representative %vork — Forty Liars. 
 
 George W. Peck. 
 Style — Humorist. 
 Representative work — Peck's Bad Boy. 
 
 Robert J. Burdette. 
 Style — Humorist. 
 Representat ive work — Hawkeye. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE 5Q1 
 
 Horatio Alger. 
 
 Style — Juvenile. 
 
 Representative work — The Odds Against Him. 
 Mrs. Emma D. E. N. Southworth. 
 
 Style — Romance. 
 
 Representative work — Ishmael. 
 Amelia Rives Chandler. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — The Quick or the Dead. 
 James Whitcomb Riley. 
 
 Style— Poet. 
 
 Representative work — The Old Swimmin' Hole. 
 
 Mrs. Augusta Evans. Wilson. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative works — Beulah and St. Elmo. 
 Whitelaw Reid. 
 
 Style — Journalist, Editor New York Tribue. 
 
 Representative work — Newspaper Tendencies. 
 Mary J. Holmes. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — Lena Rivers. 
 Mrs. A. D. T. Whitney. 
 
 Style — Novelist, Poet. 
 
 Representative works — We Girls, Odd or Even. 
 
 J. Nick Perrin. 
 
 Style — Historian. 
 
 Representative work — History of Illinois. 
 James Otis. 
 
 Style — Juvenile Tales. 
 
 Representative work — Toby Tyler. 
 
502 ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 Irving Bacheller. 
 
 Style — Novelist 
 
 Representative work — Eben Holden. 
 Sarah K. Boulton. 
 
 Style — Biographical. 
 
 Representative work — Poor Boys Who Became Famous. 
 Phillips Brooks. 
 
 Style — Religious. 
 
 Representative work — The Influence of Jesus. 
 Charles Carleton Coffin. 
 
 Style — Juvenile. 
 
 Representative work — Building the Nation. 
 Maria S. Cummins. 
 
 Style — Juvenile. 
 
 Representative work — The Lamplighter. 
 Robert Neilson Stephens. 
 
 Style — Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — Philip Winwood. 
 Ignatius Donnelly. 
 
 Style — Essaj". 
 
 Representative work — Caesar's Column. 
 Margaret Deland. 
 
 Style— Novelist. 
 
 Representative work — John Ward, Preacher. 
 Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge. 
 
 Style — Juvenile, poet. 
 
 Representative toork — Hans Brinker. 
 Amanda M. Douglas. 
 
 Style — Juvenile. 
 
 Representative work — Kathie Stories. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 593 
 
 Mrs. G. R. Alden (Pansy). 
 
 Style — Juvenile . 
 
 Representative work — The Pansy Books. 
 Lee Meriwether. 
 
 Style— Tale. 
 
 Representative works — Tramp Trips Abroad, Tramp 
 Trips at Home, On the Mediterranean. 
 Palmer Cox. 
 
 Style — Juvenile. 
 
 Representative work — The Brownies. 
 Rev. Andrew Murray. 
 
 Style — Religious. 
 
 Representative work — "With Christ" Series. 
 Martha J. Finley. 
 
 Style —Juvenile. 
 
 Representative work — Elsie Dinsmore. 
 Sophia May. 
 
 Style — Juvenile. 
 
 Representative irork — Dotty Dimple. 
 James K. Hosmer. 
 
 Style — Biographer. 
 
 Representative work — Life of Samuel Adams. 
 Julia Ward Howe. 
 
 Style— Poet. 
 
 Representative irork- — Battle Hymn of the Republic. 
 B. A. Hinsdale. 
 
 Style — Educational. 
 
 Representative work — Teaching the Language — Arts. 
 
 38. See Appleton's Cyclopedia of American Biography 
 and any good book on American Literature — Shaw- 
 Backus, Cleveland, Richardson, Brooks or Collier. 
 
504 ANSWERS SO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 39. See the above references. 
 
 40. In 1815 by William Tudor. 
 
 41. (a) Francis S. Key. 
 
 (b) John Howard Payne. 
 
 (c) Saml. F. Smith. 
 
 (d) R. H. Wilde. 
 
 (e) Wm. A. Muhlenburg. 
 (/) Thomas Kene. 
 
 (y) Cardinal Newman. 
 {h) Samuel Woodworth. 
 
 42. See the Riverside Literature Series published by 
 
 Houghton, Mifflin & Co., Boston. 
 
 43. (a) Nathaniel Hawthorne. 
 
 (b) John James Piatt, who wrote Poems of Two 
 Friends in conjunction with W. D. Howells, Poems in ' 'Sun- 
 shine and Twilight, " "Western Windows and Landmarks." 
 
 (c) Mrs. Lydia M. Child. 
 
 (d) Noah Webster. 
 
 (e) Horace Mann. 
 (/) JohnFiske. 
 
 (g) Uncle Tom's Cabin. 
 
 44. (a) Donald G. Mitchell ("Ik Marvel.") 
 (6) William Ware. 
 
 (c) James Russell Lowell. 
 
 (d) Abraham Lincoln. 
 
 (e) Mary Johnston. 
 (/) John Dewey. 
 
 (g) George D. Prentice. 
 (h) Robert Browning, 
 (t) Henry D. Thoreau. 
 
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE 5Q5 
 
 (/) Oliver Wendell Holmes. 
 
 (/.) John Ruskin. 
 
 (0 Paul Leicester Ford. 
 
 (m) Winston Churchill. 
 
 (n) Edwin Caskoden. 
 
 (o) Maurice Thompson.' 
 
 (p) Edward Noyes Westcott. 
 
 (q) Charles F. Goss. 
 
 45. (>•) Charles Felton Pidgin. 
 
 (*) Lee Meriwether. 
 
 (0 Oliver Wendell Holmes. 
 
 00 Henry W. Longfellow. 
 
 (v) James Russell Lowell. 
 
 (tr) Charles W. Brown. 
 
 4(». (a) Horace Greeley. 
 
 (b) Henry Cabot Lodge 
 
 (c) Clay, Calhoun, Choate, Edward Everett, Sum- 
 ner and Seward. 
 
 {d) ( "R. W. Emerson, (study one of his essays.) 
 
 ''Margaret Fuller Ossoli, Henry Thoreau. 
 Amos Alcott. 
 
 (c) Noah Webster (philologist.) 
 
 John J. Audobon (naturalist. ) 
 
 Louis Agassiz (geologist and zoologist.) 
 
 47. J. G. Holland, Edward Everett Hale, E. P. Roe, 
 Mary Terhune, Marion Harland. 
 
 48. Bayard Taylor and Thomas W. Higginson. 
 
 4t). John U. Saxe, William A. Butler, James K. Pauld- 
 ing. Oliver Wendell Holmes. 
 
 50. See Encyclopedia Britannica. 
 
50G ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ON AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 51. See Rolfe or Hudson's edition of the classics. 
 
 52. Take most prominent — Hamlet, Merchant of Venice 
 
 or Julius Caesar. 
 
 53. See Shaw-Backus, Kellogg, Brooks, and Richard- 
 son's English Literature. 
 
 54. Read question carefully. 
 
 55. For an example, — Gra}-'s Elegy, Lincoln's Ge 
 burg Speech, etc. 
 
 56. Fiction, realism, criticism, science, newspaper, school 
 books, juvenile writings and a noted increase of women 
 writers. 
 
 57. It was the literature of the poor and the fairly edu-' 
 cated for twenty-five years. 
 
 58. Its rank in American Literature is of the highest 
 order, 
 
 51). Very high. Hamilton wrote 40 numbers, Madison 
 29, and Jay 5. 
 
 60. Thomas Jefferson. 
 
 61. See Shaw- Backus, Cleveland, Brooks, Richardson, 
 and other works on American Literature.